UniSim User Guide PDF

UniSim® Design
User Guide
Copyright
April R390 Release
The information in this help file is subject to change over time. Honeywell may make
changes to the requirements described. Future revisions will incorporate changes,
including corrections of typographical errors and technical inaccuracies.
For further information please contact
Honeywell
300-250 York Street
London, Ontario
N6A 6K2
Telephone: (519) 679-6570
Facsimile: (519) 679-3977
Copyright Honeywell 2009. All rights reserved.
Prepared in Canada.
Table of Contents
1 Interface .............................................................. 1-1
1.1 Introduction .................................................... 1-2
1.2 Interface Basics ............................................... 1-3
1.3 Object Status Window/Trace Window ............... 1-11
1.4 Toolbar ......................................................... 1-14
1.5 Hot Keys ....................................................... 1-16
2 Program Philosophy ............................................. 2-1

2.1 Introduction .................................................... 2-2
2.2 Simulation Case ............................................... 2-5
2.3 Multi-Flowsheet Architecture/Environments.......... 2-7
3 Flowsheet ............................................................. 3-1

3.1 Introduction .................................................... 3-2
3.2 Flowsheets in UniSim Design ............................. 3-2
3.3 UniSim Design Environments ............................. 3-4
3.4 Sub-Flowsheet Environment ............................ 3-10
3.5 Templates ..................................................... 3-14
3.6 Property View Flowsheet Analysis ..................... 3-22
4 File Management .................................................. 4-1

4.1 Menu Bar ........................................................ 4-2
4.2 File................................................................. 4-2
4.3 UFL Files ....................................................... 4-11
5 Basis Environment................................................ 5-1

5.1 Introduction .................................................... 5-2
5.2 Simulation Basis Manager.................................. 5-2
5.3 Reaction Package ........................................... 5-25
5.4 Component Property View ............................... 5-26
6 Oil Characterization Environment ......................... 6-1

6.1 Introduction .................................................... 6-2
6.2 Oil Characterization Manager ............................. 6-2
7 Simulation Environment ....................................... 7-1

7.1 Introduction .................................................... 7-5
v
7.2 Main Properties ................................................ 7-5
7.3 UniSim Design XML ........................................ 7-10
7.4 Optimizer ...................................................... 7-12
7.5 Event Scheduler ............................................. 7-13
7.6 Integrator ..................................................... 7-26
7.7 Adjust-Recycle Manager .................................. 7-28
7.8 Initialize From ............................................... 7-37
7.9 Dynamic/Steady State Modes .......................... 7-50
7.10 Solver Active/Holding...................................... 7-51
7.11 Integrator Active/Holding ................................ 7-51
7.12 Equation Summary ......................................... 7-52
7.13 Enter Basis Environment ................................. 7-52
7.14 User Variables ............................................... 7-52
7.15 Importing & Exporting User Variables................ 7-54
7.16 Oil Output Settings ......................................... 7-55
7.17 Object Navigator ............................................ 7-56
7.18 Simulation Navigator ...................................... 7-58
7.19 Notes Manager............................................... 7-60
7.20 Optimization Objects ...................................... 7-61
7.21 Reaction Package ........................................... 7-63
7.22 Fluid Package/Dynamics Model......................... 7-63
7.23 Workbook ..................................................... 7-64
7.24 PFD .............................................................. 7-77
7.25 Column ......................................................... 7-94
7.26 Utilities ......................................................... 7-94
7.27 Simulation Balance Tool .................................. 7-98
8 UniSim Design Objects ......................................... 8-1

8.1 Installing Objects ............................................. 8-3
8.2 Defining Objects .............................................. 8-5
9 Print Options ........................................................ 9-1

9.1 Introduction .................................................... 9-2
9.2 Printing in UniSim Design .................................. 9-2
9.3 Reports........................................................... 9-7
9.4 Printing the PFD as a File................................. 9-14
10 Edit Options........................................................ 10-1

10.1 Introduction .................................................. 10-3
10.2 Edit Menu...................................................... 10-3
10.3 Editing the PFD .............................................. 10-4
10.4 Graph Control ...............................................10-36
vi
10.5 Format Editor ...............................................10-41
11 Simulation Tools................................................. 11-1

11.1 Introduction .................................................. 11-3
11.2 Workbook ..................................................... 11-3
11.3 PFD .............................................................. 11-3
11.4 Case Summary .............................................. 11-3
11.5 Utilities ......................................................... 11-4
11.6 Reports......................................................... 11-4
11.7 Databook ...................................................... 11-4
11.8 Face Plates ...................................................11-39
11.9 Dynamics Assistant .......................................11-40
11.10Control Manager ...........................................11-41
11.11Dynamic Profiling Tool ...................................11-41
11.12Snapshot Manager ........................................11-44
11.13Script Manager .............................................11-50
11.14Macro Language Editor...................................11-52
11.15Case Security ...............................................11-54
11.16Echo ID .......................................................11-70
11.17Correlation Manager ......................................11-71
11.18Alarm Manager .............................................11-85
11.19Variable Navigator.........................................11-88
11.20Simulation Balance Tool .................................11-90
11.21RTO Manager................................................11-90
12 Session Preferences ........................................... 12-1

12.1 Introduction .................................................. 12-3
12.2 Simulation Tab............................................... 12-5
12.3 Variables Tab................................................12-20
12.4 Reports Tab..................................................12-26
12.5 Files Tab ......................................................12-30
12.6 Resources Tab ..............................................12-36
12.7 Extensions Tab .............................................12-42
12.8 Oil Input Tab ................................................12-43
12.9 Tray Sizing Tab .............................................12-44
12.10Case Tools Tab .............................................12-48
13 Window & Help Options ...................................... 13-1

13.1 Introduction .................................................. 13-2
13.2 Window Menu ................................................ 13-2
13.3 Help Menu..................................................... 13-4
vii
Index.................................................................... I-1
viii
Interface 1-1
1 Interface
1.1 Introduction .................................................................................. 2

1.1.1 Event Driven ........................................................................... 2
1.1.2 Modular Operations .................................................................. 2
1.1.3 Multi-flowsheet Architecture ...................................................... 2
1.1.4 Object Oriented Design............................................................. 3
1.2 Interface Basics............................................................................. 3

1.2.1 Views Functionality................................................................... 3
1.2.2 Primary Interface Elements ....................................................... 3
1.2.3 Multi-Flowsheet Architecture/Environments ................................. 4
1.2.4 Navigators .............................................................................. 5
1.2.5 Objects................................................................................... 6
1.2.6 Structure Terminology .............................................................. 6
1.2.7 Desktop.................................................................................. 7
1.2.8 Interface Terminology............................................................... 9
1.3 Object Status Window/Trace Window ..........................................11

1.3.1 Opening & Sizing the Windows..................................................11
1.3.2 Message Windows ...................................................................12
1.3.3 Object Inspect Menu ...............................................................12
1.4 Toolbar .........................................................................................14

1.4.1 Dynamics Time Manager Tool Bar Icons .....................................16
1.5 Hot Keys .......................................................................................16
1-1
1-2 Introduction
1.1 Introduction
UniSim Design offers a high degree of flexibility because there are
multiple ways to accomplish specific tasks. This flexibility combined
with a consistent and logical approach to how these capabilities are
delivered makes UniSim Design an extremely versatile process
simulation tool.
The usability of UniSim Design is attributed to the following four key

aspects of its design:
• Event Driven operation
• Modular Operations
• Multi-flowsheet Architecture
• Object Oriented Design
1.1.1 Event Driven

This concept combines the power of interactive simulation with
instantaneous access to information. Interactive simulation means the
information is processed as it is supplied and calculations are performed
automatically. Also, you are not restricted to the program location
where the information is supplied.
1.1.2 Modular Operations

Modular Operations are combined with the Non-Sequential solution
algorithm. Not only is information processed as it is supplied, but the
results of any calculation are automatically produced throughout the
flowsheet, both forwards and backwards. The modular structure of the
operations means they can be calculated in either direction, using
information in an outlet stream to calculate inlet conditions. Process
understanding is gained at every step because the operations calculate
automatically and results are seen immediately.
1.1.3 Multi-flowsheet Architecture

Multi-flowsheet architecture can be used to create any number of
flowsheets within a simulation and to easily associate a fluid package
with a defined group of unit operations.
1-2
Interface 1-3
1.1.4 Object Oriented Design

The separation of interface elements (how the information appears)
from the underlying engineering code means the same information
appears simultaneously in a variety of locations. Each display is tied to
the same process variable, so if the information changes, it
automatically updates in every location.
Also, if a variable is specified, then it is shown as a specification in

every location. This means the specification can be changed wherever it
appears and you are not restricted to a single location for making
changes.
1.2 Interface Basics

This section provides basic information about using the UniSim Design
interface.
1.2.1 Views Functionality

UniSim Design has the same basic features as found in other Windows
2000 or XP based programs:
• Minimize, Maximize/Restore and Close icons are located in the
upper right corner of most views.
Minimize icon • Object icon, located in the upper left corner of most views,
contains the normal Windows 3.x menu.
Most of the different views found in UniSim Design are resizable to

Maximize icon
some degree.
The following list provides a brief description on resizable views:

Restore icon
• When the Minimize, Maximize/Restore and Close icons are
available, the view can be resized vertically and horizontally.
Close icon • When only the Minimize and Close icons are available, the view
can only be resized vertically.
• When only the Close icon or Close and Pin icons are available,
the view can not be resized.
Pin icon
1.2.2 Primary Interface Elements

Although you can input and access information in a variety of ways,
there are five primary interface elements for interacting with UniSim
1-3
1-4 Interface Basics
Design:
Interface Element Description

PFD A view containing a graphical environment for
building your flowsheet and examining process
connectivity. Process information can be displayed for
each individual stream or operation as needed.
Workbook A view containing a collection of tabs that displays
information in a tabular format. Each Workbook tab
displays information about a specific object type. You
can install multiple tabs for a given object type,
displaying information in varying levels of detail.
Property View A single view that contains multiple tabs. UniSim
Design extensively uses these single views, which
include all information about a specific object (i.e., an
individual stream or operation).
Summary View Displays the currently installed streams and
operations.
Simulation A view that provides a single location for viewing all
Navigation stream and unit operation property views in the
simulation case, regardless of the flowsheet they
exist in.
Each of these interface elements, plus the complimentary tools such as

the Data Recorder, Strip Charts, Case Study Tool, Plots, etc., are all
connected through the model itself. Changes made in any location are
automatically reflected throughout UniSim Design.
In addition, there are no restrictions as to what can be displayed at any

time. For example, you can have both the PFD and Workbook open, as
well as property views for operations and streams.
1.2.3 Multi-Flowsheet
Architecture/Environments
UniSim Design is developed around a Multi-flowsheet Architecture.
After creating the fluid package(s) for the simulation, you enter the
main flowsheet. This is where the bulk of the model is created (where
you install the streams and operations that represent the process).
Sub-flowsheets can also be created at any time within the main

flowsheet. Sub-flowsheets appear as a single operation with multiple
connections. The main simulation does not know what is inside the sub-
flowsheet, meaning it could be a refrigeration loop or a decanter
system. The sub-flowsheet is seen by UniSim Design as any other
operation and it calculates whenever conditions are changed within it.
The nature of the sub-flowsheet gives rise to the concept of

environments. Although a sub-flowsheet (template or column) appears
1-4
Interface 1-5
as a single operation in the main flowsheet, you can, at any time, enter
the sub-flowsheet to examine conditions in greater detail or make
changes.
When you enter the sub-flowsheet’s Build environment, the following

occurs:
• The main flowsheet is temporarily cached and hidden; it returns
to the exact status when you exit the sub-flowsheet.
• Other flowsheet solvers still produce the effect of a change, but
the results of that change are not produced beyond the
flowsheet boundary until you leave the sub-flowsheet
environment.
Example: A stream inside of a sub-flowsheet containing a flow
specification can also be connected to a stream in the parent
flowsheet. If changes are made to the flow rate in the sub-
flowsheet environment, the flow in the parent flowsheet is
forgotten, as are any other flows in any flowsheets that are
calculated as a result of that flow specification. This is the
“forget” pass in the UniSim Design solver.
Considering the “forget” pass in the UniSim Design solver, the definition
of a flowsheet (or sub-flowsheet) in the context of the overall program
is defined by what it possesses:
• Independent fluid package (optional)
• PFD
• Workbook
• Flowsheet Elements (streams and/or operations)
• Solver
This definition may seem to contradict previous statements regarding

the access to information, however, capabilities were built into UniSim
Design to maximize the power of using sub-flowsheets without
impeding any access to information. No matter where you are in the
simulation, you can open any flowsheet’s PFD or Workbook.
Since the sub-flowsheets are, in essence, single operations within the

main flowsheet, each has its own property view that allows you to
access information inside the sub-flowsheet without ever entering the
Refer to Section 7.18 - sub-flowsheet itself.
Simulation Navigator for
details on the Simulation
Navigator.
Refer to Section 7.17 -
Object Navigator for
1.2.4 Navigators
details on the Object
Navigator.
All of the flowsheets within a simulation are tied together through the
Variable Navigator for
details on the Variable
Navigator.
1-5
Navigators.
Navigators Description
Simulation Navigator Quick access to the property view of any stream or
unit operation from any flowsheet within the case.
Object Navigator Immediate access to the property view for any
stream or operation from any location.
You can access the Object Navigator view by right-
clicking on any blank area of the UniSim Design
Desktop and selecting Find Object command
from the Object Inspect menu.
Variable Navigator Target process variables from any flowsheet. For
example, you can select variables for inclusion on
a Strip Chart or for attachment to logical
operations such as Adjusts or Controllers.
1.2.5 Objects
The term object is used extensively throughout the documentation to
refer to an individual stream or operation. Within UniSim Design,
information associated with an object can appear in a variety of ways
(Workbook, PFD, Property View, Plot, etc.).
Through the object oriented design of UniSim Design, the information

displayed by each interface element is tied to the same underlying
object. The result is that if a parameter changes in the flowsheet, it is
automatically updated in every location.
Objects, such as an icon in a PFD, are tied to appropriate commands for

that object (i.e., printing, direct access to a property view, etc.).
1.2.6 Structure Terminology

All UniSim Design cases include certain structural elements. The
following table defines some common UniSim Design terminology.
Object Definition
Flowsheet Element A Stream or Operation.
(or Object)
Flowsheet A collection of Flowsheet Elements that utilize a
common fluid package. A flowsheet possesses its
own Workbook and PFD.
Fluid Package Includes the property package, Components
(library, pseudo or hypothetical), Reaction Package
and User Properties used for flowsheet
calculations. Fluid packages can be Imported and
Exported.
1-6
Interface 1-7
Object Definition
Simulation Case A collection of fluid package(s), flowsheets, and
flowsheet elements that form the model. The
simulation case can be saved to disk for future
reference. The extension used for saved cases is
*.usc.
Simulation cases can also be saved as template
files (*.tpl), UFL files (*.ufl) and XML files (*.xml).
Session Encompasses every simulation case that is open
while UniSim Design is running.
Special Flowsheet Elements

Column operations and flowsheet templates are special Flowsheet
Elements because they are also flowsheets. A flowsheet template can
be a column sub-flowsheet or a more complex system.
The special capabilities of the column and flowsheet template are as

follows:
Refer to Section 4.3 - • Contain their own flowsheet, meaning they possess their own
UFL Files for more PFD and Workbook.
information regarding the • Can be comprised of multiple flowsheet elements.
UFL files.
• Can be retrieved as a complete entity into any other simulation
case.
1.2.7 Desktop
The figure below shows the basic components of the UniSim Design
1-7
Desktop.
Figure 1.1
Menu Bar Title Bar Environment/Mode Label
Toolbar
Status
Bar
Object Status Window Trace Window Scroll Bar
The main features of the Desktop are defined in the following table.
Object Definition
Title Bar Indicates the UniSim Design file currently loaded.
Menu Bar Provides access to common flowsheet commands
through a drop-down menu system.
Toolbar Contains various icons that invoke a specific command
when clicked.
Environment/ Indicates the environment and mode that you are
Mode Label currently working in.
Status Bar Displays the calculation status of the object. When the
mouse pointer is placed over an icon in the toolbar, the
Object Palette, or a property view, a brief description
of its function appears in the Status Bar.
Calculation/ The Calculation/Responsiveness icon enables the user
Responsiveness to control how much time is spent updating the
icon screens vs. calculations.
Calculation/
Responsiveness icon
1-8
Interface 1-9
Object Definition
Scroll Bars Allows you to scroll horizontally and vertically.
Object Status The Object Status Window (left pane) shows current
Window/Trace status messages for flowsheet objects, while the Trace
Window Window (right pane) displays Solver information. The
windows can be resized vertically or horizontally by
clicking and dragging the windows frames located
between or above them.
For more information about the Object Status Window
or Trace Window, refer to Section 1.3 - Object
Status Window/Trace Window.
Some additional information about the UniSim Design Desktop:

• When the mouse pointer is placed over a button, its descriptive
name pops up below the pointer and a Fly by function appears in
the status bar.
• When necessary, the Desktop has both a vertical and horizontal
scroll bar that are automatically created.
1.2.8 Interface Terminology

The terminology shown in the following figures is used to describe the
various UniSim Design interface elements.
Figure 1.2
1-9
Figure 1.3
Object Definition
Active Selected The current active location is always indicated by a
Location dark frame or border.
Button Invokes a command when clicked.
Checkbox Items or settings that are On or Off. Checking the
checkbox turns the function On. Unchecking it turns it
Off.
Drop-Down List A list of available options for a given input cell.
Group Organizational border within a page that groups
related functions together. Each group has its own
active location.
Icon Invokes a command when clicked, or opens a view
when double-clicked.
Input Cell/Field Location in a view for supplying or viewing information
(e.g., stream names, temperatures, etc.). In many
cases it has a drop-down list associated with it.
Matrix A group of cells where you can manoeuvre with the
mouse or the keyboard arrow keys.
Minimize/ Either shrink the current view (minimize), or expand
Maximize icon the view to its full size.
Object icon Either closes the view (double-clicking), or produces a
drop-down menu of common Windows commands.
Object Status Each property view shows the status of the associated
object with a coloured background (red for a missing
parameter, yellow for a warning message, and green
for OK).
Pages Provides access to detailed information for the selected
object.
Pin Converts a Modal property view to a Non-Modal
property view.
1-10
Interface 1-11
Object Definition
Radio Button Always found in groups of at least two; only one can be
active at a time.
Tabs Provides a logical grouping of information. Often
contain pages where the information is sorted further.
View Any graphical representation found on the Desktop, for
example, a property view for an operation.
Active View/Active Location

Although several views can be displayed on the Desktop at any time,
only one view is Active or has focus. This is indicated by the view’s Title
Bar being selected. Within that view, there is again only one location
that is Active. How this appears varies depending on the location (cell,
button, etc.).
1.3 Object Status Window/

Trace Window
At the bottom of the UniSim Design Desktop there is a window that
appears by default. The window is split vertically into two panes and
displays status messages and detailed solver information. The left pane
is referred to as the Object Status Window and the right pane is the
Trace Window.
The Object Status Window and Trace Window cannot be

opened separately.
1.3.1 Opening & Sizing the

Windows
To open the Object Status and Trace Windows, position the mouse
pointer on any part of the thick border directly above the Status Bar.
When the cursor changes to a sizing arrowhead (double-headed arrow),
click and drag the border vertically.
If the cursor is placed over the vertical double line that separates the
two panes, a horizontal sizing arrowhead appears. The size of the two
panes can be adjusted by clicking and horizontally dragging the cursor.
1-11
1-12 Object Status Window/Trace
1.3.2 Message Windows

Status messages The message windows within UniSim Design include the Object Status
displayed in yellow in a
and Trace windows. Refer to the following table for the functionality of
property view appear in
black in the Object Status the windows:
Window for clarity.
Window Functionality
Object • Shows current status messages for objects in the
Status flowsheet, coloured accordingly. The colour of the
Window status message for an object usually matches the
colour of the status message on the object’s property
view.
• Allows you to access to the property view of an object
described in the status message by double-clicking on
the message.
Trace • Displays iterative calculations for certain operations
Window (such as the Adjust, Recycle, Reactor, etc.). These
appear in black text.
• Displays scripting commands in blue text.
• Displays error messages (that still solve), such as
operation errors or warnings, in red text.
An example of the contents shown in the Object Status and Trace

Windows appears below. Each window has a vertical scroll bar for
viewing the contents of the window.
Figure 1.4
1.3.3 Object Inspect Menu

The commands available through the Object Inspect menu of the Object
Status Window and Trace Window are specific to each pane.
Object Status Window

Status messages that are The following commands are available by right-clicking the Object
OK do not appear in the
Object Status Window.
1-12
Interface 1-13
Status Window:
Command Description
View Status Opens the Status List Properties view. This view contains
List Properties an input field for the Status List File Name (by default
Status.Log), that enables the contents of the left pane to
be written to a file. Also on this view is a drop-down list
for the Minimum Severity.
From top to bottom, the options in the drop-down list
represent increasing status message severity. For
example, selecting Warning from the list displays all
messages that are warnings or more severe in the left
pane. To display only error messages that are the most
severe, select the **Error** option.
Dump Current Automatically dumps the contents of the left pane to the
Status List to Status List File Name.
File
Figure 1.5
Trace Window
The commands in Object Inspect menu for the Trace Window are
described in the following table:
Command Description
View Trace Opens the Trace Properties view, which contains the
Properties following:
• Trace File Name field. Shows the file name to
which the contents of the Trace Window can be
written (by default Trace.Log).
• History Length field. Represents the number of
lines that the Trace Window keeps in its history.
• Trace to File Continuously checkbox. When
checked, the Trace Window contents are written to
the Trace File.
• Verbose checkbox. When checked, the Trace
Window shows solver information for all
operations in the case.
• Trace Inactive checkbox. When checked, the
Trace Window shows information for all inactive
operations in the case.
• Word Wrap Trace Lines checkbox. When
selected, the messages in the Trace Window are
word wrapped to fit the Trace Window.
Set trace Change the trace window default font
window font
1-13
1-14 Toolbar
Command Description
Dump Current Automatically dumps the contents of the Trace Window
Trace to File to the Trace File.
Clear Trace Clears all the information from the Trace Window.
Window
Copy all trace Copy all trace information to the clipboard
information
Figure 1.6
1.4 Toolbar
These commands are The icons on the toolbar provide immediate access to the most
also available in the
menu bar.
commonly used commands.
The toolbar varies depending on the current environment

and Mode.
The following buttons are found on the various tool bars in UniSim
Design.
Name Icons Description

New Case Creates a new case.
Open Case Locates and opens an existing case/

template/column.
Save Case Saves the active case.
PFD Opens the PFD for the current flowsheet.
Workbook Opens the Workbook for the current

flowsheet.
Navigator Opens the Object Navigator.
Simulation Opens the Simulation Navigator.

Navigator
1-14
Interface 1-15

Steady State/ Toggles between Steady State and
Dynamics Dynamic modes. Currently toggled to
Steady State mode.
Dynamics Opens the Dynamics Assistant view.
Assistant
Column Opens the Column Runner view.
Active/Holding Main environment: Toggles between

Run/Stop Active and Holding modes. Green (left) is
Active.
(Steady State)
Column environment: Toggles between
Run and Stop Column Solver. Green (left)
is Run.
Integrator Integrator toggle. Toggles between Active
(Dynamics) and Holding. Red (right) is Holding.
Basis Enter the Basis environment.
Parent Return to the parent flowsheet from a

Flowsheet sub-flowsheet (i.e., the main
environment from the column sub-
flowsheet environment).
Oil Environment Enter the Oil environment from the Basis
environment.
Leave From the Oil environment, return to the
Environment Basis environment; from the Basis
environment, return to the Main
environment.
Some additional things about the UniSim Design Desktop:

• When the cursor is placed over a button, its descriptive name
pops up below the pointer and a Fly by function appears in the
status bar.
• The Desktop has both a vertical and horizontal scroll bar. These
are automatically created when necessary.
1-15
1-16 Hot Keys
1.4.1 Dynamics Time Manager

Tool Bar Icons
Take One Step This causes the simulation to take one
time step. If the red light is currently on,
pressing this button will first turn the
green light on. If the Integrator is
currently in Automatic, pressing this
button will change to Manual mode.
Real Time This button activates the real time
checkbox on the Integrator.
Desired Real Time This provides a pop-up window to enter

Factor the Desired Real Time Factor on the
Integrator.
Take Multiple Steps When pressed the integrator switches to
run and manual mode, if required, and
executes the requested number of steps.
See the Set Multiple Steps icon below.
Set Multiple Steps Allows the user to enter the number of
steps to execute. See Take Multiple
Steps above.
Integrator In Auto Switches the integrator between Auto
and Manual mode.
Alarm Manager Opens Alarm Manager. Used to view and

acknowledge current status of raised
alarm events by suitably-configured
equipment items.
1.5 Hot Keys

Figure 1.7
1-16
Interface 1-17
The Hot Key list is available under the Help menu of the main screen.
File
Create New Case CTRL N
Open Case CTRL O
Save Current Case CTRL S
Save As CTRL SHIFT S
Exit UniSim Design ALT F4
Simulation
Enter Simulation Basis Manager CTRL B
Main Properties CTRL M
Access Optimizer F5
Access Event Scheduler CTRL E
Leave Current environment (Return to CTRL L
Previous)
Toggle Steady-State/Dynamic Modes F7
Toggle Hold/Go Calculations F8
Access Integrator CTRL I
Start/Stop Integrator F9
Take one step integration CTRL 1
Stop Calculations CTRL BREAK
Flowsheet
Add Material Stream F11
Add Operation F12
Access Object Navigator F3
Access Notes Manager CTRL G
Show/Hide Object Palette F4
Access Composition View (from CTRL K
Workbook)
Displays Stream Temperatures SHIFT T
Displays Stream Pressures SHIFT P
Displays Stream Molar Flow Rates SHIFT F
Displays Stream Names (Default) SHIFT N
Tools
Access Workbooks CTRL W
Access PFDs CTRL P
Toggle Move/Attach (PFD) CTRL
Access Utilities CTRL U
Access Reports CTRL R
Access Databook CTRL D
Access Controller FacePlates CTRL F
Access Dynamics Assistant CTRL Y
Access Help F1
Column
Go to Column Runner (sub-flowsheet) CTRL T
Stop Column Solver CTRL BREAK
View
1-17
1-18 Hot Keys
Close Active View CTRL F4

Tile Views SHIFT F4
Go to Next View CTRL F6 or CTRL TAB
Go to Previous View CTRL SHIFT F6 or
CTRL SHIFT TAB
Go to Next item within View TAB
Go to Previous item within View SHIFT TAB
Editing/General
Access editing cell function F2
Access Pull-Down Menus F10 or ALT
Go to Next Page Tab CTRL SHIFT N
Go to Previous Page Tab CTRL SHIFT P
Undo CTRL Z
Cut CTRL X
Copy CTRL C
Paste CTRL V
PFD
Zoom out Page Down
Zoon in Page Up
Zoom All Home
Toggle between last zoon levels Z
Pan Arrow or SHIFT Arrow Keys
Centre PFD on cursor Period key or C
Mirror about X axis X
Mirror about Y axis Y
Rotate 90 1
Rotate 180 2
Rotate 270 3
To default orientation N
Display Stream temperatures SHIFT T
Display Stream pressures SHIFT P
Display Stream molar flowrates SHIFT F
Display Stream names SHIFT N
Dsplay Stream mass flowrates SHIFT M
Display Stream descriptions SHIFT R
Display Outlet nozzle elevation SHIFT O
Display Inlet nozzle elevation SHIFT I
Select Object label L
Open Selected Object V or E
Delete Selected Object Delete
1-18
Program Philosophy 2-1
2 Program Philosophy
2.1 Introduction .................................................................................. 2

2.1.1 One Model, Many Uses.............................................................. 2
2.1.2 The Leader in Usability ............................................................. 3
2.1.3 Maximizing the Engineer’s Efficiency ........................................... 4
2.1.4 The Difference in the UniSim Design Series ................................. 5
2.2 Simulation Case ............................................................................. 5

2.2.1 Building a Simulation Case ........................................................ 6
2.3 Multi-Flowsheet Architecture/Environments ................................. 7
2-1
2-2 Introduction
2.1 Introduction
UniSim Design is based on these fundamental principles:
• “single model” concept
• rigorous first principle’s models
• reuse of simulation data
• best in class usability
• an open customizable environment
The UniSim Design series of products is true to these principles as new

developments have expanded and built upon this foundation.
2.1.1 One Model, Many Uses

The single model concept allows the user to build one model of the
process and migrate it through the various stages of the Lifecycle.
During the design stage, a model can be used for conceptual design,
real process design, detailed engineering design, and finally, for
operability design. Once the asset has been built, this same model can
be used for operations improvement, operator training, safety studies,
and asset optimization. In addition to delivering simulation capabilities
that support the Lifecycle, UniSim Design also serves as the platform
for modeling across the entire range of the chemical and hydrocarbon
processing industries.
UniSim Design serves as the engineering platform for modeling

processes from Upstream, through Gas Processing and Cryogenic
facilities, to Refining and Chemicals processes. A range of powerful new
engineering capabilities have been delivered within UniSim Design
through the development activities of Honeywell and its alliance
partners, including the following:
• UniSim Thermo. Completely flexible thermodynamics, UniSim
Thermo, is the first truly “componentized” thermodynamics
server now on the market in the process industries. UniSim
Thermo is a thermodynamic calculation framework that makes it
possible to develop independent, extensible, and encapsulated
calculation modules for reuse within the engineering Lifecycle.
The immediate benefits are more flexible thermodynamic
choices and the easy integration of in-house and 3rd party
methods.
• UniSim Design OLI Interface. Integration of OLI Systems Inc.
technology and component databanks with the industry’s first fit
for purpose set of electrolyte unit operations.
• Multi-phase Pipeline Hydraulics. Integration of PIPESYS from
Neotechnology.
• Transient Multi-phase Flow. Integration with Honeywell’s
ProFES tools.
2-2
• Advanced Amine Systems. Integration of AMSIM from DB

Robinson.
Beyond the development and integration of these technologies into the

UniSim Design engineering platform, there have been many new
capabilities developed that enhance Process Asset Lifecycle
Management. These include the following:
• Honeywell SQP. A new optimization algorithm, Honeywell SQP,
for design and asset optimizations.
• LP Utility. A utility that uses the rigorous UniSim Design
process model to generate vector data for planning and
scheduling tools.
• Dynamic Depressuring. Uses the powerful, proven dynamic
modelling capabilities of UniSim Design for conducting
depressuring studies in our steady state simulator to perform
Relief Valve sizing against safe depressuring times.
• LNG Rating. Integration of the rigorous UniSim PFE engine
from the UniSim Heat Exchanger software.
• Air Cooler Rating. Integration of the UniSim CFE functionality
from the UniSim Heat Exchanger software.
• Heat Exchanger Rating. Tight integration of the UniSim STE
engine from the UniSim Heat Exchanger software so that
process engineers can perform detailed rating calculations
within the UniSim Design environment.
• SPS. Integration of solid component characterization technology
from SPS.
2.1.2 The Leader in Usability

Honeywell has always believed that ease of use is a fundamental
component of simulation technology. UniSim Design has consistently
delivered on this, allowing engineers to easily construct and analyze
models of their process to obtain the understanding necessary to make
informed engineering, operating and business decisions.
As with previous releases of UniSim Design, there are a range of new

features that simplify the engineer’s task of building and analyzing
models. Some of the highlights include:
• A Simulation Navigator that allows instant access to all unit
operations and streams within the simulation case.
• Case Collaboration that allows the building of compound cases
that span the user’s network. Boundary streams are connected
through an external data server which supports revisions and
change notifications.
• A Notes Manager that allows one spot access to all user notes
from any location in the simulation case.
• Auto Connection feature for rapidly building flowsheets in the
PFD environment.
• Correlation Sets, which allow the user to define the properties to
be calculated and displayed for any stream in the case.
2-3
2-4 Introduction
• Case security levels that allow the protection of Intellectual

Property contained within any built UniSim Design model.
2.1.3 Maximizing the Engineer’s

Efficiency
There are several key aspects of UniSim Design which have been
designed specifically to maximize the engineer’s efficiency in using
simulation technology. Usability and reliability are two obvious
attributes, which UniSim Design has and continues to excel at. The
single model concept is key not only to the individual engineer’s
efficiency, but to the efficiency of an organization.
Of equal importance is the commitment to developing the capabilities

within the simulator that support re-use of the engineer’s work, as well
as capabilities that allow for the flexible application of the available
technology. The UniSim Design 350 series contains a number of new
developments which are designed specifically to promote re-use and
deliver increased flexibility to the engineer. Underlying this aspect of
UniSim Design has been a steady migration to delivering finer
granularity of the “components” which make up a simulation case, such
that these components can be defined once and used many times.
The most significant development within the UniSim Design 350 series
in this regard is the delivery of XML (eXtensible Mark up Language)
technology. The range of possibilities that this opens up are significant,
but some of the immediate benefits are:
• The ability to store all (or part) of the user’s inputs and
specifications in XML to allow re-building of the case.
• The ability to store parts of an existing simulation case in XML
and have it read into another case, either augmenting or
overwriting the definitions within that case.
• The ability to store simulation case results in an XML format to
allow post processing of simulator data, taking advantage of the
wide range of XML technology being developed within the
software industry.
• The ability to browse the simulation case data in a familiar
internet browser-like environment.
In addition, UniSim Design has increased ability to define and store

simulation components, including:
• Workbook Sheet definitions. Individual pages of the
Workbook can be stored out and read back into any other
simulation case.
• Correlation Sets. User defined sets of properties can be
configured and read into any other case.
• Independent and Dependant Property Sets for LP utilities.
2-4
• UFL files. Unit operation collections from an existing case can

be stored out and modified as *.ufl files, allowing them to be re-
imported via the copy/paste capabilities into any other case.
2.1.4 The Difference in the UniSim

Design Series
For existing UniSim Design users there are some significant differences
in the UniSim Design series that the user will want to take advantage
of. There have been significant advancements in the underlying “fluid”
structure within UniSim Design that has delivered a range of exciting
possibilities.
• A “component” (library or pseudo) has been defined. The
component within UniSim Design has become both flexible and
extensible. Properties of components can change through the
flowsheet, either through user intervention or via the action of a
unit operation.
• Component lists can be shared amongst fluid packages, which,
in combination with the flexible component technology,
significantly reduces the number of components required to
model a given process, particularly in refining.
• User properties have been integrated into the components and
have been tied into flexible stream reporting capabilities.
• Multiple fluid packages are supported within a single flowsheet.
The user is not restricted to having one fluid package per
flowsheet. Fluid packages can be applied to individual streams
and operations within a flowsheet, with Fluid Package
Transitions automatically inserted (or removed) where
necessary.
New Technology Built on Historical

Success
The UniSim Design series represents a significant advancement in
simulation technology, built upon the proven capabilities of previous
versions. As with every Honeywell product, it reflects our commitment
to Plant Asset Lifecycle Management by delivering the best tools within
a platform that is the world leader in ease of use and flexibility, and
sets the standard for an open engineering environment.
2.2 Simulation Case

The simulation case is comprised of the main elements described in the
2-5
2-6 Simulation Case
following table:
Main Elements Description

Fluid Definition The definition of the material that is being operated on
by the unit operations, including component lists,
component properties, property package, reactors, etc.
Refer to Chapter 5 - Basis Environment for more
information.
Flowsheet A collection of unit operations (physical and logical)
and the streams that connect fluid information
between them. This is termed Topology and
connectivity. See Chapter 3 - Flowsheet for more
information.
Analytical The property calculations (stream based) and utilities
Calculations that perform additional calculations using data
(typically stream information) owned by other objects.
Refer to Appendix A - Property Methods &
Calculations in the UniSim Design Simulation
Basis Guide for more information.
Data Sources Variables which are owned by the unit operations can
either be used by other unit operations (logical
operations) in their calculations, or attached to Data
Collectors for visualization. Refer to Section 11.19 -
Variable Navigator for more information.
Data Collectors Elements within the program that access data owned
by other objects for the purpose of visualization or
analysis. Refer to Section 11.7 - Databook for more
information.
Simulation These are the tools that sit on top of the simulation
Control Tools case, causing it to solve in a specific manner to deliver
specific behaviour.
Refer to the following objects Optimizer, Dervutil, Data
Recon utility, PM utility, and Case Studies in the
UniSim Design Operations Guide, and Section 7.6
- Integrator.
2.2.1 Building a Simulation Case

If you use the basic steps of building a simulation case, the ability to re-
use these simulation elements can be more easily illustrated:
1. Create the fluid definition. Fluid packages can be stored as self-
contained pieces (as well as some of the pieces within the fluid
package) and read in to begin a simulation case.
2. Construct the flowsheet topology. Flowsheet templates, *.ufl files,
and *.xml files can all be stored as self-contained pieces and be
read in to any future simulation case. With UniSim Design, changes
made in the external files (*.ufl and *.xml) can be easily
incorporated into an existing case.
Then optionally:
3. Define the Property Calculations wanted for the various fluid types.
The correlation sets or Workbooks (the entire Workbook definition
or individual tabs/pages) can be stored outside of the simulation
case and subsequently applied to existing or new cases.
2-6
4. Create any Analytical Calculators required.

5. Identify any data sources that are required for Data Collectors.
6. Define any Data Collectors (Strip charts, Workbooks, PFD tables).
7. Construct any Simulation Control Tools required (Optimizer,
Integrator, or Case Study).
2.3 Multi-Flowsheet
Architecture/
Environments
With the continued evolution of computer hardware and software
architecture, the ability to rigorously model entire plants has become
feasible. UniSim Design, which has always been based on a multi-
flowsheet architecture, is ideally suited for dealing with the size of the
simulation cases that result from building plant-wide models.
Once the fluid package(s) for your simulation have been created, you
enter the main flowsheet. In this location, the bulk of the model is
created, installing the streams and operations to represent your
process.
There are two types of Sub-flowsheets within the main flowsheet can be created at any time,
sub-flowsheets: columns
and templates. as well as sub-flowsheets within sub-flowsheets. There are three
fundamental purposes of the sub-flowsheet:
• Representation of complex plant models in terms of “units”
which provides an easy mechanism for the organization of large
models.
• Easy support for templating of units or processes to facilitate
their re-use.
• Provide the mechanism for solver transitions (i.e., from the
default non-sequential modular solver to the simultaneous
solver used by the Column or sub-flowsheet).
In addition, it is also possible to use the sub-flowsheet as a fluid

package transition (i.e., switching from a fluid package tailored for VLE
calculations to one tailored for LLE calculations), although, with UniSim
Design 350 and higher, this is not the only mechanism for applying
With other unit operations
these transitions.
in UniSim Design,
information can flow Within a given flowsheet, all sub-flowsheets are treated as a single unit
across the sub-flowsheet
boundary bi-directionally
operation with multiple connections. The parent flowsheet (main or
(i.e., product stream sub) in which that sub-flowsheet resides has no knowledge of what is
information can flow into inside the sub-flowsheet (i.e., it could be a refrigeration loop or a
the sub-flowsheet).
decanter system). From the parent flowsheet, the sub-flowsheet
2-7
2-8 Multi-Flowsheet Architecture/
behaves as any other operation and calculates whenever “feed”

conditions change.
The nature of the sub-flowsheet gives rise to the concept of

environments. Although a sub-flowsheet (template or column) appears
as a single operation in its owner flowsheet, you can, at any time, enter
the sub-flowsheet to examine conditions in greater detail or make
changes. You can make topology changes in the main PFD or in the
sub-flowsheet environment. If you enter the sub-flowsheet’s build
environment, the following UniSim Design behaviour occurs:
• The parent flowsheet (and all those which are above the current
flowsheet in the simulation case hierarchy) are temporarily
cached.
• The parent flowsheet’s solver(s) (and all those which are above
the current flowsheet in the simulation case hierarchy) only
process the forget pass, and calculations are temporarily
suspended. Within the sub-flowsheet calculations are still
performed, but the results are not propagated to the rest of the
simulation until you come out of the sub-flowsheet environment.
This lets you focus on a specific aspect of the simulation without
having the entire simulation calculate every time conditions
change.
While there are certain programmatic behaviours built into UniSim

Design to facilitate the proper behaviour of the flowsheets, this does
not limit its ability to access information from any location in the
program. No matter where you are in the simulation case, you can open
any flowsheet’s PFD, Workbook or property view for a stream or
operation within that flowsheet. Since the sub-flowsheets are, in
essence, single operations within the main flowsheet, each has its own
property view. You can access resident information inside the sub-
flowsheet through this property view without ever having to enter the
sub-flowsheet itself.
The accessing of data within the simulation case is the function of the
Navigators.
Refer to Section 7.17 - • The Object Navigator gives immediate access to the property
Object Navigator for view for any stream or operation from any location.
Navigator. • The Variable Navigator lets you target variables from any
Flowsheet for use—either by a logical unit operation—or as part
of one of the Data Collectors.
details on the Variable • The Simulation Navigator provides a single location where you
Navigator. can view or interact with the property views for all streams and
Refer to Section 7.18 - unit operations in the simulation case, regardless of which
Simulation Navigator flowsheet they reside in.
for details on the
Simulation Navigator.
2-8
Flowsheet 3-1
3 Flowsheet
3.1 Introduction .................................................................................. 2
3.2 Flowsheets in UniSim Design ......................................................... 2
3.3 UniSim Design Environments ......................................................... 4

3.3.1 Basis Environments .................................................................. 4
3.3.2 Simulation Environments .......................................................... 5
3.3.3 Environment Relationships ........................................................ 7
3.3.4 Advantages of Using Environments............................................. 8
3.4 Sub-Flowsheet Environment .........................................................10

3.4.1 Sub-Flowsheet Entities ............................................................10
3.4.2 Sub-Flowsheet Advantages.......................................................11
3.4.3 Multi-Level Flowsheet Architecture ............................................11
3.4.4 Flowsheet Information Transfer .................................................13
3.5 Templates.....................................................................................14
3.5.1 Template Information ..............................................................15
3.5.2 Creating a Template Style Flowsheet..........................................19
3.5.3 Installing a Template ...............................................................20
3.6 Property View Flowsheet Analysis ................................................22

3.6.1 Stream Analysis......................................................................22
3.6.2 Unit Operation Analysis............................................................24
3-1
3-2 Introduction
3.1 Introduction
The following sections describe the functionalities of the various
flowsheets within UniSim Design.
Keep the following in mind:

• Fluid packages can be assigned to individual unit operations or
groups of unit operations in a flowsheet, independent of the
default fluid package for that flowsheet. Fluid package
transitions are automatically introduced for the user.
• The Cut/Copy/Paste function allows the creation of an *.ufl file,
which can be stored on disk. This UFL file can be created from
any collection of unit operations and streams within the
simulation case. The fluid packages associated with those
objects are also saved with the UFL file. You can open this file
and edit it, using the fluid packages contained for the
calculations. When an UFL file is imported into a simulation case,
the fluid packages are removed; only the objects, topology, and
specifications are imported into the target case.
• Unit operations and streams can be added to and removed from
flowsheets using the Cut/Copy/Paste functionality.
• Case Collaboration allows you to construct smaller flowsheets of
a larger process and examine the relationships/impacts between
flowsheets.
• XML data representation provides a complimentary
representation of the traditional binary form of the case storage.
It allows you to read impartial information into one or more
existing simulation cases, resulting in those cases being updated
with the new information.
In addition to these features, UniSim Design can define elements of the

simulation case and store them independently of the case for
subsequent re-use. This includes not only fluid package elements and
flowsheet topologies, but analytical tools such as property calculations
and Workbooks as well.
3.2 Flowsheets in UniSim

Design
UniSim Design uses a multi-level flowsheet architecture tightly
integrated within a framework of simulation environments. Separate
Desktops for each environment help you focus on the current design
task, and multi-level flowsheets allow you to contain complex processes
within sub-flowsheets.
As a result, you can interact with an installed sub-flowsheet operation

as if it were a simple black box, or you can use the sub-flowsheet’s
simulation environment when more detailed interaction is required.
3-2
Flowsheet 3-3
Potentially complex flowsheets installed as sub-flowsheet

operations function in a familiar and consistent manner, much
like the other “normal” unit operations in UniSim Design.
UniSim Design also supports the concept of a Process Template.

A template is a complete flowsheet that is stored on disk with
additional information on how to set up the flowsheet as a sub-
flowsheet operation.
Typically, templates represent a plant process module or a

portion of a process module. The stored template can be read
from disk and installed as a complete sub-flowsheet operation
numerous times and in any number of different simulation
cases.
The flowsheet and sub- The sub-flowsheet can also be assigned a separate fluid package
flowsheet are not different from main flowsheet. This feature lets you model plant
restricted to a single
fluid package. utilities more rigorously using, for example, cooling water and
steam circuits as separate flowsheets with dedicated Steam
Table property packages.
Column Sub-Flowsheets – A Special Case

Column sub-flowsheets are a distinct class of sub-flowsheets
because they provide a simultaneous flowsheet solution. Even
though they are different, they are created and accessed much
like normal sub-flowsheets, and can be created and later
imported into other simulations.
The column sub-flowsheet’s property view and the Column’s

simulation environment are very different, however, as they are
suited specifically for designing columns rather than general
processes.
Although a lot of the general sub-flowsheet information

presented in this chapter also applies to the column sub-
flowsheet, the column sub-flowsheet operation is discussed
specifically and in-depth in Chapter 8 - Column in the UniSim
Design Operations Guide.
3-3
3-4 UniSim Design Environments
3.3 UniSim Design

Environments
The environments help The environment design concept is one of the cornerstones on which
you maintain peak
efficiency while working UniSim Design is built. These environments let you access and input
with your simulation by information in a certain area (environment) of the simulation, while
avoiding the execution of other areas of the simulation are put on hold. The other areas will not
redundant calculations.
proceed with steady state calculations until you are finished working in
the active area. Since the UniSim Design integrator is time-step based,
the environments have no impact on dynamic calculations.
Separate Desktops are available within each environment. These

Desktops include an appropriate menu bar, tool bar, and Home View(s)
specifically designed for interaction with that particular environment.
The Desktops also remember the views that are open, even when their
associated environment is not currently active.
When moving from one environment to another, Desktops provide a

mechanism for quickly and automatically putting away what ever
views are open in one environment, and bringing up the views that
were open in the other environment. This feature is useful when
working with large flowsheets.
The environments in UniSim Design can be loosely grouped into two

categories:
• Basis environments
• Simulation environments
These environments are described in more detail in the following

sections.
3.3.1 Basis Environments

There are two types Basis environments:
• Simulation Basis
• Oil Characterization
Simulation Basis Environment

When beginning a UniSim Design simulation, you automatically start in
the Simulation Basis environment. Here you create, define, and modify
fluid packages to be used by the simulation’s flowsheets. In general, a
fluid package contains—at minimum—a property package and library
3-4
Flowsheet 3-5
and/or hypothetical components. Fluid packages can also contain

information such as reactions and interaction parameters.
The Desktop for the Simulation Basis environment contains a tool bar
with the appropriate icons for Basis tasks and designates the
Simulation Basis Manager view as the Home View.
Oil Characterization Environment

The Oil Characterization environment lets you characterizes petroleum
fluids by creating and defining assays and blends. The Oil
Characterization procedure generates petroleum hypocomponents for
use in your fluid package(s). The Oil environment is accessible only
within the Simulation Basis environment.
The Desktop for the Oil Characterization environment is very similar to

the Desktop in the Simulation Basis environment. Icons specific to
Generating Oils appear and the Oil Characterization Manager is the
Home View.
3.3.2 Simulation Environments

The following are examples of Simulation environments:
• Main flowsheet environment/sub-flowsheet environment
• Column sub-flowsheet environment
You can create sub- UniSim Design allows you to “nest” flowsheets. The main flowsheet is
flowsheets within all the
flowsheets in your
the parent flowsheet for the sub-flowsheets it contains. A sub-flowsheet
simulation. can also be a parent flowsheet if it contains other sub-flowsheets.
Main Flowsheet/Sub-Flowsheet
Environment
The simulation case main flowsheet environment is where you do the
majority of your work in UniSim Design. Here you install and define the
following:
• Streams
• Unit operations
• Columns
You can also create sub-flowsheets in this main environment.
This flowsheet serves as the base level or “main” flowsheet for the
whole simulation case. Any number of sub-flowsheets can be generated
3-5
in this main flowsheet. While there is only one main flowsheet

environment, each individual sub-flowsheet that is installed can have its
own corresponding sub-flowsheet environment.
The Desktop for the main flowsheet environment contains an extensive

menu bar and tool bar designed for building and running simulations.
There are two Home Views for the flowsheet: the Workbook and the
PFD.
A sub-flowsheet environment is almost identical to the main flowsheet

environment because you can install streams, operations, and other
sub-flowsheets. One difference is that each installed flowsheet in the
simulation case has its own corresponding environment, while there is
only one main flowsheet environment. The other difference is that while
you are in a sub-flowsheet environment, steady state calculations in
other areas of the simulation are put on hold until you return to the
main flowsheet environment.
The Desktop for a sub-flowsheet environment is virtually identical to

the Desktop for the main flowsheet except for one difference: the
Parent Simulation Environment icon appears in the tool bar.
Parent Simulation
Environment icon
Column Sub-Flowsheet Environment

The Column environment is where you install and define the streams
and operations contained in a column sub-flowsheet, and it is similar to
the sub-flowsheet environment described in the previous section.
Examples of unit operations you can install in a column sub-flowsheet
include the following:
• Tray sections
• Condensers
• Reboilers
• Side strippers
• Heat exchangers
• Pumps
There are eleven pre-build UniSim Design contains a number of pre-built column sub-flowsheet
columns available in
UniSim Design.
templates that allow you to quickly install a column of a typical type
and then, if necessary, customize it as required within its Column
environment.
The menu bar, tool bar, and Home Views for the Column environment
are designed expressly for designing, modifying, and converging
Column Runner icon column sub-flowsheets. It includes an additional Home View (the
Column Runner), and a corresponding menu item and a Column Runner
icon on the tool bar provide access to the Column Runner view. Even
with these changes, a Column environment Desktop still closely
3-6
Flowsheet 3-7
resembles the conventional flowsheet environment Desktop.
Due to the nature of its solution method, the column sub-

flowsheet does not support other sub-flowsheets
3.3.3 Environment Relationships

The figure below shows the relationship among the various
environments. The arrows indicate how you usually move between
environments as you build a UniSim Design simulation.
Figure 3.1
Building a Simulation
1. Create a new simulation case. UniSim Design automatically starts
you in the Simulation Basis environment.
2. Inside the Simulation Basis environment, do the following:
3-7
• Select a property method and pure components from the UniSim

Design pure component library.
• Create and define any hypothetical components, if required.
• Define reactions, if required.
At this point, you have two options. If you have a petroleum fluid to
characterize, proceed to step #3. If not, proceed to step #5.
To access the Oil 3. Enter the Oil Characterization environment, where you can do the
environment you must be following:
inside the Simulation
Basis environment. • Define one or more Assays and Blends.
• Generate petroleum hypocomponents representing the oil.
4. Return to the Simulation Basis environment.
5. Enter the main flowsheet environment, where you can do the
following:
• Install and define streams and unit operations.
• Install columns operations, process templates, and sub-
flowsheet operations as required.
6. Enter a Column or sub-flowsheet environment when you need to
make topological changes, or if you want to take advantage of a
sub-flowsheet environment’s separate Desktop.
You can move between the flowsheet environments at any time during
the simulation. The arrows in the previous diagram show that the
column and sub-flowsheet environments are accessible only from the
main flowsheet, however, this is only the typical way of moving
between the environments.
The Navigator lets you move directly from one flowsheet to any
another. The only restriction is that the Oil environment can be
accessed only within the Simulation Basis environment.
Object Navigator icon
3.3.4 Advantages of Using

Environments
Using environments To illustrate the advantages of the environments approach, consider the
helps make the most of
your simulation time by
creation of a new UniSim Design simulation case. When you start
eliminating the UniSim Design, you start in the Simulation Basis environment, where
execution of time- you define a fluid package by selecting a property method and
consuming, extraneous
calculations. components. When finished, you enter the main flowsheet environment
and begin installing streams and unit operations.
If you are missing some components in the fluid package, you can
return to the Simulation Basis environment and all flowsheets are
placed in Holding mode until you return to the main flowsheet. This
prevents calculations from occurring until you have made all required
3-8
Flowsheet 3-9
changes to the fluid package.
With each time-step, Dynamic calculations proceed from the

front to back of the flowsheet in an orderly propagation. This
is not affected by the flowsheet environments. Dynamics
calculate in a “flat” flowsheet space.
The flowsheet calculations do not resume until you return to the main
flowsheet environment.
Click the Active icon to
resume calculations. For sub-flowsheets, the concept of Holding steady state calculations
works according to the hierarchy of the flowsheets in the simulation.
When working inside a particular flowsheet, only that flowsheet and
any others below it in the hierarchy automatically calculate as you
make changes. All other flowsheets hold until you move to their
flowsheet’s Simulation environment, or one directly above them on the
hierarchical tree.
Figure 3.2
You can change

specifications from
If changing the number of trays for a column in sub-flowsheet F, enter
anywhere in the the environment for this sub-flowsheet and make the changes. UniSim
simulation case. You can Design re-calculates the column. There are no flowsheets below F, so all
make topology changes
on any open PFD, or you other flowsheets are on hold while you modify the column.
can make the changes in
the environment of that Continue making changes until you reach a satisfactory solution for F,
flowsheet.
then return to the main flowsheet environment to automatically re-
calculate all the flowsheets based on the new sub-flowsheet solution.
3-9
3-10 Sub-Flowsheet Environment
If you modify sub-flowsheet D, all flowsheets are on hold except D and

E, which will solved based on your modifications. After reaching a new
solution for D, enter sub-flowsheet C, which then resumes calculations.
When you return to the main flowsheet, all other flowsheets (Main, A, B
and F) resume calculations.
If you move directly from sub-flowsheet D to sub-flowsheet A, however,

UniSim Design automatically visits the main flowsheet and updates all
calculations, so flowsheet A has the most up-to-date information when
you transfer to it. Any movement to a flowsheet not on your branch of
the tree forces a full recalculation by UniSim Design.
3.4 Sub-Flowsheet
Environment
See Section 2.3 - Adding The Simulation environment described in the previous section is one of
a Sub-Flowsheet in the
UniSim Design
the cornerstone design concepts upon which UniSim Design is built.
Operations Guide for When combined with sub-flowsheet capabilities, it defines the basic
more information about foundation for building a UniSim Design simulation. The sub-flowsheet
installing a sub-flowsheet.
and Column operations use the multi-level flowsheet architecture and
provide a flexible, intuitive method for building the simulation.
Modeling a large process Suppose you are simulating a large processing facility with a number of
using several flowsheets
helps better organize your
individual process units. Instead of installing all process streams and
work and manipulate the unit operations into a single flowsheet, you can simulate each process
simulation. unit inside its own sub-flowsheet.
3.4.1 Sub-Flowsheet Entities

Both the main flowsheet and sub-flowsheets contain the following
components:
Flowsheet Component Description

Fluid Package An independent fluid package, consisting of a
property package, components, etc. It is not
necessary that every flowsheet in the
simulation have its own separate fluid
package. More than one flowsheet can share
the same fluid package.
Flowsheet Objects The inter-connected topology of the
flowsheet, including unit operations, material
and energy streams, utilities, etc.
A Dedicated PFD A graphics view of the flowsheet showing the
inter-connections between flowsheet objects.
3-10
Flowsheet 3-11
Flowsheet Component Description

A Dedicated Workbook A tabular view describing the various types of
flowsheet objects.
A Dedicated Desktop The PFD and Workbook are home views for
this Desktop, but also included are a menu
bar and a tool bar specific to the specific
flowsheet type.
3.4.2 Sub-Flowsheet Advantages

The multi-flowsheet architecture of UniSim Design provides a number
There is no limit
(except available of technical and functional advantages. The following table explains the
memory) to the number benefits of using sub-flowsheets in a simulation:
of flowsheets contained
in a UniSim Design
simulation. Capability Benefit
Multiple Fluid Each installed sub-flowsheet can have its own fluid
Packages package within a single simulation case.
Flowsheet Flowsheet association is a design that forces the
Association change of property methods to occur at defined
flowsheet boundaries. This ensures that consistent
transitions between the thermodynamic basis of the
different property methods are maintained and easily
controlled.
Simulation Case Create sub-flowsheets to break large simulations into
Organization smaller, more easily managed components. This helps
you to keep your simulation organized and concise.
Once a template is Template Save time and money by creating individual template
installed, it is Creation style flowsheets of commonly used process units,
functionally equivalent to which you can install within other simulations.
a sub-flowsheet that was Templates are fully defined flowsheets with a property
created in that package and components, unit operations, streams,
simulation case. It and flowsheet specifications.
doesn’t work the other Nested You can use nested flowsheets, i.e., have sub-
way, however; you can’t Flowsheets flowsheets inside other sub-flowsheets. The only
save a sub-flowsheet to restriction on nesting is you cannot create sub-
disk and use it in flowsheet operations inside a Column sub-flowsheet.
another simulation.
The use of sub-flowsheets is the ideal solution if your simulation

requires the use of multiple property packages or involves modeling
large and complex processes.
3.4.3 Multi-Level Flowsheet

A Show/Hide command
Architecture
also exists for displaying
sub-flowsheet objects on The sub-flowsheets contained in the main flowsheet of the simulation
the main flowsheet PFD.
For further details, see
case are discrete unit operations with feed and product streams. If you
Section 7.24.4 - Access are interested only in the feeds to and the products from a sub-
Column or Sub- flowsheet, you can work from the main flowsheet.
Flowsheet PFDs.
If you need to view information about the individual operations in the
3-11
3-12 Sub-Flowsheet Environment
sub-flowsheet, go “inside” the sub-flowsheet to get a more detailed

perspective. This is also referred to as “Entering the sub-flowsheet
environment”.
This concept also applies to column operations. For example, consider

the PFD of the main flowsheet for the Sour Water Stripper simulation
shown below.
Figure 3.3
In the main flowsheet, the
column appears as any MAIN FLOWSHEET
other unit operation
(Figure 3.3), however,
the column has its own
sub-flowsheet (Figure
3.4) that provides a
detailed look at the
column’s internal streams
and operations.
From the simulation environment of the main flowsheet, the distillation

column SW Stripper appears as any other unit operation with feed and
product streams, however, the column is also a sub-flowsheet with
streams and operations of its own.
For a more detailed look at the column, go inside the column sub-
flowsheet and examine the streams and operations in the SW Stripper’s
simulation environment. Inside the column sub-flowsheet (see Figure
3.4), the tray section, reboiler, and condenser exist as individual unit
operations. Similarly, the streams attaching these operations are also
distinct.
Within the main flowsheet, the only sub-flowsheet streams of interest

are those that directly attach to the column. In the case of the Sour
Water Stripper, the material streams Feed, Off Gas, Bottoms, and the
utility streams Cooling Water and Steam are the streams of interest.
These streams are called Boundary Streams because they cross out of
the main flowsheet’s environment into that of the sub-flowsheet,
carrying information between parent and sub-flowsheets.
Each sub-flowsheet has Within the sub-flowsheet environment, a dedicated Workbook and PFD
its own PFD and
Workbook, which display
allow you to access to the information that pertains only to this sub-
only the information flowsheet. Although information is never hidden or inaccessible among
related to that flowsheet. the various levels of flowsheets in a simulation case, the use of the
environments organizes and focuses the simulation efforts in a clear
3-12
Flowsheet 3-13
and logical manner.
Figure 3.4
COLUMN SUB-FLOWSHEET
The Simulation environment design basis of UniSim Design

allows topological changes to a sub-flowsheet only within
the Simulation environment for that specific flowsheet.
Multi-Flowsheet Navigation
The multi-flowsheet architecture can be compared to a directory
structure. The main flowsheet and its sub-flowsheets are directories
and sub-directories, with the streams and operations as the files in that
directory. The process information associated with the streams and
operations becomes the contents of the files.
Refer to Section 7.18 - UniSim Design has special tools called Navigators that are designed to
Simulation Navigator
for details on the take advantage of this directory-like structure. Within a single view,
Simulation Navigator. you can easily access a stream, operation, or process variable in one
Refer to Section 7.17 - flowsheet from any other flowsheet in your simulation.
Navigator.
3.4.4 Flowsheet Information
Transfer
When you install or create a sub-flowsheet in the Simulation
environment, it appears and behaves as a single operation with one or
more feed and product streams. Whenever the values of the streams
attached to the sub-flowsheet change, the sub-flowsheet recalculates
3-13
3-14 Templates
just like any other regular unit operation.
By default, the Calculation Level for a sub-flowsheet is set to

2500, which ensures that all possible flowsheet calculations
in the Parent flowsheet are performed before the sub-
flowsheet is calculated. This tends to force the sub-
flowsheet to be the last calculation in the chain. In most
situations this is the desired behaviour, but can be changed
by modifying the sub-flowsheet's calculation Level.
Each of the parent flowsheet’s streams attached to the sub-flowsheet

as either a feed or product are associated on a 1:1 basis with a
Boundary Stream inside the sub-flowsheet. Information flows between
the parent flowsheet and the sub-flowsheet through these associated
streams.
When a connection is established across the boundary, the sub-

flowsheet is automatically renamed with the name of the stream in the
parent flowsheet. You can override the name reassignment afterwards
since the streams on each side of the flowsheet boundary do not
require the same name. For example, you can have a stream named To
Decanter in the main flowsheet connected with the Decanter Feed
stream in a sub-flowsheet.
The sub-flowsheet architecture allows the consistent use of different

property methods. On each sub-flowsheet’s property view, UniSim
Design allows you to control how stream information is exchanged as it
crosses the flowsheet boundary.
Component maps are For example, you can specify the Vapour Fraction and Temperature
available to allow you to
define how to handle
(specified or calculated values) of a stream in the Main simulation to be
different component lists passed to the sub-flowsheet. Once this information is passed to the
between fluid packages. sub-flowsheet, the property package for the sub-flowsheet then
calculates the remaining properties using the transferred composition.
No flash calculations are required for Energy streams. The

heat flow is simply passed between flowsheets.
3.5 Templates
A template flowsheet is a normal UniSim Design flowsheet with some
additional information contained in its main properties. It uses a
different file extension when it is stored to disk (*.tpl or *.ufl instead of
the regular *.usc). The different file extension is used mainly for
organizational purposes.
3-14
Flowsheet 3-15
3.5.1 Template Information

To open the Simulation The template information for the flowsheet is accessed through the
Case view, select Main
Properties from the
Simulation Case view.
Simulation menu, or
press CTRL M. Figure 3.5
The seven tabs of

this property view
are the same as for
any simulation case.
There are two additional tabs that are exclusive to templates, which are
available when the standard simulation case is converted to a template.
To convert a simulation case to a template, click the Convert to
Template button at the bottom of the Simulation Case view. Once you
click the button, the extra tabs appear and the button is no longer
visible.
These extra tabs contain all of the same information available on the
property view of an installed sub-flowsheet operation as well as some
additional information. These extra parameters allow the flowsheet to
be treated as a “black box” that you can install as a sub-flowsheet
operation with the same ease and in the same manner as you would
install a regular unit operation.
Exported Connections Tab

On the Exported Connections tab, enter the Template Tag and select
the Installed Simulation Basis. All Feed and Product connections also
3-15
3-16 Templates
appear.
Figure 3.6
Template Tag
Flowsheet Tags are short names used by UniSim Design to identify the
flowsheet associated with a stream or operation when that flowsheet
object is being viewed outside of its native flowsheet’s scope. The
default Tag name for sub-flowsheet operations is TPL (for template).
When more than one sub-flowsheet operation is installed, UniSim
Design ensures unique tag names by adding an incremental numerical
suffix similar to the UniSim Design auto-naming unit operations; they
are numbered sequentially in the order they were installed. For
example, if the first sub-flowsheet added to a simulation contained a
stream called Comp Duty, it would appear as Comp Duty@TPL1 when
viewed from the main flowsheet of the simulation.
Installed Simulation Basis

When a template is imported into a simulation case, its associated fluid
package is added to the list of fluid packages in the Simulation Basis
Manager view. The Installed Simulation Basis gives the template builder
the choice of using its own internal fluid package or the same fluid
package of the parent flowsheet where it is installed. This only affects
what happens at the time the template is first installed.
Once a template is installed the resulting fluid package

association can be over-ridden in the Simulation Basis
Manager view at any time.
3-16
Flowsheet 3-17
Feed and Product Stream Info

A stream that appears All streams in the flowsheet template that are not completely
on the Exported
Connections tab does
connected, (i.e., are only a feed to a unit operation, or a product from a
not necessarily have to unit operation) are designated as Boundary Streams, and appear in the
be connected. appropriate group. Boundary Streams cannot be selected to appear on
this tab; they are automatically determined by UniSim Design. These
are the streams that you are connecting to when the template is
installed in a flowsheet.
For each stream appearing in either the Feed Stream or Product Stream
matrices, you can specify the Boundary Label and Transfer Basis.
A Boundary Label describes the name of the feed and product

connections. This is not the name of the streams, but rather the
function of the streams (i.e., if using a numerical standard for stream
numbering, the feed stream inside the template could be “1”, but its
feed label could be “HP Feed”). This allows you to provide descriptive
feed and product stream labels, much like the built-in unit operation
property views used on their Connection tabs. By default, it assumes
the name of its corresponding boundary stream in the template.
The Transfer Basis is used for feed and product streams as they cross
the flowsheet boundary. The Transfer Basis becomes significant only
when the sub-flowsheet and parent flowsheet property packages are
different. When there are differing fluid packages in the two flowsheets
(parent and sub-flowsheet) you can specify what stream properties are
used to calculate the stream on the other side of the boundary.
The Transfer Basis provides a consistent means of switching between

the differing basis of the various property methods:
Flash Type Description

T-P Flash The Pressure and Temperature of the Material stream are
passed between flowsheets. A new Vapour Fraction is
calculated.
VF-T Flash The Vapour Fraction and Temperature of the Material
stream are passed between flowsheets. A new Pressure is
calculated.
VF-P Flash The Vapour Fraction and Pressure of the Material stream
are passed between flowsheets. A new Temperature is
calculated.
None No calculation is required for an Energy stream. The heat
Required flow is simply passed between flowsheets.
3-17
3-18 Templates
Exported Variables Tab

Use this tab to create and maintain the list of Exported Variables.
Figure 3.7
Although any information can be accessed inside the sub-flowsheet

using the Variable Navigator, this feature can target key process
variables inside the sub-flowsheet and display their values on the
property view. Then, when the template is installed, you can
conveniently view this information directly on the sub-flowsheet’s
property view in the parent flowsheet.
This is useful when treating the sub-flowsheet as a “black box” as all

the important specifications for the operation of the sub-flowsheet can
be collected and documented in one location. You will not have to enter
the sub-flowsheet environment to adjust the template to your needs.
To add variables to this tab, click the Add button. The Add Variable to
Case view appears. Select the flowsheet object and variable. On the
Add Variable to Case view, you can override the default variable
description and provide another one.
Refer to Section 2.2 - When installing a template into another case, these variables appear on
Sub-Flowsheet the Parameters tab of the sub-flowsheet property view.
Property View in the
UniSim Design
Operations Guide for
information about the
There is no difference between a template flowsheet and a
Parameters tab. normal flowsheet, except the additional information
mentioned above, and the use of different file extensions. A
template flowsheet can be read in as the main flowsheet in a
simulation case if necessary—you just get a warning
message and the extra information is ignored.
3-18
Flowsheet 3-19
3.5.2 Creating a Template Style

Flowsheet
Any main flowsheet can be used as the base for a template. By
pressing a button, you toggle the flowsheet so that it becomes a
template style flowsheet. Then you supply the extra information
needed for installing in any simulation case. You can also save it to
disk.
Once you convert a case into a template and import it into another
case, most of the monitoring and customizing tools within the template
will be transferred over to the new simulation environment. Information
such as the strip charts, utilities, and macro language entries are
transferred along with the template. However, the event schedules,
optimizer settings, dynamics initialization settings, snapshot manager
settings, and Databook items (for example, case studies, process data
table, and data recorder settings) are not transferable.
You cannot create a template from just parts of a main

flowsheet. Delete any unwanted streams and operations
from the main flowsheet before saving it to disk. To preserve
your original simulation case, save it with another name
before creating the template.
UFL files, which are created using the Cut/Copy and Paste
functionality (accessible from the PFD), have near
equivalent behaviour to template files and can be created by
selecting groups of operations from within a simulation case.
You can convert an existing case to a template or create a new

template for a flowsheet.
Converting an Existing Case to a Template

You can convert an existing case to a template if you have already
created a simulation case (not a new template), or if you have an
existing case on disk that you want to use as a template.
1. From the Simulation menu, select the Main Properties. The
Simulation Case property view appears.
2. Click the Convert to Template button.
Refer to Section 3.5.1 - 3. Click on the Exported Connections tab.
Template Information
for more information. 4. Set the Template Tag, Installed Simulation Basis and other optional
template information if required.
3-19
3-20 Templates
5. When you save the simulation, it is saved as a template.
You cannot create a template from an existing sub-flowsheet

that is part of a larger simulation.
Creating a New Template

You can create a new template for a new simulation case.
1. From the File menu, select the New command, and then
Template.
2. Build the simulation.
Refer to Section 3.5.1 - 3. From the Simulation menu, select Main Properties. The
Template Information
for more information.
Simulation Case property view appears.
4. Click on the Exported Connections tab.
5. Set the Template Tag, Installed Simulation Basis and other
optional template information if required.
6. When you save the simulation, it is saved as a template.
Since you can have multiple simulation cases in memory, you

can create a new template as part of your current session
and then install it in your original Simulation case.
UniSim Design automatically saves the template in the

Templates directory as a template file (*.tpl). The default path
for the Templates directory is set according to the UniSim
Design preferences. As shipped, the default directory is UniSim
Design\Template.
A combination of flowsheets can be in your template (i.e., a

main flowsheet and one or more sub-flowsheets). Likewise,
multiple fluid packages can be included in the template if
they are associated with a flowsheet at the time the
template is saved to disk.
3.5.3 Installing a Template

To install a template, follow the same procedure as for installing
a sub-flowsheet. Do one of the following:
3-20
Flowsheet 3-21
• Select the Flowsheet-Add Operation command (or

press F12), to open the UnitOps view. Select Standard
Sub-Flowsheet from the Available Unit Operations list.
• Open the UniSim Design Object Palette (press F4) and
Sub-flowsheet icon click the Sub-Flowsheet icon on the Object Palette.
After you initiate the installation of a sub-flowsheet, a Sub-

Flowsheet Option view appears.
Figure 3.8
Click the Read an Existing Template button to install a template

from disk.
If you do not want to read an existing template, click the Start

with a Blank Flowsheet button.
The Start with a Blank Flowsheet is a good option if you are

just creating a small sub-flowsheet. This sub-flowsheet is
not available for use in any other simulation case you create
in the future.
If you think you might re-use the sub-flowsheet at a later
date, consider creating a full template flowsheet instead.
The process of creating a sub-flowsheet with a blank initial

flowsheet operation is covered in detail in Section 2.3 - Adding
a Sub-Flowsheet of the UniSim Design Operations Guide.
Reading an Existing Template

UniSim Design includes a To install a template style flowsheet, click the Read an Existing
number of sample
process template for trial
Template button. UniSim Design looks in the default Templates
purposes. directory [Root:\UniSim Design\Template] for available
template files (*.TPL).
3-21
3-22 Property View Flowsheet Analysis
UniSim Design automatically installs any fluid packages associated with

the template into the Simulation Basis Manager. The main flowsheet
contained in the template is then installed as a new sub-flowsheet unit
operation in the current flowsheet.
If there are sub-flowsheets in the template, they are

installed as sub-flowsheets underneath the new sub-
flowsheet operation. In other words, everything in the
template is shifted-down at least one level.
After the flowsheet(s) have been inserted in the simulation case, a fluid
package is selected for the sub-flowsheet based on the Installed Fluid
Package setting used in the template.
Once UniSim Design finishes installing the template, you are placed on
the Connections tab of the sub-flowsheet property view where you can
define the connections for the template.
3.6 Property View Flowsheet

Analysis
In UniSim Design, stream and operation property views contain
analytical information based on the current flowsheet conditions. For
example, the stream property view has a page that contains
information concerning all phases present in the stream. Also, certain
operations have pages that display performance profiles, results, and
other analytical information.
3.6.1 Stream Analysis

Refer to Section 3.1 - The stream property view has two tabs that contain information
Material Stream
Property View in the
UniSim Design
details on the various tabs
and pages.
See Section 7.26 -
Utilities for information
on attaching a utility to a
stream.
3-22
Flowsheet 3-23
pertinent to stream analysis: the Worksheet and Attachments tabs.
Figure 3.9
The Properties page in the Worksheet tab contains detailed property

correlation information about the stream. The Conditions page is a
subset of the information provided in the Properties page.
The Utilities page in the Attachments tab is used to attach utilities to

the stream, while the Unit Ops page indicates which unit operations are
attached to the stream.
To view the stream properties, do the following:

1. Open the Stream view, click the Worksheet tab, then select the
Properties page.
2. Click the View Correlation Set List icon. The Correlation Set
Picker view appears.
View Correlation Set List 3. Select Standard Set from the view and click the Apply button.
icon The Correlation Set Picker view closes and the stream properties
appear in the table on the Properties page. In addition to containing
the basic stream conditions, more detailed physical property
information for the stream is shown in the table.
With the stream view at its default size, the page has horizontal scroll
bars. By using the horizontal scroll bar, you can scroll left and right to
view the Vapour, Liquid, and/or Aqueous phases for the stream.
Instead of scrolling through the view, you can also resize it so that all
phases, and all of the properties for each phase can be seen, as shown
3-23
in the figure below.
Figure 3.10
The Liquid Phase is referred to as the Aqueous Phase because Water is

present in the stream. The other phases you may encounter are Light
and/or Heavy Liquid.
3.6.2 Unit Operation Analysis

A Worksheet tab is Many unit operations in UniSim Design have pages that contain
available on each unit analytical information.
operation property view.
It provides access to the
streams attached to the
The type of analytical information found in operation
unit.
property views depends on the operation type. Regardless of
what the operation is, the displayed information is
automatically updated as conditions change.
For example, the Heat Exchanger displays its analytical information on

the Worksheet and Performance tabs.
The Details page in the Performance tab of a Heat Exchanger displays

the information in two groups:
• Overall Performance
3-24
Flowsheet 3-25
• Detailed Performance
Figure 3.11
The Plots page lets you to generate curves for the shell and/or tube
sides of the heat exchanger. From the Plot Type drop-down list, you can
select the X and Y axis variables for the plot.
Figure 3.12
The Tables page displays the same information provided in the Plots
page but in tabular form.
3-25
3-26
Flowsheet 3-27
3-27
3-28
File Management 4-1
4 File Management
4.1 Menu Bar ....................................................................................... 2
4.2 File ................................................................................................ 2

4.2.1 New and Open Commands ........................................................ 3
4.2.2 Saving Commands ................................................................... 6
4.2.3 File Extensions ........................................................................ 9
4.2.4 Closing Commands..................................................................10
4.2.5 Printing .................................................................................11
4.2.6 Exiting UniSim Design .............................................................11
4.3 UFL Files .......................................................................................11
4-1
4-2 Menu Bar
4.1 Menu Bar

Most of the tasks performed in UniSim Design are accessed
through the menu bar. The list of command or function groups,
displayed at the top of the UniSim Design Desktop, is a drop-
down menu system. By selecting an option from the menu bar, a
menu of commands appears.
The menus available in the menu bar changes depending on

the simulation environment. For example, the Column
environment has a menu item called Column in the menu
bar.
If you want to switch focus The menu bar also provides access to functions that can only be
from the menu bar without
accessed this way, such as Session Preferences view (units,
making a selection, press
the ESC key or the ALT default naming schemes, etc.) and switching to another
key. simulation currently in memory.
You can access the menu bar options in three ways:

• Click the required menu to open the associated drop-
down menu.
• Use the ALT key in combination with the underlined
letter in the menu bar title. For example, ALT F opens
the File menu.
• Use the ALT key by itself to move the active location to
the File option in the menu bar. Once the menu bar
becomes the active location in UniSim Design, you can
manoeuvre through the menu using the keyboard. The
up and down arrows move through the menu associated
with a specific item, while the left and right arrows move
you to the next menu, opening the associated drop-down
menu.
4.2 File
There are two variations of the File menu. A condensed menu
appears in UniSim Design before a simulation is created or
opened. The commands common to both versions of the menu,
as well as the functions specific to the detailed menu, are
explained in this section.
File Menu The menu commands are grouped into five main categories:
4-2
File Management 4-3
• Starting a Simulation
• Saving a Simulation
• Closing a Simulation
• Printing
• Exiting UniSim Design
A command item with an arrow head pointing to the side

contains additional commands in a submenu.
4.2.1 New and Open

Commands
The New and Open commands under File in the menu bar enable
See Chapter 3 - you to create a new file or open an existing file. The file type can
Flowsheet for more
information on sub-
either be a type of simulation case (flowsheet) or case scenario
flowsheets and templates. manager project. After you select New or Open, an expandable
menu apprears showing the available commands:
Option Description
Case Creates a new simulation case or opens an existing one.
This command enables you to access UniSim Design
simulation cases (*.usc), Legacy HYSIM simulation cases
(*.sim) or Backup simulation cases (*.bk0).
Template Creates a new template or opens an existing one. These
are sub-flowsheet templates.
Column Creates a new column flowsheet or opens an existing one.
Cut/Copy/ Creates a new blank case and then imports the selected
Paste UFL file into that case. Refer to Section 4.3 - UFL Files for
more information regarding the UFL files.
Case Create a new case scenario project or open an existing one.
Scenario
Project
When opening a case from an older version of UniSim Design,
4-3
4-4 File
you receive the following message.
Figure 4.1
It is not necessary to go into the Simulation Basis environment. The

warning lets you know that some objects will be recalculated when the
case is loaded.
Reading a Legacy HYSIM Case

UniSim Design presents the functionality to open Legacy HYSIM
simulations and to transfer all compatible data into the appropriate
UniSim Design environments.
Figure 4.2
Displays files according to the File Path and File Filter selections.
Your selection in this list appears in the File Name cell.
Use the File Filter to display only Legacy HYSIM cases (*.sim)
in the view.
If the Custom file picker radio button is selected in the Session

Preferences view, then the Open and Close view displays the
4-4
File Management 4-5
description for any Legacy HYSIM case with a Revision number.
If the value shown in the revision number is less than 10014,

the Legacy HYSIM case is not valid for transfer into UniSim
Design.
To open a Legacy HYSIM case:

1. From the File menu in the menu bar, click Open, then click Case
from the submenu, or click the Open Case icon.
2. On the Open Simulation Case view, select Legacy HYSIM
Open Case icon
Simulation Cases (*.sim) from the File Filter drop-down list.
3. Select a directory that contains a Legacy HYSIM case in the File
Path group.
4. Select a Legacy HYSIM case in the list of cases or type the name of
a case in the File Name input cell.
5. Click the OK button.
6. As UniSim Design reads a Legacy HYSIM case, the simulation is
rebuilt in a piece-by-piece fashion. If an incompatibility is
encountered, a message is recorded in both the Trace Window and
the Case Description.
At the end of the case recall procedure, UniSim Design displays a
summary on the Legacy HYSIM Case Reader Summary view.
Figure 4.3
The messages are separated into two groups:

• Ops with warnings
• Unsupported Ops
7. You can view a summary list of messages by doing either of the
following:
Refer to Section 1.3 - • Scroll through the messages in the Trace Window.
Object Status Window/
Trace Window for details • Click the Main Properties command in the Simulation menu.
on the Trace Window. The Main Properties view appears. Click the Status Messages
tab.
4-5
4-6 File
Legacy HYSIM Functionality Not

Supported in UniSim Design
UniSim Design does not currently support Legacy HYSIM functionality,
so it is not possible to transfer all Legacy HYSIM information into
UniSim Design. The following table lists some of the issues:
Object Details Not Supported

Calculator All Programs
Column Condenser or Reboiler with Side Stripper Draw
Column Condenser or Reboiler with Pump Around Draw
Column Reboiler Liquid Draw (other than Bottoms product)
Column Condenser Side Vapour Draw
Column Reboiler Water Draw
Column In AMSIM, tray efficiencies require the input of tray
dimensions on a per tray basis. UniSim Design
supports only one diameter, one weir length and one
weir height per Tray Section. In this case, dimensions
of the 2nd stage from the bottom of the Legacy HYSIM
column are used for the UniSim Design Tray Section.
Liquid Extractor Pump Arounds
Cyclone Liquid Streams
Hydrocyclone Vapour Streams
Rotary Vacuum Only Connections are transferred. Other operation
Filter parameters must be specified in UniSim Design.
Baghouse Filter Liquid Streams
Crystallizer Solid All
Operation
Tee Energy Stream Attachments
LNG If the LNG Duty Stream is attached to another
operation in Legacy HYSIM, the flowsheet is not
complete in UniSim Design.
Plug Flow Space Time Option
Reactor (PFR)
CSTR Space Time Option
CSTR Dead Space Option
CSTR Initialization from Stream
Data Recorder Records variables while a flowsheet is being converged
when adjusts or recycles are present.
Electrolyte Legacy HYSIM functionality is not supported at all for
simulation cases with Electrolytes OLI property
package.
4.2.2 Saving Commands

If the active file is a simulation case, UniSim Design has the following
4-6
File Management 4-7
save commands:
Command Description
Save Saves the case using the current file name and location.
Save As With this save command, you can enter a name and
location to save the file. When you select the Save As
command, either the "Revision Control on Save As" view, or
the "Save Simulation Case As" view will appear, depending
on if the "Show a pop-up view on Save As" checkbox is
checked or not on the Preferences/Files/Revision Control
page. You are able to select the File Path and a File Name
for the case. UniSim Design automatically attaches the
default file extension, *.usc. You can also save the entire
case as an XML file or an UFL file.
Save All Use this command to save all currently opened UniSim
Design files. You are asked to select which files should be
saved. You can select more than one file at a time by
holding down the CTRL key then clicking each file you want
to select. Click Save to save the files as shown in the view,
or Save As to save with a new name and/or location.
Figure 4.4
4-7
4-8 File
Figure 4.5
Figure 4.6
If the active file is a case scenario project, UniSim Design has the
following save commands:
Command Description
Save Saves the case scenario project using the current file name
and location.
Save As When you select the Save As command, the "Save Case
Scenario Project As" view will appear, allowing you to select
a different location and file name. UniSim Design
automatically attaches the default file extension, *.ucsm.
Save All Use this command to save all currently opened UniSim
Design files. You are asked to select which files should be
saved. You can select more than one file at a time by
holding down the CTRL key then clicking each file you want
to select. Click Save to save the files as shown in the view,
or Save As to save with a new name and/or location.
4-8
File Management 4-9
Figure 4.7
4.2.3 File Extensions

The following table contains the file extensions that are available in
UniSim Design:
File Extension Description

*.* All Files
*.bk? Backup Simulation Cases
*.cml Component Lists
*.col Column Templates
*csv Historical Data CSV History Files
*.dll Application Extensions (DLLs)
*.DMP Historical Data DMP History Files
*.EDF Extension Definition Files (EDFs)
*.fpk Fluid Packages
*.hvv User Variables
*.hyp Hypothetical Groups
*.inp PRO II to UniSim Design
*.oil Oil Assay Files
*.PRF Preference Files
*.rst Reaction Sets
*.sch Schedule Files
*.scp Script Files
*.sim Legacy HYSIM Simulation Cases
*.tpl Template Cases
*.ufl UniSim Design UFL Files
*.usp UniSim Design USP Cases
*.usc UniSim Design Simulation Cases
4-9
4-10 File
File Extension Description

*.ucsm UniSim Design Case Scenario Projects
*.uscv UniSim Design Selected Variables Files
for Case Scenario Manager
*.wrk Workbook Files
*.WWB WinWrap Basic
*.XML UniSim Design XML Cases
*.xml HYCON XML to UniSim Design
4.2.4 Closing Commands

If the active file is a simulation case, UniSim Design has the following
commands for closing files:
Command Description
Close Case Closes the active case. Before closing the case, you are
asked if you want to save the case.
Close All Allows you to close more than one file at a time. The name
of each opened file appears in the Close Multiple Files view.
You select which files you want to close.
Figure 4.8
If the active file is a case scenario project, UniSim Design has the
following commands for closing files:
Command Description
Close Case Closes the active case scenario project. Before closing the
Scenario file, you are asked if you want to save the file if it has been
Project modified.
Close All Allows you to close more than one file at a time. The name
of each opened file appears in the Close Multiple Files view.
You select which files you want to close.
4-10
File Management 4-11
4.2.5 Printing
See Section 9.2 - UniSim Design has the following print commands:
Printing in UniSim
Design for more
information. Command Description
Print Allows you to print Datasheets for streams and operations.
Print Prints a bitmap snapshot of what currently appears in the
Snapshot active UniSim Design view.
Printer Setup Allows you to select the default printer, print orientation,
paper size, etc. It is similar to the Printer Setup commands
in other Windows applications.
4.2.6 Exiting UniSim Design

You can close UniSim Design by opening the File menu and clicking the
Exit command.
If you have not saved your case before you select the Exit command, a
warning message appears prompting you to save the case before
exiting the program.
Figure 4.9
• If you want to save the case and exit UniSim Design, click the
Yes button.
• If you do not want to save the case and still exit UniSim Design,
click the No button.
• If you do not want to exit the UniSim Design program, click the
Cancel button to stop the exit command.
4.3 UFL Files

The Object Inspect menu from the PFD contains a Cut/Paste Objects
command. The sub-commands under the Cut/Paste Objects command
allows you to copy, clone, cut, paste, export (copy to file), and import
(copy from file) objects. When these commands are used, information
about the objects is stored in an UFL file.
Information can be pasted • When the Copy, Cut or Clone command is used, a temporary
into a different case or
UFL file is created in the default temporary directory. This file
copy of UniSim Design.
gets overwritten each time one of these commands is used by
4-11
4-12 UFL Files
any copy of UniSim Design that is running. When the paste

command is used, this UFL file is used to import the objects back
into UniSim Design.
• When the “Copy Object to File” or “Paste Object from File”
command is used, the user can explicitly provide a name for the
UFL file that is used. By default the file is saved in the UniSim
Design template directory. You can access this file from a
different case, or send this file to other UniSim Design users.
The UFL files are not full simulation case files, and do not
contain case information on the Databook, strip charts,
utilities, Optimizer, DCS driver, or event scheduler.
The entire sub-flowsheet UFL files contain information about the objects that have been copied,
can also be readily copied.
so when importing or exporting UFL files, you get all the information
required to restore the objects in a case (including fluid package
information), but not the entire flowsheet or sub-flowsheet the object
resides in.
UFL files generally contain a piece of a case that has been

copied, and are typically imported into an existing open case.
You can use the Save As command from the File menu to save an entire
case as an UFL file. This options saves you the time and trouble of
selecting every object within the main PFD and exporting them to an
UFL file. For convenience, UniSim Design also allows you to open an
UFL file directly rather than importing it into an existing open case. But
in this situation, a blank new case is created and the UFL file is actually
imported into the new case.
UFL files are a bit more flexible than templates (*.tpl files). When you
create a new template, you have to convert an entire case into a
template and when that template file is read into a UniSim Design case,
it always becomes a new sub-flowsheet. Each time you convert the case
to a template, you gain one level of flowsheets and there is no way to
move objects to different flowsheets.
The cut/copy/paste commands are easier to use because you can

quickly operate on a selected group of objects only and paste objects
back into any existing flowsheet without always creating a new sub-
flowsheet.
4-12
Basis Environment 5-1
5 Basis Environment
5.1 Introduction .................................................................................. 2
5.2 Simulation Basis Manager.............................................................. 2

5.2.1 Components Tab ...................................................................... 3
5.2.2 Fluid Packages Tab ..................................................................10
5.2.3 Hypotheticals Tab....................................................................14
5.2.4 Oil Manager Tab......................................................................16
5.2.5 Reactions Tab .........................................................................17
5.2.6 Component Maps Tab ..............................................................21
5.2.7 User Property Tab ...................................................................22
5.3 Reaction Package .........................................................................25
5.4 Component Property View ............................................................26

5.4.1 Viewing a Pure Component.......................................................27
5.4.2 Defining a Traditional Hypothetical Component............................27
5.4.3 Defining a Solid Hypothetical Component ...................................28
5-1
5-2 Introduction
5.1 Introduction
The Basis environment contains the following environments:
• Simulation Basis environment
Refer to Chapter 6 - Oil • Oil Characterization environment
Characterization
Environment for more
information.
Simulation Basis Environment
When beginning a new simulation case, UniSim Design automatically
starts you in the Simulation Basis environment where you can create,
define and modify fluid packages for use by the simulation flowsheets.
In general, a fluid package contains a minimum of one property
package and library and/or hypothetical components. Fluid packages
can also contain information for reactions and interaction parameters.
You can re-enter the Simulation Basis environment from any flowsheet
by selecting the Enter Basis Environment command in the Simulation
menu, or clicking the Basis icon found in the tool bar of both the Main
Basis icon and Column environments. For more information about the Basis
environment, refer to the UniSim Design Simulation Basis Guide.
Basis Menu
The Basis menu appears in the menu bar when you enter the Basis
environment. The options available in this menu appear in the following
figure.
Figure 5.1
5.2 Simulation Basis Manager

The Simulation Basis Manager view allows you to create and manipulate
every fluid package in the simulation. Each flowsheet in UniSim Design
can have its own fluid package.
The template and column sub-flowsheets reside inside the Main

Simulation, so these sub-flowsheets can inherit the fluid package of the
5-2
main flowsheet, or you can create an entirely new fluid package for
each sub-flowsheet.
For each fluid package, you can define the following:

• Property package
• Components
• Reactions
• User properties
Figure 5.2
There is one common button at the bottom of the Simulation Basis

Manager view.
Button Description
Enter Simulation Enables you to enter the simulation environment
Environment of the UniSim Design case. Refer to Chapter 7 -
Simulation Environment for more information.
5.2.1 Components Tab

See Chapter 1 - The Components tab is where you define the sets of chemical
Components in the
UniSim Design
components used in the simulation. These component sets are stored in
Simulation Basis Guide Component Lists and can include library pure components and/or
5-3
5-4 Simulation Basis Manager
hypothetical components.
Figure 5.3
The Components tab contains a Master Component List that cannot be

deleted. This master list contains every component available from “all”
component lists. If you add components to any other component list,
they are automatically added to the Master Component List. Also, if you
delete a component from the master list, it is deleted from all other
component lists using that component.
From this view, you can do the following to the component lists:
• View
• Add
• Delete
• Copy
• Import
• Export
• Refresh
• Reimport
Viewing a Component List

When you view a component list, you can add, remove, and sort the
components in a list:
1. From the list of available component lists, select the component list
you want to view/edit.
2. Click the View button. The selected Component List view appears.
Adding a Component List

To add a component list, click the Add button. The Component List view
appears. This view allows you to add pure, electrolyte and hypothetical
5-4
components to the new component list.
This view has three tabs: Selected, Component by Type and

Component by Type.
Selected Tab
This tab allows you to add, remove, sort, and view components in a
component list. This tab also provides a quick method for creating
hypothetical groups and hypothetical components.
Figure 5.4
Adding a Traditional or Electrolyte Component

1. Click the Selected tab in the Component List view.
2. Double-click the Components branch in the Add Component tree to
expand the tree. Two branches appear: Traditional and Electrolyte.
The Electrolyte page won’t show without “OLI Alliance Suite

for UniSim” engine installed.
3. Click the Traditional or the Electrolyte sub-branch. The available

components appear in the Component Library group.
4. In the Match field, type the name of the component you want to
add to your list. UniSim Design filters the list of available
components as you type.
5. In the component list, select the component you want to add.
5-5
You can also double-click 6. Click the Add Pure button. The component is moved from
the component name to the list of available components to the list of selected
add it to the list of
components.
selected components.
Adding a Traditional or Electrolyte Hypothetical

Component Group
1. Click the Selected tab in the Component List view.
2. In the Add Component tree, double-click the Hypothetical
branch to expand the tree. Two sub-branches appear:
Traditional and Electrolyte.
3. Click the Traditional or Electrolyte sub-branch. This displays
the Hypothetical Components Available group. You have the
option of adding either a group of hypothetical components
or individual hypothetical components to your case.
4. To add a group of hypothetical components, select the Hypo
Group you want to add from the list of available hypo
groups.
5. Click the Add Group or Add E Group button available
depending on whether you are in the Traditional or
Electrolyte sub-branch.
Adding an Individual Hypothetical Component

6. From the Available Hypo Groups list, select the Hypo Group
that contains the hypothetical component you want to add.
7. From the list of Available Hypo Components, select the
hypothetical component you want to add.
8. Click the Add Hypo button in the Traditional sub-branch or
Add E Group in the Electrolyte sub-branch.
• The hypo component added into the Component List by
clicking Add E Hypo or Add E Group will be renamed by
replacing the * at the end of the hypo name with E and
the Hypo ID number will be bumped up a value of 50000.
• The Quick Create a Hypo Component button opens
the Hypothetical Component Property view, which allows
Refer to the Section 5.4 -
you to quickly create a new hypothetical component.
Component Property • The Quick Create a Solid Component button opens
View for more information the Hypothetical Solid Component Property view, which
about defining allows you to quickly create a new hypothetical solid
hypothetical components. component.
5-6
Adding Other Components

1. Click the Selected tab of the Component List view.
2. In the Add Component tree, select the Other branch. This displays
the Existing Component Lists group.
3. From the list of available component lists, select the component list
that contains the component you want to add.
4. From the list of available components, select the component you
want to add to your case.
5. Click the Add button.
Removing Components
To remove a component from the component list:
1. Click the Selected tab of the Component List view.
2. Select the component you want to delete from the list of selected
components.
3. Click the Remove button.
Component by Type Tab

This tab allows you to filter and view the components in your
component list by type.
Component Databases
The Component Databases tab lets you to manage component property
databases by adding, removing, resetting or ordering Component
Property Databases. The component property database order will
5-7
decide the set of available components in the component list.
Figure 5.5
To Add a Component Property Database:

1. Click the Add button in the Component Property Databases group.
The custom component property database type picker appears.
Figure 5.6
2. Choose the intended component property database type and Click

Next to browse for Component Property Database file. The
operation could be cancelled by clicking Cancel.
3. In the open file dialog, browse to the location of component
property database file. From the list of available database files,
select the file you want to use. Click Open. The selected component
property database appears in the list of available component
property database. You can also verify the database configuration
string and database status of the added Component Property
Database in Component Property Databases group.
To Remove a Component Property Database:

1. Select Component Property database to be removed from the
5-8
available database list.

2. Click the Remove button in the Component Property
Databases group.
3. UniSim Design prompt will appear to confirm the removal of
the selected Component Property Database. Click Yes to
confirm or No to cancel the operation.
To Edit a Component Property Database:

1. Select Component Property database from the available
Component Property database list to edit the properties.
2. Click the Edit button in the Component Property Databases
group.
3. A File Open dialog box will appear to browse and select the
edited or updated component property database file.
To Change the order of Component Property Database:

1. Select Component Property Database in Component
Property Databases group for which sequence needs to be
Changing the order of
changed.
database loader is 2. Click the Up Arrow button to move the selected Component
possible only when more Property database higher in the order of the list.
than one Component
Property Database is 3. Click the Down Arrow button to move the selected
configured. Component Property database lower in the order of the list.
1. To Reset Component Property Databases:
2. Click the Reset button in the Component Property Databases
group.
Component property
databases will be reset as 3. A dialog box will prompt you to confirm reset for the list of
per the UniSim Design Component Property Databases. Click Yes to confirm or No
Session preferences.
to cancel the operation.
Deleting a Component List

The Master Component 1. From the list of available component lists, select the
list cannot be deleted. component list you want to delete.
2. Click the Delete button.
UniSim Design does not prompt you to confirm the deletion

of your component list. After the list is deleted, the
information cannot be retrieved.
5-9
Copying a Component List

This procedure assumes you are in the main Simulation Basis Manager
view.
1. From the Component List, select the name of the component list
you want to copy.
2. Click the Copy button.
Copying a component list creates a new component list with the exact
same properties as the original.
Importing a Component List

1. On the Simulation Basis Manager view, click the Import button.
The Open File view appears.
2. Browse to the location of your component list file (*.cml).
3. Select the file you want to import, then click Open.
Exporting a Component List

1. On the Simulation Basis Manager view, click the Export button. The
Save File view appears.
2. Specify the name of your component list file and its location.
3. Click Save.
Refreshing a Component List

1. On the Simulation Basis Manager view, click the Refresh button.
2. If any library component in the master component list has any
changed property values, a dialog box will be displayed to ask your
permission to overwrite the values with library values for that
component.
5.2.2 Fluid Packages Tab

See Chapter 2 - Fluid The fluid package contains all the necessary information for pure
Package in the UniSim
Design Simulation
component flash and physical property calculations. This allows you to
Basis guide for more define all the required information inside a single entity. There are four
information. key advantages to using fluid packages:
• All associated information is defined in a single location for easy
creation and modification.
• Fluid packages can be exported and imported as completely
defined packages for use in any simulation.
5-10
• Fluid packages can be cloned, reducing the time involved in

creating and/or modifying complex fluid packages.
• Multiple fluid packages can be used in the same simulation.
The Fluid Pkgs tab of the Simulation Basis Manager allows you to create
and manipulate multiple fluid packages.
Figure 5.7
Each fluid package available to your simulation appears in the Current

Fluid Packages group with the following information displayed:
• Name
• Number of components attached to the fluid package
• Property package attached to the fluid package
Adding a Fluid Package

1. In the Simulation Basis Manager view, click the Add button. The
5-11
Fluid Package screen appears as shown below.
Figure 5.8
2. Click the Set Up tab.

3. From the Component List Selection drop-down list, select the
component list you want to use for your fluid package.
4. From the list of available property packages, click the property
package you want to use. If the property package is one of the
following, then additional property package options appear in the
top right corner of the view:
• Equation of State (EOS)
• Activity Model
• Amines package
• Electrolyte property package
The rest of the tabs in the Fluid Package Manager view are used to
modify the fluid package according to your requirements.
Editing a Fluid Package

1. From the Current Fluid Packages list, select the fluid package that
you want to edit.
2. Click the View button to display the Fluid Package view.
3. Modify any of the parameters that comprise the fluid package.
Deleting a Fluid Package

1. From the Current Fluid Packages list, select the fluid package that
5-12
you want to delete.

UniSim Design does not prompt you to delete the last fluid
package from the Current Fluid Packages list.
Copying a Fluid Package

1. From the Current Fluid Packages list, select the fluid package you
want to copy.
Copying a fluid package creates a new fluid package with the exact
Importing a Fluid Package

1. In the Current Fluid Packages group, click the Import button. The
Open File view appears.
2. Browse to the location of your fluid package file (*.fpk).
3. Select the file you want to import and click Open.
Exporting a Fluid Package

1. In the Current Fluid Packages group, click the Export button. The
Save File view appears.
2. Specify the name and location of the fluid package file.
3. Click Save.
Associating a Fluid Package with a

Flowsheet
1. In the Flowsheet-Fluid Pkg Associations group, select the required
flowsheet.
2. Click the corresponding Fluid Pkg To Use cell to open a drop-down
list.
3. From the list, click the fluid package you want to associate with that
flowsheet.
There must be at least one fluid package within a case before you can
assign it to a flowsheet. The Default Fluid Pkg drop-down list specifies
which fluid package to use as the default. The default fluid package is
automatically assigned to any new flowsheets that are created within
the case.
5-13
5.2.3 Hypotheticals Tab

See Chapter 4 - This tab enables you to create non-library or hypothetical components.
Hypotheticals in the
UniSim Design
Hypothetical components can be any of the following:
Simulation Basis Guide • Pure components
• Defined mixtures
• Undefined mixtures
• Solids
You can also clone library components into hypothetical components,

which allows you to modify the library values.
When you click the Hypotheticals tab, the following view appears.
Figure 5.9
A broad selection of estimation methods are provided for the various

Hypo groups, ensuring the best representation of the behaviour of the
hypothetical components in the simulation. In addition, methods are
provided for estimating the interaction binaries between hypotheticals
and library components. You can also use hypotheticals with the Tabular
Package and in reactions.
Hypothetical components are independent of the fluid package, and

when created, they are placed in a Hypo Group. Since hypothetical
components are not exclusive to a particular fluid package, multiple
fluid packages can share hypotheticals. You can create a hypothetical
component or group once and use it in any fluid package within the
case.
5-14
Adding a Hypothetical Group

1. Click the Add button. The Hypo Group view appears.
2. From the Component Class drop-down list, select the class for
grouping your hypotheticals.
3. Click either the Add Hypo or Add Solid button. Keep clicking the
button until all of the hypothetical components are added to the
group.
4. Enter the information from the following table for each component
so UniSim Design can estimate the properties of the components.
Normal Boiling Point Minimum Required Information

< 700°F (370°C) Normal Boiling Point
> 700°F (370°C) Normal Boiling Point and Liquid Density
Unknown Molecular Weight and Liquid Density
5. Each component also requires a UNIFAC structure. Click the

UNIFAC button to display the UNIFAC Component Builder view.
Deleting a Hypothetical Component

1. From the list of available hypothetical components, select the
component you want to delete.
UniSim Design does not prompt you to confirm the deletion

of your hypothetical component. After the component is
deleted, the information cannot be retrieved.
Cloning Library Components

Use this procedure to clone a library component into a hypothetical
component.
1. In the Hypo Group view, click the Clone Library Comps button.
The Convert Library Comps to Hypothetical Comps view appears.
Select more than one 2. The Source Components group has two lists. From the list of
component by holding available component lists, select the component list that contains
down the CTRL key and
clicking each component the component you want to clone.
you want to select. 3. From the lists of available library components, select the component
you want to clone.
4. In the Hypo Groups group, select the target hypo group for your
new hypothetical component.
5. Click the Convert to Hypo(s) button. This clones the selected
component(s).
5-15
Editing a Hypothetical Group

1. From the list of available hypothetical groups, select the
hypothetical group you want to edit.
2. Click the View button to display the Hypo Group view.
3. From here you can add and remove hypothetical components,
change the component class, clone library components and change
estimation methods.
You can also access the Hypo Group view by selecting a hypothetical
component from the Hypothetical Quick Reference table and clicking
the View Hypo button. The information that appears corresponds to
the hypo group the hypothetical component is associated with.
Deleting a Hypothetical Group

1. From the list of available hypothetical groups, select the
hypothetical group you want to delete.
Importing a Hypothetical Group

1. Click the Import button. The Open File view appears.
2. Browse to the location of your hypothetical group file (*.hyp).
3. Select the file you want to import, then click the Open button.
Exporting a Hypothetical Group

1. Click the Export button. The Save File view appears.
2. Specify a name for your hypothetical group file and the location of
your file.
3. Click Save.
5.2.4 Oil Manager Tab

See Chapter 3 - UniSim The Oil Characterization environment is where the characteristics of a
Design Oil Manager in
the UniSim Design
petroleum fluid can be represented by using discrete hypothetical
Simulation Basis Guide components. Physical, critical, thermodynamic and transport properties
for more information. are determined for each hypothetical component using correlations that
you select. The fully defined hypocomponent can then be installed in a
stream and used in any flowsheet.
To use the Oil Characterization environment, at least one fluid package

must exist in the case. Any hypothetical components must be
5-16
compatible with the property method used by the fluid package.
UniSim Design defines the hypocomponent by using assay data you

provide. The following are features exclusive to the oil environment:
• Providing laboratory assay data
• Cutting a single assay
• Blending multiple assays
• Assigning a user property to hypocomponents
• Selecting correlation sets to determine properties
• Installing hypocomponents into a stream
• Viewing tables and plots for your input and for the characterized
fluid
Figure 5.10
5.2.5 Reactions Tab

See Chapter 5 - The Reactions Tab in the Simulation Basis Manager allows you to define
Reactions in the UniSim
reactions within UniSim Design. You can define an unlimited number of
Design Simulation
Basis Guide for more reactions and group these reactions in reaction sets. The reaction sets
information. are then attached to unit operations in the flowsheet.
Any ReactionSet and Reaction in the Reaction Manager bank

cannot be attached to any unit operation in an electrolyte
flowsheet (reactor unit operations are disabled).
The electrolytes thermo calculation conducts a reactive and
phase flash at the same time. Therefore, adding any external
reactions to a unit operation is not yet allowed in UniSim
Design for electrolyte simulation.
For more information, refer to the UniSim Design OLI
Interface Reference Guide.
5-17
The Reaction tab appears as shown in the following figure.
Figure 5.11
Use the Reaction Manager to do the following:

• Create a new list of components for the reactions or use
the components associated with a fluid package.
• Add, Edit, Copy or Delete reactions and reaction sets.
• Attach reactions to various reaction sets, or attach
reaction sets to multiple fluid packages.
• Import and Export reaction sets.
Adding a Reaction
1. Click the Add Rxn button. The Reactions view appears.
2. Select the type of reaction that you want to use.
3. Click the Add Reaction button. The Reaction Property view
appears; in this view, you can define the following:
• Stoichiometry
• Conversion basis
• Equilibrium constant
• Other properties
4. Click the Stoichiometry tab.
5. Click the field that displays **Add Comp**. Select the
component you want to use for the reaction from the drop-
down list.
6. Repeat the previous step until all of the required components
are added to the table.
5-18
7. In the Stoich Coeff column, enter a stoichiometric coefficient for

each component. This value must be negative for a reactant and
positive for a product.
8. Specify the coefficient for an inert component as 0 (which for the
Conversion reaction is the same as not including the component in
the table). Fractional coefficients are acceptable.
Editing a Reaction
1. From the list of available reactions, select the reaction you want to
edit.
2. Click the View Rxn button. The Reaction Property view appears. In
this view, you can modify the following:
• Stoichiometry
• Conversion basis
• Equilibrium constant
• Other properties
Deleting a Reaction
delete.
2. Click the Delete Rxn button. UniSim Design prompts you to
confirm the deletion.
Copying a Reaction
copy.
2. Click the Copy Rxn button. The Copy Reactions view appears.
3. Select the reaction you want to copy from the list of reactions.
4. Use the radio buttons in the New Reaction Type group to select the
reaction type for the reaction copy.
5. Click the Copy Reaction button.
Adding a Reaction Set

1. Click the Add Set button. The Reaction Set view appears.
2. In the Active List column, click the <empty> cell and use the drop-
down list to select the reaction you want to add to the set.
3. In the Inactive List column, click the <empty> cell and use the
drop-down list to select the reaction you want to add to the set.
This reaction remains inactive, but it is included in the set.
5-19
4. For a Kinetic type reaction set, you may select a solver method.
Available reaction solver
methods for Kinetic type
From the Solver Method drop-down list, select the reaction solver
reaction set: method you want to use.
• Newton's Method 5. Add any of the available reactions to the set (as long as they are the
• Rate Iterated
same type). A single reaction can be added to as many sets as
• Rate Integrated
• Auto Select necessary.
Editing a Reaction Set

1. From the list of available reaction sets, select the reaction set you
want to edit.
2. Click the View Set button. The Reaction Set view appears. In this
view, you can do the following:
• Add and remove reactions in the reaction set.
• Modify the solver method.
• Activate and inactivate reactions already in the set.
Deleting a Reaction Set

want to delete.
2. Click the Delete button. UniSim Design prompts you to confirm the
deletion of the reaction set.
Copying a Reaction Set

want to copy.
Copying a reaction set creates a new reaction set with the exact same
properties as the original.
Importing a Reaction Set

1. Click the Import Set button. The Open File view appears.
2. Browse to the location of your reaction sets file (*.rst).
Exporting a Reaction Set

1. Click the Export Set button. The Save File view appears.
2. Specify the name and location of your reaction set file.
3. Click Save.
5-20
Adding a Reaction Set to a Fluid Package

After creating reactions and reaction sets, you can associate the set(s)
with a fluid package.
1. Click the Add to FP button. The Add Reaction Set view appears.
2. From the list of available fluid packages, select the fluid package to
which you want to add a reaction set.
3. Click the Add Set to Fluid Package button.
5.2.6 Component Maps Tab

See Chapter 6 - The Component Maps tab allows you to map fluid component
Component Maps in the
UniSim Design
composition across fluid package boundaries. Composition values for
Simulation Basis Guide individual components from one fluid package can be mapped to a
for additional information. different component in an alternate fluid package. This is useful when
dealing with hypothetical oil components.
Figure 5.12
Two previously defined fluid packages are required to perform a

component mapping. One fluid package becomes the target component
set and the other becomes the source component set. Mapping is
performed using a matrix of source and target components. The
transfer basis can be performed on a mole, mass or liquid volume
basis.
Adding a Collection
1. In the Component Mapping group, select the fluid packages you
want to map.
2. After two distinct fluid packages are selected, click the Create
Collection button to add a new collection to the Collections table.
5-21
The table lists the following information:

• The fluid package where the components came from
• The fluid package where the components are going
• The collection name (can be edited at any time)
Adding a Component Map

1. From the Collection drop-down list in the Maps for Collection group,
select the collection for which you want to map components.
2. Click the Add button. The Component Map view appears.
3. In the component matrix, map all specifiable components (values in
red text). All source components appear in columns and all target
components appear in rows.
4. In the Transfer Basis group, select the basis of the component
transfer by selecting the Mole, Mass, or Volume radio button.
Editing a Component Map

select the required collection.
2. From the list of available component maps, select the component
map you want to edit.
3. Click the Edit button. The Component Map view appears. In this
view, you can modify the parameters for the map.
Deleting a Component Map

select the collection for which you want to delete component map.
2. From the list of available component maps, select the component
map you want to delete.
You are not prompted to confirm the deletion, so ensure you

have selected the correct component map before deleting.
5.2.7 User Property Tab

See Chapter 7 - User Use the User Property tab to create user properties for use in the
Properties in the UniSim
Design Simulation
Basis Guide for more
information.
5-22
Simulation environment.
Figure 5.13
You can also create user properties in the Oil

Characterization environment. See Section 6.2.4 - User
Property Tab for more information.
User properties are any property that can be defined and

calculated on the basis of composition. You supply a user
property value for each component in a fluid package, then
select the mixing basis and mixing equation to calculate the
total user property.
When a user property is defined, UniSim Design calculates the

value of the property for any stream through the user property
utility. User properties can also be set as Column specifications.
5-23
Adding a User Property

1. Click the Add button. The User Property view appears.
2. Click the Data tab.
Figure 5.14
3. In the Mixing Basis field, use the drop-down list i to select the
basis for mixing.
Refer to the UniSim 4. In the Mixing Rule field, use the drop-down list to specify the
Design Simulation
Basis Guide for more
mixing rule to use with for your user property.
information regarding the 5. Specify values for the mixing rule parameters F1 and F2 to
mixing rules.
accurately reflect your property formula. By default these
parameters have a value of 1.00.
6. Select a unit from the Unit Type drop-down list for the user property
value. If the unit type is Temperature, the internal unit used is
degrees Kelvin. (This is important when calculating the mixed value
for a stream.)
7. Specify a lower and upper limit for your user property in the Lower
Limit Value and Upper Limit Value cells.
The property parameters determine how the user property is calculated

in all streams. Whenever the value of a user property is requested by
the User Property utility or by the Column, UniSim Design uses the
composition in the specified basis and calculates the user property
value using the mixing rules and parameters that you set.
5-24
Editing a User Property

1. From the list of available user properties, select the user property
that you want to edit.
2. Click the View button. The User Property view appears.
In this view, you can edit all of the parameters that define the user
property.
Deleting a User Property

that you want to delete.
You are not prompted to confirm the deletion of your user

property, so ensure you are deleting the correct one. After a
user property is deleted, it cannot be retrieved.
5.3 Reaction Package

Refer to Section 5.2.5 - From the Basis menu, select Reaction Package to open the Reaction
Reactions Tab and Package view. Use this view to create, copy and edit both reactions and
Chapter 5 - Reactions
in the UniSim Design reaction sets. You can attach reactions to a reaction set and make a
Simulation Basis Reaction Set available to unit operations within the current case.
Guide for more
information about
reactions and reaction Figure 5.15
sets.
The reactions in the Current Clicking this Double-click on
Reaction Sets group are button creates a the selected
available to all the unit new reaction reaction to open
operations in the current case. set. its property view.
Attached reactions for Click this button Click this button to

the selected reaction to add a new make a copy of the
set. reaction. selected reaction.
5-25
5-26 Component Property View
The Reaction Package view eliminates the need to return to the

Reaction tab of the Simulation Basis Manager when defining reactions
and reaction sets. The only task when defining reactions that must be
done in the Simulation Basis Manager is the selection of components.
5.4 Component Property View

The Component Property view enables you to view and edit the
properties of a component. The two types of property views are the
traditional component property view and solid component property
view.
Refer to Chapter 1 - You can access both types of property views from the Component List
Components in the
view. You can also access the property view for hypothetical and solid
UniSim Design
Simulation Basis Guide hypothetical components from the Hypo Group view.
Refer to the following figure to see how both the Traditional and Solid
pure component views appear.
Figure 5.16
Both of these views contain five tabs and the information is colour
coded according to the type of information being displayed. The
following table explains the color coding.
Colour Information description

Red Values estimated by UniSim Design.
Blue User defined values.
Black Calculated values or information that you cannot
modify.
You can supply values for any of the component properties, or overwrite
5-26
values estimated by UniSim Design. If you change a specified value, all

properties previously estimated using that specification are removed.
5.4.1 Viewing a Pure Component

Use this procedure to view the properties of a pure component found in
a component list.
1. Select the pure component you want to view from the list of
available components.
2. Click the View Component button. The Component Property view
appears for the selected component.
Accessing a Hypothetical Component

Property View
You can access the hypothetical component property view using the
following methods:
• In the Component List view, select the component from the list
of selected components and click the View Component button.
• On the Hypotheticals tab of the Simulation Basis Manager, select
the component from the Hypothetical Quick Reference table and
click the View Hypo button.
• In the Hypo Group view, select the component from the list of
available components and click the View button.
5.4.2 Defining a Traditional

Hypothetical Component
Refer to the sections 1. Open the component property view, or create a new hypothetical
Adding a Traditional or
Electrolyte
component.
Hypothetical 2. Click the ID tab.
Component Group and
Adding a Hypothetical 3. Click the Structure Builder button. The UNIFAC Component
Group for more Builder view appears.
information.
4. From the list of available UNIFAC groups, select the sub-group you
want to add to your structure.
5. Click the Add Groups button.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 until you have the structure you want and
there are no free bonds.
7. Close the UNIFAC Component Builder view.
8. Click the Critical tab.
5-27
5-28 Component Property View
9. Enter the information from the following table so UniSim Design can
estimate the properties of your component.
Normal Boiling Point Minimum Required Information

< 700°F (370°C) Normal Boiling Point
> 700°F (370°C) Normal Boiling Point and Liquid Density
Unknown Molecular Weight and Liquid Density
10. After entering the values, click the Estimate Unknown Props
button to calculate the other properties.
5.4.3 Defining a Solid

Hypothetical Component
Refer to the sections 1. Open the component property view, or create a new hypothetical
Adding a Traditional or
Electrolyte
component.
Hypothetical 2. Click the Critical tab.
Component Group and
Adding a Hypothetical 3. Enter both the molecular weight and density (at minimum).
Group for more
4. Click the Estimate Unknown Props button to calculate the other
properties.
5-28
Oil Characterization Environment 6-1
6 Oil Characterization
Environment
6.1 Introduction .................................................................................. 2
6.2 Oil Characterization Manager......................................................... 2

6.2.1 Oil Output Settings View ........................................................... 3
6.2.2 Assay Tab ............................................................................... 4
6.2.3 Cut/Blend Tab.......................................................................... 6
6.2.4 User Property Tab .................................................................... 9
6.2.5 Correlation Tab .......................................................................10
6.2.6 Install Oil Tab .........................................................................13
6-1
6-2 Introduction
6.1 Introduction
Refer to Chapter 3 - The Oil Characterization environment enables you to characterize
UniSim Design Oil petroleum fluids by creating and defining Assays and Blends. The oil
Manager in the UniSim
Design Simulation Basis characterization procedure generates petroleum hypocomponents for
Guide for additional use in your fluid package(s). The Oil Characterization environment is
information.
accessible only through the Simulation Basis environment.
To enter the Oil Characterization environment, at least one

fluid package must exist in the case and any hypothetical
components must be compatible with the property method
used by the fluid package.
The Desktop for the Oil Characterization environment is similar to the

Desktop in the Simulation Basis environment. Icons specific to
generating oils appear and the Oil Characterization Manager is the
Home View.
Accessing the Oil Characterization

Environment
To enter the Oil Characterization environment, click the Oil Environment
icon or the Enter Oil Environment button found in the Oil Manager tab of
the Simulation Basis Manager.
Oil Environment icon
6.2 Oil Characterization

Manager
The Oil Characterization Manager contains five tabs and four buttons.
The buttons are as follows:
• Clear All. Click to clear all the information entered or imported
in the Oil environment.
Refer to Section 1.10 - • Calculate All. Click to calculate all unknown variables. This
Petroleum Fraction in button is only effective if you supply enough information about
the UniSim Design OLI the hypocomponents.
Interface Reference
Guide for more • Oil Output Settings. Click to open the Oil Output Settings
information about the view.
OLI_Electrolyte Fluid • Return to Basis Environment. Click to return to Simulation
Package. Basis environment.
6-2
6.2.1 Oil Output Settings View

To access this view, click the Oil Output Settings button on the Oil
Characterization view.
Refer to Chapter 14 - During the characterization of an oil or the calculation of boiling ranges
Utilities in the UniSim
Design Operations
for a fluid in the BP Curves utility, the initial boiling point (IBP) and final
Guide for more boiling point (FBP) cut point values can have a significant effect on the
information about the BP outer limits of the boiling range. During the laboratory analysis of a
Curves utility.
petroleum fluid’s boiling point regions, the most difficult to measure are
the end regions.
UniSim Design uses the defaults of 1% and 98% on liquid volume basis
for the IBP and FBP. With a 1% IBP value, UniSim Design uses the
boiling points of all components in the first volume percent of the given
fluid and calculates a weighted average boiling point that is used as the
IBP for any further analysis.
The final boiling point is determined similarly, using the weighted

average of the boiling points for the components found in the final two
liquid volume percents of the fluid.
Figure 6.1
These IBP and FBP values can be modified in this view. In the IBP cut
point and FBP cut point fields, enter the values you want to use for
calculating your BP curve.
Refer to the following table for a description of the values.
Field Description
IBP cut point Specify a value from 0% to 5%.
FBP cut point Specify a value from 90% to 100%.
Basis for IBP & Using the drop-down list, select the basis for your
FBP boiling points. You have three choices: Liquid
Volume%, Mass% and Mole%.
You can also specify the Interconversion method used for the ASTM
6-3
6-4 Oil Characterization Manager
D86 interconversion and ASTM D2887 interconversion. Select the

method you want to use.
For the ASTM D86 Interconversion Method, the following options are
available:
• API 1974
• API 1987
• API 1994
• Edmister-Okamoto 1959
For the ASTM D2887 Interconversion Method, the following options are
available:
• API 1987
• API 1994 Indirect
• API 1994 Direct
Note: OLI_Electrolyte property package does not support Oil

Output Settings. For details, refer to Section 1.10 -
Petroleum Fraction in the UniSim Design OLI Interface
Reference Guide
6.2.2 Assay Tab

See Section 3.5 - The Assay tab allows you to manage the oil assays in your case. Use
Characterizing Assays
in the UniSim Design
this tab to add new assays and modify existing ones. You can also
Simulation Basis import assays from other cases or export them for use with another
Guide for additional case. The Description field lets you add notes for individual assays.
information.
Figure 6.2
The minimum amount of information required to characterize a

petroleum fluid is either a laboratory distillation curve or two of the
following three bulk properties:
6-4
• Molecular Weight
• Density
• Watson UOP K factor
The more information you supply, the better the results will be for your
oil characterization.
All physical and critical properties are generated from an internally

generated TBP curve at atmospheric conditions. Regardless of the
assay data provided, UniSim Design converts it to an internal TBP curve
for the characterization procedure. This internal TBP curve is not stored
with the assay.
Click the Oil Input Preferences button to change the default oil
preferences. Refer to Section 12.8 - Oil Input Tab for more
information.
Adding an Assay
1. In the Oil Characterization view, click the Add button. The Assay
Property view appears.
2. Click the Input Data tab.
3. In the Assay Definition group, use the Bulk Properties drop-down
list to specify if you are supplying bulk properties. Select either Not
Used or Used.
4. From the Assay Data type drop-down list, select an assay data type
option.
5. Depending on the assay data type selected, supply information for
the following:
• Light Ends curve
Assay Data Type • Molecular Weight curve
options • Density curve
• Viscosity curves
• Distillation conditions
6. Each definition requires you to provide data in the Input Data
group. Click the required radio button and either enter the data
directly into the table or click the Edit Assay radio button.
7. Click the Light Ends Handling & Bulk Fitting Options button to
specify if a given curve contains light-ends contributions. Also,
specify whether the specified bulk properties contains light-ends
and partition a property curve, so that some sections can be
adjusted more than others.
6-5
Editing an Assay
1. From the list of available assays, select the assay you want to edit.
2. Click the View button. The Assay Property view appears.
3. Click the Input Data tab, then modify the assay data.
4. Click the Calculation Defaults tab, then modify how the
hypocomponents are calculated.
Deleting an Assay
1. From the list of available assays, click the assay you want to delete.
You will not be prompted to confirm the deletion of an assay,

however, assays being used by a blend will not be deleted.
Cloning an Assay
1. From the list of available assays, select the assay you want to clone.
2. Click the Clone button. Cloning creates a new assay with the exact
Importing an Assay
1. Click the Import button. The Open File view appears.
2. Browse to the location of your assay file (*.oil).
3. Select the file you want to import and click Open. The new assay
appears in the list of available assays.
Exporting an Assay
1. Click the Export button. The Save File view appears.
2. Specify a name and location for your assay file.
3. Click Save.
6.2.3 Cut/Blend Tab

See Section 3.6 - The Cut/Blend tab allows you to manage the hypocomponents in a
Hypocomponent
Generation in the UniSim
Design Simulation Basis
Guide for additional
information.
6-6
case.
Figure 6.3
The Cut/Blend tab allows you to do the following:

• Add new blends
• Modify existing blends
• Clone existing blends
• Provide descriptions for individual blends so others can easily
access the information.
The Cut/Blend characterization splits internal working curves for one or

more assays into hypocomponents.
To modify the graph labels in a Blend plot, click the Clone

button. UniSim Design generates a copy of the existing
selected plot. The cloned plot is independent, and its labels
can be modified and are not overwritten.
For more information, refer to Chapter 3 - UniSim Design Oil
Manager in the UniSim Design Simulation Basis Guide.
Adding a Blend
1. Click the Add button. The Blend Property view appears.
3. From the list of available assays, select the assay you want use for
the blend.
4. Click the Add button. The assay is moved from the list of available
assays to the Oil Flow Information table.
5. In the Oil Flow table, specify the flow units for the oil as either
Liquid Volume, Molar, or Mass.
6. Specify the flow rate of the oil.
6-7
7. From the Cut Option Selection drop-down list, select one of the
following cut options:
• Auto Cut
• User Ranges
• User Points
There is no limit for the number of assays that can be included in a

single blend or the number of blends that can contain a given assay.
Each blend is treated as a single oil and does not share
hypocomponents with other blends or oils.
The Bulk Data button is available when more than one assay is present
in the Oil Flow Information table. Clicking this button opens the Bulk
Values view, where you can provide the following bulk data for a blend:
• Molecular Weight
• Mass Density
• Watson (UOP) K
• Viscosities at two temperatures.
The Bulk Data feature is useful for supplying the bulk viscosities of the
blend if they are known.
Editing a Blend
1. From the list of available blends, select the blend you want to edit.
2. Click the View button. The Blend Property view appears.
3. Click the Data tab, then modify the data for the blend.
Deleting a Blend
1. From the list of available blends, click the blend you want to delete.
UniSim Design will not prompt you to confirm the deletion of

a blend, so ensure you have selected the correct blend
before deleting.
Cloning a Blend
1. From the list of available blends, select the blend you want to clone.
2. Click the Clone button. Cloning a blend creates a new blend with
the exact same properties as the original.
6-8
6.2.4 User Property Tab

Refer to Section 3.7 - The User Property tab allows you to create user properties for use in
User Property in the
the Simulation environment. You can only create user properties in the
UniSim Design
Simulation Basis Guide Basis environment.
for additional information.
Figure 6.4
A user property is any property that can be defined and

calculated on the basis of composition. Examples for oils
include RON and Sulfur content.
During the characterization process, all hypocomponents are assigned

an appropriate property value. The value of the property for any
flowsheet stream is then calculated. This enables user properties to be
used as Column specifications.
Adding a User Property

1. Click the Add button. The User Property view appears.
3. Use the drop-down list in the Mixing Basis field to select the basis
for mixing.
4. Use the drop-down list in the Mixing Rule field to specify the
mixing rule to use with your user property.
5. Specify values for the mixing rule parameters F1 and F2. By default
these parameters have a value of 1.00.
6. Select a unit from the Unit Type drop-down list for the user
property value. If the unit type is Temperature, the internal unit
used is degrees Kelvin. (This is important when calculating the
mixed value for a stream.)
6-9
7. Specify a lower and upper limit for your user property in the Lower
Limit Value and Upper Limit Value cells.
The choice of Mixing Basis applies only to the basis that is used for
calculating the property in a stream. You supply the property curve
information on the same basis as the Boiling Point Curve for your assay.
The values you provide for the light end components are used when
calculating the property value for each hypocomponent (removing that
portion of the property curve attributable to the light ends
components).
This is not the property curve information. These values determine how
the user property is calculated in all flowsheet streams. When the value
of a user property is requested for a stream, the composition in the
specified basis is used and the property value is calculated using your
mixing rule and parameters.
Editing a User Property

1. From the list of available user properties, click the user property you
want to edit.
2. Click the View button. The User Property view appears.
3. Click the Data tab and modify the data for the user property.
Deleting a User Property

1. From the list of available user properties, click the user property you
want to delete.
You will not be prompted to confirm the deletion of a user

property, so ensure you have selected the correct one before
deleting.
Cloning a User Property

you want to copy.
2. Click the Clone button. Cloning a user property creates a new user
property with the exact same properties as the original.
See Section 3.8.1 -
Correlation Tab in the
UniSim Design
Simulation Basis Guide
6.2.5 Correlation Tab
This tab allows you to manage the correlations in a case. Use this tab to
6-10
add new correlation sets and modify existing sets.
Figure 6.5
You cannot change the correlations or ranges for the Default correlation
set. If you want to specify different correlations or temperature ranges,
create a new correlation set.
Adding a Correlation Set

1. Click the Add button. The Correlation Set view appears.
2. Click the Options tab and use the drop-down list in the MW column
to specify the correlation you want to use.
3. Repeat step 2 for each of the columns in the table: SG, Tc, Pc, Acc.
Factor and Ideal H.
Property correlations can be changed for the entire range or they
can be made valid for only certain boiling point ranges.
4. To divide correlations over several boiling ranges, click the Add
New Range button. The Add Temperature Range view appears.
5. In the New Temp field, enter the temperature at which you want to
split the range.
6. Click the Split Range button and specify correlations in these two
ranges. You can add as many temperature splits as required.
7. In the Assay and Blend Association group, check the New Assays/
Blends checkbox to add all new assays and blends that were
created using this correlation set.
8. Select the Available Assays radio button.
9. In the Assay/Blend table, select the Use this Set checkbox to use
all the assays in this correlation set.
10. Select the Available Blends radio button.
6-11
11. In the Assay/Blend table, select the Use this Set checkbox to use
all the blends in this correlation set.
Changes to the Molecular Weight or Specific Gravity correlations are

applied to the assay curve, while the critical temperature, critical
pressure, acentric factor and heat capacity correlations are applied to
the blend’s hypocomponent properties.
Changes to the assay correlations have no effect when you supply a

property curve (e.g., Molecular Weight). The changes only apply when
properties are being estimated.
Removing a Split
1. Click the Remove Range button. The Remove view appears.
2. From the list of available splits, select the split you want to remove.
3. Click the Merge Temp Range button. When you merge a range,
you delete the correlations for the range with a Low End
Temperature that is equal to the range temperature you are
merging.
Changes to the correlations for an input assay results in the

recalculation of that assay followed by the recalculation of any blend
that uses it. Existing oil is automatically recalculated/re-cut using the
new correlations and components installed in the flowsheet.
Editing a Correlation Set

1. From the list of available correlation sets, click the correlation set
you want to edit.
2. Click the View button. The Correlation Set view appears.
3. Click the Options tab and modify the data that makes up the
correlation set.
Deleting a Correlation Set

1. From the list of available correlation sets, click the correlation set
you want to delete.
You will not be prompted to confirm the deletion of a

correlation set, so ensure the correct correlation set is
selected before deleting.
6-12
Cloning a Correlation Set

1. From the list of available correlation sets, select the correlation set
you want to copy.
2. Click the Clone button. Cloning a correlation set creates a new
correlation set with the exact same properties as the original.
6.2.6 Install Oil Tab

See Section 3.8.3 - Use this table to install an oil blend into a flowsheet.
Install Oil Tab in the
UniSim Design 1. Check the Install checkbox.
Simulation Basis Guide 2. In the Stream Name column, type a stream name for that blend.
You can use an existing stream name or provide a new one. If you
do not provide a name, the hypocomponents are not attached to
the fluid package.
3. Use the drop-down list in the Flow Sheet column to specify for
which flowsheet you want to install the stream containing the
hypocomponents.
Figure 6.6
6-13
6-14
Simulation Environment 7-1
7 Simulation Environment
7.1 Introduction .................................................................................. 5
7.2 Main Properties ............................................................................. 5

7.2.1 Status Message Tab.................................................................. 6
7.2.2 Calculation Levels Tab............................................................... 6
7.2.3 Notes Tab ............................................................................... 7
7.2.4 PV Balance Tab ........................................................................ 7
7.2.5 Lock Tab ................................................................................. 8
7.2.7 Converting a Case to a Template ................................................ 9
7.3 UniSim Design XML .......................................................................10
7.4 Optimizer......................................................................................12
7.5 Event Scheduler............................................................................13

7.5.1 Adding a Schedule ..................................................................14
7.5.2 Adding a Sequence..................................................................14
7.5.3 Adding an Event .....................................................................15
7.5.4 Editing a Sequence..................................................................17
7.5.5 Editing an Event .....................................................................18
7.5.6 Deleting a Schedule ................................................................19
7.5.7 Deleting a Sequence................................................................19
7.5.8 Deleting an Event ...................................................................20
7.5.9 Copying a Schedule.................................................................20
7.5.10 Copying a Sequence ..............................................................20
7.5.11 Copying an Event ..................................................................21
7.5.12 Importing a Schedule ............................................................21
7.5.13 Importing a Sequence............................................................22
7.5.14 Exporting a Schedule .............................................................23
7.5.15 Exporting a Sequence ............................................................23
7.5.16 Sorting a Schedule ................................................................24
7.5.17 Sorting a Sequence ...............................................................25
7.5.18 Sorting an Event ...................................................................25
7.6 Integrator.....................................................................................26
7.6.1 Integration Time Group............................................................27
7.6.2 Integration Step Size Group .....................................................28
7.7 Adjust-Recycle Manager ...............................................................28

7.7.1 Simultaneous Adjust-Recycle Group...........................................30
7-1
7-2 Simulation Environment
7.8 Initialize From ..............................................................................37

7.8.1 Terminology ...........................................................................38
7.8.2 Dynamic Usage Notes..............................................................39
7.8.3 Steady-State Usage Notes........................................................49
7.8.4 Warning Messages ..................................................................49
7.9 Dynamic/Steady State Modes .......................................................50
7.10 Solver Active/Holding.................................................................51
7.11 Integrator Active/Holding ..........................................................51
7.12 Equation Summary .....................................................................52
7.13 Enter Basis Environment.............................................................52
7.14 User Variables ............................................................................52

7.14.1 Adding a User Variable ...........................................................54
7.14.2 Editing a User Variable ...........................................................54
7.14.3 Deleting a User Variable .........................................................54
7.15 Importing & Exporting User Variables ........................................54

7.15.1 Importing User Variables ........................................................55
7.15.2 Exporting User Variables ........................................................55
7.16 Oil Output Settings .....................................................................55
7.17 Object Navigator.........................................................................56

7.17.1 Locating an Object ................................................................57
7.18 Simulation Navigator ..................................................................58

7.18.1 Viewing an Object .................................................................59
7.19 Notes Manager............................................................................60
7.20 Optimization Objects ..................................................................61

7.20.1 Adding an Optimization Object ................................................62
7.20.2 Editing an Optimization Object ................................................62
7.20.3 Deleting an Optimization Object ..............................................63
7.21 Reaction Package .......................................................................63
7.22 Fluid Package/Dynamics Model ..................................................63
7.23 Workbook ...................................................................................64

7.23.1 Opening a Workbook..............................................................65
7.23.2 Installing Streams or Operations .............................................67
7.23.3 Deleting Streams or Operations...............................................67
7.23.4 Accessing Streams or Operations.............................................68
7-2
7.23.5 Managing Workbook Tabs .......................................................71

7.23.6 Sorting Information ...............................................................74
7.23.7 Exporting/Importing Workbook Tabs ........................................76
7.24 PFD.............................................................................................77
7.24.1 Custom PFD Notebook ...........................................................78
7.24.2 Locating Objects in PFD..........................................................79
7.24.3 Flowsheet Analysis Using the PFD ............................................80
7.24.4 Access Column or Sub-Flowsheet PFDs.....................................82
7.24.5 Opening Controller Face Plates ................................................83
7.24.6 PFD Colour Schemes..............................................................84
7.24.7 Column Tray Section Display ...................................................87
7.24.8 PFD Tables ...........................................................................88
7.24.9 Multi-Pane PFDs ....................................................................92
7.24.10 Exchanging XML Files ...........................................................94
7.25 Column .......................................................................................94
7.26 Utilities .......................................................................................94

7.26.1 Adding Utilities......................................................................95
7.26.2 Viewing Utilities ....................................................................97
7.26.3 Deleting Utilities....................................................................97
7.27 Simulation Balance Tool..............................................................98

7.27.1 Accessing the Simulation Balance Tool......................................98
7.27.2 Setup Tab.............................................................................99
7.27.3 Summary Tab .....................................................................100
7.27.4 Feeds/Products Tab .............................................................102
7.27.5 Transitions Tab....................................................................103
7.27.6 Adjust/Recycle Tab ..............................................................105
7.27.7 Alerts Tab...........................................................................106
7.27.8 Status Bar Monitoring ..........................................................107
7-3
7-4
7.1 Introduction
Before entering the The Simulation environment contains the main flowsheet where you do
Simulation environment, the majority of your work (installing and defining streams, unit
you must have a fluid
package with selected operations, columns and sub-flowsheets).
components in the
component list and a This flowsheet serves as the base level or “main” flowsheet for the
property package.
whole simulation case. Any number of sub-flowsheets can be generated
If you do not have the
above requirements, from the main flowsheet, but there is only one main flowsheet
you cannot enter the environment. Each individual sub-flowsheet that is installed has its own
Simulation environment.
corresponding sub-flowsheet environment.
To enter the Simulation environment, click either the Enter Simulation

Environment button or Return to Simulation Environment button in the
Basis environment.
7.2 Main Properties

To access the Simulation Case view, select Main Properties from the
Simulation menu, or use the CTRL M hot key combination. The
Simulation Case view appears as shown below:
Figure 7.1
If Main Properties is selected in a sub-flowsheet environment, a Main

Environment button is available for returning to the main environment.
7-5
7-6 Main Properties
7.2.1 Status Message Tab

The Status Message tab allows you to view any errors or warnings in
your case, name the flowsheet, and provide a tag for it.
Figure 7.2
• To name the flowsheet, click the Name field and type a name for
the flowsheet. The default name is Case.
• To add a tag to the flowsheet, click the Tag field and type a tag
for your flowsheet. The default tag for the main flowsheet is
Main.
The Object Status group displays the current status messages for all
objects in the flowsheet according to the minimum severity. In the
Minimum Severity drop-down list, click one of the following options:
• OK. Sets the minimum severity at OK.
• Optional Info. Sets the minimum severity at Optional Info.
• Warning. Sets the minimum severity at Warning.
• Required Info. Sets the minimum severity at Required Info.
• **Error**. Sets the minimum severity at **Error**.
7.2.2 Calculation Levels Tab

The Calc Levels tab controls the order in which streams, operations,
7-6
and flowsheets are calculated.
Figure 7.3
You can ignore

a certain
stream or
operation in a
case by
unchecking its
checkbox.
Clicking the
Reset button
returns all
Calculation
Levels to their
default values.
Use this procedure to change the calculation order/sequence of a

separator in the PFD.
1. Open the UniSim Design case that contains the PFD you want to
modify.
2. Enter the Simulation Environment.
3. From the Simulation menu, select the Main Properties
command. The Simulation Case view will appear.
4. Click the Calc Levels tab in the Simulation Case view.
5. Locate the name of the separator in the table on the Calc Levels
tab.
6. Enter a lower calculation level value in the appropriate cell under
the Calculation Level column.
7.2.3 Notes Tab

To see all notes entered in Use the Notes tab to add comments or descriptions about your
the case, refer to Section
simulation. For example, this is a good location for documenting
7.19 - Notes Manager.
changes made to the settings.
7.2.4 PV Balance Tab

The PV Balance tab enables you to modify the property vector balance
7-7
7-8 Main Properties
calculation.
Figure 7.4
There are two balance option available for you to select: Default
Property Balance and Petroleum Assay Balance.
For the Petroleum Assay Balance, you can click the View button to
modify the balance calculation method for the assay properties.
7.2.5 Lock Tab

Refer to Section 11.15 - The Lock tab enables you to lock the Main flowsheet by entering a
Case Security for more
information on locking
password in the field and press ENTER.
flowsheet.
Figure 7.5
7-8
7.2.6 Revision Control Tab

The Revision Control Tab allows you to view or change t.he revision
control information for the simulation case.
Figure 7.6
There are two groups in this view: Current default file name
creation attributes and Optional attributes. The attributes in the
former group are used to automatically create file names when the Use
revision control setting to create default file name for Save As
checkbox is checked in Revision Control page under Preferences/Files.
The attributes in the latter group are used to enter some optional
information for the case. The number of attributes, the name, data type
of the attributes and the way to formulate the default file names can all
be customized on the preferences page.
7.2.7 Converting a Case to a

Template
Refer to Section 3.5 - Click the Convert to Template button in the Simulation Case view. You
Templates for additional
information about
are prompted to confirm your selection and save your case.
templates and extra tabs.
Converting your case to a template treats the flowsheet like a “black
box” and allows you to install it as a sub-flowsheet operation in other
cases.
After you convert the case to a template, the Exported Connections and
Exported Variables tabs become available and the Convert to Template
7-9
7-10 UniSim Design XML
button disappears from this view.
Figure 7.7
7.3 UniSim Design XML

UniSim Design now contains the ability to represent a simulation case in
XML form. XML (Extended Markup Language) is used extensively in the
computer software industry to facilitate data exchange between
applications.
The UniSim Design XML view lists all the current specifications used to
build the simulation case. To access the UniSim Design XML view:
7-10
1. From the Simulation menu, select UniSim Design XML.

2. The UniSim Design XML view appears.
Figure 7.8
Options Description
Allows you to return to the main Web
page as shown in Figure 7.8.
Allows you to return to the previous

page.
Allows you to go to the next page.
Import/Export/Display Options Use the check boxes to select the

information you want to appear in the
Datasheet.
Use WebBrowser If you want to view the data in a web
page, check the Use WebBrowser
check box. If the check box is clear,
XML code is displayed.
Auto Refresh To automatically update the web
page, check the Auto Refresh check
box.
7-11
7-12 Optimizer
Options Description
Input Summary Format If you want to view all the user
specifications in the UniSim Design
v2.4 case, check the Input Summary
Format check box. The functionality is
similar to the Print-Specsheet-
Flowsheet capability in UniSim Design
2.4.1, but reports more specifications
to produce a more accurate
representation of the case.
Scroll up and down for a list of all
flowsheet specification details. Click
the buttons in the list to jump to the
list displayed in groups.
Export Case as XML Allows you to save the flowsheet

specification details to an *.xml file.
Import XML Allows you to open the flowsheet
specification details from an *.xml
file.
Refresh Updates the list of current
specifications in the flowsheet.
Restore Restores the default import/export
options.
There are a number of options associated with the UniSim Design XML
output. These control the amount of information saved to the XML file.
Benefits of the UniSim Design XML tool:

• A structured output of simulation case data that can be queried
using XML tools.
• An alternate form of case storage that allows the user to rebuild
the case from the XML file.
• The ability to read partial information (additional pieces of
equipment/streams or changed parameters for existing streams
or operations) over top of an existing case.
Print the information in the Datasheet to an XML file:

1. Click the Export Case as XML button. The Save File view appears.
2. Specify a name and location for the Datasheet file, then click Save.
Import a Datasheet from an XML file:

1. Click the Import XML button. The Open File view appears.
2. Browse to the location of the required Datasheet file (*.xml).
Refer to Chapter 13 -
Optimizer in the UniSim
Design Operations
7.4 Optimizer
Guide for more
information about the The Optimizer performs steady state optimization by finding values of
Optimizer. process variables that minimize or maximize a user-defined objective
function. It has its own spreadsheet with attached variables that define
7-12
the objective function and mathematical expression relating to the

variables.
In addition, you must set upper and lower bounds and constraints that
the process variables must satisfy. The optimization must begin in a
feasible region (i.e., all constraints must be satisfied at the initial
starting conditions).
7.5 Event Scheduler

Refer to Chapter 2 - Use the Event Scheduler to perform tasks at specified times during the
Dynamic Tools in the dynamic simulation of a process. Task times can be predetermined, or
UniSim Design
Dynamic Modeling they can depend on the simulation.
information. For example, you can set a task to begin 20 minutes into the simulation
or after a reboiler product stream temperature stabilizes.
You can access the Event To access the Event Scheduler view:
Scheduler using the CTRL
E hot key combination. 1. From the Simulation menu, select Event Scheduler.
2. The Event Scheduler view appears.
Figure 7.9
The Event Scheduler can be used only in Dynamics mode.
7-13
7-14 Event Scheduler
7.5.1 Adding a Schedule

To add a new schedule:
1. From the Event Scheduler view, click the Add button in the
Schedule Options group.
2. The Schedule Sequences group appears.
Figure 7.10
7.5.2 Adding a Sequence

You can add as many To add a new sequence:
sequences as needed in a
schedule. 1. From the Event Scheduler view, click the Add button in the
7-14
Schedule Options group. The Schedule Sequences group appears.

2. From the Schedule Sequences group, click the Add button. The
sequence appears in the Schedule Sequences table.
Figure 7.11
7.5.3 Adding an Event

You can add multiple To add a new event to the sequence:
events to a sequence.
1. From the Event Scheduler view, click the Add button in the
Schedule Options group. The Schedule Sequences group appears.
2. From the Schedule Sequences group, click the Add button. The
sequence appears in the Schedule Sequences table.
7-15
3. Click the View button in the Schedule Sequences group. The

Sequence view appears.
Figure 7.12
4. Click the Add button. The event appears in the table.
Figure 7.13
Defining an Event
1. From the Sequence view, click the View button. The Event view
7-16
appears, which allows you to define events.
Figure 7.14
The parameters on the 2. Click on the Condition tab. In the Wait For group, select the
view change depending on
the radio button you condition you are waiting for before running the event. Select from
select. Refer to Section the following options:
2.5.4 - Event View in the
UniSim Design Dynamic
• The Logic to Evaluate True
Modeling Guide for more • An Elapsed Amount of Time
information. • A Specific Simulation Time
• A Variable to Stabilize
Refer to Action List Tab 3. Click the Action List tab.
in Section 2.5.4 - Event
View from the UniSim 4. Close the Event and Sequence views to return to the Event
Design Dynamic Scheduler view.
Modeling Guide for
more information. 5. Click the Start button to start the integrator.
7.5.4 Editing a Sequence

1. From the Schedule Sequences group of the Event Scheduler view,
7-17
select the sequence you want to edit.
Figure 7.15
2. You can modify the sequence name and run mode. If you want to
modify the information for the defined event and the sequence
universal settings, click the View button. The Sequence view
appears.
Figure 7.16
7.5.5 Editing an Event

select the sequence you want to edit the defined events.
Figure 7.17
2. Click the View button in the Schedule Sequences group. The

Sequence view appears.
7-18
3. From the Sequence view, select the event you want to edit.
Figure 7.18
4. Click the View button. The Event view appears.

5. Modify the event as required.
7.5.6 Deleting a Schedule

1. From the Event Scheduler view, select the schedule you want to
delete from the tree browser.
Figure 7.19
The Delete button is only 2. Click the Delete button in the Schedule Options group.
active when a schedule
exists in the case.
You will not be prompted to confirm the deletion of the
schedule, even if you have sequences and events defined.
Ensure the correct schedule is selected before deleting.
7.5.7 Deleting a Sequence

select the sequence you want to delete.
Figure 7.20
The Delete button is only 2. Click the Delete button in the Schedule Sequences group.
active when a sequence
exists in the schedule.
sequence, even if you have events defined. Ensure you
selected the correct sequence before deleting.
7-19
7.5.8 Deleting an Event

select the sequence you want to delete the defined events.
Figure 7.21
2. Click the View button. The Sequence view appears.
Figure 7.22
The Delete button is only 3. From the Sequence view, select the event you want to delete, and
active when an event click the Delete button.
exists in the sequence.

event, so ensure you selected the correct event before
deleting.
7.5.9 Copying a Schedule

copy from the tree browser.
Figure 7.23
The Copy button is only 2. Click the Copy button in the Schedule Options group to make a
active when a schedule copy of the selected schedule. The copied schedule is added to the
exists in the case.
tree browser.
7.5.10 Copying a Sequence

The Copy button is active 1. From the Schedule Sequences group of the Event Scheduler view,
when a sequence exists in
the schedule.
7-20
select the sequence you want to copy.
Figure 7.24
2. Click the Copy button in the Schedule Sequences group to make a

copy of the selected sequence.
7.5.11 Copying an Event

select the sequence you want to copy the defined events.
Figure 7.25
Figure 7.26
The Copy button is only 3. From the Sequence view, select the event you want to copy, and
active when an event click the Copy button.
exists in the sequence.
7.5.12 Importing a Schedule

1. From the Schedule Options group of the Event Scheduler view, click
the Import button. The File Selection for Importing Schedule view
7-21
appears.
Figure 7.27
2. Browse to the location of the saved schedule file (*.sch).

3. Select the file you want to import, then click the Open button.
7.5.13 Importing a Sequence

click the Import button. The File Selection for Importing Sequence
view appears.
Figure 7.28
2. Browse to the location of the saved sequence file (*.seq).

3. Select the file you want to import and click the Open button.
7-22
7.5.14 Exporting a Schedule

export from the tree browser.
The Export button is only 2. Click the Export button. The File Selection for Exporting Schedule
active when a schedule view appears.
exists in the case.
Figure 7.29
3. In the File name field, specify the name for the schedule file
4. From the Save in drop-down list, select the location to save the
schedule file and then click the Save button.
7.5.15 Exporting a Sequence

7-23
select the sequence you want to export.

The Export button is only 2. Click the Export button. The File Selection for Exporting Sequence
active when a sequence
view appears.
exists in the schedule.
Figure 7.30
3. In the File name field, specify the name for the schedule file
4. From the Save in drop-down list, select the location to save the
sequence file and then click the Save button.
7.5.16 Sorting a Schedule

The Sort button is only 1. From the Schedule Options group of the Event Scheduler view, click
active when at least two the Sort button. The Reorder Schedules view appears.
schedules exist in the
case.
Figure 7.31
2. From the Move Object list, select the schedule you want to move.
To move a schedule to the 3. From the Before list, select the schedule you want to insert the
end of the list, select the
schedule you are moving before.
blank space under the
last schedule in the 4. Click the Move button to complete the move.
Before list.
5. Close the Reorder Schedules view when you have completed sorting
the schedules.
7-24
7.5.17 Sorting a Sequence

click the Sort button. The Reorder Sequences view appears.
Figure 7.32
The Sort button is only active when at least two sequences exist in
the schedule.
2. From the Move Object list, select the sequence you want to move.
To move a sequence to 3. From the Before list, select the sequence you want to insert the
the end of the list, select
sequence you are moving before.
the blank space under the
last sequence in the 4. Click the Move button to complete the move.
Before list.
5. Close the Reorder Sequences view when you have completed
sorting the sequences.
7.5.18 Sorting an Event

select the sequence you want to sort the defined events.
Figure 7.33
Figure 7.34
7-25
7-26 Integrator
3. Click the Sort button. The Reorder Events view appears.
Figure 7.35
The Sort button is only active when at least two events exist in the
sequence.
4. From the Move Object list, select the event you want to move.
To move an event to the 5. From the Before list, select the event you want to insert the event
end of the list, select the you are moving before.
blank space under the
last event in the Before 6. Click the Move button to complete the move.
list.
7. Close the Reorder Events view when you have completed sorting the
events.
7.6 Integrator
Refer to Section 2.4 - You can use the Integrator when running a case in Dynamic mode.
Integrator in the
UniSim Design
There are two ways you can access the Integrator:
Dynamic Modeling • From the Simulation menu, select Integrator.
information.
7-26
• Press CTRL I.
Figure 7.36
The Start button allows you

to start to run the Integrator.
When the Integrator is
running, the button is
replaced by Stop. When the
Integrator has run once, the
Start button turns into a
Continue button. You can
also access the Start/
Continue and Stop
functionality by using the
icons on the toolbar.
The Reset Sim Time button resets the

Current Time to 0.0
7.6.1 Integration Time Group

The Integration Time group contains the following parameters:
Parameter Description
Units Time units for the Current Time, End Time, and Display
Interval fields.
Current Time Displays the time that the Integrator is running. When
the Integrator is Reset, this value returns to zero.
When the Integrator is not running, you can specify the
value for the current time.
Acceleration Actual Step Size = Acceleration * Specified Step Size.
This always applies.
End Time Allows you to specify the time at which the Integrator
stops.
Real Time Activates the Desired Real Time Factor field.
Display Interval Visible only in Automatic Integration Control, this field
contains the time interval at which UniSim Design
updates the views. The frequency of updating has a
significant impact on the speed at which your
simulation runs. The Display Interval has no effect on
the calculation frequency.
Real time factor Visible only in Automatic Integration Control, this field
is calculated by dividing a time interval for a case by
the actual time required by UniSim Design to simulate
that time interval. The Real time factor depends on the
computer’s processing speed and the complexity of the
simulation case.
7-27
7-28 Adjust-Recycle Manager
Desired Real Appears only when you check the Real time checkbox.
Time Factor Allows you to set the speed at which the integrator
operates. The default setting of 1 indicates that the
integrator is running at actual time, which appears on
the status bar of the UniSim Design Desktop. You have
the option to increase (>1) or decrease (<1) the speed
of the integration. The Desired Real Time Factor has no
effect on the calculation and results.
Number of time Number of time steps at which UniSim Design
steps to execute: executes. This field appears only when you click the
Manual radio button in the Integration Control group.
7.6.2 Integration Step Size Group

The Integration Step Size group contains the following parameters:
Units Allows you to select the units for the integration step size.
Step Size Allows you to specify the integration step size, which by
default is 0.5 seconds. While the integrator is running, this
value cannot be changed.
7.7 Adjust-Recycle Manager

The Adjust-Recycle Manager (ARM) allows you to monitor and control
all simultaneous groups in the case.
Access the Adjust-Recycle Manager by selecting the Adjust-Recycle

Manager command from the Simulation menu.
The ARM contains the following tabs:

• Configuration
• Parameters
Configuration Tab
The Configuration tab allows the user to:
• add new simultaneous groups
• view selected simultaneous group
• display information regarding simultaneous groups,
• displays independent adjusts and independent recycles within
the case, and
7-28
• locate selected adjusts and recycles on the PFD.
Figure 7.37
To add new simultaneous groups, just click button Add Group, a new
simultaneous group will be created and be added to the list of groups
available in the case.
To view an object, just select the object (e.g., simultaneous group,

adjust or recycle), and click button View, then the view of the selected
object will pop up.
To locate selected adjust or recycle on PFD, select adjust or recycle in

the list and click button Locate Object in PFD. The location of the
selected object will pop up.
Parameters Tab
The Parameters tab allows the user to modify calculation mode, math
solver, calculation level and maximum number of iterations of each
simultaneous group. This tab also allows the user to ignore individual
7-29
simultaneous group.
Figure 7.38
Always Stop at Maximum Iterations If checked on, any Adjust

operation in the case will stop as soon as the number of iterations
exceeds the user specified Maximum Iterations. Otherwise, it will
behave according to the specifications of Always Stop at Max Iters
for the specific adjust.
7.7.1 Simultaneous Adjust-

Recycle Group
The Simultaneous Adjust-Recycle Group (SARG) allows you to monitor
and modify adjusts and recycles in the group. This gives you access to
a more efficient calculation method with more control over the
calculations.
The SARG requires at least two active (in other words, not
ignored) adjusts or at least one active recycles to solve. If
you are using only one adjust, you cannot use the SARG.
The ARG contains the following tabs:

• Configurations
• Parameters
• Results
• History
The SARG also consists of the Add/Remove Adjusts/Recycles, Continue
7-30
and Delete buttons. The Ignored checkbox when activated switches the
SARG off, as well as all of adjusts and recycles in the group.
To add or remove adjusts and recycles from SARG, click button Add/
Remove Adjusts/Recycles, and the following view will pop up.
Figure 7.39
Procedures for Adding or Removing

Adjusts and Recycles
1. Select the flowsheet containing adjusts and recycles you want from
the FlowSheets Filter. If you want to include adjusts and recycles
located in the sub-flowsheets of the selected flowsheet, active
checkbox "Include Sub-Flowsheet".
2. Select the adjusts and recycles you want to add from the second
column. Click the button to add the selected objects to the
column Adjusts and Recycles in Group.
You can remove objects from the column Adjusts & Recycles in
Group by selecting the objects you do not want from the list, and
clicking the button .
3. Click button Accept to accept or click button Cancel to cancel the
changes made in the above step.
When a new simultaneous group is created, before any adjust or

recycle is added to the group, page Empty Group will be displayed on
7-31
each tab of the group.
Figure 7.40
After adjusts and/or recycles are added to the group, page Empty
Group will be removed. New page Adjusts if there is at least one adjust
in the group, and new page Recycles if there is at least one recycle in
the group, will be added.
Configuration Tab
The Configuration tab displays information regarding adjusts and
recycles in the group on pages Adjusts and Recycles. You can view the
individual adjusts or recycles by double-clicking on their names. You
can modify the target value or matching value object, value, and offset
of the adjusts, and specified conditions and compositions of inlet and
outlet streams of the recycles. This tab also allows you to ignore
7-32
individual adjusts and recycles.
Figure 7.41
Parameters Tab
The Parameters tab allows you to modify the method, tolerance, step
size, maximum iterations, max, and min values of each Adjust, to
modify acceleration method, maximum iterations, flash type,
acceleration frequency, Q maximum, Q minimum and acceleration
delay of each recycle. This tab also allows you to specify some of the
calculation parameters of the group as described in the table below.
Calc Mode Allows you to select one of two simultaneous
calculation modes:
Interactive
Adjusts/Recycles are solved simultaneously by solving
a set of nonlinear equations using numerical methods
such as Lmder and Broyden.
Non-Interactive
Adjusts/Recycles are solved at the same time using
their own methods (e.g., Secant, Wegstein), and new
calculated values are pushed back by the group to
flowsheet simultaneously
Calc Level Allows the user to control the order in which groups are
calculated by flowsheet solvers within the case. The
lower the calc level of a group, the earlier the group is
solved.
Adjusts and recycles in the simultaneous group will use

Calc Level of the group. Calc Level of the adjusts and
recycles themselves will not be applied.
7-33
Method Allows to select one of two math solvers when
Interactive mode is applied:
Broyden
Use a unit matrix as initial Jacobian matrix, and apply
Sherman-Morrison formula to update inverse of
Jacobian matrix.
Lmder
It is a modification of the Levenberg-Marquardt
algorithm, and needs derivatives calculation by
perturbation at every iteration step. Lmder is not
applied if the group includes recycles.
Max # of Iterations Maximum number of iterations for the group.
Type of Jacobian Allows you to select one of three Jacobian calculations:
Calculations ResetJac
Jacobian is fully calculated and values reset to initial
values after each jacobian calculation step. Most time
consuming but most accurate.
Continuous
Values are not recalculated between Jacobian
calculation steps. Quickest, but allows for "drift" in the
Jacobian therefore not as accurate.
Hybrid
Hybrid of the above two methods.
Type of convergence Allows you to select one of three convergence types:
Specified
SARG is converged when all adjusts and recycles
arewithin the specified tolerances.
Norm
SARG is converged when the norm of the residuals
(sums of squares) is less then a user specified value.
Either
SARG is converged with which ever of the above types
occurs first.
Max Step Fraction The number x step size is the maximum that the solver
is allowed to move during a solve step.
Perturbation Factor The number x range (Max - Min) or the number x 100
x step size (if no valid range). This is the maximum
that the solver is allowed to move during a Jacobian
step when Lmder is applied.
7-34
Figure 7.42
Results Tab
The Results tab displays the adjusted value, target value, residual
value, iteration number and status of adjusts, as well as iteration
number and status of recycles when solving of the group is finished.
Figure 7.43
History Tab
The History tab contains the following three pages to monitor history of
adjust and recycles for each iteration of the group.
7-35
• SetUp
• Table
• Plot
The SetUp page allows to specify which adjusts, recycles and variables
you want to view or monitor. To view an adjust or a recycle, activate
the Display checkbox beside the adjust or recycle name. Adjusts or
recycles are always viewed in order from left to right across the page.
For example, if you are viewing Adjust 2 and add Adjust 1 to the view,
Adjust 1 becomes the first set of numbers, and Adjust 2 is shifted to the
right. To view a variable, activate the Display checkbox corresponding
to the variable of interest.
Figure 7.44
The Table page and Plot page display the convergence information of
the selected variables corresponding to the selected adjusts and
recycles as the calculations are performed in tabular and graphical
format respectively.
The History tab only displays the values from a solve step.
The values calculated during a Jacobian step can be seen on
the Monitor tabs of adjusts and recycles for the individual
results.
7-36
Figure 7.45
7.8 Initialize From

The Initialize From command is located in the Simulation menu and is
used to initialize the dynamic data from another saved case into the
currently opened case while leaving all of the static data unchanged.
Figure 7.46
Note that the Initialize From operation is used to initialize the entire
flowsheet. If you want to only initialize a portion of the flowsheet, refer
to Section 2.7.2 - Initialize From in the Dynamic Modeling
Reference Guide.
DynamicInitializeFrom is available from the OLE interface.
7-37
7-38 Initialize From
7.8.1 Terminology
A typical project may have to maintain multiple cases, where each case
represents different operating conditions. The underlying flow scheme
and equipment details are the same for each case, but the operating
conditions are different. For example, a project might need a case for:
steady-state, shutdown, summer operation, maximum throughput,
maximum diesel production, etc.
If the equipment details are changed (because of a plant

debottlenecking project or update of design data from the
subcontractor), then it will be necessary to change the equipment
details for every maintained case. The manual method to maintain
multiple cases would be to open each individual case and change the
equipment sizes by hand. The Initialize From functionality allows you to
make all of the equipment changes to one case, and then automatically
update the other cases.
Some key terminology:
Case Management A process undertaken by a simulation

engineer to maintain a set of cases that model
a plant at different operating conditions.
IC Initial Condition. The starting operating
conditions of a case. A case will sometimes
be referred to as an IC.
IC Set A set of initial conditions (cases) that model
important operating regimes in the plant.
Typically used as starting points for training
exercises or to define design limitations for
various pieces of equipment / unit operations.
Target Case Master case (at any operating condition) that
includes the superset of all unit operations
and the most recent static initialization data
Source Case(s) Secondary case(s) at different operating
conditions. Some examples are: summer /
winter, maximum feed / turndown, shut down
under nitrogen blanket, maximum gasoline /
maximum diesel production.
Static data Data that represents physical equipment.
Static data is desired to be the same between
all source and target cases. Some examples
are: valve Cv, vessel dimensions, heat
exchanger area, pump curves.
Dynamic data Data that represents operating conditions.
Dynamic data is expected to be different
between source and target cases. Some
examples are: stream temperature, pressure
and composition, controller setpoints, valve
actuator position, ambient temperature.
Initialize From The dynamic data is copied from the source
case to the target case. The static data in the
target case is unchanged.
7-38
When managing dynamic cases, a typical use case would be for the
user to Initialize From a source case to a target case, integrate until
operation is lined out, and then Save As over the source case. The
result will be that the dynamic data (operating conditions) will be
different between the two cases, but the static data (equipment sizes)
will be the same.
7.8.2 Dynamic Usage Notes

The Initialize From operation will copy the dynamic data for every
matching unit operation from the source to the target case. Therefore,
the target case should contain a superset of all of the unit operations.
The Initialize From functionality matches unit operations between the

source and target cases based on the name of the unit operation.
Therefore, if the name of a unit operation has been changed between
the source and target case, then that unit operation will not be
initialized. If a unit operation is not initialized, then after the Initialize
From operation completes, the dynamic data for that unit operation will
be based on the data from the target case, and not the source case. All
other unit operations (provided they completed successfully) will have
dynamic data from the source case. When you start the integrator,
there is likely to be a significant "bump" to the plant operation.
Note that if sub-flowsheets are used, the name of the unit operation
includes the tag of the sub-flowsheet. Therefore, if the tag of a sub-
flowsheet has been changed between the source and target case, then
none of the unit operations in that sub-flowsheet will be initialized.
The dynamic data is highly dependent on the thermodynamic

calculations. Therefore, if the Fluid Package used for a unit operation is
changed between the source and the target, then that unit operation
will not be initialized. Dynamic Initialize From is not supported for
UniSim Thermo.
It is recommended that you integrate both the source and target cases
and save them before starting the Initialize From operation. Firstly,
many internal variables are calculated just after the green light is
turned on. Secondly, if you change an equipment size, some internal
variables are reset at the time of the change. They are not recalculated
until the green light is turned on. Therefore, always integrate the case
after making a change. If you save an integrated case, all of the
internal variables will be saved with the case. However, if you Initialize
From using an unintegrated case, you will get many uninformative
warnings and errors.
For dynamic cases, the variable status determines a variable's colour in
7-39
the view: blue is specified, red is default, and black is calculated. The
Initialize From operation will not copy the variable status from the
source to the target. Consequently, a variable that was red in the
source case might be blue in the target case.
If a static variable (valve Cv, heat exchanger size, pump curve, etc.) is
changed, it is highly likely that there will be a bump after Initialize From
(i.e. the case will not operate at steady-state). A warning message is
issued for some of these changes, but not all.
Notes are considered static data, so the superset of notes should

always be in the target case.
It is possible to Initialize From between two steady-state cases, or two

dynamic cases, but not between a steady-state and a dynamic case.
During an Initialize From operation, the source case is loaded just like it
would be if you opened the case, only it is loaded into memory without
displaying the user interface. Consequently, it is recommended that
your preferences are set so that the checkbox for "Confirm Before
Adding if Active Correlations are Present" is not ticked (on the
Simulations tab, Options page). Otherwise, you will have to confirm
every time the Initialize From operation is used.
Note that the determination of whether a variable is static or dynamic is

subjective. Most variables are obviously static or obviously dynamic,
however, some could be either static or dynamic depending on the
situation. Therefore, for some unit operations, the user is allowed to
choose whether a variable will be initialized (dynamic) or not (static).
The following sections describe the special behaviours and usage for
each unit operation type during Initialization From for dynamic cases.
Streams
Material Streams
For each individual stream in the flowsheet:
• "if the pressure specification is active, you can choose to make it
static or dynamic using the check box on the Dynamics tab,
Specs page
• "if the flow specification is active, you can choose to make it
static or dynamic using the check box on the Dynamics tab,
Specs page
7-40
• "if the stream has a feeder block, you can choose to make the
conditions (temperature and composition) static or dynamic
using the check box on the Feeder block view (called up from
the message box on the Dynamics tab, Specs page),
Composition tab.
• "if the stream has a product block, you can choose to make the
reverse flow conditions (temperature and composition) static or
dynamic using the check box on the Product block view (called
up from the message box on the Dynamics tab, Specs page),
Composition tab.
Each stream is flashed after the Initialize From operation is completed.
Energy Streams
The heat flow is a dynamic variable.
Heat Transfer Equipment

Air Cooler
Demanded fan speed and on/off are dynamic. Design fan speed,
design fan air flow, UA, and pressure drop factors are static.
Initialization will fail if the row/pass configuration, or number of fans is

changed.
Initialize From for UniSim CFE is not supported.
Cooler/Heater
For all heater/coolers the sizing and configuration variables are static.
For each individual heater/cooler, the temperature, duty, or duty fluid
specifications can be made static or dynamic using the check box on
the Dynamics tab, Specs page.
Initialization will fail if the number of zones or specification type

(temperature, duty, or duty fluid) is changed.
Heat Exchanger
The sizing and configuration variables are static. UA and UA reference
flow are static.
7-41
Initialization will fail if the number of zones or TEMA type is changed.
Initialize From for UniSim STE is not supported.
Fired Heater
The sizing and configuration variables are static.
LNG
The sizing and configuration variables are static. The U calculation
method is static.
Initialization will fail if the number of zones or layers is changed.
Initialize From for UniSim PFE is not supported.
Piping Equipment
Mixer
The pressure specification is static. The Product Molar Flow Factor is
dynamic.
Pipe Segment
The sizing and configuration variables are static. If the order of the
fittings is changed, initialization will proceed, but there is likely to be a
bump to the plant operation.
Initialization will fail if the number of segments is changed.
Compressible Gas Pipe

Not supported for USD dynamics - only available in steady-state.
Tee
If splits are used as flow specifications, they are dynamic.
7-42
Valve
The sizing and configuration variables are static. The valve actuator
position is dynamic. Instructor failures of failed actuator and worn trim
are dynamic.
Limit switches are matched between the source and target cases based
on name (so the order does not matter). If a limit switch was included
in the source case but not the target, or its name was changed, a
warning message is displayed.
Relief Valve
The sizing and configuration variables are static. Valve failure is
dynamic.
Rotating Equipment
Centrifugal Compressor or Expander
The sizing and configuration variables are static. The specification
types (head or speed, etc.) are static, but the specification values are
dynamic. Use of electric motor is static, but a warning message is
displayed if it differs between the source and target case.
Reciprocating Compressor
dynamic. Variable clearance volumes are dynamic. Enabling variable
clearance volumes, and use of electric motor are static, but a warning
message is displayed if they differ between the source and target case.
Centrifugal Pump
displayed if they differ between the source and target case.
Malfunction state and information are dynamic.
7-43
Positive Displacement Pump

displayed if they differ between the source and target case. Malfunction
state and information are dynamic.
Separation Operations
Separator, 3-Phase Separator, & Tank
The sizing and configuration variables are static.
Level taps are matched between the source and target cases based on
name (so the order does not matter). If a level tap was included in the
source case but not the target, or its name was changed, a warning
message is displayed.
If the volume is changed between the source and target, the holdup
mols are automatically adjusted. This will likely prevent a bump if there
is only vapour holdup. If there is liquid holdup, it is unlikely that the
level controller will be at steady-state.
Shortcut Column
Component Splitter
For all component splitters, the temperature and pressure specifications
are static. For each individual component splitter, the component or TBP
split specifications can be made static or dynamic using the check box
on the Design tab, Splits or TBP Cut Point page.
Column
The sizing and configuration variables (including tray efficiencies and
pressure drop factors) are static.
If the tray volume is changed (diameter or tray spacing) between the
7-44
source and target, the holdup mols are automatically adjusted;

however, there is still likely to be a bump to operation.
Initialization will fail if the number of trays is changed.
Reactors
Conversion Reactor, Equilibrium Reactor, CSTR
The reaction sets, reactions, and kinetic constants are all static. The
sizing and configuration variables are static.
Initialization will fail if the number of reaction sets or reactions is

changed.
mols are automatically adjusted. However, this is likely to affect the
reaction rates, so a bump to operation is expected.
Gibbs Reactor
The Gibbs Reactor is not recommended for use in dynamics.
Plug Flow Reactor

The reaction sets, reactions and kinetic constants are all static. The
sizing and configuration variables are static.
Initialization will fail if the number of reaction sets, reactions, or

segments is changed.
mols are automatically adjusted. However, this is likely to affect the
reaction rates, so a bump to operation is expected.
Solid Separation Operations

Simple Solid Separator, Rotary Vacuum Filter,
Baghouse Filter, Centrifuge
7-45
Screen, Cyclone, Hydrocyclone, Crusher

Initialize From supported for USD dynamics.
Conveyor
The sizing and configuration variables (including belt/bucket,
acceleration speed, length, capacity, etc.) are static. The specified
speed is dynamic.
Boolean Operations
On/Off Delay Gate
Delay Time is static.
If a source case was saved where the input had changed, but the
output had not yet changed because the delay time had not been
reached, the output will change based on the cumulative integration
time since the input was changed. For example, if the delay time is 10
minutes, and a case is saved 5 minutes after the input changes, the
output will change 5 minutes after the Initialize From operation.
Counter Up/Down Gate

Maximum counter, PV alarm, and Desired Output value are static.
Cause and Effect Matrix

The matrix configuration variables (including trip points, delay times,
and descriptions) are static. Input (causes) bypasses and Output
(effects) overrides are dynamic. Whether an Output Local Switch exists
is static; the switch value is dynamic.
Inputs and outputs are matched between the source and target cases
based on name. If a cause or effect was included in the source case but
not the target, or its name was changed, a warning message is
displayed.
7-46
Control Operations
Split Range Controller, Ratio Controller,
PID Controller
The sizing and configuration variables (including controller action,
tuning constants, and pv/sp/op range) are static. Mode, set point, and
output are dynamic. Execution (internal or external) is static, but a
warning message is displayed if they differ between the source and
target case.
For Set Point Ramping, Ramp Duration is static, but Ramp Enable/
Disable and Target SP are dynamic. If a source case was saved where
the ramp had not completed, the ramp will continue at the same slope
after an Initialize From operation.
Autotuning is not supported by Initialize From for USD dynamics.
The malfunction aspect of PV Conditioning is dynamic.
MPC Controller, DMCplus Controller, Profit

Controller
Initialize From not supported for USD dynamics.
Control Valve
The Valve Sizing data (flow type, min/max flow) are all static.
Control OP Port
The Control OP Port data (min/max value) are all static.
Selector Block
The sizing and configuration variables (including mode, and gain/bias)
are static.
7-47
Transfer Function
The sizing and configuration variables (including active transfer
functions) are static.
Digital Point
The sizing and configuration variables (including threshold and dead
band) are static. Mode and output are dynamic.
Spreadsheet
For all spreadsheets, the formulae are static. For each individual
spreadsheet, each user entered constant can be made static or dynamic
using the check box on the Initialize From tab.
Spreadsheets have special handling for Initialize From because they can
operate on values imported from other unit operations and can export
calculated values to other unit operations. Consequently, all
spreadsheets are calculated after the Initialize From operation has
updated the dynamic data for all other unit operations. This eliminates
possible calculation order dependencies once the integrator is started.
Integrator
Integration step size, and options for static head, heat loss, rigorous
non-equilibrium mixed properties, liquid valve choking, and reduced
liquid efficiency for low vapour holdups are static, but a warning
message is displayed if they differ between the source and target case.
Default ambient temperature and the Current Time are dynamic.
Strip Charts
The Sample Interval is static. The historical data is dynamic. The
Logger Size (number of samples) is taken as the maximum between the
source and target case. If the Logger Size or Sample Interval is
different between the source and target cases, all past data will be
based on the Logger Size and Sample Interval of the source case; all
future data will be based on the Sample Interval of the target case.
Strip Charts and Individual Strip Chart Data Selections are matched
between the source and target cases based on name. If a Strip Chart
or Data Selection was included in the source case but not the target, or
7-48
its name was changed, a warning message is displayed.
Extensions
Extension variables are defined in the edf. All variables with the
attribute TriggerSolve are dynamic; variables with NoTriggerSolve are
static.
Steady-State Operations
The following steady-state operations are not supported by Initialize
From for dynamic cases:
• Adjust
• Set
• Recycle
• Balance
7.8.3 Steady-State Usage Notes

Initialize From functionality for steady-state cases will be included in a
future release.
7.8.4 Warning Messages

After the Initialize From operation has completed, an analysis of the
changes are displayed. Note that if there were no error/warning
messages, this view will not be displayed.
Figure 7.47
7-49
7-50 Dynamic/Steady State Modes
Sort by radio buttons Use these radio buttons to sort the

Messages by either: Severity, Object
Type, or Object Name.
Message matrix Displays the messages. If you double-
click on an object name, the view for that
unit operation will be displayed.
Remove selected messages Single or multiple messages can be
selected and removed
Remove messages for Messages for single or multiple objects
selected object can be selected and removed
Remove messages for Messages for single or multiple object
selected type types can be selected and removed
Following the Initialize From operation, if the model is not running at

steady-state, the analysis display can be used to help trace the root of
the problem. The message severity levels have the following meaning:
Fatal The unit operation could not be initialized.

This could be because: the unit operation did
not exist in the source case, it used a different
fluid package, or there was a significant
change to the structure of the unit operation
(such as number of zones in a heat
exchanger), etc.
Critical Only a partial initialization of the object
occurred. This could be because: one
separator models carry over and the other
doesn't, one compressor has a rotational
linker and the other doesn't, etc.
Warning Initialization completed, but some change to
the data or structure of the unit operation is
likely to cause a bump to operation.
7.9 Dynamic/Steady State

Modes
Press the F7 hot key to The Dynamic/Steady State command is located in the Simulation menu
alternate between the two
modes.
and is used to alternate between the two modes.
To switch from Steady State to Dynamic mode, open the Simulation

menu and select the Dynamics command. The Dynamics Assistant
identifies items that require attention:
• Click Yes to open the Dynamics Assistant and view the items.
See Chapter 2 - • Click No to ignore them and continue to Dynamics mode.
Dynamic Tools in the
UniSim Design To switch from Dynamic to Steady State mode, open the Simulation
Dynamic Modeling
Guide for additional menu and select the Steady State command. Switching back to Steady
information about the State mode results in the loss of results:
Dynamics Assistant.
• Click Yes to proceed to steady state.
• Click No to remain in dynamics.
7-50
Your steady state simulation remains unsolved and may require some
adjusting before it fully solves.
7.10 Solver Active/Holding

When inheriting a case When in Steady State mode, you can activate or hold the solver. This is
from someone else,
double-check that the
useful for building your simulation without interruption; you can add
solver is active when your operations and streams without UniSim Design trying to solve them
case is not solving. immediately. By default the UniSim Design solver is active.
Use one of the following methods to place the solver on hold:

• Open the Simulation menu and click the Solver Holding
command.
• Press the F8 hot key.
• Click the Solver Holding icon in the toolbar.
Solver Holding icon
Use one of the following methods to make the solver active:
• Open the Simulation menu and click the Solver Active
command.
Solver Active icon • Click the Solver Active icon in the toolbar.
7.11 Integrator Active/

Holding
When in Dynamics mode, you can activate and hold the integrator. This
is useful for examining the results of your simulation. By default the
integrator is on hold (inactive).
Use one of the following methods to activate the integrator:

• Open the Simulation menu and click the Integrator Active
command.
Integrator Active icon • Click the Integrator Active icon in the toolbar.
Use one of the following methods to put the integrator on hold:

• Open the Simulation menu and click the Integrator Holding
command.
Integrator Holding icon • Click the Integrator Holding icon in the toolbar.
7-51
7-52 Equation Summary
7.12 Equation Summary

The Equation Summary view is used when running a case in Dynamics
mode and it automatically opens when there are dynamic specification
errors in your case.
The Equation Summary option is available only in Dynamics

mode.
Refer to Section 2.3 - To open the view manually, select the Equation Summary View
Equation Summary
View in the UniSim command from the Simulation menu.
Design Dynamic
Modeling Guide for The Equation Summary provides a list of the equations and pressure
additional information.
flow specifications that are currently used in the dynamic simulation. It
also enables you to analyse the simulation to determine if any
equations/specifications are required or redundant.
7.13 Enter Basis Environment

Use the hot key CTRL B to To enter the Basis environment from any flowsheet, use one of the
enter the Basis following methods:
environment from any
environment. • Click the Enter Basis Environment command in the Simulation
menu.
• Click the Enter Basis Environment icon in the toolbar.
Enter Basis Environment

The Basis environment allows you to create and manipulate the fluid
icon package in your simulation. Each object and flowsheet can have its own
Refer to Chapter 5 - fluid package, and flowsheets can contain multiple fluid packages. For
Basis Environment of each fluid package, you can supply the following:
this guide and the UniSim
Design Simulation Basis • Property package
• Components
Basis environment. • Reactions
• User properties
7.14 User Variables

Refer to Chapter 5 - User User Variables increase the internal functionality of objects, such as
Variables in the UniSim streams and unit operations, by dynamically attaching variables and
Design Customization
Guide for additional code to those objects from within the application.
information.
User Variables cannot be distinguished from variables built into UniSim
Design objects so they can be added to spreadsheets, targeted by logic
controllers, and have their values specified by user input.
7-52
For example, you can attach a User Variable to a stream to ensure the
flow rate is specified lower than a certain value, or display a view when
a vessel temperature exceeds a certain value.
User Variables let you attach code (written in a Visual Basic compatible
macro language) to simulation objects and specify when the code is to
execute. This can add extra functionality to any simulation.
Simulation Case User Variables

Select the Simulation Case User Variable command from the Simulation
menu to access the User Variables of Case view.
Figure 7.48
The User Variables listed in this view apply to the current simulation
case.
Flowsheet User Variables

Select the Flowsheet User Variables command from the Flowsheet
menu to access the Flowsheet User Variables view.
Figure 7.49
The User Variables listed in this view apply only to the flowsheet.
7-53
7-54 Importing & Exporting User
7.14.1 Adding a User Variable

You can add a User Variable in either the User Variables of Case view or
the Flowsheet User Variables view.
1. Click the Create a New User Variable icon to add a new User
Variable to your simulation. The Create New User Variable view
appears.
Create a New User
Variable icon 2. On the Create New User Variable view, you can enter code to define
your User Variable. You can also specify the following:
• Type
• Dimensions
• Units
• Macros
• Attributes
• Filters
• Security
• Variable defaults
7.14.2 Editing a User Variable

You can edit a User Variable from either the User Variables of Case view
or Flowsheet User Variables view.
1. Select the User Variable you want to edit from the list of available
User Variables.
2. Click the Edit the Selected User Variable icon. The Edit Existing
Edit the Selected User Code of Case User Variables view appears. This view allows you to
Variable icon modify the code, tag, type and dimensions of the user variable.
7.14.3 Deleting a User Variable

You can delete a user variable from either the User Variables of Case or
Flowsheet User Variables view.
1. Select the User Variable you want to delete from the list of available
User Variables.
2. Click the Delete the Selected User Variable icon. You are
Delete the Selected User prompted to verify the deletion of the User Variable.
Variable icon
7.15 Importing & Exporting

User Variables
From the Simulation menu, select the Import and Export User
7-54
Variables. The Import and Export User Variables view appears.
Figure 7.50
7.15.1 Importing User Variables

1. Click the Select File button. The Open File view appears.
2. Browse to the location of the User Variable file you want to import
(*.hvv).
Select multiple User 4. From the list of available User Variables in the export file, select the
Variables at one time by
User Variable(s) you want to import.
holding down the CTRL
key, and clicking each 5. Click the Import button.
variable you want to
select.
7.15.2 Exporting User Variables

1. Click the User Var Manager Object in the User Variables In Case
group. A list of available User Variables appears.
Select multiple User 2. From the list of available User Variables, select the User Variable(s)
Variables at one time by you want to export.
holding down the CTRL
key and clicking each 3. Click the Export button. The Save File view appears.
variable you want to
select.
4. Specify a name and location for the User Variable file and click
Save.
7.16 Oil Output Settings

Select the Oil Output Settings command in the Simulation menu to
open the Oil Output Settings view. For more information, see Section
6.2.1 - Oil Output Settings View.
7-55
7-56 Object Navigator
7.17 Object Navigator

The Object Navigator is one of the two navigational aids that brings the
multi-flowsheet architecture into a flat space. A simulation containing a
main flowsheet and sub-flowsheets (columns and/or template sub-
flowsheets) is considered as having a directory/file structure.
Flowsheets are directories (with the main flowsheet being the root
directory) with flowsheet elements (streams, operations or utilities)
being the files.
One difference, however, is that sub-flowsheets are both flowsheet

elements (within the main simulation) as well as flowsheets
themselves. How you use the navigational tools is illustrated in the
following subsections.
The Object Navigator enables you to locate and view any flowsheet
element within any flowsheet, or enter the build environment for a
flowsheet.
There are several ways to access the Object Navigator:

• Click the Object Navigator icon in the toolbar.
• Click the Find Object command in the Flowsheet menu.
Object Navigator icon • Press the F3 hot key.
• Right-click in any blank area of the UniSim Design Desktop and
select the Find Object command from the Object Inspect
Object Inspect menu menu.
The Object Navigator view appears.
Figure 7.51
The Flowsheets group Contains objects

contains flowsheets, present in the selected Radio buttons
sub-flowsheets and flowsheet according to designate which
templates. the filter. object types appear
in the Flowsheet
Objects group.
Create your own

filter topic for the
Flowsheet Objects
group.
Opens the
property view of
Enter the Locates and opens the the selected
environment of the property view of a object.
selected flowsheet by named object.
clicking this button.
7-56
Object Filter Tools

Filter Radio Buttons
These radio buttons allow you to filter the Object list by certain types.
For example, click the Streams radio button to view only streams.
Setup Custom Button

Click the ‘+’ symbol to The Setup Custom button lets you to define your own filter criteria.
expand the tree and view
more options. 1. Click the Custom radio button or the Setup Custom button. The
Select Type view appears.
2. Select the stream type or unit operation type.
3. Click OK.
Entering the Build Environment

Enter the Build environment for any flowsheet directly from the Object
Navigator.
1. From the list of available flowsheets, select the flowsheet you want
to enter.
2. Click the Build button.
7.17.1 Locating an Object

The Object Navigator works in a left to right sequence. When you select
a flowsheet, all flowsheet objects (based on the current filter) appear in
the Flowsheet Objects group.
Use this procedure to locate an object and open that object’s property
view.
1. From the list of available flowsheets, select the required flowsheet.
2. In the Flowsheet Objects list, select the object you want to view.
3. Click the View button. The Object Navigator is closed and the
property view for the selected object appears.
Use this procedure to locate an object by name.

1. Click the Find button. The Find Object view appears.
2. Type the name of the object in the Object Name field.
3. Click OK. The Object Navigator is closed and the property view for
the selected object appears.
7-57
7-58 Simulation Navigator
Use any one of the following methods to access a property view for a
specific flowsheet object. For these methods you need to first select the
appropriate flowsheet from the Flowsheets group.
• Select the required object in the Flowsheet Objects group,
then click the View button.
• Double-click the object in the Flowsheet Objects group.
• Click the Find button, then type the name of the object you
want to locate.
You can start or end the search string with an asterisk (*),
which acts as a wildcard character. This lets you find
multiple objects with one search. For example, searching for
VLV* will open the property view for all objects with VLV at
the beginning of their name.
When the required object is located, the Object Navigator closes and
the property view for that stream or operation is opened.
7.18 Simulation Navigator

The Simulation Navigator lets you quickly access the property view of
any stream or unit operation within the case. Within the Simulation
Navigator view, you can modify object parameters the same way you
would in the regular object property view.
To access the Simulation Navigator, select the Simulation Navigator

command from the Flowsheet menu, or click the Simulation Navigator
Simulation Navigator icon icon in the toolbar.
Figure 7.52
Locates the
selected
object on the
PFD.
7-58
In the Filter Types group, use the radio buttons to filter the flowsheet
objects:
• Object Filter. Organizes the attachment tree by object type.
This allows you to access all objects of a given type (i.e., heat
exchangers or vessels) regardless of the flowsheet they exist in.
• Status Filter. View all of the objects by status type: OK, Not
Solved, Warning, Under Specified and Error.
• Flowsheet Filter. All the objects within a column or sub-
flowsheet appear under their respective column/sub-flowsheet
title. The objects in the main flowsheet are listed in alphabetical
order.
For certain objects you may need to enlarge the view horizontally to
see more of the property view. To resize the view, place the mouse
pointer at the view edge, then click and drag the mouse button to
resize the view.
7.18.1 Viewing an Object

To view an object using the Simulation Navigator, do the following.
1. In the Filter Types group, select the required filter radio button.
2. From the list of available objects, select the object you want to
view. Click the ‘+’ symbol to expand the tree and reveal more
selections.
You can use the Object Inspect menu (right-click) to access

commands associated with the current property view.
7-59
7-60 Notes Manager
7.19 Notes Manager

The Notes Manager lets you search for and manage notes for a case.
Figure 7.53
To access the Notes Manager, select the Notes Manager command from
the Flowsheet menu, or press the CTRL G hot key.
View/Add/Edit Notes
To view, add, or edit notes for an object, select the object in the List of
Objects group. Existing object notes appear in the Note group.
Click the icon to expand the tree browser.
• To add a note, type the text in the Note group. A time and date
stamp appears automatically.
• To format note text, use the text tools in the Note group tool bar.
You can also insert graphics and other objects.
• Click the Clear button to delete the entire note for the selected
object. Click the View button to open the property view for the
selected object.
7-60
Search Notes
The Notes Manager allows you to search notes in three ways:
• Check the View Objects with Notes Only checkbox (in the
List of Objects group) to filter the list to show only objects that
have notes.
• Check the Search notes containing the string checkbox,
then type a search string. Only objects with notes containing
that string appear in the object list.
You can change the search option to be case sensitive by
checking the Search is Case Sensitive checkbox.
The case sensitive search option is only available if you are

searching by string.
• Check the Search notes modified since checkbox, then type a

date.Only objects with notes modified after this date will appear
in the object list.
7.20 Optimization Objects

Refer to Chapter 2 - The Optimization Objects view lets you select a generic set of objects
Using UniSim
Design.RTO in the
that identify the underlying flowsheet variable(s) and provide the
UniSim Design RTO necessary configuration information for use by Optim or Estim.
Reference Guide for
additional information.
To access the Select Optimization Object view, select the Optimization
Objects command from the Flowsheet menu.
Figure 7.54
7-61
7-62 Optimization Objects
7.20.1 Adding an Optimization

Object
1. In the Types group, select one of the optimization type radio buttons
to determine the type of optimization object you are creating.
You cannot add an optimization object when the All radio

button is selected.

The Select object and variable view appears.
Figure 7.55
You must select an object 3. Select the object and variable you want to optimize.
before the variable list is
populated. 4. Click OK. The Optimization Object view appears.
5. Specify the parameters defining your optimization object.
7.20.2 Editing an Optimization

Object
1. In the Select Optimization Object view, select the object you want
to edit from the Objects list.
2. Click the Edit button. The Optimization Object view appears.
3. Modify the parameters that define your optimization object.
7-62
7.20.3 Deleting an Optimization

Object
1. Select the object you want to delete from the list of available
objects.
2. Click the Delete button. UniSim Design prompts you to confirm the
deletion.
7.21 Reaction Package

Refer to Chapter 5 - To access the Reaction Package view, select the Reaction Package
Basis Environment in
this guide and Chapter 5
command from the Flowsheet menu.
- Reactions in the
UniSim Design Figure 7.56
Simulation Basis Guide
for more information
about reactions and
reaction sets.
This view allows you to do the following:

• Create, Copy or Edit a Reaction
• Create, Copy or Edit a Reaction Set
• Attach Reactions to a Reaction Set
• Make a Reaction Set available to unit operations in the current
case
The Reaction Package view eliminates the need to return to the

Reaction tab of the Simulation Basis Manager to define reactions and
reaction sets. The only aspect of defining reactions that must be done
in the Simulation Basis Manager is the selection of components.
7.22 Fluid Package/Dynamics

Model
To access the Fluid Packages view, select Fluid Package/Dynamics
7-63
7-64 Workbook
Model from the Flowsheet menu.
For information The Fluid Packages view provides you with a summary of all the fluid
regarding the Dynamic packages in the simulation and lets you view the property package and
Flash options, refer to
Section 2.4.4 - components contained in each flowsheet. Since each flowsheet can
Stability Test Tab of have a different fluid and property package, each can also have a
the UniSim Design
Simulation Basis
different flash option.
Guide.
Figure 7.57
Displays the fluid and

Displays all the property packages for the
flowsheets in the case. selected flowsheet.
Displays the
components in
the selected
flowsheet.
Displays the flash

options for the
current fluid
package.
If flowsheets use the same fluid package, they must also use
the same flash options.
7.23 Workbook
The most concise way to display process information is in a tabular
format. The Workbook is designed for this purpose and extends the
Most of the object concept to the entire simulation. In addition to displaying stream and
properties in UniSim general unit operation information, the Workbook is also configured to
Design are calculated
display information about any object type (streams, pipes, controllers,
based on information
entered by the user, so if separators, etc.).
there are large quantities
of data in your workbook, The Workbook becomes a collection of tabs. For example, if you add a
then the performance of
your simulation may be tab for Separators, then every separator in the flowsheets appear on
affected. the tab with their current value of process variables displayed. To
For example, extensive provide the greatest degree of flexibility, modify the variable set to
calculations such as Heat
of Comb will take longer show the variables of interest, or install multiple tabs for the same
to calculate than simpler object type with varying levels of detail.
calculations.
Not only is the Workbook useful for process analysis, but it was also
developed as an integral element in the building and manipulation of
7-64
your simulation. In addition to displaying the process information, you

can make changes to specifications directly from the Workbook and
calculations are performed automatically. Mechanisms were also built
into the Workbook to provide immediate access to the property view for
an individual stream or operation.
Key Workbook features:

• Workbook tabs can be added/deleted as required.
• Multiple tabs for a given object type are supported, allowing
each tab to display different variables for that object type.
• Objects on a given Workbook tab can be sorted, hidden, or
revealed as required.
The Workbook can be • User defined configurations of variables for given object types
exported entirely or as can be stored independently of the case they were configured
individual tabs. When in, and read back in to any other simulation case.
importing, the user
defined configurations can Each flowsheet in your simulation (main flowsheet and column/
either replace or be
appended to the template sub-flowsheets) has its own Workbook. You can access the
Workbook. Workbook for any flowsheet from any location in your simulation.
7.23.1 Opening a Workbook

There are three ways to open a Workbook:
• Click the Workbook icon in the toolbar.
• Select the Workbooks command in the Tools menu.
Workbook icon • Press the CTRL W hot key to open the Workbook for the current
flowsheet.
The Select Workbook view displays all flowsheets in the simulation. To

open a specific Workbook, select the flowsheet containing the
Workbook and click the View button.
The first time you access the Workbook, it opens to the Material
Streams tab, displaying the basic stream information for all streams
currently installed in the main flowsheet. The default Workbook also
Select Workbook view
7-65
7-66 Workbook
contains tabs for Compositions, Energy Streams, and Unit Ops.
Figure 7.58
The Workbook is a resizable view. Place the mouse

pointer over the border and drag to resize.
In the case of a stream, this field indicates which unit Indicates where
operations the active stream is attached to you can type in
(FeederBlock and ProductBlock indicates that no unit a name to
operation is connected to that side of the stream). In create a new
the case of a unit operation, this field indicates which Stream.
streams are attached to the active unit operation.
When the Workbook is active, the Workbook menu appears in the menu
bar. The commands associated with this menu are described below:
Command Description
Setup Opens the Setup view allowing you to manage the tabs in
your Workbook. Refer to Section 7.23.5 - Managing
Workbook Tabs for more information.
Export Accesses a submenu containing the Workbook and Pages
commands. These commands let you save a Workbook or
page setup. Refer to Section 7.23.7 - Exporting/
Importing Workbook Tabs for more information.
Import Accesses a submenu containing the Workbook and Pages
commands. These commands replace the current
Workbook or page setup with a saved setup. Refer to
Section 7.23.7 - Exporting/Importing Workbook Tabs
Page Scope Accesses a submenu containing the Show/Hide Sub-
Flowsheet Objects commands. This toggle function either
shows or hides sub-flowsheet objects on the active
Workbook tab. Refer to the Viewing Sub-Flowsheet
Objects section for more information.
Order/Hide/ Opens the Order/Hide/Reveal Objects view allowing you to
Reveal sort the Workbook objects either alphabetically or
Objects manually, hide Workbook objects and reveal Workbook
objects. Refer to Section 7.23.6 - Sorting Information
7-66
7.23.2 Installing Streams or

Operations
Streams
Use this procedure to install a new stream using the Workbook.
1. Click the Material Streams tab.
2. Click the **New** cell and type the stream name.
3. Press ENTER or click any other cell to complete your input.
4. Specify values for three of the properties in the table with at least
one of the specifications being temperature or pressure.
5. Specify the composition of the stream.
Operations
Use this procedure to install a new unit operation through the
Workbook:
1. Click the Unit Ops tab.
If the unit operation 2. Click the Add UnitOp button. The UnitOps view appears.
category is known,
selecting the 3. From the list of available unit operations, click the operation you
corresponding radio want to install.
button in the UnitOps
view filters the list of 4. Click Add. The operation is added to the Workbook and the
available unit operations. operation’s property view automatically opens.
For example, click the
Heat Transfer Equipment
radio button to display
only unit operations 7.23.3 Deleting Streams or
Operations
associated with heat
transfer.
Streams
To delete a stream from the Workbook:
To delete objects
without confirmation, • Right-click any cell associated with the stream you want to
clear the Confirm Delete delete. From the Object Inspect menu, select the Delete
checkbox on the command.
Simulation page of the • Click the Name cell associated with the stream you want to
Session Preferences delete and press the DELETE key on the keyboard.
view. Access the
Session Preferences
view by selecting the
A confirmation message appears to ensure the deletion is intended.
Preferences command
from the Tools menu.
7-67
7-68 Workbook
Operations
To delete a unit operation from the Workbook:
• Click any cell associated with the unit operation you want to
delete and click the Delete UnitOp button.
• Click the name cell associated with the unit operation you want
to delete and press the DELETE key on the keyboard.
UniSim Design prompts you to confirm the deletion.
7.23.4 Accessing Streams or

Operations
You can access both streams and unit operations from any of the
default Workbook tabs.
You can access the property view for a material stream directly from
the Material Streams and Compositions tab. From this location, you can
also access the Input Composition view, as well as open the property
view for any operation attached to a stream.
Figure 7.59
Double-click any stream cell

(except the material flow cells) to
open the property view for that
stream.
Double-clicking the material flow

cells opens the Input Composition
view with units defaulted to the
selected flow type.
Double-click DEHYDRATOR to open

its property view.
7-68
Figure 7.60
Double-click or Double-click the

start typing in a name cell to
composition cell to access the
open the Input stream property
Composition view view.
for the stream.
Right-click any
Double-click the cell and select
unit operation the View
name to access its command to
property view. display the
stream property
view.
Access the energy stream property views from the Energy Streams tab.
The property views for unit operations that the energy streams are
attached to can also be accessed through this tab.
Figure 7.61
Double-click a cell to open the energy stream property view.
Right-click a cell
and select the
View command
to access a
property view.
Double-click on
the unit
operation name
to access its
property view.
The same capabilities are found on the Unit Ops tab. You can access
each operation’s property view by double-clicking in the appropriate
row. The property view of any stream that is attached to a unit
7-69
7-70 Workbook
operation can also be opened from this tab.
Figure 7.62
Open the property view of the first stream listed by double-clicking

the Inlet or Outlet cell.
Double-click the Name

cell, Object Type cell or
Calc. Level cell to access
the Unit Operation
property view.
Double-click a name to
access the stream
property view.
Viewing Sub-Flowsheet Objects

From the Workbook in the main environment, you can view information
for sub-flowsheet items. You can display sub-flowsheet information by
clicking the Include Sub-Flowsheets button, located in the lower right
corner of the Workbook. This includes all of the information from the
sub-flowsheet with the information from the main flowsheet.
The command to display The functionality of the Include Sub-Flowsheets button is not global to
sub-flowsheet objects the entire Workbook. With each tab, you can include the sub-flowsheet
must be repeated on each
individual Workbook tab. objects.
To hide the sub-flowsheet objects from a Workbook tab, click the

Include Sub-Flowsheets button again.
You can also view or hide sub-flowsheet items on a Workbook tab by

using the Workbook menu. Under Workbook menu, click Page Scope.
From the submenu, click Show/Hide Sub-Flowsheet Objects as shown
below.
Figure 7.63
7-70
When the Include Sub-Flowsheets option is checked, the

Composition tab only displays results if a common fluid
package is shared by the sub-flowsheets and the main
environment in the case. Since different fluid packages can
contain both different types and numbers of components, it
is not possible to display the compositions in the same form.
Show Name Only

The Show Name Only To simplify the search for a particular stream or unit operation, click the
button is not available on Show Name Only button, located in the lower right corner of the
the Unit Ops tab.
Workbook.
This button hides all object data except the object name. Place the
cursor on the name of the chosen object and click the Show Name Only
button again. All object data re-appears and the cursor remains on the
selected object.
The functionality of the Show Name Only button is not global to the
entire Workbook. With each Workbook tab, you can show either just the
object name or all object data.
7.23.5 Managing Workbook Tabs

The Workbook Setup view lets you add, delete, and customize the tabs
in the Workbook. To access this view, do the following:
• Select the Setup command from the Workbook menu.
• Right-click any of the tabs available in the Workbook. From the
Object Inspect menu click the Setup command.
Figure 7.64
This is the
newly typed
name.
The name of
the Object Type
appears.
Format cells
indicate the
precision of the
variable.
The default variable set for streams is filled.
7-71
7-72 Workbook
Adding a New Tab to the Workbook

1. From the list of available Workbook tabs, click the tab you want to
insert the new tab before.
2. Click the Add button in the Workbook Tabs group to display the
New Object Type view.
3. Click the object that is the subject of the tab. Click the Expand icon
to view the additional sub-items.
4. Click Expand icon next to the Stream object type. The list
appears as shown in the figure below (on the right).
Figure 7.65
The Material and Energy Stream options appear in the list.

5. Click the Material Stream object type and then click the OK
button. You return to the Setup view and the new tab appears in the
list of available tabs.
6. The tab is named Material Streams 1, since there is already a
Material Streams tab. To change the tab name, click the Name field
and type a new name for the tab.
7. Click the Close icon to return to the Workbook. The newly added
tab is active.
Editing a Workbook Tab

Changes cannot be made Use the Setup view to edit the tabs in your Workbook by adding,
to the default Unit Ops deleting, and sorting variables on the Workbook tab. Tabs can contain
Workbook tab.
default variable sets or user-defined variable sets. You can define the
format of each variable and modify the name, type and order of tab
Refer to Section 7.23.6 -
objects.
Sorting Information for 1. From the list of available Workbook tabs, select the tab you want to
details on sorting objects edit.
and variables.
2. Click the New Type button to change the object type of the tab.
The New Object Type view appears.
7-72
3. From the list of available objects, select the new object type, then
click OK.
4. Click the Use Set button to display the Use Set view. This view lets
you select a pre-defined variable set.
Figure 7.66
5. From the list of available variable sets, select the variable set being
used, then click OK. The Use Set view closes and the variables
appear in the Variables table.
6. To add a variable to the variable set, click the Add button in the
Variables group. The Select Variables view appears.
7. Select the variable and any variable specifics you want to add to the
variable set, then click OK.
Figure 7.67
From this list select the variable to add to the Workbook tab.
The Single radio button lets

you add one variable to the
variable set.
The All radio button lets you add

all available variables to the
variable set.
You can change the variable label by typing the new name in the
Description field. This is useful for changing long default names.
Refer to Section 10.5 - 8. To change the format of the variables value, click the Format
Format Editor for details
button The Real Format Editor appears. Specify the number of
on the Real Format Editor.
significant digits, a fixed number of decimal places or have the
variable display in exponential form.
7-73
7-74 Workbook
9. Make any necessary changes and click OK, or click the Use Default
button for application defaults.
Figure 7.68
Deleting Variables
1. From the list of available variables, click the variable you want to
delete. Select more than one variable at a time by holding down the
CTRL key, and clicking each variable.
Deleting a Tab from the Workbook

1. From the list of available Workbook tabs, select the Workbook tab
you want to delete.
2. Click the Delete button in the Workbook Tabs group.
There is no confirmation message when you delete a

Workbook tab and deleted tabs cannot be recovered.
7.23.6 Sorting Information

Workbook tabs can be sorted independently. You can sort the objects on
a tab or you can set the order of the variables on a tab.
Sorting Objects
If the Workbook tab is To sort the objects of a tab:
sorted alphabetically,
objects continue to be 1. Open the Order/Hide/Reveal Objects view using one of the following
sorted automatically methods:
following any ensuing
name changes.
• Select the Order/Hide/Reveal Objects command From the
Workbook Menu.
• Use the Order/Hide/Reveal command in the Object Inspect
menu that appears when you right-click any Workbook tabs or
cells.
7-74
• Click the Order button in the Object group of the Setup view.
Figure 7.69
2. Use the radio buttons in the Sorting group to specify the sorting
method being used.
• Manual. From the list of revealed objects, select an object (or
multiple objects) using the up and down arrows to manually
move the selected object(s) through the list.
• Alphabetical Ascending. Sorts the names of the objects in
Up and down arrows
alphabetically ascending order. Objects with numerical names
are listed first.
• Alphabetical Descending. Sorts the names of the objects in
alphabetically descending order. Objects with numerical names
are listed last.
Hiding & Revealing Objects

To hide an object:
1. From the list of revealed objects, select the object(s) you want to
hide. Select more than one at a time by holding down the CTRL key
and clicking each object being selected.
2. Click the Hide button. The selected object(s) appear(s) in the
Hidden list.
To reveal a hidden object:

1. From the list of hidden objects, select the object(s) you want to
reveal. Select more than one at a time by holding down the CTRL
key and clicking each object being selected.
2. Click the Reveal button. The selected object(s) appears in the
Revealed list.
7-75
7-76 Workbook
Sorting Variables
1. Select Setup from the Workbook menu. The Setup view appears.
2. From the list of available Workbook tabs, select the Workbook tab
with the variables you want to sort.
If variables were added to
the Workbook tab as a 3. Click the Order button in the Variables group. The Move Variables
group (i.e., component view appears as shown on the left.
molar flows), then you
cannot move these 4. From the list of available variables, select the variable(s) you want
individually, but only as a to move. Select more than one at a time by holding down the CTRL
group. key and clicking each variable being selected.
5. Click the Up Arrow or Down Arrow icon.
7.23.7 Exporting/Importing
Workbook Tabs
Move Variables view
UniSim Design allows you to import and export Workbook information.
This same Workbook setup can then be used in other simulation cases.
Exporting a Workbook
1. From the Workbook-Export sub-menu, select the Workbook
command. The Save File view appears.
The format for the *.wrk 2. Specify a name and location for your Workbook file.
files does not change for
an exported Workbook 3. Click Save.
or individual exported
pages. This means
existing *.wrk files are
completely backwards Exporting a Workbook Tab
and forwards
compatible, as well as 1. From the Workbook-Export sub-menu, select the Pages
interchangeable for command. The Export Pages view appears.
Workbook or Workbook
page importing.
Figure 7.70
Click the Select All

button to checked all of
the checkboxes. 2. Click the Export checkbox by the name of the tab you want to
Click the Deselect All export.
button to unchecked all of
the checkboxes. 3. Click the Export button. The Save File view appears.
4. Specify a name and location for your Workbook file and click Save.
7-76
Importing a Workbook
1. From the Workbook-Import sub-menu, select the Workbook
command. The Open File view appears.
2. Browse to the location of your Workbook file (*.wrk).
The imported Workbook replaces the existing one.
Importing a Workbook Tab

A unique-naming function 1. From the Workbook-Import sub-menu, select the Pages
is available to distinguish command. The Open File view appears.
imported pages from pre-
existing pages with the 2. Browse to the location of your Workbook file (*.wrk).
same name.
The imported Workbook tabs are added to the existing

Workbook.
7.24 PFD
The Process Flow Diagram (PFD) is the default view when you first
enter the Simulation environment. The PFD provides the best
representation of the flowsheet as a whole. Using the PFD gives you
Any PFD in the simulation
can be accessed from any immediate reference to the progress of the simulation currently being
location in the Simulation built, such as what streams and operations are installed, flowsheet
environment by clicking connectivity, and the status of objects.
the PFD icon or using the
CTRL P hot key.
The PFD is the default view that appears when you enter the
Simulation environment. You can change the Simulation
environment default view in your Session Preferences. Refer
to Section 12.2.3 - Desktop Page for additional information.
In addition to graphical representation, you can build your flowsheet

within the PFD using the mouse to install and connect objects. A full set
of manipulation tools is available so you can reposition streams and
operations, resize icons, or reroute streams. All of these tools are
designed to simplify the development of a clear and concise graphical
process representation.
For information
regarding manipulating The PFD also possesses analytical capabilities. You can access property
PFDs, see Section 10.3 views for streams or operations directly from the PFD, or install custom
- Editing the PFD.
Material Balance Tables for any or all objects. Complete Workbook
7-77
7-78 PFD
pages can also be displayed on the PFD and information is automatically

updated when changes are made to the process.
There are several ways you can track a specific variable throughout the
PFD, including replacing stream name labels or designating a colour to
represent a variable range.
Every flowsheet (or sub-flowsheet) has its own PFD, so you can access
any flowsheet’s PFD from any location. You can also use the multi-
flowsheeting architecture to provide clear and concise representations
of complex simulations. Instant access to the sub-flowsheet PFD is
available through Object Inspect menu of the main flowsheet’s PFD.
7.24.1 Custom PFD Notebook

You can customize the PFD into a Notebook by adding new tabs. Using
multiple tabs allows for flexibility when dealing with large and complex
flow diagrams. For example, one PFD can be used as the main tab for
the entire process, while subsequent tabs deal with more specific areas.
Notebooks are also useful when you want each PFD to have a distinct
colour scheme for an identical object’s setup.
Installing a New PFD

Each PFD is an To add a new PFD to the Notebook:
independent element in
that objects can be 1. From the PFD menu, select Add a PFD. The Add a PFD view
moved or hidden appears.
without changing the
appearance of the other
tabs. However, when Figure 7.71
multiple PFDs exist, an
object added to one PFD
appears on all PFDs.
2. In the New PFD Name field, type the name of your PFD.
Cloning a PFD produces an 4. If you want your new PFD to be a clone of an existing PFD, check
exact duplicate of the
the Clone from Existing PFD checkbox. From the list of available
selected PFD.
PFDs, select the PFD you want to clone and click OK. If you just
want to create a new blank PFD, ensure the Clone from Existing
PFD checkbox is unchecked.
7-78
A new tab appears with the specified name and the new PFD becomes
the active view.
Deleting a PFD
You cannot recover a Unlike the deletion of a single object, deleting a PFD removes it from
deleted PFD. the Notebook, but does not remove the associated objects from the
simulation case.
1. Click the PFD tab that you want to delete.
2. Do one of the following:
• Select Delete this PFD from the PFD menu.
• Right-click the PFD tab, and select Delete this PFD.
The delete option is not available if there is only one PFD in

the Notebook.
Renaming a PFD
If the name of the PFD is not changed when it is added, or if the name
of the original PFD is not suitable, it can be changed.
1. Make the PFD active by selecting its tab.
2. Select Rename this PFD from the PFD menu. The PFD Name view
appears.
3. In the Current PFD Name field, type the new name of the PFD.
4. Click the Close icon to return to the PFD.
7.24.2 Locating Objects in PFD

The Select Objects command in the PFD Object Inspect menu enables
you to find objects in the PFD.
To access the locating option in the PFD:

1. Open the PFD of the simulation case.
2. Right-click in any empty area of the PFD to access the Object
Inspect menu.
3. Click the Select Objects command.
7-79
7-80 PFD
The Select Objects view appears.
Figure 7.72
You can select the

appropriate radio
button to filter the
objects in the
Objects To Select
list.
4. Select the object you want from the list and click the OK button.
The object you are looking for will be selected on the PFD and will
have a blinking white frame around it.
7.24.3 Flowsheet Analysis Using

the PFD
After installing your streams and operations in the PFD, you need to
supply specifications. Specifications are entered using the Workbook or
an object’s property view. Property views are accessed through the
PFD, so you can keep the PFD open while supplying the necessary
object information. Tables containing specified variables for streams
and operations can also be installed in the PFD.
Accessing Stream & Operation Property

Views
You can also press the V Open the property views directly from the PFD by double-clicking the
or E key to open the
property view of a single
object icon. Also, you can right-click on an object’s icon and select View
selected object in the PFD Properties from the Object Inspect. menu that appears, as shown in the
view.
7-80
following figure.
Figure 7.73
Unit Operation Object

Inspect menu
Stream Object
Inspect menu
View the property view for a stream by double-clicking the stream icon
or by right-clicking any portion of the line that represents the stream
and selecting the View Properties command from the Object Inspect
menu.
You can also use the Object Status Window to open property views.
Move the cursor to the thick border (directly above the status bar at the
Refer to Section 1.3 - bottom of the Desktop) and it changes to a vertical line with two
Trace Window for details
arrowheads. Click and hold the mouse button while dragging the cursor
about these windows. upward to expand the Object Status and Trace Windows.
The left pane is the Object Status Window and contains status
messages for the various streams and operations. By double-clicking a
message, the property view for the associated object appears.
The Object Status Window option is not available after the

case solves. At this point, all object status messages are OK
and are no longer displayed in the window.
Deleting Streams & Operations

You can delete streams and operations from the case in the PFD by
doing either of the following:
• Select the object being deleted and press the DELETE key on
the keyboard.
7-81
7-82 PFD
• Right-click the object and select Delete from the Object Inspect
menu, as shown on the left.
Using either method, you are prompted to confirm the deletion of the
object. If multiple objects are being deleted at once, you must confirm
each deletion.
Deleting an object is a global function, so if an object is

deleted from a PFD, it is removed not only from all PFDs, but
from the simulation case.
Fly-by Information
The controls for the Fly-by You can view Information related to an object by placing the cursor over
are found in the Session
Preferences. Refer to
its associated icon. A small box listing the object name and the current
Section 12.2.5 - Tool values of key variables appears. This box is called a Fly-by. The Fly-by
Tips Page for more of a heat exchanger is shown below.
information.
Figure 7.74
7.24.4 Access Column or Sub-

Flowsheet PFDs
Right-clicking a column (or sub-flowsheet template) in the main PFD
displays an Object Inspect menu similar to the one for streams and
operations, but with the addition of two options:
• Open PFD command opens the separate column or sub-
flowsheet PFD into the case (main) environment.
• Show sub-FlowSheet Objects command displays all sub-
flowsheet objects (streams, unit operations, tables, text, etc.) in
the main flowsheet. This allows all sub-flowsheet streams and
operations to be viewed and accessed from the main PFD
without entering the sub-flowsheet environment.
7-82
Figure 7.75
A reasonable arrangement of icons on the PFD

should be preserved using the Show sub-
FlowSheets option, however, for complex sub-
flowsheets the icon layout can become crowded
and may need to be re-arranged manually.
Appearance of sub- To hide sub-flowsheet objects displayed in the main PFD, right-click the
flowsheet stream tip within
main flowsheet PFD. tip of any sub-flowsheet stream connected to the main flowsheet. The
tip of the stream has a small square visible. When you right-click, the
Hide sub-FlowSheet Objects command appears. Clicking this command
hides all associated sub-flowsheet objects.
Column Sub-Flowsheet
The external view of the Column resides in the main PFD. Only the
external streams of the Column appear (i.e., Inlet, Outlet, and Energy
streams), however, the Column has a unique PFD that displays the
complete representation of the column flowsheet internal view,
including reboilers and condensers.
The Column PFD displays the Columns internal streams, such as Boilup
and Reflux. Also, in the Column PFD, the Column stages appear.
When the column PFD is accessed from the main flowsheet,

you are not able to modify internal sub-flowsheet
connections. You must enter the column sub-flowsheet to
perform such tasks as adding or deleting objects and
breaking stream connections.
7.24.5 Opening Controller Face

Plates
Controllers can also be right-clicked like streams, operations, and
columns. The commands available are the same as those associated
with the other operations, except for the addition of the Face Plate
command. Selecting this command opens the face plate of the selected
controller.
7-83
7-84 PFD
7.24.6 PFD Colour Schemes

By viewing the colour schemes on the PFD, you can retrieve specific
information about your case. The type of information that is available
Colour Scheme icon
depends on the selected colour scheme.
For example, in default mode, a unit operation can be red, indicating a

serious status message associated with the object. The red status can
indicate that the object requires the attachment of a material or energy
stream. The benefit of the colour scheme in the PFD is greatly enhanced
if the Object Status Window is also open. The object colour combined
with the information provided in the Object Status Window is helpful.
Each PFD can have its own distinct colour scheme.
There are three colour scheme options supplied with UniSim Design:
Scheme Description
Default The colour of unit operations and streams is changed to
Colour reflect the status of the object. Unit Ops are red if a serious
Scheme message is in the Object Status Window, outlined in yellow
if a warning message exists, and completely grey if the
object has solved. A Stream icon appears light blue if
unsolved and dark blue if solved.
PFD default colours can be changed on the Colours page of
the Session Preferences view. Refer to Section 12.6.1 -
Colours Page.
7-84
Scheme Description
HYSIM Streams and unit operation icons are shown as wire frames
Colour and the colours can be changed. Right-click an object and
Scheme click the Change Colour command. The colour palette
appears and a new colour can be selected. Select an
existing colour or click the Define Custom Colours button to
customize a colour. After a colour is selected, click the OK
button. The new colour for the wire frame appears.
Simultaneously change the colour of multiple wire frames
by selecting all of the required objects.
Query Colour The value of a specified variable can be monitored for all
Scheme material streams. You can select five colours and an
associated variable range for each.
For the example given in the figure above, the top colour
(Colour 1) appears for material streams that have a
temperature greater or equal to 300°C. Colour 2 represents
streams ranging from 200 to 300°C, etc. The last colour
(Colour 5) is shown for streams that have temperatures
below 0°C. Refer to the following sections for information
about working with query colour schemes.
The Temperature colour scheme (shown in the Colour
Scheme drop-down list when the PFD is accessed), is a
Query scheme.
Selecting/Changing a Colour Scheme

The Default Colour Scheme is active when the PFD is first accessed.
There are two ways of switching to another scheme:
• Click the Colour Scheme icon in the toolbar. The PFD Colour
Schemes view appears. From the Current Scheme drop-down
list, select a colour scheme. Click the Close icon to return to
Colour Scheme icon the PFD.
Figure 7.76
• Click the colour scheme drop-down list located in the PFD

toolbar. Select a colour scheme from the list.
When the simulation case is saved, the active colour scheme for each
7-85
7-86 PFD
PFD is also stored.
The Delete this Scheme and Edit this Scheme buttons appear
for query colour schemes only.
Adding a Query Colour Scheme

You can add a colour scheme that tracks a key material stream variable
throughout the PFD.
1. Click the Colour Scheme icon in the toolbar. The PFD Colour
Schemes view appears.
2. Click the Add a Scheme button. The Select Query Variable view
appears.
3. From the list of available variables, select the variable you want to
monitor. Some variables require a qualifier such as the Comp Mole
Frac variable, which requires a component from the list of variable
specifics.
4. Click the OK button. The Edit PFD Colour Scheme view appears.
5. Input the appropriate values in the variable range fields.
Figure 7.77
Variable
range fields
Colours that
represent the
variable
ranges.
For details about available 6. To change the colour of the variable range, double-click a colour to
colour scheme changes, access the colour palette. Changes can also be made to the scheme
refer to the Editing a
Query Colour Scheme
name and to the variable.
section. 7. Click the Close icon to return to the PFD Colour Schemes view.
The new colour scheme is active.
8. Click the Close icon to return to the PFD.
Deleting a Query Colour Scheme

Edit and Delete buttons
appear only when a Query Schemes view appears.
Colour Scheme is selected. 2. Select a colour scheme from the Current Scheme drop-down list.
7-86
3. Click the Delete this Scheme button.
Ensure the correct scheme is selected before deleting. You

cannot recover deleted schemes.
Editing a Query Colour Scheme

Schemes view appears.
2. Select a colour scheme from the Current Scheme drop-down list.
3. Click the Edit this Scheme button. The Edit PFD Colour Scheme
view appears as shown previously in Figure 7.77.
4. In this view, edit the scheme name, query variable, variable ranges,
and variable range colours. Refer to Adding a Query Colour
Scheme in the previous section for more information.
Only one colour can be 5. After all changes are made to the query colour scheme, click the
changed at a time. Close icon to return to the PFD Colour Schemes view.
6. Click the Close icon on the PFD Colour Schemes view to return to
the PFD.
7.24.7 Column Tray Section

Display
In the column sub-flowsheet, you can right-click the individual
components of the Column, (i.e., Tray Section, Condenser, and
Reboiler). The Object Inspect menu of the Tray Section provides two
additional commands: Show Trays and Compress/Expand as shown
below.
Figure 7.78
7-87
7-88 PFD
Click the Show Trays command to open the Stage Visibility view.
Figure 7.79
When this radio button is When this radio button is

selected, the Column appears selected, you can compress
showing each tray. For the column tray section
instance, a 10-tray column displayed on the PFD.
shows trays 1 through 9 on
the PFD.
Instead of individually
This group can only be checking all the checkboxes,
accessed when the Selected use these buttons to check
Expansion radio button is or uncheck all the stages in
selected. the Column.
UniSim Design always draws
the column showing the first Check the checkbox for each
and last stages, as well as tray you want to display on
feed and draw stages. the PFD.
If the tray section shown Click the Expand option to expand the column to the full size, showing
is compressed, the all trays. Click the Compress option to compress the column to the
command at the bottom of
the menu is Expand. If the settings in the Stage Visibility view. Only the selected trays will appear.
section is fully expanded,
the command is
Compress.
7.24.8 PFD Tables
Workbook Table
You can display any full Workbook tab as a table on the PFD except for
the Unit Ops tab. All information on the Workbook tab is shown in the
table and is automatically updated when changes occur in the
flowsheet.
Add a Workbook Table to the PFD

1. Right-click to open the PFD Object Inspect menu and select Add
Workbook Table. The Select Workbook Page view appears.
7-88
2. Click the name of the tab being added, then click the Select button
as shown below. After the Workbook table is added, click and drag it
to the necessary location.
Figure 7.80
The Select Workbook

Page view appears.
When you right-click a Workbook table, the Object Inspect menu

shows the following options:
• Hide. Hides the Workbook table.
• Change font. Changes the font of the text in the table.
• Change colour. Opens the colour palette so you can change the
text and table border colours.
Object Variable Table

Install a table for any object in the PFD by right-clicking the stream or
operation and clicking the Show Table command as shown on the left.
Each object type has a default variable list associated with it. The table
shown below is for a Separator.
Figure 7.81
Table Object Inspect

You can modify the list of displayed variables as well as the table
menu appearance by right-clicking to access the table’s Object Inspect menu.
7-89
7-90 PFD
The menu contains the following options.
Table Menu Item Description

View Properties Access the various properties available for the tables.
Refer to the Table Properties section for more
information.
Hide Table Temporarily hides the table on the PFD. When the table
is revealed, it is shown as it was before it was hidden.
Change Font Change the font for the text in the table.
Change Colour Open the colour palette, and change the colour of the
Table text, and the Table outline.
Table Properties
Open the PFD Table view A default variable set is provided for each stream and operation type.
by double-clicking on To modify this list, right-click the table and select the View Properties
the table.
command.
If you are having trouble
selecting a table, ensure
you are not in Attach Figure 7.82
mode.
Adds a new variable to the table.
Removes the
selected
variable from
the table.
Toggle the checkboxes on and off to control

these table properties.
Use the buttons available in the view to modify the variable set for the
7-90
table. Refer to the following table for the description of each button:
Button Button Usage Views/Remarks

Add To add a variable to the table:
Variable 1. Click the Add Variable button. The Variable
Navigator view appears.
2. From the list of available variables, select the
variable you want to add to the table.
3. Make any required changes to the variable
description in the Description field.
4. Click the OK button to return to the PFD Table
view.
The Add Variable option lets you add only one
variable at a time to the table.
Remove Removes variables from the table. Select the You are not prompted to confirm the
Var variable(s) to remove from the table, and click the deletion of variables from the table.
Remove Var button.
(Select more than one variable at a time by
holding down the CTRL key, and then clicking
each variable you want to select.)
Use Set Default variable sets are provided and accessed by
clicking the Use Set button. The list of variable
Sets differs, depending on the object type
(stream, unit operation, column, or controller). To
change to a default variable set, select variable set
from the list and click the OK button.
The sets shown above applies to a

Separator.
Sort Use to reorganize variables in the table. Select the
item(s) being moved in the Move Variable field. In
the Before field, select the variables that are in
front of the variables being moved and click the
Move button.
(Select more than one variable at a time by
holding down the CTRL key, and then clicking
each variable you want to select.)
Format Change the numeric format of a value. Select the

variables being changed from the table. Click the
Format button. The Real Format Editor appears.
In the Format Specification group, select one of
the following radio buttons: Exponential, Fixed
Decimal Point, or Significant Figures. Each
selection requires you to specify information to
fully define the selection. Click the OK button.
Save Set Specify the New Set Name and click the OK
As button.
The Specs Only button is turned off by default. Click this checkbox to
7-91
7-92 PFD
show all entries that are currently not specified.
Column Tables
Column tables can be added in the main PFD and in the column PFD.
The tables that can be added are different in each environment. For
example, in the main PFD, the column table consists of variables
relating to the column tray section.
Inside the column PFD, you can add tables for the Condenser, Tray
Section, and Reboiler. Each of these can contain variables specific to
that unit operation.
7.24.9 Multi-Pane PFDs

Since each pane is simply The PFD interface lets you separate the PFD view into a maximum of
a different representation
of the same flowsheet, you
four panes. Each pane contains all the information concerning the PFD
can interact across views (operations, connections, etc.), but operates independently in regards
(i.e., connect an operation to the area of focus, zooming, etc.
in one pane to an
operation in another).
New panes are created using the manipulation areas located on the
border edge of the PFD view. The PFD appears with two borders. The
manipulation areas are located along the inner border. You can split the
PFD once vertically and once horizontally, for a maximum of four panes.
Each new view created has its own zoom and scroll buttons. This
enables the various views to be at different zoom levels or locations in
the overall PFD.
When the cursor is over the inside border of the PFD, the pointer
changes into the multi-pane sizing tool. The symbol is rotated 90
Multi-Pane Sizing Tool degrees for a horizontal split.
The Status Bar in the bottom of the screen indicates the way the split
7-92
occurs.
Figure 7.83
Each Pane has its own zoom

and scrolling buttons.
1. The third and fourth

Panes can be created by
dragging from the inside
border of the PFD view.
2. By placing the cursor over the inside border and then dragging
horizontally, a second pane of the PFD is created.
There is no requirement for how you initially split the PFD. For
description purposes, a pane that is created by dragging vertically is
termed a horizontally split pane, and one created by dragging
horizontally is termed a vertically split pane.
Working Across Panes

By creating split panes The splitting of PFD panes becomes useful when the PFD is complex
within your PFD, you can
focus on different
and you cannot view it entirely without making it very small. When
sections of the PFD in working in split panes, remember that all the panes interact with each
each pane. other. This enables you to connect an operation or stream in one pane
to an operation or stream in another. Changes made in one pane are
made in the overall PFD.
Resizing or Closing Split Panes

After panes are created, they can be resized or closed. To resize or
close a vertically split pane, place the cursor on the right side of the
Multi-Pane Sizing Tool
vertical scroll bar (in the split pane). The Multi-Pane Sizing Tool cursor
cursor appears. Drag it left or right to change the existing view. Dragging to
the extreme right closes the right split pane.
The procedure is the same for a horizontally split pane, except you
place the cursor on the bottom of the horizontal scroll bar and drag up
or down. Dragging to the bottom of the original PFD view closes the
7-93
7-94 Column
bottom split pane.
7.24.10 Exchanging XML Files

When you right-click any object on the PFD, the Object Inspect menu
appears. When you select the XML Data Exchange command, the XML
File Exchange view appears.
Figure 7.84
Select the information you want to export or import to the XML file by
clicking the corresponding checkboxes. You can change the file name
and location by entering the new name and file path in the File field.
Click the Export button to export the file, the Import button to import
the file, or the Cancel button to close the view without completing the
action.
7.25 Column
This menu item only appears inside the Column environment. The
options under Column are as follows:
Command Description
Refer to Chapter 8 - Column Runner View the Column Runner.
Column in the UniSim
Run Start the Column Solver.
Design Operations
Guide for more Reset Reset the Column Solver.
information.
Refer to Chapter 14 -
Utilities in the UniSim
7.26 Utilities
Design Operations The utilities available in UniSim Design are a set of useful tools that
Guide for detailed
information about the interact with your process, providing additional information or analysis
individual utilities. of streams or operations. A utility becomes a permanent part of the
7-94
flowsheet, automatically recalculating when conditions change in the

stream or operation that it is attached to. You can access utilities using
any of the following methods:
• Select the Utilities command from the Tools menu.
• Press the CTRL U hot key.
• Click the Create button on the Utilities page of the
Attachments tab of a Stream property view.
7.26.1 Adding Utilities

There are two ways to add utilities: add the utility in the Stream
property view or in the Available Utilities view.
Using the Stream Property View

Not all utilities can be 1. Open the property view for the stream, and go to the Utilities page
accessed through the of the Attachments tab.
Stream property view.
Figure 7.85
2. Click the Create button. The Available Utilities view appears as

shown on the left.
3. From the list of available utilities, select the utility you want to add.
4. Click the Add Utility button. The property view for the selected
utility appears.
5. Define the utility as required.
Using the Flowsheet

Available Utilities view for 1. Select the Utilities command from the Tools menu. The Available
stream
7-95
7-96 Utilities
Utilities view appears.
Figure 7.86
List of
available
utilities.
List of utilities
that are
added to the
case.
2. There are two categories of utilities, one is UniSim Design utilities,

the other is UniSim Thermo Utilities. User can chose from the
categories by click the radio button.
• UniSim Design Utilities - UniSim Design native utilities
• UniSim Thermo Utilities - Plug in utilities (as COM object),
mostly from third party
Figure 7.87
3. From the list of available utilities, select the utility you want to add.
7-96
4. Click the Add Utility button. The property view for the selected
utility appears.
5. Define the utility as required.
7.26.2 Viewing Utilities

The property view for a There are two ways to view utilities: from the Stream property view or
Utility can remain open the Available Utilities view.
independently of the
stream to which it is

attached.
1. Open the property view for the stream.

2. Click the Attachments tab and select the Utilities page.
3. From the list of attached utilities, select the utility you want to edit.
4. Click the Edit button. The property view for the selected utility
appears.
Using the Flowsheet

1. Select the Utilities command from the Tools menu. The Available
2. From the list of attached utilities, select the utility you want to edit.
3. Click the View Utility button. The property view for the selected
utility appears.
7.26.3 Deleting Utilities

There are two ways to delete the utilities: delete the utility in the
Stream property view or in the Available Utilities view.

1. Open the property view for the stream.
2. Click the Attachments tab, then select the Utilities page.
3. From the list of attached utilities, select the utility you want to
delete.
4. Click the Delete button. You are not prompted to confirm the
deletion of a utility.
Using the Flowsheet

1. Select the Utilities command from the Tools menu. The Available
7-97
7-98 Simulation Balance Tool

2. From the list of attached utilities, select the utility you want to
delete.
3. Click the Delete Utility button. You are not prompted to confirm
the deletion of a utility.
7.27 Simulation Balance Tool

The Simulation Balance Tool provides a mechanism to check for
material and energy balances within the UniSim Design flowsheets as a
means to gain a rapid overview of all entities which could be sources of
flowsheeting errors although a flowsheet has status converged.
You can select to validate any combination of mass, mole, heat and
component balances and using absolute and relative tolerances.
7.27.1 Accessing the Simulation

Balance Tool
There are two ways to access the Tool:
• Via the Tools menu - from the Tools menu, select Simulation
Balance Tool
Figure 7.88
• Via the status bar - locate the Overall Mass Balance Monitor
status bar on the bottom right of UniSim Design and double-click
on it
Figure 7.89
7-98
7.27.2 Setup Tab

On the Setup page, you can set the parameters for the Simulation
Balance Tool as well as perform other functions.
Figure 7.90
Setting the Simulation Balance Tool

Parameters
1. In the Tolerance Settings matrix, specify the tolerances and
balances to use in the validation.
2. Component Balance Option - shows up when Component
Balance is checked. Select either all components or a single
component to perform the component balancing.
3. Check to Include “Feed” and “Product” streams within Sub-
Flowsheets in balancing of Sub-Flowsheets, if desired.
4. Check to Run the Simulation Balance Tool Always, if desired.
When checked, the Tool automatically runs on changes to the
flowsheets. If not checked, the Run button must be pressed to re-
calculate.
5. Check to Include Multiple Stream Connections such as non-
physical feed streams (multiple stream connections or exported
column streams), if desired.
6. You can also perform the following functions:
• Press the Recalculate Flowsheet button to force the flowsheet to
recalculate.
• Press the Run button to run the Simulation Balance Tool.
7-99
7.27.3 Summary Tab

The Summary tab consists of two pages selectable via a radio button:
• General Summary page
• Detailed Summary page
General Summary
The General Summary page lists all operations that exceed the
specified tolerances.
Figure 7.91
The table gives the following information about the operations:

• Flowsheet - the operation's parent flowsheet
• Type - the UniSim Design object type of the operation
• Name - the operation name. You can double-click on the name
to bring up the operation view.
• Mass Error - the mass balance error in both absolute and
percentage values
• Mole Error - the molar balance error in both absolute and
percentage values
• Energy Error - the heat balance error in both absolute and
percentage values
• Comp Error - the component molar balance error in both
absolute and percentage values
• Comp Name - the name of the component with the highest
molar balance error
There are also columns with arrows (', , <->) indicating balance errors
that exceed the specified tolerances.
7-100
Grouping/Sorting
The table of results can be grouped by Flowsheet and Type as well as
sorted based on the other columns. The grouping and sorting by name
is done in ascending order while the rest of the sorting is in descending
order.
Detailed Summary
The Detailed Summary page gives a unit by unit balance summary in
both tolerance bases.
Figure 7.92
To view a particular unit operation summary, select the Flowsheet and

Operations and the balance summary table will update appropriately.
Double-clicking on the Name of the Operation will bring up the
operation property view.
Detailed Comp Balance - opens up the Detailed Component Balance

Summary view displaying either a single component or all the
components (depending on the Component Balance Option selection)
7-101
along with their molar balance errors in absolute and relative bases.
Figure 7.93
7.27.4 Feeds/Products Tab

The Feeds/Products tab contains the overall mass, mole and heat
balance errors in both absolute and relative units, a list of feed streams
and a list of product streams along with their flow information.
Figure 7.94
The Overall Balance Errors are displayed in different colours:

• Green - the errors are within the specified tolerances
• Red - the errors exceed the specified tolerances
The Feeds and Products tables list the following information about the
streams:
• Flowsheet - the stream's parent flowsheet
7-102
• Name - the name of the stream. Double-clicking the name will

bring up the stream's property view.
• Type - the UniSim Design object type of the stream
• Mass Flow - the stream's mass flow rate
• Mole Flow - the stream's molar flow rate
• Heat Flow - the stream's heat flow rate
There is also a row of total flows for the Feed streams and a row of total
flows for the Product streams.
Comp Balance Summary - opens up the Component Balance

Summary view displaying either a single component or all the
components (depending on the Component Balance Option selection)
along with their molar balance errors in absolute and relative bases.
You can also sort based on the component name, absolute and relative
error.
Figure 7.95
7.27.5 Transitions Tab

The Transitions page summarizes all interconnecting streams and
transition points that have exceeded the specified tolerances. The
interconnecting streams and transition points include external to
internal streams at flowsheet boundaries, stream cutters and recycles.
7-103
Click the Hide Ignored checkbox to hide everything with status-ignored.
Figure 7.96
Figure 7.97
The table contains the following columns:

• Parent Sheet - the parent flowsheet of the external stream
• External Stream - the name of the external stream. Double-
clicking will bring up the stream's property view.
• SubFlowsheet - the parent flowsheet of the internal stream
• Internal Stream - the name of the internal stream. Double-
clicking will bring up the stream's property view.
• Unit Op - the name of the unit operation that the
interconnecting stream is attached to. Double-clicking will bring
up the operation's property view.
• Type - the UniSim Design object type of the unit operation
7-104
• Transfer Basis - the transfer basis used in the interconnecting

stream
• Status - the solving status of the operation
• Mass Error - the mass balance error in both absolute and
percentage values
• Mole Error - the molar balance error in both absolute and
percentage values
• Heat Error - the heat balance error in both absolute and
percentage values
• Temp Error - the temperature balance error in both absolute
and percentage values
• VFrac Error - the vapour fraction balance error in both absolute
and percentage values
• Comp Error - the component molar balance error in both
absolute and percentage values
• Comp Name - the name of the component with the highest
molar balance error
7.27.6 Adjust/Recycle Tab

The Adjust/Recycle page lists all recycle and adjust operations along
with their statuses and defined tolerances.
Figure 7.98
The following information is displayed:

• Flowsheet - the parent flowsheet of the operation
• Name - the name of the operation. Double-clicking brings up
the operation's property view.
• Ignored - toggle to ignore the calculation of the unit operation
• Flow Sensitivity - the specified flow sensitivity value of the
recycle operation
7-105
• Energy Sensitivity - the specified energy sensitivity value of

the recycle operation
• Comp Sensitivity - the specified component sensitivity value of
the recycle operation
• Tolerance - the defined tolerance of the adjust operation
Grouping/Sorting
The recycles and adjusts tables can be grouped by Flowsheet as well as
sorted by Name and Status. The grouping and sorting is done in
ascending order.
7.27.7 Alerts Tab

All operations with a solve status that is Not OK are populated on this
page.
Figure 7.99
The table contains the following columns:

• Flowsheet - the parent flowsheet of the operation
• Name - the name of the operation. Double-clicking brings up
the operation's property view.
• Type - the UniSim Design object type of the operation
Grouping/Sorting
The table of results can be grouped by Flowsheet and Type as well as
sorted based on Name and Status. The grouping and sorting is done in
ascending order.
7-106
7.27.8 Status Bar Monitoring

The enhancement to the status bar includes helpful information on the
status of the overall mass balance as run by the Simulation Balance
Tool and an overall status monitor that summarizes the status window
list.
Figure 7.100
Overall Mass Balance Monitor

The overall mass balance monitor gives the status of the overall mass
balance when the Simulation Balance Tool is run. Double-clicking on
this will bring up the Simulation Balance Tool property view.
Overall Status Monitor

This status monitor gives a summary of the flowsheeting status as
captured in the Status Window List.
7-107
7-108
UniSim Design Objects 8-1
8 UniSim Design Objects
8.1 Installing Objects .......................................................................... 3

8.1.1 Install Objects Using the Object Palette....................................... 3
8.1.2 Install Objects Using the Flowsheet Menu .................................... 5
8.2 Defining Objects ............................................................................ 5

8.2.1 Defining a Material Stream ........................................................ 5
8.2.2 Defining an Energy Stream........................................................ 6
8.2.3 Defining a Separator ................................................................ 6
8.2.4 Defining a 3-Phase Separator .................................................... 7
8.2.5 Defining a Tank........................................................................ 7
8.2.6 Defining a Single Outlet Vessel................................................... 8
8.2.7 Defining a Cooler/Heater........................................................... 8
8.2.8 Defining an LNG Exchanger ....................................................... 9
8.2.9 Defining a Heat Exchanger .......................................................10
8.2.10 Defining an Air Cooler ............................................................10
8.2.11 Defining a Pump ...................................................................11
8.2.12 Defining a Compressor/Expander.............................................11
8.2.13 Defining a Compressible Gas Pipe ............................................12
8.2.14 Defining a Pipe Segment ........................................................13
8.2.15 Defining a Valve ....................................................................13
8.2.16 Defining a Relief Valve ...........................................................14
8.2.17 Defining a Mixer....................................................................14
8.2.18 Defining a Tee.......................................................................15
8.2.19 Defining a Simple Solid Separator............................................15
8.2.20 Defining a Cyclone.................................................................16
8.2.21 Defining a Hydrocyclone.........................................................16
8.2.22 Defining a Rotary Vacuum Filter ..............................................17
8.2.23 Defining a Baghouse Filter ......................................................17
8.2.24 Defining a Screen..................................................................18
8.2.25 Defining a Conveyor ..............................................................18
8.2.26 Defining a Crusher ................................................................19
8.2.27 Defining a CSTR ....................................................................19
8.2.28 Defining a PFR ......................................................................20
8.2.29 Defining a Gibbs Reactor ........................................................21
8.2.30 Defining an Equilibrium Reactor...............................................22
8.2.31 Defining a Conversion Reactor.................................................22
8.2.32 Defining a Neutralizer ............................................................23
8.2.33 Defining a Crystallizer ............................................................24
8.2.34 Defining a Precipitator ...........................................................24
8.2.35 Defining a Distillation Column .................................................25
8-1
8-2 UniSim Design Objects
8.2.36 Defining a Refluxed Absorber Column.......................................26

8.2.37 Defining an Absorber Column..................................................27
8.2.38 Defining a Reboiled Absorber Column.......................................28
8.2.39 Defining a Liquid-Liquid Extractor ............................................29
8.2.40 Defining a Three Phase Distillation Column ...............................30
8.2.41 Defining a Component Splitter ................................................31
8.2.42 Defining a Short Cut Distillation Column ...................................31
8.2.43 Defining an Adjust.................................................................32
8.2.44 Defining a Set.......................................................................33
8.2.45 Defining a Recycle .................................................................33
8.2.46 Defining a PID Controller........................................................33
8.2.47 Defining a Selector Block........................................................34
8.2.48 Defining a Balance.................................................................34
8.2.49 Defining a Digital Point...........................................................34
8.2.50 Defining a Transfer Function Block ...........................................35
8.2.51 Defining an MPC Controller .....................................................35
8.2.52 Defining a Centrifuge .............................................................35
8.2.53 Defining a Virtual Stream .......................................................36
8-2
8.1 Installing Objects

Objects are used to build your simulation within the Simulation
environment. The objects in UniSim Design are streams, unit
operations or logical operations.
To enter the Simulation environment click the Enter

Simulation Environment button or Return to Simulation
Environment button in the Basis environment.
Refer to Section 7.23.2 - Use one of the following methods to install an object in your simulation:
Installing Streams or
Operations for more • Object Palette
information about the • Workbook
Workbook. • Flowsheet-Add Stream/Add Operations command
8.1.1 Install Objects Using the

Object Palette
To access the Object Palette (shown on the left), select the Object
Palette command from the Flowsheet menu or press F4.
In the main flowsheet or template sub-flowsheet, all available

operations are accessible through the palette except those specifically
used with Columns (tray sections, reboilers, etc.). A modified palette
appears when you are inside the column sub-flowsheet.
The Object Palette is organized into the following categories from top to
bottom:
• Streams
• Vessels (2- and 3-phase separators, tank, Single Outlet Vessel)
• Heat Transfer Equipment
• Rotating Equipment (compressor, expander, pump)
• Piping Equipment
• Solids Handling
• Reactors
• Prebuilt Columns
• Shortcut Columns
• Sub-flowsheets
• Logicals
General Buttons
Icons on the object palette with an arrow pointing to the right are
8-3
8-4 Installing Objects
general icons (for example, the Solid Ops and General Reactors icons)
that contain sub-palettes. These sub-palettes display icons for more
specific unit operations.
As shown on the left, you can install a Gibbs Reactor, an Equilibrium

Reactor, or a Conversion Reactor from the sub-palette.
Each operation has an icon and when you place the cursor
over it, a fly-by description of the operation appears below
the cursor and in the Status Bar.
You can install a single stream, unit operation, or logical operation from
The General Reactors icon
the palette by double-clicking the icon for the object you want to install.
opens this sub-palette.
The object appears in the PFD and the object’s property view is opened.
You can also use the Add icon at the top of the palette to install objects.
1. Click the icon for the object you want to install.
2. Click the Add icon to insert the object in the PFD and open the
Add icon
object’s property view.
You can install same objects multiple times by using the Lock feature.
1. Click the Lock icon at the top of the palette.
2. Click the icon of the object you want to install.
Lock icon 3. Click the Add icon to install the object. With the lock feature active,
you can add as many of the selected object as required without
having to click the object icon.
4. To switch objects when in locked mode, click the Cancel icon or click
a different icon.
Cancel icon 5. To stop the Lock function, click the Lock icon again.
You can also use the drag-and-drop method of installing objects.

1. Click the icon of the object you want to install.
2. Move the cursor into the PFD. Your cursor changes to an arrow with
a ‘+’ and a white outline of the object.
3. In the PFD, click where you want to install the object. The object
appears in the PFD (but the object’s property view does not
automatically open).
8-4
8.1.2 Install Objects Using the

Flowsheet Menu
Installing Streams
Press the F11 hot key to Select the Add Stream command from the Flowsheet menu to install a
quickly add a stream to stream in the PFD. When the stream is added to the PFD, the stream
the simulation.
property view opens.
Material streams can only be added using the Add Stream command in
the Flowsheet menu whereas energy streams can only be added using
the Object Palette.
Installing Operations
Press the F12 hot key to 1. Select the Add Operation command from the Flowsheet menu.
quickly open the UnitOps The UnitOps view appears.
view.
Use the radio button in 2. From the list of available unit operations, click the operation you
the Categories group to want to install.
filter the list of available
unit operations making it 3. Click the Add button. The operation is added to the PFD. The
easier to find the operation property view automatically opens.
operation you want to
add.
The following sections show steps for providing the
minimum amount of information required to define each
object. For more information, refer to the UniSim Design
Operations Guide.
8.2 Defining Objects

8.2.1 Defining a Material Stream
1. Add a material stream to your simulation.
2. Click the Worksheet tab, then select the Conditions page.
If you specify a vapour 3. Specify values for three of the properties in the table. (One of the
fraction of 0 or 1, the specifications must be temperature or pressure.)
stream is assumed to be
at the bubble point or 4. Select the Composition page.
dew point. You can also
specify vapour fractions 5. Click the Edit button. The Input Composition for Stream view
between 0 and 1. appears.
6. Click the radio button in the Composition Basis group that indicates
the basis of your composition.
8-5
8-6 Defining Objects
7. In the table, specify the composition of your stream.

8. Click the Normalize button to ensure that your composition adds
up to 1.0 in the case of fractions.
9. Click Ok.
The status bar at the bottom of the property view turns green and
displays the message ‘Ok’.
8.2.2 Defining an Energy Stream

1. Add an energy stream to your simulation.
2. Click the Stream tab.
3. In the Heat Flow field, specify a value for heat flow.
The status bar at the bottom of the property view turns green and
displays the message ‘Ok’.
8.2.3 Defining a Separator

1. Add a separator to your simulation.
2. Click the Design tab, then select the Connections page.
3. In the Inlets list, click the <<stream>> field and a drop-down list
appears.
4. From the drop-down list, select a pre-defined stream or click the
space at the top of the list and type the name of the stream.
5. Repeat step 4 if you have multiple feed streams.
6. In the Vapour Outlet drop-down list, select a pre-defined stream or
click the space at the top of the list and type the name of the
stream.
7. In the Liquid Outlet drop-down list, select a pre-defined stream or
click the space at the top of the list and type the name of the
stream.
When all of the attached streams are properly defined the status
bar at the bottom of the property view turns green and displays the
message ‘Ok’. If the separator cannot solve, the status bar is yellow
and displays the requirements needed to solve.
8. (Optional) Click the Parameters page and enter a pressure
difference in the Delta P field. (A default value of zero is entered for
new separators, so it solves without entering a value, but you may
not get the results you want.)
8-6
8.2.4 Defining a 3-Phase

Separator
1. Add a 3-phase separator to your simulation.
appears.
space at the top of the list and type the stream name.
6. In the Vapour drop-down list, select a pre-defined stream or click
the space at the top of the list and type the stream name.
7. In the Light Liquid drop-down list, select a pre-defined stream or
click the space at the top of the list and type the stream name.
8. In the Heavy Liquid drop-down list, select a pre-defined stream or
When all of the attached streams are properly defined, the status
message ‘Ok’. If the 3-phase separator cannot solve, the status bar
is yellow and displays the requirements needed to solve.
difference in the Delta P field. A default value of zero is entered for
new separators so it solves without entering a value, but you may
not get the results you want.
8.2.5 Defining a Tank

1. Add a tank to your simulation.
3. In the Inlets list, click the <<stream>> field to display a drop-down
list.
message ‘Ok’. If the tank cannot solve, the status bar is yellow and
displays the requirements needed to solve.
8-7

8.2.6 Defining a Single Outlet

Vessel
1. Add a Single Outlet Vessel to your simulation.
3. In the Inlets list, click the <<stream>> field to display a drop-down
list.
6. In the Outlet drop-down list, select a pre-defined stream or click the
space at the top of the list and type the stream name. When all of
the attached streams are properly defined, the status bar at the
bottom of the property view turns green and displays the message
'Ok'. If the Single Outlet Vessel cannot solve, the status bar is
yellow and displays the requirements needed to solve.
8.2.7 Defining a Cooler/Heater

1. Add a cooler or heater to your simulation.
3. In the Inlet drop-down list, select a pre-defined stream or click the
5. In the Energy drop-down list, select a pre-defined stream or click
For your cooler/heater to solve, you must have enough
specifications to calculate the pressure drop across the cooler/
heater and the duty of the cooler/heater.
6. Click the Parameters page and enter a pressure difference for the
cooler/heater in the Delta P field. The value is automatically
calculated if the pressure is specified for both inlet and outlet
streams.
8-8
7. In the Duty field, specify a duty for the cooler/heater. The value is
automatically calculated if the temperature is specified for both the
inlet and outlet streams.
When the cooler/heater is solved, the status bar at the bottom of the
property view turns green and displays the message ‘Ok’. If the cooler/
heater cannot solve, the status bar is yellow and displays the
requirements needed to solve.
8.2.8 Defining an LNG Exchanger

1. Add an LNG exchanger to your simulation.
3. In the Inlet Streams column, click the <<stream>> field and a
drop-down list appears.
5. Repeat step 4 for the remaining inlet streams.
6. In the Outlet Streams column, click the <<stream>> field and a
drop-down list appears.
8. Repeat step 7 for the remaining outlet streams.
9. In the Pressure drop column, specify a pressure drop for both the
hot side and cold side.
10. Click the Parameters (SS) page.
11. Specify the rating method being used; heat leak/loss, pass
intervals, step type or pressure profile.
For the LNG exchanger to solve, the number of independent
unknowns must be equal to the number of constraints (Degrees of
Freedom = 0). The LNG considers constraints to be parameters
such as UA, Minimum Temperature Approach, or a temperature
difference between two streams.
12. Click the Specs (SS) page.
13. Click the Add button to display the Spec view. In this view you can
add a specification to define your LNG exchanger.
14. Repeat step 13 until the degrees of freedom equal zero.
When the degrees of freedom equal zero and all attached streams are
properly defined, the status bar at the bottom of the property view
turns green and displays the message ‘Ok’. If the LNG exchanger
cannot solve, the status bar is yellow and displays the requirements
needed to solve.
8-9
8.2.9 Defining a Heat Exchanger

1. Add a heat exchanger to your simulation.
3. In the Tube Side Inlet drop-down list, select a pre-defined stream or
4. In the Tube Side Outlet drop-down list, select a pre-defined stream
or click the space at the top of the list and type the stream name.
5. In the Shell Side Inlet drop-down list, select a pre-defined stream or
6. In the Shell Side Outlet drop-down list, select a pre-defined stream
7. Click the Parameters page.
8. Where applicable, specify the rating method being used; heat leak/
loss, heat curve details, tube and shell side pressure differences and
UA.
For the heat exchanger to solve, the number of independent
unknowns must equal the number of constraints (Degrees of
Freedom = 0). The heat exchanger considers constraints to be
parameters such as UA, Minimum Temperature Approach, or a
temperature difference between two streams.
9. Click the Specs page.
10. Click the Add button to display the Spec view. In this view, add a
specification to define your heat exchanger.
11. Repeat step 10 until degrees of freedom equal zero.
When the degrees of freedom equal zero and all attached streams are
turns green and displays the message ‘Ok’. If the heat exchanger
cannot solve, the status bar is yellow and displays the requirements
needed to solve.
8.2.10 Defining an Air Cooler

For information about the 1. Add an air cooler to your simulation.
UniSim CFE tab in the Air
Cooler view, refer to 2. Click the Connections page of the Design tab.
Section 4.1 - Air Cooler
in the UniSim Design
Operations Guide. space at the top of the list and type the stream name.
For your air cooler to solve, you must have enough specifications to
calculate the pressure drop across the air cooler and the duty of the
air cooler.
8-10

6. In the Delta P field, specify a pressure difference for the air cooler.
This value automatically calculates if the pressure is specified for
both the inlet and outlet streams.
7. Specify either the overall UA or the temperature of the outlet air.
This value automatically calculates if the temperature is specified
for both the inlet and outlet streams.
When all of the attached streams are properly defined, the status bar at
the bottom of the property view turns green and displays the message
‘Ok’. If the air cooler cannot solve, the status bar is yellow and displays
the requirements needed to solve.
8.2.11 Defining a Pump

1. Add a pump to your simulation.
For your pump to solve, you must have enough specifications to
calculate the pressure drop across the pump and the duty of the
pump.
6. Click the Parameters page. Do one of the following:
• In the Delta P field, specify a pressure difference for the pump.
This value is calculated if the pressure is specified for both the
• In the Duty field, specify the duty for the pump. These values
are calculated if the pressure is specified for both the inlet and
outlet streams.
‘Ok’. If the pump cannot solve, the status bar is yellow and displays the
8.2.12 Defining a Compressor/

Expander
1. Add a compressor/expander to your simulation.
8-11

For your compressor/expander to solve, you must have enough
specifications to calculate the duty of the compressor/expander.
6. Select the Parameters page.
7. In the Duty field, specify a duty for the compressor/expander. This
value is calculated if the pressure is specified for both the inlet and
outlet streams.
‘Ok’. If the compressor/expander cannot solve, the status bar is yellow
8.2.13 Defining a Compressible

Gas Pipe
1. Add a compressible gas pipe to your simulation.
6. In the Delta P field, specify a pressure difference for the
compressible gas pipe. By default a value of 25 kPa is specified.
Click the Add Section 7. Click the Rating tab, then select the Sizing page.
button to add multiple
pipe sections. 8. Specify the following parameters:
• Length
• Elevation Change
• Cells
• Roughness
• External Diameter
• Internal Diameter
9. Select the Heat Transfer page, then specify the ambient
temperature and overall heat transfer coefficient in the
corresponding fields.
8-12
‘Ok’. If the compressible gas pipe cannot solve, the status bar is yellow
8.2.14 Defining a Pipe Segment

1. Add a pipe segment to your simulation.
7. From the list of available pipe flow correlations, select the
correlation you want to use.
8. In the Delta P field, specify a pressure difference for the pipe
segment. This value is calculated if the pressure is specified for both
the inlet and outlet streams.
9. Click the Ratings tab, then select the Sizing page.
10. Click the Append Segment button to display a pipe segment in the
table. Specify the Fitting/Pipe, Length, and Increments.
11. Click the View Segment button to display the Pipe Info view.
Specify the pipe schedule and diameters.
12. Click the Heat Transfer page.
13. In the Specify By group, click the radio button that describes how
the heat transfer occurs in the pipe segment. Then specify the
corresponding parameters.
Ok. If the pipe segment cannot solve, the status bar is yellow and
8.2.15 Defining a Valve

1. Add a valve to your simulation.
8-13

6. Specify a pressure difference for the pipe segment in the Delta P
field. This value is calculated if the pressure is specified for both the
‘Ok’. If the valve cannot solve, the status bar is yellow and displays the
8.2.16 Defining a Relief Valve

Both the inlet and outlet 1. Add a relief valve to your simulation.
stream pressures must be
specified for the relief 2. Click the Design tab, then select the Connections page.
valve. 3. In the Inlet drop-down list, select a pre-defined stream or click the
6. In the Set Pressure field, specify the pressure for when the relief
valve begins to open.
7. In the Full Open Pressure field, specify the pressure for when the
relief valve is fully open.
the bottom of the property view is either red or yellow. When the status
bar is yellow, the message ‘Valve is Open’ displays. When the status bar
is red, the message ‘material flows into a closed relief valve’ displays.
This indicates the valve is shut and no material is passing through.
8.2.17 Defining a Mixer

1. Add a mixer to your simulation.
2. Click the Connections page of the Design tab.
appears.
5. Repeat step 4 for the multiple feed streams.
8-14
‘Ok’. If the mixer cannot solve, the status bar is yellow and displays the
8.2.18 Defining a Tee

1. Add a tee to your simulation.
4. In the Outlets list, click the <<stream>> field and a drop-down list
appears.
6. Repeat step 5 for the multiple outlet streams.
7. Select the Parameters page and specify flow ratios for outlet
streams.
‘Ok’. If the tee cannot solve, the status bar is yellow and displays the
8.2.19 Defining a Simple Solid

Separator
1. Add a simple solid separator to your simulation.
4. In the Vapour Product drop-down list, select a pre-defined stream
5. In the Liquid Product drop-down list, select a pre-defined stream or
6. In the Solids Product drop-down list, select a pre-defined stream or
8. In the Delta P field, specify a pressure difference for the solids
separator. By default a value of 0.0 kPa is specified.
9. Select the Splits page, then define your stream split according to
the separation.
8-15
‘Ok’. If the solid separator cannot solve, the status bar is yellow and
8.2.20 Defining a Cyclone

1. Add a cyclone to your simulation.
4. In the Vapour Product drop-down list, select a pre-defined stream or
5. In the Solid Product drop-down list, select a pre-defined stream or
7. In the Particle Efficiency field, specify a value for the particle
efficiency of the cyclone.
8. Select the Solids page.
9. Click the Solid Name field to open the drop-down list. Select the
solid component being separated from the stream.
‘Ok’. If the cyclone cannot solve, the status bar is yellow and displays
8.2.21 Defining a Hydrocyclone

1. Add a hydrocyclone to your simulation.
7. In the Particle Efficiency field, specify a value for the particle
efficiency of the cyclone.
8. Select the Solids page.
9. Click the Solid Name field to open the drop-down list. Select the
solid component being separated from the stream.
8-16
‘Ok’. If the hydrocyclone cannot solve, the status bar is yellow and
8.2.22 Defining a Rotary Vacuum

Filter
1. Add a rotary vacuum filter to your simulation.
6. Click the Rating tab, then select the Sizing page.
7. In the Filter Size group, specify either the filter radius or filter width
in the corresponding field.
‘Ok’. If the rotary vacuum filter cannot solve, the status bar is yellow
8.2.23 Defining a Baghouse Filter

1. Add a baghouse filter to your simulation.
5. In the Solid Outlet drop-down list, select a pre-defined stream or
‘Ok’. If the baghouse filter cannot solve, the status bar is yellow and
8-17
8.2.24 Defining a Screen

1. Add a screen unit operation to your simulation.
4. In the Over Size drop-down list, select a pre-defined stream or click
5. In the Under Size drop-down list, select a pre-defined stream or
6. If the Excess Product Streams check box is checked, the Over Size
Excess (Optional) drop-down list will be active. In the Over Size
Excess (Optional) drop-down list, select a pre-defined stream or
7. If Under Size Excess (Optional) drop-down list is active, in the
Under Size Excess (Optional) drop-down list, select a pre-defined
stream or click the space at the top of the list and type the stream
name.
When all of the attached streams are properly defined and screen
pressure is entered, the status bar at the bottom of the property view
turns green and displays the message 'Ok'. If the screen unit operation
cannot solve, the status bar is red or yellow and displays the
8.2.25 Defining a Conveyor

1. Add a conveyor to your simulation.
2. Click the Design tab then select the Connections page.
3. In the Feed drop-down list, select a pre-defined stream or click the
4. In the Inlet Excess Product drop-down list, select a pre-defined
name.
6. In the Outlet Excess Product drop-down list, select a pre-defined
name.
7. Select the Parameters page. In the Pressure field, specify a pressure
for the Conveyor.
8. Click on the Rating tab, select the Sizing page and define the
parameters for conveyor operation
8-18
9. For dynamic modeling, click the Dynamics tab and specifying the
pressure flow parameters.
10. When all of the attached streams and all required parameters are
turns green and displays the message 'Ok'. If conveyor cannot
solve, the status bar is yellow and displays the requirements
needed to solve.
8.2.26 Defining a Crusher

1. Add a crusher to your simulation.
5. In the Energy (Optional) drop-down list select a pre-defined stream
7. In the Pressure Drop field of the General Parameters group, specify
a value for the pressure drop of the crusher.
8. If crushing one pseudo solid component into another pseudo solid
component click the Inter-Component Crushing check box.
9. In the Parameters for Rousseau's Model group, for each solid
component or solid group specify the Number of Sizes, Breakability,
and Deviation.
10. If the power consumption is required, check the Calculate Power
and Bond Theory check boxes.
11. Specify the BWI for each solid component or solid group in the Bond
Work Index group.
'Ok'. If the crusher cannot solve, the status bar is yellow and displays
8.2.27 Defining a CSTR

1. Add a CSTR to your simulation.
appears.
8-19

10. In the Volume field, specify the volume of the reactor.
11. Click the Reactions tab, then select the Details page.
12. From the Reaction Set drop-down list, select the reaction set being
used.
13. From the Reaction drop-down list, select the reaction being used.
‘Ok’. If the CSTR cannot solve, the status bar is yellow and displays the
8.2.28 Defining a PFR

1. Add a PFR to your simulation.
appears.
8. In the Delta P field, specify the pressure drop across the reactor.
9. Click the Reactions tab, then select the Overall page.
10. From the Reaction Set drop-down list, select the reaction set being
used.
11. Select the Details page.
14. In the Tube Dimensions group, specify two of the three following
parameters:
• Total Volume
• Length
8-20
• Diameter
When all of the attached streams are properly defined, the

status bar at the bottom of the property view turns green and
displays the message ‘Ok’. If the PFR cannot solve, the status
bar is yellow and displays the requirements needed to solve.
8.2.29 Defining a Gibbs

Reactor
1. Add a Gibbs reactor to your simulation.
3. In the Inlets list, click the <<stream>> field and a drop-
down list appears.
4. From the drop-down list, select a pre-defined stream or click
6. In the Vapour Outlet drop-down list, select a pre-defined
stream or click the space at the top of the list and type the
stream name.
7. In the Liquid Outlet drop-down list, select a pre-defined
stream or click the space at the top of the list and type the
stream name.
When all of the attached streams are properly defined, the
status bar at the bottom of the property view turns green
and displays the message ‘Ok’. If the Gibbs reactor cannot
solve, the status bar is yellow and displays the requirements
needed to solve.
8. (Optional) Select the Parameters page and enter a
pressure difference in the Delta P field. A default value of
zero is entered for new Gibbs reactors, so your Gibbs reactor
solves without entering the value, but you do not get the
desired results.
9. (Optional) Click the Reactions tab, then select the Overall
page. In the Reactor type group, click the corresponding
radio button for the type of reactor you want to model.
8-21
8.2.30 Defining an Equilibrium

Reactor
1. Add an equilibrium reactor to your simulation.
appears.
9. From the Reaction Set drop-down list, select the reaction set
containing the reaction being used.
message ‘Ok’. If the equilibrium reactor cannot solve, the status bar
11. (Optional) Click the Design tab, then select the Parameters page.
In the Delta P field, enter a pressure difference. A default value of
zero is entered for new equilibrium reactors, so your equilibrium
reactor solves without entering a value, but you may not get the
desired results.
8.2.31 Defining a Conversion

Reactor
1. Add a conversion reactor to your simulation.
appears.
8-22

9. From the Reaction Set drop-down list, select the reaction set
containing the reaction being used.
message ‘Ok’. If the conversion reactor cannot solve, the status bar
11. (Optional) Click the Design tab, then select the Parameters page.
In the Delta P field, enter a pressure difference. A default value of
zero is entered for new conversion reactors, so your conversion
reactor solves without entering a value, but you do not get the
desired results.
8.2.32 Defining a Neutralizer

This operation can only be 1. Add a neutralizer to your simulation.
used with a fluid package
that uses the electrolyte 2. Click the Design tab, then select the Connections page.
property package. 3. In the Inlets list, click the <<stream>> field and a drop-down list
appears.
6. In the Reagent Stream drop-down list, select a pre-defined stream
message ‘Ok’. If the neutralizer cannot solve, the status bar is
9. (Optional) Select the Parameters page. In the Delta P field, enter
a pressure difference. A default value of zero is entered for new
neutralizers, so your neutralizer solves without entering a value, but
you may not get the desired results.
8-23
8.2.33 Defining a Crystallizer

This operation can only 1. Add a crystallizer to your simulation.
be used with a fluid
package that uses the 2. Click the Design tab, then select the Connections page.
electrolyte property 3. In the Inlets list, click the <<stream>> field and a drop-down list
package.
appears.
message ‘Ok’. If the crystallizer cannot solve, the status bar is
crystallizers, so your crystallizer solves without having to enter a
value, but you may not get the desired results.
8.2.34 Defining a Precipitator

This operation can only 1. Add a precipitator to your simulation.
be used with a fluid
package that uses the 2. Click the Design tab, then select the Connections page.
electrolyte property 3. In the Inlets list, click the <<stream>> field and a drop-down list
package.
appears.
6. In the Reagent Stream drop-down list, select a pre-defined stream
message ‘Ok’. If the precipitator cannot solve, the status bar is
8-24

precipitators, so your precipitator solves without entering a value,
but you may not get the desired results.
8.2.35 Defining a Distillation

Column
Use this procedure to define a distillation column using the input
expert:
1. Add a distillation column to your simulation.
2. In the # Stages field, specify the number of trays in the column.
3. In the Inlet Streams list, click the <<stream>> field and a drop-
down list appears.
6. In the Inlet Stage column, use the drop-down list to select what
stage the stream is entering the column.
7. In the Condenser Energy Stream drop-down list, select a pre-
defined stream or click the space at the top of the list and type the
stream name.
8. In the Condenser group, click the condenser type radio button that
you want to use for the column. Depending on the selection, select
a pre-defined stream or click the space at the top of the list and
type the stream name for the following:
• Total. Specify in the Ovhd Liquid Outlet drop-down list.
• Partial. Specify in the Ovhd Outlets drop-down list.
• Full Rflx. Specify in the Ovhd Vapour Outlet drop-down list.
9. In the Reboiler Energy stream drop-down list, select a pre-defined
name.
10. In the Bottoms Liquid Outlet drop-down list, select a pre-defined
name.
11. Click the Next button.
12. In the Condenser Pressure field, enter the pressure in the
condenser.
13. In the Condenser Pressure Drop field, enter the pressure drop
across the condenser.
14. In the Reboiler Pressure field, enter the pressure in the reboiler.
8-25
16. (Optional) Enter temperature values for the condenser, top stage,
and reboiler.
18. (Optional) Enter a product flow rate and a reflux ratio.
19. Click Done to display the Column property view.
For the distillation column to solve, the number of independent
unknowns must be equal to the number of constraints (Degrees of
Freedom = 0). The distillation column considers constraints to be
parameters such as product draw rates, tray temperatures, or reflux
ratio.
20. Click the Design tab, then select the Specs page.
Select the Monitor page of 21. Click the Add button to display the Spec view. In this view, add a
the Design tab to see the specification to define your distillation column. Repeat this step until
degrees of freedom the
column has and manage
the degrees of freedom equal zero.
the specifications in the
column. When the degrees of freedom equal zero and all attached streams are
turns green and displays the message ‘Ok’. If the distillation column
cannot solve, the status bar is red and displays ‘Unconverged’.
8.2.36 Defining a Refluxed

Absorber Column
Use this procedure to define a refluxed absorber column using the input
expert:
1. Add a refluxed absorber column to your simulation.
2. In the # Stages field, type the number of trays for the column.
3. In the Bottom Stage Inlet drop-down list, select a pre-defined
name.
stream name.
5. In the Condenser group, click the condenser type radio button being
used for the column. Depending on the selection, in the Ovhd Liquid
Outlet drop-down list, select a pre-defined stream or click the space
at the top of the list and type the stream names for the following:
• Total
• Partial
• Full Rflx
name.
8-26

8. In the Condenser Pressure field, enter the pressure in the
condenser.
9. In the Condenser Pressure Drop field, enter the pressure drop
across the condenser.
10. In the Reboiler Pressure field, enter the pressure in the reboiler.
12. (Optional) Enter temperature values for the condenser, top stage,
and reboiler.
14. (Optional) Enter the product flow rate and a reflux ratio.
For the refluxed absorber column to solve, the number of
independent unknowns must equal the number of constraints
(Degrees of Freedom = 0). The refluxed absorber column views
constraints as parameters such as product draw rates, tray
temperatures, or reflux ratio.
Select the Monitor page 17. Click the Add button to display the Spec view and add a
of the Design tab to see
specification to define your refluxed absorber column.
how many degrees of
freedom the column has 18. Repeat step 17 until the degrees of freedom equal zero.
and manage the
specifications in the
column. When the degrees of freedom equal zero and all attached streams are
turns green and displays the message ‘Ok’. If the refluxed absorber
column cannot solve, the status bar is red and displays ‘Unconverged’.
8.2.37 Defining an Absorber

Column
Use this procedure to define an absorber column using the input
expert:
1. Add an absorber column to your simulation.
2. In the # Stages field, type the number of trays in the column.
3. In the Top Stg Reflux group, click the radio button being used for
the column. Depending on the selection, select a pre-defined
names for the following:
• Liquid Inlet. Specify in the Top Stage Inlet drop-down list.
• Pump-around. Specify in the Draw Stage drop-down list.
4. In the Bottom Stage Inlet column, use the drop-down list to specify
at what stage the stream enters the column.
8-27
5. In the Ovhd Vapour Outlet drop-down list, select a pre-defined

name.
name.
8. In the Top Stage Pressure field, type the pressure in the
condenser.
9. In the Bottom Stage Pressure field, enter the pressure in the
reboiler.
11. (Optional) Enter temperature values for the top stage and bottom
stage.
When all attached streams are properly defined, the status bar at the
bottom of the property view turns green and displays the message ‘Ok’.
If the absorber column cannot solve, the status bar is red and displays
‘Unconverged’.
8.2.38 Defining a Reboiled

Absorber Column
Use this procedure to define a reboiled absorber column using the input
expert:
1. Add a reboiled absorber column to your simulation.
3. In the Top Stg Reflux group, click the radio button being used for
the column. Depending on the selection, select a pre-defined stream
or click the space at the top of the list and type the stream name for
the following:
• Liquid Inlet. Specify in the Top Stage Inlet drop-down list.
• Pump-around. Specify in the Draw Stage drop-down list.
4. In the Ovhd Vapour Outlet drop-down list, select a pre-defined
name.
5. In the Reboiler Energy Stream drop-down list, select a pre-defined
name.
name.
8-28

8. In the Top Stage Pressure field, type the pressure in the
condenser.
9. In the Reboiler Pressure field, type the pressure in the reboiler.
11. (Optional) Enter temperature values for the top stage and reboiler.
13. (Optional) Enter a boilup ratio.
For the reboiled absorber column to solve, the number of
independent unknowns must equal the number of constraints
(Degrees of Freedom = 0). The reboiled absorber column views
constraints as parameters such as product draw rates, tray
temperatures, or reflux ratio.
Click the Monitor page 16. Click the Add button to display the Spec view. From this view, add a
of the Design tab to see specification to define your refluxed absorber column.
how many degrees of
freedom the column has 17. Repeat step 16 until degrees of freedom equals zero.
and manage the
specifications in the
column.
When the degrees of freedom equal zero and attached streams are
turns green and displays the message ‘Ok’. If the reboiled absorber
column cannot solve, the status bar is red and displays ‘Unconverged’.
8.2.39 Defining a Liquid-Liquid

Extractor
Use this procedure to define a liquid-liquid extractor using the input
expert:
1. Add a liquid-liquid extractor to your simulation.
3. In the Top Stage Inlet drop-down list, select a pre-defined stream or
4. In the Bottom Stage Inlet drop-down list, select a pre-defined
name.
5. In the Ovhd Light Liquid drop-down list, select a pre-defined stream
6. In the Bottoms Heavy Liquid drop-down list, select a pre-defined
name.
8-29

8. In the Top Stage Pressure field, enter the pressure in the
condenser.
9. In the Bottom Stage Pressure field, enter the pressure in the
reboiler.
11. (Optional) Enter temperature values for the top stage and bottom
stage.
When all attached streams are properly defined, the status bar at the
bottom of the property view turns green and displays the message ‘Ok’.
If the liquid-liquid extractor cannot solve, the status bar is red and
displays ‘Unconverged’.
8.2.40 Defining a Three Phase

Distillation Column
Use this procedure to define a three phase distillation column using the
input expert:
1. Add a three phase distillation column to your simulation.
2. Click one of the following radio buttons for the column you want to
model:
• Distillation
• Refluxed Absorber
• Reboiled Absorber
• Absorber
4. In the Two Liquid Phase Check group, select the stages you want to
check for two liquid phases.
stream name.
7. Use the radio buttons in the Condenser type, Outlet Streams, and
Reflux Streams groups to specify the condenser configuration of the
column.
8. In the remaining drop-down lists, select a pre-defined stream or
10. (Optional) Specify the flow rates for entering and leaving the
condenser.
8-30
11. Click the Next button to display the Input Expert view for the
selected column.
12. Follow the sections outlined for each of the columns above to
complete the three phase distillation column.
8.2.41 Defining a Component

Splitter
1. Add a component splitter to your simulation.
2. In the Inlet Streams list, select a pre-defined stream from the drop-
down list, or click the space at the top of the list and type the
stream name.
4. In the Energy Streams list, select a pre-defined stream from the
drop-down list, or click the space at the top of the list and type the
stream name.
5. Repeat step 4 if you have multiple energy streams.
6. In the Overhead Outlet list, click the <<stream>> field to display
the drop-down list. From the drop-down list, select a pre-defined
name.
7. Repeat step 6 if you have multiple outlet streams.
8. In the Bottoms Outlet drop-down list, select a pre-defined stream or
9. Select the Splits page.
10. Specify the split fraction for each of the overhead streams.
‘Ok’. If the component splitter cannot solve, the status bar is yellow and
8.2.42 Defining a Short Cut

Distillation Column
1. Add a short cut distillation column to your simulation.
3. From the Top Product Phase group, select whether you want the
overhead product to be vapour or liquid.
4. Then specify the following by selecting a pre-defined stream or
clicking the space at the top of the list and typing the stream name:
8-31
• Liquid. Specify in the Distillate drop-down list.

• Vapour. Specify in the Overhead Vapour drop-down list.
5. In the Condenser Duty drop-down list, select a pre-defined stream
6. In the Reboiler Duty drop-down list, select a pre-defined stream or
7. In the Bottoms drop-down list, select a pre-defined stream or click
9. Click the down arrow in the Light Key in Bottoms cell under the
Component column. From the drop-down list of available
components, select the component to use for the light key.
10. In the Light Key in Bottoms cell under the Mole Fraction column,
specify the mole fraction of the key component.
11. Click the down arrow in the Heavy Key in Distillate cell under the
Component column. From the list of available components, select
the component to use for the heavy key.
12. In the Heavy Key in Distillate cell under the Mole Fraction column,
specify the mole fraction of the key component.
13. In the Condenser Pressure field, specify the pressure at the
condenser.
14. In the Reboiler Pressure field, specify the pressure at the reboiler.
15. In the External Reflux Ratio field, specify the external reflux ratio.
‘Ok’. If the short cut distillation column cannot solve, the status bar is
8.2.43 Defining an Adjust

1. Add an adjust to your simulation.
2. In the Adjusted Variable group, click the Select Var button to
display the Select Variable view.
3. Select the object and the variable you want to use and click OK.
4. In the Target Variable group, click the Select Var button to display
the Select Variable view.
6. In the Target Value group, enter either a user specified value or a
value from another object.
7. Click the Start button to start the solver.
8-32
8.2.44 Defining a Set

1. Add a set to your simulation.
2. In the Target Variable group, click the Select Var button to display
the Select Variable view.
4. In the Source Object drop-down list, select a pre-defined stream or
5. Click the Parameters tab.
6. Specify either the multiplier or offset in the appropriate field. The
parameter that is not specified is automatically calculated.
8.2.45 Defining a Recycle

1. Add a recycle to your simulation.
8.2.46 Defining a PID Controller

1. Add a PID controller to your simulation.
2. In the Process Variable Source group, click the Select Var button to
display the Select Variable view.
4. In the Output Target Object group, click the Select OP button to
display the Select OP Object view.
5. Select the object you want to use and click OK.
6. Click the Parameters tab, then select the Configuration page.
7. Click either the Reverse or Direct action radio button.
8. In the Kc field, specify a value for the controller gain.
9. In the Ti field, specify a value for the integral time, if required.
10. In the Td field, specify a value for the derivative time, if required.
11. In the PV Minimum field, specify the minimum process variable
value.
12. In the PV Maximum field, specify the maximum process variable
value.
13. From the mode drop-down list, select one of the following options
for the mode of the controller:
• Man
8-33
• Auto Indicator
• Off
14. In the SP field, specify the set point for the controller.
8.2.47 Defining a Selector Block

1. Add a selector block to your simulation.
2. Click the Add PV button to display the Select Input PV view.
4. Repeat steps #2 and #3 for each process variable you want to use.
5. Click the Select PV button to display the Select Input PV view.
8.2.48 Defining a Balance

1. Add a balance to your simulation.
2. Click the Connections tab.
3. In the Inlet Streams list, click the <<stream>> field to display a
drop-down list. From the drop-down list, select a pre-defined
name.
5. In the Outlet Streams list, click the <<stream>> field to display a
drop-down list. From the drop-down list, select a pre-defined
name.
6. Repeat step 5 if you have multiple outlet streams.
7. Click the Parameters tab.
8. In the Balance Type group, select the balance type you want to use.
‘Ok’. If the balance cannot solve, the status bar is yellow and displays
8.2.49 Defining a Digital Point

1. Add a digital point to your simulation.
3. Select the object you want to use.
4. Click OK.
8-34
8.2.50 Defining a Transfer

Function Block
1. Add a transfer function block to your simulation.
2. In the Transformed PV Target group, click the Select PV button to
display the Select Output PV view.
3. Select the object and the variable you want to use.
4. Click OK.
6. Specify a value for the input variable in the Constant PV field.
8.2.51 Defining an MPC Controller

1. Add an MPC controller to your simulation.
2. In the Process Variable Source group, click the Select PV button to
display the Select Input PV view.
3. Select the object and the variable you want to use.
4. Click OK.
7. Click the Control Valve button to display the Control Valve view.
8. Depending on what type of stream the output object is, specify the
minimum and maximum variables and then close the view.
10. In the PV Min and Max group, specify minimum and maximum
values for the process variables.
8.2.52 Defining a Centrifuge

1. Add a centrifuge to your simulation.
8-35
6. In the Energy drop down list, if you leave it unattached to an energy

stream. The centrifuge will operate at adiabatic condition. If you
choose to add a pre-defined Energy stream or click the space at the
top of the list and type the Energy stream name, you have to either
specify a duty or the centrifuge operation temperature.
8. In the Model Selection drop drown list, select either Laval
(Sediment) or Bird (Sediment) model.
9. In the field of the General Parameters group, specify a value
either for the pressure drop or operating pressure of the
centrifuge. Specify operating temperature if Energy stream is
attached to the centrifuge and duty is not specified.
10. In the Component Separation Efficiency group, for each solid,
specify the efficiency. A default 100% is provided.
11. Select the Split page.
12. In the Split Weight Fraction group, specify a value for Feed
Liquid to Solid Product Stream and Feed Solid to Solid
Product Stream.
14. Specify the sizing values for the centrifuge. For Laval (Sediment)
model, specify number of stacks, Disc Stack Slant Length,
Inner Disc Stack Radius, Outer Disc Stack Radius, Disc Stack
Slant Angle and Rotational Speed. For Bird (Sediment) model,
specify Bowl Radius, Bowl Length, Weir Height and Rational
Speed.
'Ok'. If the centrifuge cannot solve, the status bar is yellow and displays
8.2.53 Defining a Virtual Stream

1. Add a virtual stream to your simulation.
2. Click Connections Tab.
3. In the Reference Stream drop-down list, select a pre-defined
name.
4. In the Target Stream drop-down list, select a pre-defined stream
5. Click the Parameters tab. Transfer Information page will open.
6. The Multiplier and the offset have default values at 1 and 0. The
User can modify it as needed.
When both Reference and target streams are solved according to the
8-36
transfer parameters, the status bar at the bottom of the property view
turns green and displays the message 'Ok', which means the
transformation is completed. If the Virtual stream cannot solve, the
status bar will display the required information needed to solve with
yellow color.
8-37
8-38
Print Options 9-1
9 Print Options
9.1 Introduction .................................................................................. 2
9.2 Printing in UniSim Design .............................................................. 2

9.2.1 Menu Bar Options .................................................................... 3
9.2.2 Printing Datasheets .................................................................. 3
9.2.3 Printing the PFD....................................................................... 5
9.2.4 Printing Plots........................................................................... 5
9.2.5 Printer Setup........................................................................... 6
9.3 Reports.......................................................................................... 7
9.3.1 Creating a Report..................................................................... 8
9.3.2 Editing a Report......................................................................11
9.3.3 Deleting a Report ....................................................................11
9.3.4 Report Format & Layout ...........................................................11
9.3.5 Text Report Format .................................................................12
9.3.6 Specs Only.............................................................................13
9.3.7 Printing & Previewing Reports ...................................................14
9.4 Printing the PFD as a File..............................................................14
9-1
9-2 Introduction
9.1 Introduction
In UniSim Design, you can transcribe process information concerning
your simulation case using printing features. You can create printed
reports ranging from basic data to comprehensive summaries. There
are two primary printing options in UniSim Design:
• Object Specific
• Reports
Object Specific printing relates to the current object of focus in the

simulation case. For instance, if the Separator property view is active,
you can print a Snapshot of that view as seen on your monitor or print
out a Datasheet specific to the unit operation. A Datasheet displays
object related information that can include input specifications and
calculated results. Each object within UniSim Design has at least one
Datasheet available, with many objects also having condensed versions
of the full Datasheet.
Printing reports deal with more extensive information sets. When

creating a report, you collect the Datasheets of multiple objects into
one document. UniSim Design enables you to select any Datasheet for
any object currently in your simulation case. For each report created,
you can customize the page setup.
Both primary printing features are accessed through the menu bar,
however, Object Specific printing is also available through the Object
Inspect menu. By right-clicking the Title Bar of an object, you can
preview and print its associated Datasheet.
The Report view can remain open while you manipulate your flowsheet.
If changes occur that affect the values shown in a Datasheet, you can
easily update the information.
9.2 Printing in UniSim Design

In UniSim Design, you can print information in one of three ways:
Method Description
Refer to Section 9.2.1 - Menu Bar Select one of the options under the File menu.
Menu Bar Options for
Object Right-click the Title Bar of a view and select the Print
details.
Inspect Datasheet command from the menu. This is the same as
menu selecting the Print command from the File menu.
Reports for details on the Report In the Simulation environment, from the Tools menu, select
Report Manager. Manager Reports. This opens the Report Manager view.
9-2
Print Options 9-3
9.2.1 Menu Bar Options

The UniSim Design printing options found in the File in the menu are as
follows:
Option Description
Print Lists the available Datasheet(s) for the currently active
object. You can select a Datasheet and either preview or print
it. See Section 9.2.2 - Printing Datasheets for more detail.
Print Prints a bitmap of the currently active UniSim Design view.
Window Use this command when you want to print a view that does
Snapshot not have a Datasheet associated with it (i.e., table such as a
Column Profiles table).
Printer With this command, you can select either the Graphic
Setup Printer or the Report Printer. This enables you to select the
printer, paper orientation, paper size and source. Refer to
Section 9.3.7 - Printing & Previewing Reports for details.
Figure 9.1
9.2.2 Printing Datasheets

All default and customized When you select the Print command, the Select Datablocks to Print
Workbook pages have
Datasheets available.
view appears and UniSim Design prepares to print the Datasheets for
the view that currently has focus. For example, this could be a
Workbook tab, a Stream, a Unit Operation or a Utility. If you are
currently in an area where printing is not available (e.g., the Reaction
Package view), the Select Datablocks to Print view appears with no
Datasheets available.
9-3
9-4 Printing in UniSim Design
The Select Datablocks to Print appears as follows.
Figure 9.2
Select the Click the Select All button to include

Datasheets by all the Datasheets. The Invert
clicking in the Selection button reverses the
checkbox. selection.
Prints the selected

Datasheets.
Selects the output

format. If checked,
UniSim Design
prints the
Datasheet to an
ASCII file.
Displays a Preview If checked,

Set the Datasheet of the selected filtered results are
preferences and recall the Datasheets. displayed to show
preferred selection. user inputs.
Click the Set Preferences button to save the Datasheet selections set in
the UniSim Design preferences. This allows you to use the same
settings for each type of object. For example, if you print the same
Datasheets for every stream in your case, use the Set Preferences
button to save the settings for the first stream and the Use Preferences
button to load the settings into each of the remaining streams.
The default Datasheet selections are set in the Session Preferences.

Refer to Section 12.4 - Reports Tab for more details.
There are particular The active location in the flowsheet determines which Datasheets are
Datasheets for certain available. In this case, the active location is a Workbook, so the only
operations. For example,
a column tray section available options pertain to the Workbook. The All Pages Datasheet
has a Tray Section displays all the information in the Workbook. Only the variables present
Component Summary
and a Datasheet; a Strip on the Workbook tabs appear in the Datasheets.
Chart has a Strip Chart
Variables and Historical Click the Preview button to open the Report Preview view as shown
Data Datasheet.
9-4
Print Options 9-5
below.
Figure 9.3
Change the Prints the currently displayed Datasheet.

Datasheet
format.
You can
zoom-in to
get a close-
up view of
your
document or
zoom-out to
see more of
the page at a
reduced size.
9.2.3 Printing the PFD

Alternatively, you can To print the PFD, right-click on an empty area of the PFD to display the
select Print from the File
menu when the PFD has
Object Inspect menu shown in the figure on the left.
focus.
There are three print related functions available:
Option Description
Print PFD Prints the PFD as it appears on the screen. Only the
sections visible within the PFD view are printed. Any tables
that you add are also printed. When you select this
command, the PFD is printed without accessing any further
menus.
Print Setup Accesses the Windows Print Setup. You can set the printer,
the paper orientation, the paper size and paper source.
Print to PFD Prints the entire PFD to a file. For more information refer to
to File Section 9.4 - Printing the PFD as a File.
All items (Streams, Operations, Text, and PFD Tables) included in the
PFD view can be printed. You can also use the Print Snapshot command
under the File menu to print the PFD when it has focus.
9.2.4 Printing Plots

To print a plot, right-click on the plot area to display the Object Inspect
menu as shown on the left. Select one of the following two printing
9-5
9-6 Printing in UniSim Design
options from the menu:
Object Description
Print Plot Prints the plot as it appears on the screen.
For information on setting the appearance of plots, refer to
Section 10.4 - Graph Control.
Print Setup Accesses the Windows Print Setup. You can set the printer,
the paper orientation, the paper size and paper source.
9.2.5 Printer Setup

Plot Object Inspect menu
The Print Setup view is accessed by selecting Printer Setup from the File
menu. The sub-menu provides two additional commands:
Figure 9.4
Printer Description
Graphic The Graphic Printer is used to print the PFD, Plots, Strip
Printer Charts and Snapshots.
Report Printer The Report Printer is used to print Datasheets, Reports
and Text.
If the Print Setup view is accessed by right-clicking (in other words,

through the PFD Object Inspect menu), UniSim Design defaults to the
appropriate printer according to the active location in the flowsheet.
The layout of the Print Setup view varies depending on the

selected printer. You can also modify the default properties
for the selected printer by clicking the Properties button.
9-6
Print Options 9-7
Figure 9.5
9.3 Reports
The Report Manager can Within a simulation case, you can print stream and operation
only be accessed in the
Simulation environment. Datasheets using the print function, however, this only enables you to
print Datasheets for a single object at a time. By using the Report
Manager, you can combine multiple Datasheets for streams and
operations in a single report and print the entire document. You can
also format the display of the report to meet your requirements.
The Report Manager is accessed by selecting Reports from the Tools

menu, or by using the hot key combination CTRL R.
Figure 9.6
Shows the Reports All reports created for Opens the Report Updates and
installed in the the simulation are Builder view for prints the selected
simulation case. listed in the Available creating new reports. Report.
Report1 is a default Reports group.
name, Second
Report is a user
Selects the
specified name.
output format. If
checked, UniSim
Design prints the
Opens the Report
Datasheet to an
Builder view so you
ASCII file.
can edit the selected
Report. If checked, filtered
results are
Deletes the selected displayed to show
Report. user inputs.
Displays a Preview
of the Report.
9-7
9-8 Reports
9.3.1 Creating a Report

Click the Create button in the Report Manager to open the Report
Builder view for creating a new report.
Figure 9.7
By default, it is Displays the

named Report1. current
You can type a number of
new name in this pages in the
field. report.
Removes a
Allows you to add
selected
available
Datasheet
Datasheets to the
from the
report.
report.
Allows you to edit the Allows you to rearrange the list in the Report
selection made for the Datasheets group. The selected Datasheet is
selected Datasheet. moved up or down within the list.
The Printing group provides the same functions as what you find in the
Report Manager.
Inserting a Datasheet
Click the Insert Datasheet button in the Report Builder view to open the
Select Datablocks for Datasheet view as shown below.
Figure 9.8
To return to the Report

Builder view without The view is divided into the Source for Datablocks and Available
adding a Datasheet, click
the Cancel button. Datablocks groups. The Source for Datablocks Group contains a list of
available flowsheets and the following radio buttons:
9-8
Print Options 9-9
• Pick a Specific Object by Name

• Pick All Objects of a Given Type
The information contained within the group changes depending on the

radio button selected.
The Available Datablocks group lists the datablocks that can be added
to the report.
Pick a Specific Object by Name

Use the Filter to narrow When the Pick a Specific Object by Name radio button is selected, the
the search list of available Objects list and Filter group appear as shown in Figure 9.8. This allows
objects.
you to insert individual Datasheets for any object that is present in the
simulation case.
To add a Datasheet to your report, do the following:

1. From the list of available flowsheets, click the flowsheet containing
the objects you want to add to the Datasheet.
2. From the list of available objects, select an object.
Expand some of branches 3. In the Available Datablocks tree, all datablocks available for the
in the tree by clicking the selected flowsheet object appear. Select the datablocks you want to
+ symbol to reveal more
datablocks. add to the report by clicking in their corresponding checkboxes.
4. Click the Add button to add the datablocks with checkmarks to the
report.
5. Repeat steps 1 to 4 for each Datasheet that you want to add to the
report.
6. Click the Done button when all Datasheets are added.
Pick All Objects of a Given Type

When the Pick All Objects of a Given Type radio button is selected, the
list of available object types appears as shown in the figure below. This
enables you to insert Datasheets for all object types in the simulation
9-9
9-10 Reports
case.
Figure 9.9
To add a group of Datasheets, do the following:

1. From the list of available flowsheets, select the flowsheet containing
the objects you want to add the Datasheet.
For the selected object 2. In the list of available object types, select an object type (for
type, add Datasheets to example, material stream or compressor). To open the list of sub-
the report for objects
that reside within sub- items, click the +.
flowsheets. Check the 3. In the Available Datablocks tree, all datablocks available for the
Include Sub-Flowsheets
checkbox. selected flowsheet object appear. Select the datablocks you want to
add to the report by clicking the corresponding checkbox.
4. Click the Add button to add the datablocks with checkmarks to the
report.
5. Repeat steps 1 to 6 for each Datasheet being added to the report.
6. When all Datasheets are added, click the Done button.
Editing a Datasheet
1. From the list of available report Datasheets in the Report Builder
view, select the Datasheet you want to edit.
2. Click the Edit Datasheet button to open the Select Datablocks for
Datasheet view. Refer to the section Inserting a Datasheet for
more information about this view.
3. Use this view to edit the Datasheet.
Removing a Datasheet
1. From the list of available report Datasheet in the Report Builder
view, click the Datasheet you want to delete.
2. Click the Remove Datasheet button. You are not prompted to
confirm the deletion of the Datasheet.
9-10
Print Options 9-11
9.3.2 Editing a Report

1. From the list of available reports in the Report Manager view, click
the report you want to edit.
2. Click the Edit button to open the Report Builder view. Refer to
Section 9.3.1 - Creating a Report for more information about
this view.
9.3.3 Deleting a Report

1. From the list of available reports in the Report Manager view, click
the report you want to delete.
deletion of the Datasheet.
9.3.4 Report Format & Layout

When the Text to File checkbox in the Report Builder and Report
Manager views is unchecked, the Format/Layout button appears.
Click this button to open the Report Format and Layout view. This view
displays the options available for customizing the format and layout of
your report.
Figure 9.10
Specify the distance

between each border
and the edge of the
report page. Default
units correspond to the
page width and height
units.
Specification values for the page size and orientation.
The following options in the Format group allow you to determine how
the data will appear in the report:
Field Description
Shading When selected, the headers, footers and titles are
shaded.
Line Number When selected, line numbers appear on the left side of
each page.
9-11
9-12 Reports
Field Description
Thick Borders When selected, the report borders are thicker than the
other lines in the report.
Indicate User When selected, any user specified values in the
Specified Datasheet are indicated with an asterisk “*”.
Start Datasheet When selected, each Datasheet starts on a new page.
on New Page
Empty Text Specify what displays in the report when there is no
value available. The default is ---.
Unit Set Select the unit set you want your report to use. This
gives you the option of printing reports with different
unit sets than your case. For example, your case may
be in SI, but you require your report to be in Field
units.
The default report format Click the Set Preferences button to save your format selections in
is set in the Session
UniSim Design preferences. This enables you to use the same settings
Preferences. See Section
12.4 - Reports Tab for for each report you create. Click the Use Preferences button to load the
more details. settings into any future reports.
9.3.5 Text Report Format

When the Text to File checkbox in the Report Builder and Report
Manager views is checked, the Delimited checkbox is available and the
Format button appears.
Check the Delimited checkbox if you want your text file to be text
delimited.
Click the Format button to open the Text Format view. This view
displays the options for formatting your text file.
Figure 9.11
The items in the Options When Delimited group allow you to control
9-12
Print Options 9-13
how data appears in the report:
Field Description
Text is Delimited When selected, the text file will be delimited.
Title Description When selected, a title is added to the text file. The title
Visible includes the name of the object and the tabs in the
report.
Header Field When selected, a header is added to the text file. The
Visible header includes the company information and the date
the file was created.
Footer Field When selected, a footer is added to the text file. The
Visible footer includes the UniSim Design version and build
number.
Fields Padded for When selected, spaces are added between each field to
Alignment align the fields in the report.
Disable Column When selected, column wrapping is disabled. This
Wrapping means that text running past the edge of the page
does not wrap onto the next line.
Empty Text Specify what you want to display in the report when
there is no value available. The default is ---.
Delimiter Specify what you want to use as the delimiter in your
text file. The UniSim Design default is ‘,’.
From the Unit Set drop-down list, select the unit set you want your
report to use. This gives you the option of printing reports with different
unit sets than in your case. For example, your case may be in SI, but
you can print the report in Field units.
The default report format Click the Set Preferences button to save the format selections you
is set in the Session defined in UniSim Design preferences. This allows you to use the same
Preferences. See Section
12.4 - Reports Tab for settings for each report you create. Click the Use Preferences button to
more details. load the settings into subsequent reports.
9.3.6 Specs Only

The Specs Only feature is available when printing reports. By default
it is turned off but a user can choose to select a Specs Only checkbox
before printing a Report or Datasheet. The checkbox appears just
below the Text to File checkbox on the datablocks selection view (i.e.
just before printing). When the option is turned on for any report the
results are filtered to just show user inputs. This works for all printing
styles (previewing, printing or writing to a file). In some cases values
will be shown that are not user input in order to provide context. The
Indicate User Specified behaviour is implicitly turned on (regardless of
user’s choice) when Specs Only is selected.
9-13
9-14 Printing the PFD as a File
9.3.7 Printing & Previewing

Reports
Refer to Section 9.2.2 - A report can be printed or previewed from either the Report Manager
Printing Datasheets for
more information
view or the Report Builder view. Click the Print button in either of these
regarding the print views and the entire report is updated and printed.
preview view.
When you preview a report, a print button is available on the preview
screen so you can print directly from the preview.
9.4 Printing the PFD as a File

To open the *.dxf file in You can use UniSim Design to create an ASCII Drawing Interchange File
AutoCAD Release 14, select
DXF in the Files of Type
(DXF) representing the UniSim Design PFD. The *.dxf file can then be
drop-down list on the File read into AutoCAD. By default, the file created is called pfd.dxf and
Open view. contains the entire PFD regardless of what is visible on the screen. A
different layer is generated for each of the following groups:
• Physical unit operations (pfdOP)
• Logical unit operations (pfdLOGICOP)
• Streams (pfdSTREAM)
• Stream labels (pfdLABEL)
• Table or other text (pfdTABLE)
Each layer is created using standard AUTOCAD blocks.
To create a *.dxf file in UniSim Design, do the following:

1. Right-click the PFD and select Print PFD to File from the Object
9-14
Print Options 9-15
Inspect menu.
Figure 9.12
2. Select Print to DXF File from the sub-menu. A standard windows

file selection view appears.
3. Select the path and file name for the *.dxf file.
You can also right-click the PFD and select Print PFD to File -
Setup DXF File. This opens the Setup DXF view. This view enables
you to set which layers are sent to the file. Click the Print button,
define the file location, and click the Save button.
Figure 9.13
9-15
9-16 Printing the PFD as a File
An example of a pfd.dxf exported to AutoCAD appears below:
Figure 9.14
Included in the directory \UniSim Design\Support\ is a header file

named autocad.hdr. If you have trouble transferring the *.dxf into
AutoCAD, changes may be needed in this header file. The default
version of the header file may not be compatible with certain versions
of AutoCAD and therefore, may need to be manipulated.
To check the header file, follow the steps below:

1. Start a completely new AutoCAD drawing.
2. Verify that the custom corporate title blocks and border are not in
the blank drawing used to generate the test header.
3. Save the blank drawing as a *.dxf file using AutoCAD’s DXFOUT
command.
4. Compare the *.dxf file of the blank drawing to the AutoCAD.hdr
supplied with UniSim Design.
9-16
Edit Options 10-1
10 Edit Options
10.1 Introduction ................................................................................ 3
10.2 Edit Menu..................................................................................... 3
10.3 Editing the PFD ............................................................................ 4

10.3.1 PFD Menu.............................................................................. 4
10.3.2 Object Inspect Menu............................................................... 5
10.3.3 PFD Tools .............................................................................. 6
10.3.4 Selecting PFD Objects ............................................................12
10.3.5 Deselecting PFD Objects.........................................................13
10.3.6 Moving Objects .....................................................................14
10.3.7 Auto Positioning ....................................................................14
10.3.8 Aligning Icons.......................................................................15
10.3.9 Auto Snap Align ....................................................................15
10.3.10 Sizing Objects .....................................................................15
10.3.11 Swapping Connections .........................................................17
10.3.12 Transforming Icons, Labels, & Annotations ..............................17
10.3.13 Changing Icons ...................................................................18
10.3.14 PFD Navigation....................................................................19
10.3.15 Stream Routing ...................................................................20
10.3.16 Rebuilding the PFD ..............................................................25
10.3.17 Connecting Streams & Operations..........................................25
10.3.18 Disconnecting Streams & Operations ......................................29
10.3.19 Cut/Paste Functions .............................................................30
10.3.20 Stream Label Options...........................................................32
10.3.21 Annotations & Labels ...........................................................34
10.3.22 Hiding PFD Objects ..............................................................35
10.3.23 Printing the PFD ..................................................................36
10.4 Graph Control .............................................................................36

10.4.1 Data Page Tab.......................................................................37
10.4.2 Axes Tab ..............................................................................38
10.4.3 Title Tab...............................................................................39
10.4.4 Legend Tab...........................................................................40
10.4.5 Plot Area Tab ........................................................................40
10.5 Format Editor..............................................................................41
10-1
10-2 Edit Options
10-2
Edit Options 10-3
10.1 Introduction
This chapter explains the commands that are available through the Edit
menu and provides information on editing PFD objects.
You can access the Edit menu commands in three ways:

• Select the Edit menu in the menu bar.
• Use the ALT key in combination with the letter E.
• Use the ALT key by itself to move the active location to the File
menu in the menu bar.
The up and down arrows move you through the menu associated with a
specific item, while the left and right arrows move you to the next
menu bar item, automatically opening the associated menu. If you
want to switch focus from the menu bar without making a selection,
press the ESC key or the ALT key.
10.2 Edit Menu

The functions listed under the Edit menu are available in all
environments (i.e., Basis, Simulation, sub-flowsheet) and can be used
across environments and outside of UniSim Design:
Command Description
Edit menu
Cut Copy and remove the selected values/objects from the
current view.
Copy Copies the selected values/objects to the clipboard.
Copy Special Copies the selected values/objects and their corresponding
/ with Labels labels to the clipboard.
Paste Place copied or cut selections in the location of your choice
or in another application.
Although the edit functions are available throughout UniSim Design, not
all areas within the environments support them. Only matrix type areas
can be manipulated.
For example, you can copy a group of cells from the Workbook or from
a table and paste them into the spreadsheet. In most areas, you can
manipulate a group of cells by clicking and dragging them with the
mouse. Whenever cells are grouped within a matrix (i.e., Inlet streams
for a mixer as shown in the figure below), you can select more than a
10-3
10-4 Editing the PFD
single cell.
Figure 10.1
10.3 Editing the PFD

Any PFD in the simulation The appearance of the PFD can be modified including all objects that
can be accessed from any
are installed in the PFD:
location in the Simulation
environment by clicking • Streams
the PFD icon or using the
CTRL P hot key.
• Unit Operations
• Logical Operations
• Labels
• Text Annotations
PFD icon
In addition to selecting alternate icons for the operations, you can
manipulate the routing of streams, swap nozzle connections for two
streams attached to the same operation, move and size icons, add text,
transform the orientation of objects, and change text fonts and colours.
The items being modified Use the following tools to modify the appearance of the PFD:
must be selected before
using these tools. • Menu Bar
• Mouse and Keyboard
• Object Inspect menu
• PFD Inspection Menu
10.3.1 PFD Menu

The PFD menu is only available when the PFD is open and active. The
PFD menu
10-4
Edit Options 10-5
commands contained in the PFD menu are described in the table below:
Command Description
Select Objects Select multiple operations and streams on the PFD.
The Select Objects view contains a filter for narrowing
object selection. See Menu Bar Option for more
information.
Show Hidden Hidden objects in the PFD can be viewed using this
Objects command. When selected, the Show Hidden Objects
view appears.
See Revealing Hidden Objects for more information.
Break a Breaks the connection between a stream and an
Connection operation without deleting either.
See Disconnecting Using the Break Connection
Tool for more information.
Swap Select two streams that are attached to the same
Connections operation and exchange their nozzle connections.
See Section 10.3.11 - Swapping Connections for
more information.
Auto Position All Repositions all objects on the PFD to the best possible
location as determined by the application.
See Section 10.3.7 - Auto Positioning for more
information.
Auto Position Auto positions only selected objects.
Selected See Section 10.3.7 - Auto Positioning for more
information.
Select Mode Select the operating mode for the PFD. This is either
Move, Size, or Attach.
See the PFD Modes section for more information.
Drag Zoom Click and hold the mouse button to drag a frame
around a region, then release the mouse button. The
PFD is redrawn showing only that region.
Add a PFD Adds a new page to the PFD Notebook. The command
to clone an existing PFD is available.
Delete this PFD Deletes the active PFD without a prompt to confirm the
action. You cannot delete the PFD if it is the only one in
the case.
Rename this PFD Change the name of the PFD that appears on the tab.
10.3.2 Object Inspect Menu

To access the Object Use the Object Inspect menu to manipulate the icons in the PFD. The
Inspect menu of an icon,
position the cursor over
menu options vary depending on the selected item (Stream, Operation,
the icon and right-click. Column or Text Annotation).
The entire PFD Object Inspect menu can be accessed by right-clicking

on an area of the PFD where there are no icons. The menu of available
10-5
commands appears.
Figure 10.2
A menu item with an arrow

head pointing to the side
has further commands on a
sub-menu.
General Object Inspect

menu for the PFD.
For stream, the following

extra command appears.
General Object Inspect

menu for Icons.
For sub-flowsheet operations (including

the column sub-flowsheet), the following
two extra commands appear.
10.3.3 PFD Tools

Several tools are provided to help simplify interaction with the PFD.
These tools are described in the following section.
Pan/Zoom Functions
For the PFD to respond to The pan and zoom functions allow you to focus on a particular area
the keyboard command, it within the PFD or to view all the objects within the flowsheet. The
must be the active view.
following table describes the available functions:
Function Icon Definition

Zoom Out Zooms the display out by 25%. Click the
Zoom Out icon, located in the lower left of the
PFD, or use the keyboard command SHIFT
PAGE DOWN.
Zoom In Zooms the display in by 25%. Click the Zoom
In icon, located in the lower left of the PFD, or
use the keyboard command SHIFT PAGE UP.
10-6
Edit Options 10-7
Function Icon Definition

Zoom All Displays all visible objects in the current PFD.
Click the function icon, located in the lower
left of the PFD, or use the keyboard command
HOME.
Zoom Out display Use the keyboard command PAGE DOWN.
5%
Zoom In display Use the keyboard command PAGE UP.
5%
Zoom In Scroll the mouse wheel forward to display the
Mouse Wheel PFD zoom in.
Zoom Out Scroll the mouse wheel backward to display

Mouse Wheel the PFD zoom out.
Zoom In Select PFD objects and press the HOME key

HOME Key to zoom in on those objects. If no objects are
selected, the entire PFD is shown.
Toggle between Use the keyboard key Z.
last two Zoom
views
Pan 15% Left, Use the keyboard arrow keys: left, right, up,
Right, Up, Down down.
Pan 70% Left, Use the SHIFT key combined with one of the
Right, Up, Down arrow keys: left, right, up, down.
Pan Mouse Click the mouse wheel (or middle mouse
Wheel button) and move the mouse to pan the view.
To stop, click the mouse button a second
time.
Centre PFD on Press the PERIOD key on the keyboard, and
cursor the PFD shifts, making the location of the
cursor the centre of the view.
PFD Modes
The PFD operates in the following four modes:
• Move
• Attach
• Auto Attach
• Size
Only one mode can be active at a time, so when you are in attach
mode, you cannot move or resize icons. There are three ways to
change the PFD mode:
10-7
• Select the Select Mode command from the PFD menu to open
the Select PFD Mode view. Use the radio buttons in the PFD
Mode group to select the mode.
Figure 10.3
• Right-click the PFD, then select the mode options in the Mode
sub-menu from the PFD Object Inspect menu.
• Use the icons in the PFD tool bar.
Name Icon Definition

Move/Attach Controls the Move and Attach modes in the PFD.
Mode Move is the default setting and is used to relocate
selected operations and streams.
When the icon is “pressed” you are in Attach mode
and can connect streams and operations
graphically. Refer to Section 10.3.17 -
Connecting Streams & Operations for more
information about Attach mode.
Auto Attach In this mode, new operations placed on the PFD
Mode automatically have their own required material
and energy streams connected to them. These
generated streams are automatically given a
numerical value for a name. See the Auto Attach
Mode section for more information.
Size Mode When in Size mode, selected objects can be sized.
A selected sizeable object appears with a box
around it, and this box contains eight smaller
white boxes around its perimeter. Using the
mouse, drag the size of the box in any of these
eight directions. Refer to the section, Section
10.3.4 - Selecting PFD Objects for more details
on sizing PFD objects.
Auto Attach Mode

Auto attach mode does In Auto Attach mode, any unit operation added to the PFD is
not attach energy
streams already in the automatically attached with the required material and energy streams.
PFD to an added The generated streams are automatically named based on the user’s
operation, even if the
defined naming preference (see Section 12.2.4 - Naming Page for
energy stream is selected
and the operation more information on setting the naming preference).
requires an energy
stream. The Auto Attach mode behaviour changes when a new unit operation is
Auto attach mode always
generates and attaches
added, depending on what is selected in the PFD.
new energy streams for • When nothing is selected and a unit operation is added, then the
added operations that required streams are created and attached.
require energy streams.
10-8
Edit Options 10-9
• The Auto Attach functionality is based on an anchor stream(s).

Once a stream(s) is selected, it is treated as the anchor. The
behaviour from this point is dependent on the current
connectivity of the anchor stream(s).
If the anchor stream is a product from a unit operation, it is
automatically attached as the feed to the unit operation being
added. The remaining streams for the unit operation are
automatically created and connected.
If the anchor stream is a feed stream to another unit operation,
it is automatically attached as a product to the unit operation
being added.
Since most unit operations have multiple product streams,

the selected product stream is attached to the top product
stream (i.e., usually the vapour stream).
If the anchor stream is both a feed and a product, you are

prompted to insert the unit operation upstream or downstream
of the anchor stream.
Figure 10.4
In this example a valve is attached to Stream D using Auto Attach Mode.

The valve is placed upstream of Stream D.
Product stream of Unit B is now stream 1.
• When multiple streams are selected, (in some cases) this mode
attaches multiple feeds and products depending on what is
selected (in other words, one feed and one product or three
feeds and a product).
When one product and one feed are selected and a new unit
operation is added, both the feed and product streams are
10-9
attached to the unit operation along with the remaining required

streams.
If multiple feeds and a product are selected and a new mixer or
separator is added, all the selected feeds and the product are
attached to the unit op along with the remaining required
streams.
When multiple feeds and products are selected, multiple feeds
are attached to the mixer or separator, but a new product
stream is created because the system does not know which
selected product stream attaches to where.
You can select multiple product streams and use Auto Attach
mode to add a tee.
• Auto attach mode has limitations; with the sub-flowsheet and
template, it creates all required streams and attaches them to
the unit operations. Because there are so many different feeds
and products, even if there is a feed or product selected, all new
streams are attached, but not necessarily where you wanted
them attached.
• You are not limited to selecting streams; you can also select a
unit operation.
If you select a unit operation with a single feed and a single
product and add a new unit op, then a view prompts you to add
the unit operation upstream or downstream of the selected unit
operation.
For example, the figure below displays a view prompting an
object to be attached up or down stream:
Figure 10.5
If you select a unit operation with multiple feed or products and

add a new unit operation, you are prompted to select a stream
from a list of streams that are attached to this selected unit
operation. You are also prompted to specify if the new unit
operation is to be attached upstream or downstream of the
stream selected from the attachment list.
10-10
Edit Options 10-11
Additional Icons
Name Icon Function
Break Break the connection between a stream and an
Connection operation. When you place the cursor over the
stream you want to break, the cursor appears with
a checkmark. Click any portion of the stream
between the stream icon and the operation to
break the connection. Refer to Section 10.3.18 -
Disconnecting Streams & Operations for more
details.
Swap Switches the nozzle connection points for two
Connections streams attached to the same operation. For more
information, see Section 10.3.11 - Swapping
Connections.
Drag Zoom When you click this icon, the cursor becomes an
arrow and magnifying glass combination. Click and
drag around a region of interest to redraw the PFD
showing only the selected region. You can also
Zoom from the PFD Object Inspect menu by
clicking Mode and then Zoom (see Figure 10.6)
or by selecting Drag Zoom from the PFD menu in
the menu bar.
Add Text Adds text to a PFD. When clicked, a ‘+’ symbol is
Annotation added to the regular cursor and a rectangular box
appears at the end of the pointer. Position the
cursor where you want to place the text, click the
mouse button, and then type the text into the
view that appears. See Section 10.3.21 -
Annotations & Labels, for more information.
Quick Route Move icons quickly about the PFD (in other words,
Mode object icons can be moved with their attached
streams overlapping the other object icons).
Turning off the Quick Route mode, enables UniSim
Design to reposition the stream lines so that there
is no overlap of the object icons. See Section
10.3.15 - Stream Routing for more information.
Drag Mode Enables you to shift/scroll through the PFD view
and see other areas of the PFD. To scroll across
the PFD, click and drag the mouse cursor on the
PFD. Similar functions as the scroll buttons, except
with in the Drag mode you can scroll diagonally.
Object Enables you to access the Object Palette. See
Palette Section 8.1.1 - Install Objects Using the
Object Palette for more information.
Colour Displays the PFD Colour Schemes view. A new
Scheme scheme can be created or an existing one
selected, edited or deleted.
10-11
Figure 10.6
If you are trying to perform a function in the PFD, (such as

Move, Size, or Attach) and it is not working, check the icons
to see if you are in the correct mode.
10.3.4 Selecting PFD Objects

When an object is To manipulate the PFD, you must be able to select PFD objects such as
selected, the icon is streams, operations, and text annotations. You can select single or
surrounded by a border
and the label background multiple objects, but you cannot be in Attach mode when doing so.
is selected.
Press and hold SHIFT while clicking the objects to select

scattered multiple objects in the PFD.
Single Object Selection

To select a single object in the PFD, do one of the following:
To select a label, right- • Position the cursor over the object and click the mouse button.
click the label or the The object has a white rectangular box around its icon when
object that it is attached selected.
to, and select the Move/
Size Label command.
• Use the keyboard by pressing S to cycle through all items in the
Alternatively, select the PFD and SHIFT S to cycle backwards through all items.
object and press the L
Multiple Object Selection

key.
There are three methods available to select multiple objects and they
are as follows:
• Mouse drag option
• Menu bar option
• Keyboard/mouse option
10-12
Edit Options 10-13
Mouse Drag Option

If selecting multiple objects within the same area, click and hold the
mouse button while dragging a box around the entire group of objects.
When all of the objects are within the box, release the mouse button.
Each object is outlined to indicate that it is selected.
Menu Bar Option

1. From the PFD menu or the PFD Inspection menu, select the
Select Objects command. The Select Objects view appears.
2. From the list of available objects, select the necessary objects.
Select multiple objects by holding down the CTRL key and clicking
each object being selected.
Figure 10.7
Use the filter for a more
specific list of objects.
3. Click the OK button after all selections are made. This closes the
view and returns you to the PFD. Each object is outlined to indicate
that it is selected.
Keyboard/Mouse Option
1. Position the cursor (in the PFD) over the first object you want to
select and click the mouse button.
2. To select a second object, hold down the SHIFT key and click the
second object. The two objects are now selected.
3. Repeat step #2 until all the necessary objects are selected.
10.3.5 Deselecting PFD Objects

Any of the following methods can be used to deselect an object:
• Click any empty spot in the PFD.
• Press the D key to deselect all the selected items.
• Press the SHIFT key and click on a selected object to deselect
only that one item.
10-13
10.3.6 Moving Objects

Objects can be moved in You can move objects individually or as a group.
either Size or Move mode.
1. Select the object or objects you want to move.
2. Position the cursor over one of the selected objects.
The internal Auto Snap 3. Press and hold the mouse button while dragging the cursor to the
feature can prevent an new position on the PFD. Release the mouse button. If multiple
icon from being moved objects are selected, all selected objects move simultaneously.
with the keyboard arrow
keys. See Section 10.3.8
- Aligning Icons section The keyboard can also be used to move an object within the PFD. Select
for more information. the object(s) to move. Use the arrow keys to move up, down, right, or
left. The object moves one space at a time. To move an item in larger
increments, hold the SHIFT key down while pressing the arrow keys.
10.3.7 Auto Positioning

Use the Auto Positioning function to automatically reposition streams
and unit operations. Select the object(s) being repositioned and an
internal algorithm determines the current location of objects on the
PFD. This information is then used to set the most appropriate location
for the selected object(s).
Auto positioning works differently depending on the object selected. For

unit operations, a new location for the object is determined and it is
placed in that position. Manually moving streams attached to the unit
operation after the auto positioning has no effect on the position of the
unit operation icon.
When a stream is auto positioned, it becomes a floating icon until it is

manually moved. This means the stream is initially positioned by
UniSim Design after the Auto Positioning function is accessed. If a unit
operation icon that is attached to the stream is then moved, the stream
is automatically repositioned, floating with the unit operation icon.
When you manually move a selected stream, the auto positioning

function becomes inactive. Any subsequent movement of an operation
that this stream is attached to does not affect the position of the
stream. Use the Auto Positioning function again to have the stream
move with the operation.
10-14
Edit Options 10-15
You can access Auto Positioning in the following ways.
Method Description
Menu Bar From the PFD menu, select either Auto Position All or
Auto Position Selected.
Object Inspect Select Auto Position from the Object Inspect menu.
menu Only selected items are repositioned.
10.3.8 Aligning Icons

This function can be used to horizontally or vertically align any
combination of streams and objects on the PFD. Each object has a
predetermined point through which it is aligned.
1. Select the objects that you want to align. At least two objects must
be selected.
2. Right-click the icon that is to be the anchoring point (all other
selected objects are aligned with this icon).
3. Select Align Selected Icons from the Object Inspect menu.
10.3.9 Auto Snap Align

The Auto Snap feature on the PFD automatically aligns objects if they
are moved within an internally set tolerance. This feature helps
eliminate the irregular line segments that might occur for streams.
The Auto Snap feature is always active and cannot be toggled on and
off. This poses a problem if you want to move an icon using the
keyboard arrow keys. If UniSim Design detects that the object is within
the set tolerance, the object initially moves in the direction of the arrow
key, but snaps back to its original position. To overcome this, use the
SHIFT key with the keyboard arrow key to move the object by larger
increments.
10.3.10 Sizing Objects

Operations and streams installed on a PFD are all a standard size.
Sometimes the size of these objects needs to be changed; this can be
done in Size mode only.
1. Activate the Size mode by doing one of the following:
• Click the Size Mode icon in the PFD toolbar.
Size Mode icon
10-15
• Select the Select Mode command from the PFD menu. The
Select PFD Mode view appears.
Figure 10.8
Click the Size radio button.

• Right-click in the PFD and select Mode>Size from the Object
Inspect menu.
2. Select the object being resized. A white outline with eight handles
appears around the icon. These identify the directions in which you
can size the icon.
Figure 10.9
Sizing
Tool
3. Place the cursor over one of the target handles. The pointer changes
to the sizing tool (line with an arrowhead at each end) indicating the
directions that the object can be stretched or compressed.
4. Click and drag the mouse in the direction you want to size the
object. The icon is sized according to the change in the size of the
box.
You can size Labels and The Pump shown in Figure 10.9 is ready to size, however, the name
Annotations only
horizontally and to a
associated with it, P-100, is not resized. It remains at its default size
maximum size. This is even though the size of its associated icon changes. To change the size
useful for text containing of the label, change the Font size of the text. See the Moving & Sizing
more than one line. You
can size such a text box so Labels section.
that all text appears on
one line. Rather than sizing several objects individually, you can size multiple
objects simultaneously. Enter Size mode and select the objects you
want to size. Each object has its own outline around it. Select any one
of these boxes and then resize the object. All the selected objects are
sized by this factor.
10-16
Edit Options 10-17
10.3.11 Swapping Connections

This function lets you select two streams attached to the same object
and swap their nozzle connections. This is useful when streams cross
each other.
Swap Connections icon
1. Activate the Swap Connections tool by doing one of the following:
• Click the Swap Connections icon in the PFD tool bar.
• Right-click a connection point and select Swap Attachments
from the Object Inspect menu.
• Select Swap Connections from the PFD menu.
• Press the F hot key to activate the Swap Connections icon.The
ESC key reverses the effect of the F key.
Available to Swap 2. The cursor (when it is over an area of the PFD) takes on a special
Connections flip stream appearance, indicating which streams are available for
Unavailable to the operation (arrow with a checkmark and a number 1).
Swap Connections
3. Click the first stream you want to swap and the cursor changes
(replacing the 1 with a 2).
4. Click the second stream being swapped.
5. After the swapping is complete, the Swap Connections icon is
released.
UniSim Design indicates an unacceptable choice for Swap

Connections by replacing the checkmark with an X.
10.3.12 Transforming Icons,

Labels, & Annotations
Keyboard commands for When you add a unit operation, stream, or annotations to the PFD, the
selected objects: icon appears as shown in the Object Palette. You may want to alter the
• X mirror about X axis orientation of an icon to improve PFD clarity. This can be done using
• Y mirror about Y axis
• 1 rotate by 90 rotating and mirroring functions.
• 2 rotate by 180
• 3 rotate by 270 Method Description
• N returns original
orientation Transform-Rotate Rotate the icon of a selected object (clockwise)
about its centre in one of three ways, 90 degrees,
180 degrees, and 270 degrees.
Transform-Mirror Mirrors the object about the X or Y axis.
You can use the Rotate and Mirror functions to change the
orientation of multiple objects at the same time.
Access the Rotate and Mirror functions from the Object Inspect menu.
10-17
1. Select the object(s) you want to transform.

2. Right-click on one of the objects to open the Object Inspect menu.
3. Select Transform to open a sub-menu containing the Rotate and
Mirror functions. Click the required function.
Figure 10.10
10.3.13 Changing Icons

UniSim Design always displays the default icons for the PFD. However,
there are optional icons that can be used to represent the same unit
operation.
1. Select the unit operation for which you want to change the icon.
2. Right-click on the unit operation to open the Object Inspect menu.
3. Click Change Icon (if there are no alternate icons, this command is
disabled in the menu). This opens the Select Icon view.
4. Click the icon you want to use. The figure below shows the options
available for the Cooler operation.
Figure 10.11
Check the Default checkbox to

make the selected icon the
default icon for your simulation.
This icon is then used the next
time you add this type of
operation.
5. Click OK to accept the selection and return to the PFD.
If you have more than one icon selected in the PFD and they represent
the same type of operation, then you can change all selections to an
alternate icon at the same time. If the operations are of different types,
the Change Icon command is not available in the Object Inspect menu.
10-18
Edit Options 10-19
Wire Frame & 3D Icons

When you right-click a three dimensional icon, the Draw Wire Frame
command is available in the Object Inspect menu. Any operation or
stream with a three dimensional icon can be transformed to an outline
representation, or a Wire Frame. A wire frame of the Cooler is shown in
the figure below.
Figure 10.12
Cooler 3D Icon Cooler Wire Frame Icon
Alternatively, the Object Inspect menu of a wire frame object contains

the Draw 3D command, which draws the icon in its default 3D view.
To switch all objects into wire frames, do the following:

1. Select all objects.
2. Right-click one of the objects and select the Draw Wire Frame
command in the Object Inspect menu.
Thick Stream Line

The Draw Thick Streamline command (in the stream Object Inspect
menu) creates a more visible stream by making it wider than the other
streams. This command is useful when tracking one particular stream
in a complex flowsheet (i.e., a pipe network).
Return a stream to its default thickness by right-clicking the stream and

clicking Draw Normal Streamline from the Object Inspect menu.
10.3.14 PFD Navigation

Auto Scrolling
Unlike most of the features available on the PFD, the auto scrolling
function cannot be accessed through the main menu or by using the
keyboard. Only the mouse can be used to access this feature.
Auto scrolling enables continuous horizontal or vertical scrolling of the

active pane, depending on the location of the mouse.
Scroll Button
To initiate auto scrolling, do the following:
10-19
1. Place the cursor anywhere in the active view.

2. Press and hold the mouse button and drag the mouse near the PFD
pane boundary. When the cursor enters a 15 pixel boundary at a
pane edge and remains anywhere within the boundary for 0.3
seconds, the view of the PFD begins to scroll. The boundary closest
to the cursor determines the direction of scrolling.
The speed of scrolling can be varied by moving the mouse within the
boundary near the edge of the view. Faster scrolling occurs as the
cursor is moved closer to the outside.
Mouse Wheel Scrolling

As an alternative to using the scroll bars, you can scroll to any location
on your PFD using the mouse wheel (or middle mouse button). Click the
mouse wheel while the cursor is in the PFD. The cursor changes to the
The Static PFD Scroll
cursor static PFD scroll cursor. Point the mouse in the direction you want to
scroll. After you have reached the location that you want to view, either
click the mouse wheel a second time or place the cursor directly over
The Scrolling Cursor the static PFD scroll cursor (which remains on your PFD until you click
points in the direction
that the focus is moving. the mouse wheel).
10.3.15 Stream Routing

Quick Route Mode
The Quick Route function To maintain clarity in the PFD, streams should not overlap unit
can be accessed in any operation icons. When working with large, complex flowsheets, each
mode.
movement of an object causes UniSim Design to reposition streams so
that no unit operation icons are covered. If the PFD is complex, this
repositioning can consume valuable computational time.
When you use the Quick Route function, UniSim Design relocates and
connects the objects without considering the other objects in the
flowsheet. For example, if moving a valve, its icon and streams are
relocated without repositioning the streams, even if one passes over
another icon.
After exiting Quick Route mode, the streams are repositioned

automatically so they do not overlap the icons. This means the streams
are repositioned once instead of after relocating each object.
To access the Quick Route function, click the Quick Route icon in the
Quick Route icon PFD tool bar. After manipulating the objects on the PFD, click the Quick
Route icon again to ensure that no streams overlap unit operation
10-20
Edit Options 10-21
icons.
Manual Routing of Streams

There are two types of manual stream routing:
• Moving the location of a horizontal or vertical line segment
• Adding bend points to create a new route for some portion of
the stream
Full Manual Route mode can only be accessed by right-clicking a stream

(not the stream arrow icon). From the Object Inspect menu, select the
Manual Route command.
Only the portion of the stream that is inspected becomes available for
manual routing (i.e., right-click either the portion upstream or
downstream of the stream icon).
To exit the Manual Route In Full Manual Route mode, a bend point is shown at the end of each
function, click an empty line segment and the portion of the stream available for manual routing
area of the PFD.
changes colour. You can then manipulate any of the line segments in
the selected stream until the manual route is interrupted.
When not in Manual Route mode, you can still click on a stream line
segment and drag that portion of the line. The bend points are not
shown in this case.
Moving Line Segments

To move a portion of a stream, do the following:
1. Right-click the stream portion and select Manual Route from the
Object Inspect menu. Anchor points appear at each corner of the
stream route.
This cursor is oriented in When you move the pointer over the stream, the pointer changes to
the direction in which you a double arrowhead cursor.
can move the selected
stream portion; Vertical
for a horizontal section Figure 10.13
and Horizontal for a
vertical section.
A Vertical Stream Line can
be dragged Horizontally.
A Horizontal Stream Line

can be dragged Vertically.
10-21
2. Click the mouse button and drag the stream portion to the new
location. As you move, a thin black line appears, indicating the new
stream route.
3. Release the mouse button when you reach the target location. The
stream is redrawn through the new path.
Adding Bend Points

A bend point is an anchor Add new bend points to create a new route for a stream. The initial
that the stream passes
procedure is the same as moving line segments. Right-click the stream
through.
Press the ESC key to end
and select Manual Route from the menu. The stream is re-drawn
Manual Routing. Press the showing the existing bend points.
DELETE key to delete a
manual route in progress.
The logic behind the routing procedure is that you alternate
between horizontal and vertical sections of line with each
successive bend point.
Place a bend point by The idea of bend points is illustrated in the figure below.
clicking the stream.
Figure 10.14
A Bend Point placed in this

region specifies a Horizontal
Line.
A Bend Point in this

region produces a
Vertical Line.
Bend point 2 is the one being manipulated. You can initially create a
horizontal or vertical line segment and subsequent line orientation is
determined by that first line, i.e., horizontal segments follow vertical
and vice versa.
The mouse cursor displays 1. Select an existing bend point to begin the new route. The cursor
a checkmark at an changes to an arrow with a ‘+’ symbol at the end when placed over
acceptable location for the
a bend point.
final Bend Point.
For slight kinks in a stream Around a bend point there are four regions, two that define the next
it could be easier to select line as Horizontal, and two that define the next line as Vertical. As
the Stream icon and use
the keyboard arrow keys
you drag the mouse pointer around the region of the bend point, a
to nudge it into place, light coloured line shows the area where the new line routing is
rather than inserting and placed.
removing bend points.
2. Click to place a new bend point.
3. Continue to move the cursor to the location of the next bend point
and place it by clicking the PFD.
10-22
Edit Options 10-23
4. Manual Routing can only be completed by placing the final bend

point on an existing bend point, otherwise the new routing you just
laid out does not appear in the PFD. Any bend points added are
erased.
Removing Bend Points

In certain instances, bend points can be removed to provide a more
direct route between operations. When there is an extra bend in the
route, as shown in the figure below, close the section.
Figure 10.15
Select either the horizontal section between points 1 and 2 and move it
vertically until points 1 and 3 coincide, or select the vertical section (2
to 3) and move it horizontally until points 1 and 2 coincide. Either route
results in the extra bend being removed from the stream.
You can also remove several intermediate bend points. Select the bend
point at the start of the section to be manipulated (in the case of the
figure below, point 2). Next, select the bend point at the end of the
section (point 9) and double-click on the end point. All intermediate
bend points are removed.
Figure 10.16
Connection Line Straightening

The Connection Line Straightening function removes all bend points
from a stream to straighten the line between the stream icon and the
unit operation. To access this function, the orientation of the Stream
icon must align with the nozzle connection (in other words, a horizontal
stream icon is in alignment with a nozzle connected to the side of a unit
10-23
operation).
To straighten a connection line, do the following:

1. Right-click the stream and select Straighten Stream Line from the
Object Inspect menu.
The end of the thin red 2. The stream section being straightened becomes a thin red line and
line that is not selected the cursor changes to the acceptable/unacceptable connection
serves as the anchor
point, and does not move indicator.
when the line is 3. Move the cursor to either end of the red line where the cursor
straightened.
changes from an X to a checkmark, indicating an acceptable choice
for line straightening.
4. Click to straighten the line.
Line Segment Alignment

While performing manual routing, the mouse can be used to align
sections of streams. Horizontal sections are aligned horizontally and
vertical sections are aligned vertically. The streams do not need to be
connected to the same unit operation, but the stream sections must be
in close proximity so that the internal tolerance for the function is not
exceeded.
As an example of line segment aligning, a unit operation with multiple

feeds is used. The Mixer, shown in the figure below, has three feed
streams, two that contain vertical sections. For presentation purposes
the vertical sections of the streams are to be aligned.
Figure 10.17
To align segments ab and cd, do the following:

1. Right-click the line segment ab and select the Manual Route
command. The entire line becomes selected and its bend points are
shown.
2. Click the anchoring segment, in this case segment cd.
The segments are now aligned. Follow the same steps for the alignment
of horizontal segments.
10-24
Edit Options 10-25
10.3.16 Rebuilding the PFD

In addition to manipulating the PFD, you can also rebuild the PFD for
any simulation case.
1. Before opening the case you want to rebuild, use the hot key
combination CTRL SHIFT K Z to display a message asking if you
want to rebuild the PFD.
Figure 10.18
2. Click the Yes button. The Open Simulation Case view appears.
3. Open the case for the PFD you want to rebuild. If there is more than
one PFD (in the main and sub-flowsheet environments), you are
asked if you want to rebuild each PFD (in the main and sub-
flowsheet environments).
4. Click Yes if you want to rebuild the specified PFD and No if you do
not. If there is only one PFD (i.e., no sub-flowsheets), you are only
asked once if you want to rebuild the main PFD.
10.3.17 Connecting Streams &

Operations
There are two ways to connect streams to an operation:
• In the operation property view, select the streams’ name in the
inlet and outlet field/cell. New streams can be generated and
connected to the operation by entering the new stream’s name
in the inlet and/or outlet field/cell.
• On the PFD view, make the connections in Attach mode.
Connecting Streams & Operations in

Attach Mode
The Attach mode can be used to connect an operation to an existing
stream, generate a new stream connected to an existing operation, or
10-25
create a new stream to connect two operations.
Figure 10.19
Connection nozzle or These small

port colours: boxes are
• Dark Red - Energy connection
Stream nozzles and
• Blue - Material ports.
Stream
• Green - Logical
Connection
An exception to this is
the Balance block which When the PFD is in Attach mode, connection nozzles and ports
can accept both Material
and Energy streams. All
automatically appear on each icon as the cursor passes over the icon.
connections for the In addition to the coloured boxes that indicate the different connection
Balance are shown in types, a Fly-by description appears when the cursor is placed over a
green.
connection nozzle or port.
Creating a New Stream from an Operation

Hold down the CTRL key to To create a stream from an operation in Attach mode, do the following:
temporarily toggle to
Attach Mode. Make the 1. Place the cursor over the required operation connection point or
connections, then release nozzle. When the cursor is in the correct location, a white square
the CTRL key. appears at the tip of the cursor.
2. Click and drag the mouse to an empty space in the PFD. Keep
dragging the stream until the Stream Connection Tool cursor
appears at the end of the stream. If you release the mouse button
Stream Connection Tool
cursor
while a full black square is visible, the stream will not be created.
3. Release the mouse button and a stream icon appears. UniSim
Design names the stream using the next stream name as defined
under the current Session Preferences.
Refer to Chapter 3 - Streams in the UniSim Design

Operations Guide for more information about streams.
Connecting Operations to Existing Streams

In Attach mode you can connect streams operations or vice versa on
the PFD. The procedure for both is identical.
To connect an operation to an existing stream, do the following:

See Section 10.3.15 - 1. Place the cursor over the required connection point, then click and
Stream Routing for drag the cursor to the target stream. A line indicating the creation of
information on manually
changing the route of a
stream.
10-26
Edit Options 10-27
a stream appears as you move the mouse.
Both Streams and Operations have nozzle(s) and port(s).

The connection points that activate depend on the origin of
the connection (i.e., when connecting from a stream outlet,
only nozzles to operations appear).
As you approach the stream, the available connection activates.

When you are within the defined connection region for a nozzle
Stream Connection Tool (larger than the region used when UniSim Design indicates available
cursor connection points), the cursor changes to the Stream Connection
Tool cursor.
2. To complete the connection, release the mouse button when a white
square appears at the tip of the cursor.
Connecting Two Operations

Directly connecting two operations automatically creates a new stream
using the next available name as defined in the Session Preferences. To
accomplish this, you must make the connection on the PFD in Attach
mode.
1. Select the connection point of the operation to which the stream will
be connected (in the case of Figure 10.20 the Valve, VLV-100).
2. Click and drag the new stream toward the operation that the stream
is connected to (the separator V-100 in Figure 10.20). The
available connection points are indicated. In this case, because the
stream is taken from the outlet of the Valve, only the connection
point on the inlet area of the Separator appears.
10-27
3. When you reach the connection region, the cursor changes

to a solid white square. Release the mouse button to
complete the connection and create a new stream.
Figure 10.20
1 2 The long
connection
indicates that
more than one
feed can be
Valve outlet nozzle attached
where a stream
connects
Connecting Logical Operations

Refer to Chapter 12 - Logical operations can be connected to operations or streams in
Logical Operations in the same way as other objects. The only difference is that after
the UniSim Design
Operations Guide for the connection is made, the Select Adjusted Variable view
more information about appears. This view varies depending on the type of logical
this view.
operation and whether the connection is made to a stream or
operation.
Figure 10.21
10-28
Edit Options 10-29
10.3.18 Disconnecting
Streams & Operations
Connections between streams and operations can be broken by
doing one of the following:
• Enter the operation’s property view and break the
connection by deleting the stream’s name from the inlet
or outlet cell/field.
• Break the connection on the PFD by using the Object
Inspect menu or the Break Connection tool.
Disconnecting Using the Object

Inspect Menu
Use this procedure to break a connection using the Object
Inspect menu.
1. On the PFD, move the cursor to the stream where you want
to break the connection (anywhere except over the stream
icon).
2. When the cursor is over the stream line, it changes into the
Move Segment cursor. Right-click the mouse button.
Figure 10.22
Move
Segment
cursor
The Swap Attachments 3. From the menu that appears, select Break Connection.
command appears in the (Depending on the selected stream, the Object Inspect
Object Inspect menu only
when more than one menu may not have all of the commands as shown in the
stream is attached to a figure below.)
certain location (in other
words, 2 feed streams).
Figure 10.23
10-29
Disconnecting Using the Break

Connection Tool
Breaking the connection The Break Connection tool lets you break an existing stream connection
does not delete the
stream, only its
in the PFD. You can only break one connection at a time. If you want to
connection to the break a second connection, select the Break Connection option again.
operation. You can either break an inlet or an outlet stream connection, depending
on which side of the stream icon you select.
Use this procedure to break a connection using the Break Connection

tool:
1. Access the Break Connection tool by doing one of the following:
• Select Break a Connection from the PFD menu.
• Click the Break Connection icon in PFD tool bar.
2. Move the cursor to the stream where you want to break the
connection. When the cursor is in position, it changes from an X to a
Break Connection icon
checkmark.
3. When the checkmark appears, click the stream. The connection is
broken.
10.3.19 Cut/Paste Functions

The Cut/Paste Objects sub-menu available in the PFD Object Inspect
menu provides several commands for adding, removing, and
recombining flowsheet objects.
Figure 10.24
Creating Sub-Flowsheets
The Combine Into Sub-flowsheet command lets you select multiple PFD
objects in your simulation case (in the main flowsheet) and create a
10-30
Edit Options 10-31
sub-flowsheet containing those objects.
Use this feature to organize complicated flowsheets. For example, you

can divide your flowsheet into different sections to make the
information more readable.
1. Select the PFD objects (i.e., unit operations, streams and logical
operators) to be included in the new sub-flowsheet.
2. Right-click to open the Object Inspect menu.
3. From the Cut/Paste Objects sub-menu, select the Combine Into
Sub-flowsheet command.
Moving Sub-Flowsheet Objects Back to the Parent

Flowsheet
1. Right-click the sub-flowsheet icon. The Object Inspect menu
appears.
2. From the Cut/Paste Objects sub-menu, select the Move Contents
to Owner Flowsheet command.
Even though the contents of the sub-flowsheet were moved

to the owner flowsheet, the sub-flowsheet still exists, but
can be deleted. If you decided to “re-collapse” the sub-
flowsheet objects, a new sub-flowsheet is created.
Importing/Exporting Objects
You can export flowsheet objects from one PFD and import to another
using the Import Objects and Export Objects commands in the PFD
Object Inspect menu. The objects that you export or import are saved
as an UFL file. See Section 4.3 - UFL Files for more information.
Exporting Objects
Exported object files use 1. Select the PFD objects you want to export.
the extension.ufl.
2. Right-click on one of the selected objects.
3. From the Cut/Paste Objects sub-menu, select Export Objects. The
File Save view appears.
4. Enter a name and destination for the flowsheet file.
5. Click Save.
When you export objects from a flowsheet, the objects, connections,

and geometric data are exported. None of the basis or flow information
(components, flowrates, etc.) are included.
10-31
Importing Objects
Templates can be imported into a flowsheet by using the Import Objects
command in the PFD Object Inspect menu. All basis information already
supplied to the flowsheet is automatically applied to the imported
objects. None of the basis information from the case in which the
objects were exported is saved in the template file.
1. Right-click the PFD to open the Object Inspect menu.
2. From the Cut/Paste Objects sub-menu select Import Objects. This
opens the Open File view.
3. Browse to the location of the flowsheet file (*.ufl) you want to open
and select it.
4. Click Open.
Cloning Objects
You can clone flowsheet objects on your PFD using the Clone Selected
Objects command in the Copy/Paste Objects sub-menu. All object
information is automatically cloned into a new set of objects. Only the
object name changes.
Cut/Copy/Paste
Hot Keys: The Cut, Copy, and Paste commands in the Cut/Paste Objects sub-
Cut - CTRL X menu have the typical functionality associated with these commands.
Copy - CTRL C You cut or copy an object(s) in one flowsheet and paste the object(s) to
Paste - CTRL V another location on the PFD or into any sub-flowsheets of any case. If
the destination sub-flowsheet was created using a different fluid
package, then some of the copied information may not be transferrable
and will be omitted.
10.3.20 Stream Label Options

By default, each stream on the PFD has a label that displays its name.
You can change all stream name labels so that the current value of a
key variable appears in place of each stream name.
Common Variable Choices

There are some hot key combinations that let you toggle between
10-32
Edit Options 10-33
stream name labels and some of the more common stream variables:
Hot Key Combination Function

Shift T Displays stream temperatures
Shift P Displays stream pressures
Shift F Displays stream molar flowrates
Shift N Displays stream names
Other Variables
You can also replace the stream name labels with other variable values.
To change the stream name label to the Std Gas Flow, do the following:
1. Right-click in a blank part of the PFD to open the Object Inspect
menu.
2. Select Choose Label Variable to open the Select Variable for PFD
Labels view.
Figure 10.25
3. Click the Change Variable button to open the Variable Navigator.

4. Select Std Gas Flow from the list of available variables.
Figure 10.26
5. Change the variable description in the Description field, if required.

6. Click OK.
10-33
Use the Hide Units and You are returned to the Select Variable for PFD Labels view. The
Show Units radio variable you just selected appears in the Current Variable field.
buttons to toggle the
units on and off. 7. Click the Variable Values radio button to display the values of the
current variable on the PFD. Select the Object Names radio button
to display the names of the streams on the PFD.
8. Click the Close icon.
10.3.21 Annotations & Labels

Annotations are any text that appears on the PFD aside from the object
labels. UniSim Design allows you to enter annotations anywhere on the
PFD. UniSim Design automatically labels an object on the PFD with the
object’s name. The object’s name is taken from the name that appears
on the Name field in the object’s property view.
Adding Annotations
Use this procedure to add text to the PFD.
1. Click the Add Text Annotation icon in the PFD tool bar.
2. Move the cursor to the location on the PFD where you want to place
the text and click the mouse button. The Text Props view appears.
Add Text Annotation icon
3. In the Text field, type the text that you want to appear on the PFD.
Figure 10.27
Editing Annotations
1. In the PFD, right-click the Text Annotation, then click the View
Properties command. The Text Props view appears.
2. In the Text field, modify the text, then click OK.
Other editing options include the following:
10-34
Edit Options 10-35
• Hide. Hides the selected Label or Text Annotation.

• Delete. Deletes the selected Label or Text Annotation.
• Transform. Rotate by 90, 180 or 270 degrees.
• Change Font. Changes the font for a Label or Text Annotation.
This function is not global; it changes only the selected object’s
font.
• Change Colour. Opens the colour palette and lets you change
the colour of the selected Label or Text Annotation.
Moving & Sizing Labels

You can move and size object labels on the PFD. Right-click any icon
and select the Move/Size Label command. You can also ‘free’ the Label
by selecting the object and then pressing L on the keyboard. Move
labels the same way you move operations, streams, and annotations.
Figure 10.28
Labels and annotations can

only be sized horizontally.
There are only two resize
handles on the box
surrounding the label, as
compared to the eight
handles that appear for
objects.
Once you select the Move/Size Label command, the label is unlocked
from the object to which it belongs. The label re-locks itself once it is
deselected, however, you can select the label’s corresponding object
icon and then select the label again without re-locking the Label. This
facilitates moving and sizing both the icon and its label at one time
without repeatedly selecting the Move/Size Label command.
10.3.22 Hiding PFD Objects

Hiding a unit operation or Any object on the PFD can be hidden, and you can hide multiple objects
stream on your PFD does
not alter your simulation at one time. Hiding an object does not prevent the case from solving.
case. You can hide operations, streams, and text annotations by selecting the
Hide command from the Object Inspect menu.
10-35
10-36 Graph Control
To hide labels, you need to select the Format Label command and then
A Show/Hide option also
exists for displaying sub- select Hide Label from the sub-menu.
flowsheet objects on the
main flowsheet PFD. For
details, see Section
7.24.4 - Access Column Revealing Hidden Objects
or Sub-Flowsheet PFDs.
Use this function to reveal any objects that are hidden on the PFD. You
can access this function in two places:
• PFD menu
• Object Inspect menu
When you select the Show Hidden Objects command, the Show Hidden
Object view appears. This view allows you to specify the hidden objects
to be revealed. Select the objects you want to show, then click the OK
button.
Figure 10.29
10.3.23 Printing the PFD

For more information see All objects (Streams, Operations, Text, and PFD Tables) included within
Section 9.2.3 - Printing
the PFD view can be printed. UniSim Design prints the PFD as it appears
the PFD.
on the screen.
10.4 Graph Control

The changes made to a You can customize each individual plot in UniSim Design using the
plot using the Graph
Graph Control tool. You can also modify many of the plot
Control tool are specific to
the active plot. characteristics, which are grouped into the five tabs of the Graph
To make global changes
that affect all plots, use
the Colours and Fonts
pages on the Resources
tab of the Session
Preferences property
view.
10-36
Edit Options 10-37
Control property view:
Figure 10.30
To access the Graph Control property view, do one of the following:

• Right-click any spot on an active plot and select the Graph
Control command from the Object Inspect menu.
• Double-click in the plot area to make the plot the active view.
Then, either double-click on the plot Title or Legend to access
the respective tab of the Graph Control view.
While the plot area has focus, you can also click and drag on either the
Legend or Title to reposition the selected item.
10.4.1 Data Page Tab

For each data set on the plot, you can do the following:
All changes
instantaneously affect the • View the data set Type
plot. There is no need to • Modify the data set Name
close the Graph Control
property view to see the
• Specify the Colour and Symbol that represent the data on the
modifications. plot
• Select a Line Style
The Symbol drop-down • Show/hide the Symbol or Line
list is not available for Bar
• Show/hide the name in the Legend
Charts.
Any changes that are made affect only the data set that is selected in
the list.
To modify the appearance of a data set, select the name of the set in
the list of data sets. The information that corresponds to the selected
10-37
10-38 Graph Control
data set appears, as shown in the figure below.
Figure 10.31
Changes can be made directly in the input field and are The Type is either Line or
reflected in the list of data sets and in the legend. Bar, depending on the
selected plot. This
information cannot be
Select a data set to changed.
make modifications
to the associated Double-click here to
data. access the colour palette.
Select a default colour or
customize a colour for the
data set.
Check the checkbox

Open the drop-down list
to have the data set
and select one of the
name appear in the
options. If you do not
Legend.
want the symbol to
appear on the plot,
uncheck the Visible
checkbox.
10.4.2 Axes Tab

Refer to Section 10.5 - From the Axes tab, you can do the following for each axis:
Format Editor for
information regarding • Make changes to the Label name, font and units.
value formatting. • Show/Hide the Label name and/or units.
• Define the axis bounds or use the Auto Scale function.
• Format the axis values.
Any changes that are made affect only the axis that is selected in the
list. To make modifications to the appearance of an axis, select the
name in the list of axes. The information that corresponds to the
10-38
Edit Options 10-39
selected axis appears.
Figure 10.32
Change the label name for the Check the Visible checkbox to display the
axis using the input field. axis name and/or units on the plot.
List of Axes
Double-click here to
The drop-down list access the Font view.
shows the available
units for the axis.
Set the Minimum and
Maximum values for
Check the Use Auto the axis Bounds in
Scale checkboxes to the input fields. The
have UniSim Design Use Auto Scale
automatically set the checkboxes must be
bounds for the axis. unchecked.
Check this checkbox to display the Click this button to access the Real Format Editor, from
axis on a Logarithmic scale. which you can set the format for the axis values.
10.4.3 Title Tab

On the Title tab, you can do the following:
• Change the default title name and font.
• Select the colours for the text, background, and border of the
title.
• Show/Hide the title, background, and border.
Figure 10.33
Make changes Double-click on

to the title the coloured box
directly in the to access the
input field. colour palette.
Check the
appropriate
Double-click
here to Visible checkbox
to display the
access the
Font view. text,
background, or
border.
10-39
10-40 Graph Control
10.4.4 Legend Tab

The Legend tab allows you to change the appearance and location of
the legend. You can do the following:
• Change the colour of the border, background, or text.
• Select the orientation: vertical or horizontal.
• Show/Hide the border and background.
• Enable automatic resizing of the legend upon repositioning.
• Place the legend in the foreground or background.
Figure 10.34
Double-click on the Double-click here

Check the Visible coloured box to access the to access the
checkbox to place colour palette. Font view.
the legend in the
foreground.
Check the
appropriate Visible
checkbox to display
the border or
background colour.
Check this
checkbox to have
UniSim Design
resize the legend
when it is
repositioned in the Select a radio button for the
plot area. orientation of the legend.
10.4.5 Plot Area Tab

From the Plot Area tab, you can do the following:
• Change the colour of the background, frame, and grid.
10-40
Edit Options 10-41
• Show/Hide the background, frame, and grid.
Figure 10.35
Double-click on a
coloured box to
access the colour
palette.
Check the
appropriate Visible
checkbox to
display the
background,
frame, or grid.
10.5 Format Editor

The Real Format Editor can be accessed in the following locations:
• Workbook Setup property view
• Graph Control property view
Figure 10.36
The layout of the Real Format Editor view

depends on the radio button selected.
From the view in the figure above, you can set the format of values
displayed in UniSim Design. The Format Specification group uses three
10-41
10-42 Format Editor
radio buttons for the options available:
Format Description
Exponential The values are in exponential form with a specified number
of Significant digits. For example, 8546 appears as
8.546e+03 if 4 was specified in the Significant cell.
Fixed Specify the maximum number of digits that appear before
Decimal the decimal point in the Whole cell (see above figure). If
Point the Whole cell limit is exceeded by a value in UniSim
Design, exponential form is used. In the Decimal Digits cell,
input the number of digits that appear after the decimal
point.
If you check the Display sign if zero checkbox, UniSim
Design displays a ‘+’ symbol in front of a value that
appears as zero using the current precision. For example, a
composition of 0.000008 appears as zero when using a
Decimal Digits value of 4. With the checkbox checked, the
cell shows +0.0000 to signify that there is a small number
present.
Significant In the Significant cell, specify the number of significant
Figures figures (between 0 and 9) that you want to display.
The Use Default button closes the Real Format Editor view and assigns
the UniSim Design default format to the associated values.
10-42
Simulation Tools 11-1
11 Simulation Tools
11.1 Introduction ................................................................................ 3
11.2 Workbook .................................................................................... 3
11.3 PFD.............................................................................................. 3
11.4 Case Summary............................................................................. 3
11.5 Utilities ........................................................................................ 4
11.6 Reports........................................................................................ 4
11.7 Databook ..................................................................................... 4

11.7.1 Databook Variables................................................................. 5
11.7.2 Process Data Tables................................................................ 7
11.7.3 Strip Charts..........................................................................13
11.7.4 Data Recorder.......................................................................27
11.7.5 Case Studies ........................................................................30
11.7.6 Spec Scenarios .....................................................................37
11.8 Face Plates .................................................................................39
11.9 Dynamics Assistant.....................................................................40
11.10 Control Manager .......................................................................41
11.11 Dynamic Profiling Tool..............................................................41

11.11.1 Profiling a Case ...................................................................42
11.12 Snapshot Manager ....................................................................44

11.12.1 Local Snapshots Tab ............................................................44
11.12.2 Real Time Monitor................................................................46
11.12.3 External Snapshots..............................................................47
11.13 Script Manager .........................................................................50

11.13.1 Recording a New Script ....................................................51
11.13.2 Script Playback ...............................................................52
11.14 Macro Language Editor .............................................................52
11.15 Case Security ............................................................................54

11.15.1 Locking a UniSim Design Case...........................................54
11.15.2 Loading a Locked UniSim Design Case................................56
11-1
11-2 Simulation Tools
11.15.3 File Security Setup ..........................................................56

11.15.4 Unlocking a Case.............................................................64
11.15.5 Runtime Mode.................................................................65
11.16 Echo ID.....................................................................................70
11.17 Correlation Manager .................................................................71

11.17.1 Adding Property Correlations to Streams ............................73
11.17.2 Removing Property Correlations from Streams.....................74
11.17.3 Cloning Property Correlations ............................................74
11.17.4 Deleting Cloned Property Correlations ................................75
11.17.5 Adding Correlation Sets to Streams....................................75
11.17.6 Deleting a Correlation Set.................................................77
11.17.7 Gas Properties Correlation ................................................77
11.17.8 RVP Properties ................................................................82
11.18 Alarm Manager .........................................................................85

11.18.2 Understanding the Alarm Manager .........................................86
11.19 Variable Navigator ....................................................................88

11.19.1 Using the Variable Navigator .............................................89
11.20 Simulation Balance Tool............................................................90
11.21 RTO Manager ............................................................................90

11.21.1 Adding a Transfer Table ........................................................91
11.21.2 Viewing a Transfer Table .......................................................92
11.21.3 Deleting a Transfer Table ......................................................93
11.21.4 Adding Object .....................................................................93
11.21.5 Removing Object .................................................................94
11-2
11.1 Introduction
This chapter provides information about the tools available in the Tools
menu. To access the Tools menu commands, use one of the following
methods:
• Click the Tools menu in the menu bar.
• Press ALT T.
• Press just the ALT key to move the active location to the File
menu in the menu bar.
When you press the ALT key, the menu bar is active and you can
navigate it using the keyboard. The up and down arrows move through
the menu associated with a specific item, while the left and right arrows
move you to the next menu bar item, automatically opening the
associated menu.
If you want to switch focus from the menu bar without making a
selection, press the ESC key or the ALT key.
Tools menu
11.2 Workbook
The Workbook command opens the UniSim Design Workbook. Refer to
Section 7.23 - Workbook for more information on using the
Workbook.
11.3 PFD
The PFD command opens the UniSim Design PFD. This section is
covered in Chapter 8 - UniSim Design Objects and Chapter 7 -
Simulation Environment.
11.4 Case Summary

To open the Select Summary view, do the following:
1. Select the Summaries command from the Tools menu.
to view.
11-3
11-4 Utilities
3. Click the View button to display the Summary view. The Summary
view provides an alternative way of adding, editing, and deleting
streams and unit operation in specific flowsheets.
Figure 11.1
Select more than one The Flowsheet Streams group is used for adding, editing, and deleting
object at a time by holding
streams in the selected flowsheet. The stream list contains all of the
down the CTRL key and
then clicking each object streams available in the selected flowsheet.
you want to select.
The Unit Operations group is used for adding, editing, and deleting unit
operations in the selected flowsheet. The unit operation list contains all
of the unit operations available in the selected flowsheet.
Upon deleting a stream or unit operation, you are prompted to confirm

the deletion.
11.5 Utilities
The Utilities command opens the Available Utilities view. Refer to
Section 7.26 - Utilities for more information on utilities.
11.6 Reports
The Reports command opens the Report Manager. Refer to Section 9.3
- Reports for more information on using the Report Manager.
11.7 Databook
There is only one The Databook is used for systematically analyzing data and lets you
Databook in each UniSim
Design case, which monitor key process variables in both Steady State and Dynamics
contains variables from all modes. Variables for all Databook features are selected in a single
flowsheets. location and can be activated from the main list for each application.
To access the Databook, use one of the following methods:

• Select the Databook command from the Tools menu.
11-4
• Press the CTRL D hot key combination.
11.7.1 Databook Variables

Attach as many variables All variables used by the Databook are managed through the Variables
to the Databook as
required.
tab.
Figure 11.2
Adding a Variable
Refer to Section 11.19 - Use this procedure to add a variable to the Databook.
information regarding the 1. Click the Insert button to display the Variable Navigator view.
Variable Navigator.
Figure 11.3
Select the
Unit Ops
radio button
to view only
Unit Ops
variables.
2. From the list of available flowsheets, select the flowsheet in which

the object is located.
Click the Cancel button at any time to close the Variable Navigator
11-5
11-6 Databook
without accepting any changes.

3. From the list of available objects, select the object containing the
variable.
add. Some variables (e.g., Comp Mass Flow) require that you select
a variable specific.
5. Click in the Variable Description field and type a description for the
variable (optional).
6. Click OK. The variable appears in the list of available data entries on
the Variable tab.
Another way of adding variables is via the Insert Object and Variable
Groups or Insert Object and Variable Pairs buttons.
Editing a Variable
Refer to Section 11.19 - Use this procedure to edit a variable in the Databook.
information about the 1. From the list of available data entries, select the variable you want
Variable Navigator. to edit.
2. Click the Edit button. The Variable Navigator view appears. This
view lets you change the flowsheet, object, variable and description
of the variable.
3. Make the required changes, then click OK, or click the Cancel
button to close the view without making changes.
Deleting a Variable
Use this procedure to delete a variable from the Databook.
1. From the list of available data entries, select the variable you want
to delete.
2. Click the Delete button
You will not be prompted to confirm the deletion, so ensure

you have selected the correct variable.
When a variable is deleted, it is removed from all features in
the Databook.
You can also Delete all Unused variables from the databook. this will
remove variables which are no longer used by any of the Data Tables,
Strip charts, Data Records, Case Studies or Spec Scenarios.
Optionally, you can also Delete All Variables. this will remove the
variables from all the Data Tables, etc that are using the variables.
11-6
11.7.2 Process Data Tables

Variables for the process Process data tables are installed individually through the Process Data
data table are selected on Tables tab. Use this tab to view, add, or delete customized process data
the Variables tab of the
Databook. tables. For each table, add any combination of key process variables
from the list of available variables. Variables can be used in multiple
process data tables.
Figure 11.4
Views the selected process data table. Supply a descriptive

Lists all the
process data name for the
selected process
tables in the
case. data table.
When the Show

Adds a new checkbox is
process data checked, the
table. variable is added to
the selected
process data table.
Deletes the
selected Removes all of the
process data variables from the
table. process data table.
Accesses the
DDE Notify Checks all
view, so you unchecked
can set up the checkboxes and unchecks
Adds all of the
process data table to trigger a DDE all checked checkboxes.
variables to the
command as a result of the timestep
process data
event trigger.
Adding a Process Data Table

1. Click the Add button. A process data table with default name
ProcData1 appears in the list of available tables. If required, type a
new name in the Process Data Table field.
2. Check the Show checkbox for each variable you want displayed in
this process data table.
Note that for UniSim Design models that are connected to external
models, either UniSim Operate or PDTGen (refer to UniSim Operations
Engineering Guide) can automatically generate Process Data Tables.
Viewing a Process Data Table

1. From the list of available process data tables, click the process data
11-7
11-8 Databook
table you want to view.

Click the View Databook 2. Click the View button. The Process Data Table view appears.
button to open the
Databook if it is closed.
Note that for UniSim Design models that are connected to
external models, either UniSim Operate or PDTGen (refer to
UniSim Operations Engineering Guide) can automatically
generate Process Data Tables.
Figure 11.5
The Process Data Table shows the following for each variable:
• Name of the Object that the variable is attached to
• Object variable name
• Current value
• Units of the value
• Tag name of connected variable
• Access mode
• No Transfer
• Read
• Write
• Read/Write.
A radio button at the bottom of the table gives the user the option to
sort the variables by object name or tag name.
Viewing the FCE Process Data Table

If the UniSim Design case is connected to an external model, it may be
necessary to synchronize values from the external model to values in
the UniSim Design model. This is commonly called integration. For
example, if the UniSim Design model is used in an operator training
simulator, there may be an external controls model. The outputs of the
external controllers will have to be integrated with final control
elements (FCE) in the UniSim Design model. The values from the
external model and connection points in the UniSim Design model will
be displayed in the Process Data Table named "FCE Table".
11-8
To facilitate the integration process, you can use the enhanced PDT.
Figure 11.6
The enhanced FCE Table shows the following for each variable:
• Name of the object that the variable is attached to.
• Object variable name.
• Object type (PID controller, Digital Pt, etc.)
• Current value in USD.
• Current value in the external model
• Tag name of connected variable (can be generated automatically
by PDTGen)
• Internal / external mode of the USD variable. If the object type
is a PID controller, digital point, selector, or transfer function,
this will be the internal/external mode of that controller. If the
object is a spreadsheet (or other non-controller), then this will
be a variable internal to the Process Data Table to allow that
object to function as if it had an internal/external mode.
The following options are shown at the bottom of the table:

• Switch between the normal and enhanced view of the table
• Sort by:
• Object name
• Tag name
• Object type
• Internal / external mode of the USD variable
• AutoCut Analog = automatically switch from internal to external
mode for any variable in the table that is within a certain
tolerance.
• The tolerance for the AutoCut option
• AutoCut Digital = automatically switch from internal to external
mode for any digital point in the table where the USD value
matches the external value.
A typical work process to integrate an external DCS system to a UniSim

Design model would be as follows:
1. Run the integrator
2. Call up the FCE table
3. Sort by Internal / external mode so that variables in internal mode
are on top
11-9
11-10 Databook
4. Set the tolerance to a small value (1% is the default)

5. Select AutoCut Analog
6. For the variable at the top of the list, look at the DCS tag (column 6)
and call up that tag on the external DCS
7. Put the DCS controller in manual mode
8. If the DCS controller is not PV tracking:
• Double click on the USD object name (column 1) to call up the
view for that object
• Set the DCS setpoint equal to the PV of the USD controller
9. Set the output of the DCS controller to equal the output of the USD
controller (in column 4).
10. The USD controller will automatically switch from internal to
external mode.
11. Put the DCS controller in its appropriate mode (automatic or
cascade for example).
12. Make sure that the controller does not go unstable. You could check
stability by making a small change to the setpoint on the DCS
controller.
13. Move on to the next object in the FCE table.
The entire model can be integrated from the FCE table.
Viewing the MV Process Data Table

If the UniSim Design case is connected to an external model, it may be
necessary to synchronize values from the external model to values in

the UniSim Design model and vice versa. This is commonly called
integration. For example, if the UniSim Design model is used in an
operator training simulator, there may be external controls model. The
measured variables (PV) in the UniSim Design model will have to be
integrated with the external controllers measured variables. The values
from the UniSim Design model and connection points in the UniSim
Design model will be displayed in the Process Data Table named "MV
Table".
To facilitate the integration process, you can use the enhanced MV
11-10
Table.
Figure 11.7
The enhanced MV Table shows the following for each variable:

• Name of the object that the variable is attached to.
• Object variable name.
• Indicated value in USD.
• Tag name of connected variable (can be generated
automatically by PDTGen).
• Use Malfunction checkbox to specify whether the variable
is malfunctionable or not.
• Overall Malfunction Status of the variable.
The following options are shown at the bottom of the table:

• Switch between the normal and enhanced view of the
table
• Sort by:
• Object name
• Tag name
• Use Malfunction
• Malfunction Status
If Use Malfunction checkbox is checked the data entry is

malfunctionable for the entries other than PID Controller's PV. If
the data entry is PID Controller's PV the entry is malfunctionable
if the "Use Malfunction" checkbox is checked on the Malfunction
page. If the data entry is PID Controller's PV then Malfunction
Status is the Overall Malfunction Status of the data entry.
Double click on the Use Malfunction cell to bring up the
Malfunction view. The Malfunction view for the data entries
other than PID Controller's PV is shown in Figure 11.8. If the
data entry is the "PV" of PID Controller, the Malfunction view is
same as the Malfunction page view appearing on the PID
11-11
11-12 Databook
Controller as shown in Figure 11.9.
Figure 11.8 Malfunction View of data entires

other than PID Controller’s PV
Figure 11.9Malfunction View of PID

Controller’s PV
The malfunction details can be seen in the Malfunction view. The

Malfunction view Status Bar is updated with Overall Malfunction Status
when malfunction is enabled.
When Use Malfunction checkbox on the MV Table is toggled the

malfunction details are not persisted for the data entries other than PID
Controller's PV.
The variable value on the MV Table is the indicated value in USD. This
value is the failed value of the variable. If the malfunction is not
enabled, the failed value is same as the actual value and when the
malfunction is enabled the failed value is calculated. The failed value
calculations are detailed in the PID Controller's Malfunction section.
11-12
The PV value of the PID Controller is the failed value and not the actual
value. The value of the variable within the object is the actual value for
the data entries on the MV Table other than PID Controller's PV. The
failed values are shown on the "Value" column in the MV Table.
Hence the value in the "Value" column (failed value or indicated value)
should be used as the MV (measured value) and not the variable value
within the object for the data entries other than PID Controller's PV.
Note: The malfunction of the MV simulates the malfunction

of transmitter (transmitter may or may not physically be
present in the flowsheet) which transmits the MV from the
source module to the controller. The failed value of the MV is
used by the controllers to determine the SP. The failed value
of the MV is not used to update the property in the unit
operation window. For example, if a stream's temperature is
failed using the MV table, the stream's temperature is not
updated with the failed value, but the failed value in MV
table is transmitted as the PV to the controller thereby
simulating the transmitter malfunction.
Deleting a Process Data Table

1. From the list of available process data tables, click the process data
table you want to delete.
When a Process Data 2. Click the Delete button.
Table is deleted, the
variables associated with
it are not deleted from You will not be prompted to confirm the deletion, so ensure
the Databook. you have selected the correct variable.
11.7.3 Strip Charts

Variables for the strip Use the strip chart tool to monitor the response of key process
chart are selected on the variables during dynamics calculations. Strip charts let you monitor the
Variables tab of the
Databook. behaviour of process variables in a graphical format while calculations
proceed. Current and historical values for each strip chart are also
tabulated for further examination.
Strip charts are installed individually using the Strip Charts tab. You can
have multiple strip charts, with each having an unlimited number of
variables charted. The same variable can be used in more than one
Strip Chart, so the use of multiple strip charts with a maximum of six
11-13
11-14 Databook
variables per strip chart is recommended.
Figure 11.10
Displays all Views the history Opens the Supplies a descriptive

the strip data of the selected selected strip name for the selected
charts in the strip chart. chart. strip chart.
case.
Displays the
current values
of variables in The interval
the selected length of the
strip chart. sample. The
current data is
only stored for
Adds a new this amount of
strip chart. time.
Deletes the
selected strip
chart.
Opens the
Logger Set-Up
Opens the Clears all
View. When checked, the
Logger Set- historical data.
associated variable is plotted
Up-All View. on the selected strip chart.
Logger Set-Up View

The Logger Set-Up view allows you to modify the following options of
the selected strip chart in the Available Strip Charts group:
• The amount of data that the strip chart keeps and displays in the
graph.
• The frequency the strip chart records and displays the data.
For example, if the Logger Size has a value of 250 and the Sample
Interval has a value of 5 seconds, the strip chart stores and displays
250 values, and each value was recorded every 5 seconds. So the
amount of time range displayed in the strip chart is 1250 seconds or 20
minutes and 50 seconds.
Logger Set-Up-All View

The Logger Set-Up-All view allows you to modify the following options
of all the strip charts in the Available Strip Charts group:
• The amount of data that the strip chart keeps and displays in the
graph.
11-14
• The frequency the strip chart records and displays the data.
Figure 11.11
Clear
Historical data can dramatically increase the size of a simulation case
when it is stored to disk (and held in computer memory). You can clear
all of the historical data by clicking the Clear button.
Adding a Strip Chart

Use this procedure to add a strip chart to the Databook.
1. Click the Add button to display a strip chart with default name
DataLogger1 in the list of available strip charts. If necessary, type a
new name in the Logger Name field.
Variables can exist in more 2. Click the Active checkbox for each variable that you want to display
than one strip chart. in this strip chart.
Deleting a Strip Chart

When a strip chart is Use this procedure too delete a strip chart from the Databook.
deleted, the attached
variables are not deleted 1. From the list of available strip charts, click on the strip chart you
from the Databook. want to delete.
You will not be prompted to confirm the deletion, so ensure

you have selected the correct strip chart.
Viewing a Strip Chart

When the Integrator is Use this procedure to view a strip chart.
active, the strip chart
begins to accumulate 1. From the list of available strip charts, select the strip chart you want
data points.
11-15
11-16 Databook
to view.
2. Click the Strip Chart button. The Strip Chart view. appears.
Figure 11.12
The Legend displays By default, like variables are Current

the names and formats grouped under a similar axis values of the
of the variables as they range, however, you can create strip chart
appear on the strip your own y-axis in the Graph variables.
chart. Controls property view.
Strip chart
variables are
grouped into
their unit sets.
Grouped
variables share
the same y-axis
range.
Interval
markers are
used to
measure
Time is always variables at
on the x-axis. certain
instances in
the strip chart.
You can manipulate the information displayed on the strip chart within
the Strip Chart view. There are several functions you can perform
directly on the strip chart; these are described in the following sections.
Selecting Curves
The y-axis displays the range and units of a specific strip chart variable
depending on the variable selected. Select a curve using one of the
following methods:
• Click any part of the variable curve in the strip chart.
11-16
• Right-click the strip chart and click the Select Curve command,
then from the sub-menu select the required variable.
Figure 11.13
Manipulating the Y-Axis Range

Use this procedure to manipulate the y-axis range of the strip chart.
1. Position the cursor over an empty space in the strip chart.
Cursor Description
When the cursor is in the background of the strip chart, the
following cursor appears. You can move along the strip
chart in any direction.
If you simply want to move vertically across the strip chart,

move the cursor on or near a curve and the following cursor
appears.
2. Click and hold the mouse button until a multi-directional cursor

appears.
3. Drag the strip chart up if you want to display a lower range of
values on the y-axis, or, drag the strip chart down if you want to
display a higher range of values.
By default, strip chart curves are grouped into their unit sets. For
example, all temperature variables are associated and displayed with
the same y-axis range and units. By manipulating the range of a
temperature variable in the strip chart, you change the range of all
temperature variables associated with that axis.
If you want to associate a different range with a variable in the strip

chart, you must first create your own axis. Refer to the Graph Control
section for more information.
11-17
11-18 Databook
Manipulating the X-Axis Range

Scroll across the strip The range of sampled data displayed in the strip chart can be
chart by the x-axis or by
selecting the light blue
manipulated. Below the x-axis, a set of colours appear to indicate what
section of the Log range of sampled data are in the strip chart.
Controller bar with the
cursor.
Increase or decrease the range of sampled data and scroll the strip
The following cursor
appears.
chart over a range of recorded strip chart data. Depending on the
amount of data already recorded in the strip chart view, the Log
Controller bar, shown in the figure below, appears below the x-axis.
Move the cursor along
the bar to the interval Figure 11.14
you want to view.
Each colour (from left to right) in the Log Controller bar is described in
the following table:
Colour Definition
Gray Bar There is no data in the strip chart.
Dark Blue Strip chart data is recorded.
Bar
Red Marker Indicates where the first data displayed in the strip chart is
located in the overall data set. Expand the range of display
by “dragging” the red marker to the left (away from the
yellow marker) and decrease the displayed range by
dragging the red marker right (towards the yellow marker).
Light Blue Indicates where the data displayed on the strip chart is
Bar located in the overall data set.
Yellow Indicates where the displayed data ends. Expand the
Marker displayed range by “dragging” the yellow marker to the
right (away from the red marker) and decrease the
displayed range of data by dragging the yellow marker left
(towards the red marker).
Creating Interval Markers

Interval markers are used to measure variables at certain instances in
the strip chart. The strip chart variable value appears next to the
intersecting point of the interval marker and the strip chart variable
curve. Up to four interval markers can be added to the strip chart.
1. Ensure the most recent data appears on the strip chart. The light
blue portion of the Log Controller Bar should be located to the far
right of the x-axis.
2. Place the cursor on the right edge of the strip chart. A left arrow
Left Arrow cursor replaces the cursor.
11-18
3. Click and drag the interval marker across the strip chart. Release
the mouse button when the interval marker is in the required
location.
Zooming in on the Strip Chart

Use this procedure to focus or zoom in on an area of the strip chart.
1. Press and hold the SHIFT key and press and hold the right mouse
button until the cursor changes to a magnifying glass.
Zoom Strip Chart cursor
2. Drag the cursor until a box encompasses an area in the strip chart.
3. Release the mouse button and the SHIFT key. The y-axis scaling
changes to reflect the zoom selection.
Figure 11.15
11-19
11-20 Databook
Object Inspect Menu

The following commands appear in the strip chart Object Inspect
menu.
Option Description
Graph Customize the appearance of the strip chart and modify
Control curve and axis parameters. For more information, see the
Graph Control section.
Legend Opens the Legend view.
The Legend view displays all the Curve Names, Colours,

and Line Styles associated with the variables in the strip
chart.
• Modify the curve name by clicking in the Curve Name
field of the appropriate variable and typing in a new
name.
• Modify the colour by double-clicking in the Colour field
of the appropriate variable and selecting the new
colour from the colour palette.
• Modify the line style by clicking in the Line Style field
of the appropriate variable and selecting a new line
style from the drop-down list.
Select Curve Select a curve on the strip chart.
Auto Scale The bounds for the y-axis of the selected curve are
Curve automatically set.
Copy to Copies the selected view/information to the clipboard for
Clipboard storage and later use. Also, modifies the percentage of the
object’s size being stored.
Print Plot Prints the strip chart as it appears on the screen.
Print Setup Opens the Print Setup view so you can modify any print
options associated with printing the strip chart.
Graph Control
To open the Strip Chart Configuration view, click the Graph
Control command in the strip chart Object Inspect menu. Use
this view to modify the characteristics of the strip chart.
11-20
General Tab
Use the General tab to format the appearance of the strip chart.
Figure 11.16
Checkboxes are used to modify Check the Visible checkbox to make the
the appearance of the strip background, grid, or frame colours visible.
chart. Select the appropriate Select a colour for the item by double-clicking
checkbox to display the option the colour field and selecting a colour from the
on the strip chart. colour palette.
Opens the Setup

Logger view. This
view lets you
specify logger
sample size and
sample interval.
Opens the
Databook view.
Curves Tab
The Curves tab is used to modify the appearance of individual curves in
the strip chart. You can also modify how strip chart variables, variable
11-21
11-22 Databook
titles, and units appear on this tab.
Figure 11.17
The Object/Variable and Display Label fields Check the Show Curve checkbox to
display the strip chart curve names. By display or hide the selected curve.
default, the Display Label is copied from the Check the Live Values checkbox to
Object/Variable field. Change what is display the most recent calculated
actually displayed in the strip chart by strip chart values.
modifying the Display Label field.
Select a specific strip Select the units of the curve

chart variable to modify from the drop-down list.
plot characteristics.
Modify the curve colour

and line style in this
group. Select a colour
for the item by double-
clicking the Colour field
and selecting a colour
from the colour palette.
Select the line style from
the drop-down list.
Displays the axis associated with Opens the Opens the Setup Deletes the
the selected strip chart variable. Databook Logger view. selected curve.
Use the drop-down list to select view. Specify logger
any of the axes currently created sample size and
on the Axes tab for the same sample interval.
variable type.
Axes Tab
The Axes tab allows you to create, modify, and delete the y-axes.
Figure 11.18
Select an axis to The Curves group Lists all the variables that
modify. are associated with the selected axis.
11-22
Object Description
Label field Allows you to change the label name of the
selected vertical axis (y-axis) in the strip chart.
Units field Allows you to change the unit label of the selected
vertical axis by using the drop-down list.
Approx Num of Allows you to set the number of intervals on the
Intervals field vertical axis.
Scaling group The Scaling group contains the following objects:
• Current row. Displays the actual high and
low range values of the axis.
• Default row. Displays the UniSim Design
default high and low range values of the axis.
• Set button. Allows you to copy the ranges
from the Current row into the Default row.
• Use button. Allows you to copy the default
ranges from the Default row into the Current
row.
Auto Scale group This group contains the following objects:
• All Points radio button. Allows you to
automatically adjust the scale to best show
all of the data points available.
• Current Time Frame radio button. Allows
you to automatically adjust the scale to best
show all the data points available within the
current time frame.
• Automatic Auto Scale checkbox. When
The Automatic Auto Scale you check the Automatic Auto Scale
checkbox is automatically checkbox, UniSim Design automatically
unchecked when you calculates the most suitable scale setting for
move the curves, adjust all the axes in the strip chart. Uncheck to
the grid, zoom in/out, or allow user-specified scaling.
scales a single curve in • AutoScale button. Automatically adjust the
the strip chart. high and low range values for all axes. The
AutoScale button is automatically disabled
when the Automatic Auto Scale checkbox is
active.
New Axis button Allows you to create a new axis in the strip chart.
Delete Axis button Allows you to delete the selected axis created by
the user. The UniSim Design default axes cannot
be deleted.
Axis Display group Check the Show All checkbox to display all the
vertical axes with individual scale settings in the
strip chart. Uncheck to display only one selected
axis.
Time Axis Tab

The Time Axis tab allows you to modify the display and range of the x-
11-23
11-24 Databook
axis.
Figure 11.19
The following table lists and describes the objects on the Time Axis tab.
Object Description
Enter time using the Units group This group contains four radio buttons:
following format: • Seconds. Displays the time in seconds on
HHH:MM:SS.S the x-axis.
• Minutes. Displays the time in minutes on the
x-axis.
• Hours. Select to have the time displayed in
hours on the x-axis.
• Formatted. Select to have the time
displayed in standard time display (i.e.
hour:minute:second.second).
Low Time field Allows you to enter the low range value of the time
shown on the x-axis on the strip chart.
High Time field Allows you to enter the high range value of the
time shown on the x-axis on the strip chart.
Delta Time field Allows you to enter the difference between the
high and low range value of time. If the Low Time
and High Time fields are specified, the Delta Time
field shows the time difference.
Customize Time When you check the Customize Time Interval
Interval checkbox checkbox, the Time Interval field is enabled. In the
Time Interval field, you can specify the size of
each time interval on the x-axis.
Enable group Allows you to show the time axis label on the strip
chart. When you uncheck the Time Axis Visible
checkbox, the time axis label is removed from the
strip chart.
Open Databook Opens the Databook view.
button
Set-up Logger button Opens the Setup Logger view which allows you to
specify the logger sample size and the sample
interval.
11-24
Printing Tab
The Printing tab is used to control the printed output of the strip
chart.
Figure 11.20
Toggles the title

on and off.
Allows you to write

comments
concerning the strip
chart.
In the Options
group, you can
select what you
want to print with
the strip chart.
Notes Tab
To see all notes entered in Enter notes or comments about the strip chart in the notes tab
the simulation case, refer
to Section 7.19 - Notes
to let others know what the chart displays.
Manager.
Figure 11.21
Viewing Historical Data

1. From the list of available strip charts, select the strip chart
11-25
11-26 Databook
you want to view.

2. Click the Historical button. The Historical Data view appears.
Figure 11.22
Resize the Historical Data The Historical Data view records the data history for the variables on a
view to see more strip chart. The number of points recorded and the time between points
information.
is determined by the logger size and sample interval values specified in
the Logger Set-Up view. All data in the Historical Data view are
displayed in ascending order by default (the Ascending checkbox is
checked automatically). You can uncheck the Ascending checkbox to
display the data in descending order.
Exporting Historical Data

1. Click either the Save To .CSV File or Save To .DMP File button.
The Save File view appears.
2. Specify the name and location of your history file.
3. Click Save.
Viewing Current Data

1. From the list of available strip charts, select the strip chart you want
to view.
2. Click the Current button. The Current Data view appears.
Figure 11.23
11-26
11.7.4 Data Recorder

Variables for the data The Data Recorder tab lets you store snapshots of your process by
recorder are selected on grouping key process variables into different scenarios. You can
the Variables tab of the
Databook. manipulate the process in the current case and then record the results
for the variables you are monitoring. Each scenario created can have an
unlimited number of snapshots, called States.
Figure 11.24
Displays all Adds a new Records a state (the current Provide a

scenarios in scenario. values of the variables) for the descriptive name
the case. selected scenario. for the selected
scenario in this
Deletes the cell.
selected
scenario.
When the Include
checkbox is
Views the checked, the
recorded states associated
of the selected variable is added
scenario in to the selected
tabular or scenario.
graphical
format.
Adding a Scenario
You can create an 1. Click the Add button.
unlimited number of
scenarios.
A scenario with the default name Scenario 1 appears in the list of
available scenarios. If required, type a new name in the Current
Scenario field.
Variables can be included 2. From the list of available variables, check the Include checkbox for
in more than one each process variable you want to add to the scenario.
scenario.
Recording States
When you make changes to your process, you can record the values of
the key variables contained in the scenario.
1. From the list of available scenarios, select the scenario you want to
use.
2. Click the Record button.
The New Solved State view appears. The initial default name for the
New Solved State view new state is State1. Each time you click the Record button, the
11-27
11-28 Databook
integer value in the state name incrementally increases. If required,

modify the State name directly in the Name for New State field.
If adding a variable to a Scenario after States are recorded,

values for the new variable do not appear in the previously
recorded States.
3. Click the OK button. The key process variables of the selected

Scenario are recorded.
Repeat these steps each time you want to record the process variables
in the scenario. You can record an unlimited number of states for a
given scenario.
Viewing a Scenario
If you create more than States within a scenario can be viewed in either tabular or graphical
one scenario, the format.
scenarios are grouped in a
Notebook format. 1. From the list of available scenarios, select the scenario you want to
view.
2. Select either the Table or Graph radio button.
3. Click the View button. The Data Recorder view appears.
Figure 11.25
Modify the name of

the state in the
State row.
Returns the existing

state names to the
UniSim Design default
(e.g., State1, State2,
etc.).
Opens the Data

Recorder Setup view.
Deletes the active These radio buttons let you to

scenario from the toggle between tabular,
Databook. graphical and transpose
formats.
11-28
Figure 11.26
Refer to Section 10.4 - Customize the scenario plot by accessing the Graph Control property
Graph Control for
view. Right-click anywhere on the plot area and select the Graph
information about
customizing plots. Control command from the Object Inspect menu.
If more than two variables are active in the Data Recorder Setup
view, only the first two are plotted.
Deleting a Scenario
When a scenario is 1. From the list of available scenarios, select the scenario you want to
deleted, the attached delete.
variables are not deleted
from the Databook. 2. Click the Delete button.
You will not be prompted to confirm the deletion of a

scenario, so ensure the correct scenario is selected before
deleting.
Deleting a State
view.
2. Select either the Table radio button or the View button. The Data
Recorder view appears.
3. Click in the column of the state you want to delete.
4. Press the DELETE key.
You will not be prompted to confirm the deletion of a state,

so ensure the correct state is selected before deleting.
11-29
11-30 Databook
Data Recorder Setup

The Data Recorder Setup view provides a list of all scenarios installed in
the Databook. From this view, select the variables that appear in the
table and on the y-axis of the plot for each scenario. There is a limit of
two y-axis variables per plot.
Figure 11.27
Select the variables you want to display.

modify.
2. From the list of variables, check the Active checkbox for the
variable(s) to be displayed on the plot and in the table.
The following buttons are also available in this view:
Button Description
Add Adds a scenario to the Databook.
Delete Removes the selected scenario from the Databook.
Results Opens the Data Recorder view to the tab of the selected
scenario.
11.7.5 Case Studies

Variables for the case Use the case study tool to monitor the response of key process
study are selected on the variables to changes in your steady state process.
Variables tab of the
Databook. 1. From the list of variables created on the Variables tab, designate
the independent and dependent variables for each case study.
2. The independent variables can be input either in Discrete states or
as Nested variable ranges. If the Nested input method is selected,
each independent variable may be changed by three ways: step
size, logarithm step size, or total number of calculation points. Refer
to Independent Variable Setup in sub-section Defining a Case Study
for more information on the various input methods .
11-30
When the Nested method is selected, the independent variables are

varied one at a time and with each change, the dependent variables are
calculated and a new state is defined. As you define the bounds and
step size of the independent variables, the number of states that are
calculated are shown.
Since a maximum of two After the case study solves, examine the states in a table or view the
independent variables can results in a plot. Although you can select as many variables as you want
be plotted, limit the
number of states and for a case study, a maximum of three variables can be shown on a plot.
minimize solution time by
selecting only two One independent variable and two dependent variables produce a two-
independent variables per
case study. dimensional plot while two independent variables and a single
dependent variable appear on a three-dimensional graph.
Figure 11.28
Deletes the selected Adds a new Provides a descriptive name

case study. case study. for the case study.
Displays all the
available case
studies.
Opens the Case Select the

Studies Setup independent
view. and dependent
variables for
the selected
Select either a case study by
tabular, clicking the
graphical or appropriate
transpose table checkboxes.
format for the
results of the
selected case
study.
Opens the Case Studies view.
Adding a Case Study

1. Click the Add button. A scenario with the default name Case Study
1 appears in the list of available case studies. If necessary, type a
new name in the Current Case Study field.
Use the same variables in 2. In the Case Studies Data Selection group, check the Ind checkbox
different case studies. for the independent variables that UniSim Design varies.
3. Check the Dep checkbox for the calculated dependent variables.
When a case study is

Deleting a Case Study
variables are not deleted 1. From the list of available case studies, select the case study you
from the Databook.
11-31
11-32 Databook
want to delete.
You will not be prompted to confirm the deletion of a case

study, so ensure the correct case study is selected before
deleting.
Defining a Case Study

1. From the list of available case studies, select the case study you
want to define.
2. Select the independent and dependent variables for the selected
case study by checking the corresponding checkboxes.
3. Click the View button.
You can add and delete The Case Studies Setup view appears.
case studies from the
Case Studies Setup view,
but you cannot select the Figure 11.29
dependent and
independent variables.
4. Click the Independent Variables Setup tab.

5. When Step Downward is checked, the case study will run from the
high bound and step downward to the low bound.
A maximum of two 6. In the State Input Type dropdown box, you can select either
independent variables
Discrete or Nested. When you select Nested as shown in Figure
can be plotted. If more
than two are used in a 11.29, you may enter Low Bound, High Bound, Step Size or
case study, graphical Number of Points. If you check the Use Log Step checkbox, UniSim
results are not available. Design will use logarithm scale and step size for the chosen
independent variable. However, the logarithm scale and step size
have their intrinsic limitations and need special handling for some
situations. Following are the limitations and implementation details
for logarithm scale and step size:
• Logarithm step size is the power of a multiplier based on 10, i.e.,
a step size of 1 means a multiplier of 10.
• UniSim Design internal units are used when calculating the
logarithm values, with the only exception being the
temperature, for which K is used instead of C.
11-32
• Negative independent values are not allowed to use logarithm

step size except for Temperature where internal unit is used as
Kelvin.
• The minimum value to use logarithm step size is 0, for which the
following special handling is implemented: When 0 or any
number less than 1.0x10-6 (in internal units) is specified as the
lower bound, it will be used directly as the first point. However,
when calculating the next point, 1.0x10-6 is used in place of the
specified lower bound.
7. When you select Discrete for State Input Type, the following view
appears and you can enter the number of states and the values for
the discrete states.
Figure 11.30
8. Click the Start button to begin calculations. At any time during the
calculations, click the Stop button to stop calculating.
9. Click the Failed States tab.
Figure 11.31
If any of the states could not solve, these states and the unit
operation associated with failure appear on this tab.
10. From the list of available failed states, click the failed state to see
the value at which the independent variable failed.
11-33
11-34 Databook
11. Click the Display Properties tab.
Figure 11.32
If two independent
variables are checked,
only the first checked
dependent variable
appears on the plot. If
one independent variable
is used, the first two
checked dependent
variables are shown on
the plot.
12. From the list of available dependent variables, select the variables
for which you want to show results.
13. Click the Results button. The Case Studies view. appears.
Viewing Case Study Results

The states contained within a case study can be viewed in either tabular
or graphical format.
1. From the list of available case studies, select the case study you
want to view.
2. Select either the Table or Graph radio button.
3. Click the View button.
The Case Studies view appears.
Figure 11.33
To delete a
Click the state cell
state, right-
and modify the
click an
name.
associated cell
and select
Renames the
Delete from
existing states to
the menu.
the default names;
State1, State2,
State3, etc.
Opens the
Case Studies
Deletes the active Setup view.
case study.
11-34
Figure 11.34
Click the tab to These radio buttons let you

move between case toggle between tabular, graphical
studies. and Transpose Table format.
Refer to Section 10.4 - Customize the scenario plot by accessing the Graph Control property
Graph Control for more
information about
view. Right-click anywhere on the plot area and select the Graph
customizing plots. Control command from the Object Inspect menu.
Multi-Dimensional Graphing
When conducting case studies that involve two independent variables,
these results are plotted in a three-dimensional graphing environment.
Figure 11.35
If the case study is run with two independent variables, it automatically
11-35
11-36 Databook
plots three-dimensionally.
The limits of the system allow for only three dimensions. Any
more than two independent variables results in no graph
being produced.
Multi-Dimensional Graph Control

The options in the Graph To access the graph control, place the cursor over the plot and right-
Control view can also be
click. The Object Inspect menu appears. Select the Graph Control
found in the Object
Inspect menu. command and the Graph Control view appears.
Figure 11.36
The Azimuth field defines the angle between a horizontal plane and the
XY plane of the plot. This means that an azimuth of 0.0 results in a view
of the XY plane as a single horizontal line across the screen. The
azimuth can be manipulated by clicking in the Azimuth field, entering a
value, and then clicking the Apply button.
The Angle field defines the angle between the vertical and the XZ (YZ)
plane of the plot. Increasing the angle causes the graph to rotate
counter-clockwise. The angle can be manipulated by clicking in the
Angle field, entering a value, and clicking the Apply button.
Alternatively, the angle and azimuth can be manipulated by pressing

the arrow buttons of the keypad in the View Control group. The action
11-36
of each arrow button is explained in the figure below.
Figure 11.37
Decrease angle and Increase Increase angle and

increase azimuth azimuth. decrease azimuth
Decrease angle Increase angle
Decrease angle and Increase angle and

decrease azimuth Decrease decrease azimuth
azimuth
The Plane Slice group is used to examine two-dimensional plots taken

from the XZ, XY, and YZ plane. The appropriate two-dimensional plot is
specified by selecting one of the radio buttons. The two-dimensional
plot can be examined by clicking the View button.
A sample plot using the plane slice method appears in the figure below:
Figure 11.38
The planar slice can be moved through the plot by pressing the right
and left arrow buttons located within the Plane Slice group.
11.7.6 Spec Scenarios

The Spec Scenarios tab lets you enter and then switch between
different sets of specifications. You can add any number of
specification scenarios and each scenario can contain multiple states.
Each state provides specified values for the process. When each state
11-37
11-38 Databook
is applied, the values in that state are used to calculate the flowsheet.
If you want to switch which variables are specified in some of the
states, simply add all of the potential variables to the scenario and then
leave unspecified values empty. Variables for the spec scenarios are
selected on the Variables tab of the databook.
Figure 11.39
Deletes the selected Adds a new Provides a descriptive name

Spec Scenario. Spec Scenario. for the Spec Scenario.
Displays all the
available Spec
Scenarios.
Opens the Spec Select the

Scenarios Setup Include
view. checkbox to
include the
appropriate
Spec Scenario.
Opens the Spec Scenario view.
Adding a Spec Scenario

1. Click the Add button. A scenario with the default name Spec
Scenario 1 appears in the list of available Spec Scenarios. If
necessary, type a new name in the Current Spec Scenario field.
Use the same variables in 2. In the Spec Scenarios Data Selection group, check the Include
different spec scenarios. checkbox for the variables that UniSim Design varies.
Deleting a Spec Scenarios

When a Spec Scenario is 1. From the list of available Spec Scenarios, select the spec scenario
you want to delete.
variables are not deleted
from the Databook. 2. Click the Delete button.
You will not be prompted to confirm the deletion of a spec

scenario, so ensure the correct spec scenario is selected
before deleting.
Viewing Spec Scenario Results

1. From the list of available Spec Scenarios, select the Spec Scenario
11-38
you want to view.

A tab is displayed for
each Spec Scenario in 2. Click the View button.
your databook.
The Spec Scenario view appears.
To apply a state to the Figure 11.40

flowsheet, click the Apply
Selected State button.
11.8 Face Plates

Refer to Section 12.13 - The face plate provides all pertinent information about a controller. To
Controller Face Plate in
the UniSim Design
access the Face Plates Manager, select the Face Plates command from
Operations Guide for the Tools menu, or press the CTRL F hot key.
more information.
Figure 11.41
The Face Plate Manager lets you quickly search all available flowsheets
in the case and open the faceplate of the controller you want.
Opening a Face Plate

to search.
2. From the list of logical operations, select the controller for which
you want to view the face plate.
11-39
11-40 Dynamics Assistant
3. Click the Open button to display the face plate for that controller.
OR
1. If you know the name of the controller, but not the location, click
the Find button. The Find Object view appears.
2. Type in the name of the controller, then click OK. The controller
property view appears, giving you access to all the controller
parameters and the controllers face plate.
Face Plate Types

Change the appearance of all face plates in the flowsheet by clicking the
Type button. Two types of face plates available are Fixed Size (the
default) and Scalable. Both types appear in the figure below.
Figure 11.42
With these radio

buttons, you can
select the
controller mode:
• Manual
• Automatic
• Cascade
Fixed Size Face Plate Scalable Face Plate
When the scalable face plate type is selected, you can change the face
plate font by clicking the Set Font button in the Face Plate Manager.
11.9 Dynamics Assistant

For more information The Dynamics Assistant provides a quick method for ensuring that a
about the Dynamics
Assistant, see Section correct set of pressure flow specifications is used. The Assistant can be
2.2 - Dynamics used when initially preparing your case for dynamics, or when opening
Assistant in the UniSim an old UniSim Design 1.x dynamic case.
Design Dynamic
Modeling Guide.
The Assistant makes recommendations for specifying your
model in Dynamics mode. You do not have to follow all the
suggestions. It is recommended that you be aware of the
effects of each change you make.
11-40
11.10 Control Manager

For more information The Control Manager command opens the Control Manager view. This
about the Control view contains a summary of the PID Controllers and MPC Controllers
Manager see Section 2.6
- Control Manager in contained within the current simulation.
the UniSim Design
11.11 Dynamic Profiling Tool

Dynamic Modeling
Guide.
The Dynamic Profiling Tool logs the CPU time spent in the main modules
of a case during dynamic simulation. Therefore, it allows you to
compare the speed of the modules within the case.
Figure 11.43
There are two groups in the Dynamic Profiling Tool view:

• Profiling Controls
• Profiling Results
Profiling Controls
The buttons found in the Profiling Controls group are:
• Start Profiling. The profiling tool begins to record data from an
active case.
• Stop Profiling. The profiling tools stops recording data from a
case.
• Clear Results. This clears the results that are currently in the
Profiling Results group.
11-41
11-42 Dynamic Profiling Tool
Profiling Results
The Profiling Results group displays a table with four categories and
their corresponding radio buttons. The table displays the following
information:
• Cost. The CPU cost of an object for a certain integration time.
The CPS time associated with flashes is attributed to the object
and not the pressure flow solver module.
• Name. The name you have given to the object in your case.
• Type. The type of object in your case. (e.g., valve, separator,
feeder block, etc.)
• Converge Problems. The status of the pressure flow solver
convergence problems associated with a module. The checkbox
is checked if the module requires four or more pressure flow
solver iterations during the integration period. Four iterations
represents a high iteration count.
11.11.1 Profiling a Case

To profile a case:
1. From the Tools menu, select Dynamic Profiling Tool. The
Dynamic Profiling Tool view appears.
2. Ensure that the StripChart view and Dynamic Profiling Tool view are
both visible.
Figure 11.44
3. Click the Start Profiling button.
11-42
4. Click the Integrator Active icon.
You should run the profiling tool until there is no significant

Integrator icons
change in the order of the results when it is sorted by cost.
Green = Active
Red = Holding
5. When you want to stop logging the profiling data, click the
Integrator Holding icon.
6. Click the Stop Profiling button and the results are displayed in the
table in the Profiling Results group.
Figure 11.45
If you start the profiling tool again after receiving results, it

will ask if you want to clear your current results or add to
them. Click the Yes button if you want to clear the results, or
click the No button if you want the results to accumulate.
7. You can sort the results by Cost, Name, Type, or Convergence

Problems by clicking on the corresponding radio button.
The information in the Converge Problems column of the profiling

results is most useful to a developer and not the general user. The
checkbox is checked if a module requires four or more pressure flow
solver iterations during the integration period. A high convergence
count may be associated with a particular operating region, or stiff or
non-linear equations associated with that module. This information is
useful to a developer in debugging a particular problem with a case that
could be improved via code changes. If a user has written their own
extension and they are having problems (e.g., case is running really
slow) the convergence problems information may direct them to look at
certain pressure flow equations in their extension.
11-43
11-44 Snapshot Manager
The Profiling Tool can be useful in a variety of ways, especially when

you are trying to investigate why a dynamics case is running
particularly slow. When you compare the profiling results from two runs
of the same case, you can point to problems with a unit operation/
module if it is particularly expensive in one of the runs.
As well, you can compare the profiling results by object type. For
example, if one valve is much more expensive than the rest, then that
valve deserves some investigation.
11.12 Snapshot Manager

The Snapshot Manager allows you to create a snapshot of the
simulation during dynamics modeling. A snapshot is a file that contains
the state of the simulation at a particular time when the integrator is
still running. Snapshot files allow you to trace back to a specific point in
the simulation and review the results calculated at that time. This is
especially useful for Operation Training System (OTS) applications,
where the instructor can routinely save the state of the simulation at
various times during a training exercise for an extended period of time.
Students or trainees can then study and compare the result from the
snapshot files.
The Snapshot Manager consists of three tabs:

• Local Snapshots
• Real Time Monitor
• External Snapshots
11.12.1 Local Snapshots Tab

The Local Snapshots tab allows you to save, load, and configure a
11-44
snapshot.
Figure 11.46
Adds a new group

of snapshots.
Saves a
snapshot
Deletes an
existing group of
snapshots.
Displays the
Name (group
name) of the
snapshots.
Opens the File

Displays the current integration time. You can choose the units for the time Selection for
displayed from the drop-down list. The Current Time can be reset by changing Recalling Snapshot
the integration time in the Integrator from the Simulation menu. view, which allows
you to load a saved
snapshot file.
Refer to Chapter 7.6 - The Configuration group is used to specify how you want the snapshot
Integrator for more
information on the
to be taken. The following table describes each parameter in the
Integrator. Configuration group:
Object Description
Name Displays the group name of the snapshots in the
Snapshot List.
FileName Displays the root directory path and the generic
name of the snapshots. The root path must
contain the generic name of the snapshots. By
default, the generic name is set to be the same as
the Name (group name) of the snapshots.
Click the Ellipsis icon to change the directory or
file name. The File Selection for Saving Snapshot
view appears.
Ellipsis icon Append to Name Consists two radio buttons:
• Real Time. Attaches the current date and
real time to the FileName of the snapshot
(e.g., snapshot1_2002-12-24_10-20-
15.usp).
• Sim Time. Attaches the current date and
simulation time to the FileName of the
snapshot (e.g., snapshot1_2002-12-
24_10-20-15.usp).
• Index. Labels the snapshot in chronological
order by attaching an index number at the
end of the FileName. (e.g.,
snapshot1_1.usp).
11-45
Object Description
Snapshot Type Consists of two radio buttons:
• Periodic. The Periodic Specs table appears
upon activating the Periodic radio button. In
the table, you can set the snapshot capturing
parameters by specifying the Start Time, End
Time, and Time Interval.
• Specified. A table should appear upon
activating the Specified radio button. In the
Specified Time column, you can specify the
time (real time) that you want to take the
UniSim Design displays snapshot. You can choose the unit of input
all time in standard time from the drop-down list. UniSim Design
display: hh:mm:ss. automatically converts your input into
standard time display. The status of the
snapshots are shown in the Processed
column. The Specified Time values must be
equal or larger than the Current Time value.
Periodic Specs The table contains three fields:
• Start Time. Allows you to specify the time to
take the first snapshot. You can choose the
unit of input from the drop-down list. UniSim
Design automatically converts your input into
standard time display.
• End Time. Allows you to specify the time to
take the last snapshot. You can choose the
unit of input from the drop-down list. UniSim
Design automatically converts your input into
standard time display. The End Time value
must be larger than the one of Start Time. If
the field is left blank as <empty>, End Time
is equivalent to infinity.
• Time Interval. The time interval between
capturing each snapshot. It is the capturing
frequency of the snapshots. The minimum
value for the Time Interval is 1 second. If the
Time Interval field is left blank as <empty>,
no snapshots will be taken.
Save PFD with Allows you to save the PFD with the simulation
Snapshot results in one single file.
Save PFD in Single Allows you to save the PFD in a separate file
Separate File without saving it each time as the simulation
results are being saved. This speeds up the saving
process of the snapshot.
Restore PFD Upon Allows you to restore the PFD upon load if the PFD
Load if Saved in was saved in a separate file when the snapshot is
Separated File saved.
Enable Snapshot Allows you to manually activate the snapshot
option according to the specified settings.
11.12.2 Real Time Monitor

The Real Time Monitor gives you an overview of the status of each
11-46
group of snapshots.
Figure 11.47
Opens the File

Selection for
Recalling
Snapshot view,
which allows you
to load a saved
snapshot file.
The following table lists and describes the columns in the Real Time
Info table.
Object Description
Snapshot Displays the group name of the snapshots in the Snapshot
Name List, and the Name field on the Local Snapshots tab.
Type Displays the type (Periodic or Specified) of snapshot you
specified in the Configuration group on the Local Snapshots
tab.
Time Spent Displays the time spent on saving the last snapshot.
Count Displays the number of snapshots taken under the same
group.
Enable When you check the Enable checkbox, the snapshots are
taken under the specified conditions in the Local Snapshots
tab.
Active Displays the status of a group of snapshots. A green check
indicates that all the specifications are valid and the
Snapshot Manager is ready to take the snapshots. A red
cross indicates that some of the specifications are not valid
or the Periodic Specs have expired.
11.12.3 External Snapshots

UniSim Design provides other means to configure and capture a
snapshot without using the Snapshot Manager.
The External Snapshots tab allows you to set the PFD saving
preferences when you are taking a snapshot outside of the Snapshot
Manager. These saving preferences are the same as the first three
11-47
checkboxes in the Configuration group on the Local Snapshots tab. You

have the options to save the PFD with the simulation results in one file
or separate file, and you can choose to have the PFD restored upon
loading if the snapshot is saved in a separate file.
Figure 11.48
Use the checkboxes

to set the PFD saving
preferences.
Displays the
directory of the
current PFD file.
You can take a snapshot by using one of the following methods:

• Save As option in the File menu
• Event Scheduler
• OLE (Object Linking and Embedding)
Taking a Snapshot with the Save As

Option
The Save As option provides you with the most direct way to take a
snapshot. You can manually take a snapshot at any point during the
simulation with the integrator running.
From the Save As Type drop-down list, select UniSim Design USP Cases
11-48
(*.usp) as shown in the figure below.
Figure 11.49
In the File name field, type the name you want to save the snapshot as.
There is no date, time, or index that will be appended to the end of the
file name. You can view the last saved PFD location in the Current PFD
File field on the External Snapshots tab.
Taking a Snapshot in the Event

Scheduler
Refer to Chapter 7.5 - The Event Scheduler allows you to setup more complicated scenarios
Event Scheduler for
more information on the
for taking a snapshot. With the Event Scheduler, you can set the
Event Scheduler. snapshot capturing conditions to be triggered by a pre-determined
You can access the Event simulation time, a logical expression becoming true, or a variable
Scheduler by pressing stabilizing to within a given tolerance for a set amount of time. You can
CTRL E.
also setup the Event Scheduler to take a snapshot when certain
operating conditions are reached (i.e., amount of valve opening,
11-49
11-50 Script Manager
controller output).
Figure 11.50
Displays
the name
Activates the of the
action. action.
Selects the
Displays the type of the
action name from action from
the Name field in the drop-
the individual down list.
Action
Saves
Specification
the
group.
snapshot
manually.
Displays the root Opens the

directory path of File
the snapshot. Selection
for Saving
Snapshot
view. You
can name
and save the
snapshot.
Taking a Snapshot with OLE

Refer to Section 1.2 - An OLE is a tool that allows you to programmatically interact between
Automation & two applications. You can program an OLE using Visual Basic to have
Extensibility in the
UniSim Design UniSim Design take the snapshots according to the conditions specified
Customization Guide in the user code. This option gives you more flexibility on how to take
for more information on
OLE and Automation.
the snapshots in terms of time and operation conditions. You can even
define additional capturing parameters in your code. The PFD saving
preferences are still constrained by the specifications on the External
Snapshots tab.
11.13 Script Manager

You can use the Script Manager to record all your case interaction
including the following:
• Installing streams or operations
• Making connections
• Supplying specifications
The recorded script can be played back later. To access the Script
Manager view, select the Script Manager command from the Tools
11-50
menu.
Figure 11.51
When using the script feature, keep the following in mind:

• Session preferences are not saved in the Script.
• Scripting is always done in UniSim Design internal units.
• Scripting is name specific, so stream and operation names must
be identical to those in the case that you are running the script.
• For the playback of a script, the simulation case must be exactly
as it was when the script was recorded, so all the steps in the
script can be performed.
11.13.1 Recording a New Script

1. Save your simulation, because the case must be in exactly the
same condition for playback of the recorded script.
2. Select the Script Manager command from the Tools menu. The
Script Manager appears.
3. From the list of available directories, select the directory where you
want to save the script file.
4. Click the New button. The New Script view appears.
Figure 11.52
5. Type a name and description for the script.

6. Click the Record button to start recording. The red Record icon
appears in the lower right corner of the Desktop.
Record icon
7. Perform each task that you want to record.
8. When you finish recording, open the Script Manager and click the
Stop Recording button.
11-51
11-52 Macro Language Editor
9. Save the case with a different name. If you save the case with the
same name, this will prevent you from playing back the script.
11.13.2 Script Playback

For you to run a script, the simulation case must be in the same state
as it was prior to the recording.
At any time during the playback, you can stop the script by
opening the Script Manager view and clicking the Stop Play
button. This stops the script, but does not stop the UniSim
Design function that was occurring during playback.
1. Open the case associated with the script.

2. Select the Script Manager command from the Tools menu. The
Playback icon Script Manager appears.
3. From the list of available directories, select the directory where your
script file is located.
4. From the list of available script files, select the script you want to
play.
5. Click the Play button. The green Playback icon appears in the lower
right corner of the Desktop.
Refer to Section 1.3 - 6. View the steps of the script playback in the Trace Window.
11.14 Macro Language Editor

Trace Window for details
about the Trace Window.
For more information, The UniSim Design Macro Language Editor is an interactive design
consult the Online help by
environment for developing, testing, and executing WinWrap Basic
clicking Editor Help
command in the Help scripts. The editor uses a syntax that is similar to Microsoft Visual
menu of the UniSim Basic®.
Design Macro Language
Editor.
Example 1: The Macro
Language Editor in the
UniSim Design
Customization Guide for
an example.
11-52
1. From the Tools menu, select Macro Language Editor.

2. The UniSim Design Macro Language Editor view appears.
Figure 11.53
The editor is an interactive design environment for developing, testing

and executing WinWrap Basic automation scripts. The editor, which
uses a syntax that is very similar to Microsoft®’s Visual Basic, allows
you to write code that interacts with UniSim Design.
New Features
The Macro Language Editor now has two new features:
• Auto completion feature, which helps you complete the user
variable codes and helps you debug the program with flyby
evaluation.
Figure 11.54
For example, if you want

to specify
SimulationCase, you
just need to type up the
first few letters of the
variable, and the auto
completion feature will
display all variables with
similar names in a drop-
down list.
11-53
11-54 Case Security
• List command feature, which shows you a list of valid methods

or properties depending on the context (type of expression) you
enter.
Figure 11.55
For example, if you type

ActiveObject and type the
period, a drop-down list appears
displaying a list of methods that
are applicable to the current
object.
11.15 Case Security

Cases can be locked to a password or a password with a security lock
device such as a security key.
The Case Security command from the Tools menu enables you to access
the Enter Master Password view. This view contains options to lock a
UniSim Design case and enable the Runtime Mode.
The Runtime Mode allows you to run a pre-built case with access
restricted to certain areas in the case only. This option serves as a
security control that allows clients (especially consultants, contractors,
and licensors) to deliver a complete UniSim Design model with their end
product while protecting their business interests and the intellectual
property contained within the product model.
The limitations of a UniSim Design runtime version exist at two levels:

case level and application level. The runtime version of the UniSim
Design application is compatible only with the runtime version of the
UniSim Design cases. Additional licenses are needed to gain full
authority to edit the basis and model topology of the runtime case.
11.15.1 Locking a UniSim Design

Case
To lock a case, the following three information must be specified:
• master password
• contact name
• company name
1. Select the Case Security command from the Tools menu. The
11-54
Enter Master Password view appears.
Figure 11.56
The password is case 2. In the Case Security tab, type the password you want to use for
sensitive and must be at
least six characters in
the case in the Password field.
length. 3. Retype the password in the Confirm field.
4. Click the Accept Password icon.
Accept Password icon The File Security Setup view appears.
Figure 11.57
5. In the Master Password group, enter the name of the contact

(typically the name of the user entering the initial password) in the
Contact Name field.
6. Enter the company name (a UniSim Design default company name
is provided, however you can be change it) in the Company Name
field.
7. Check that the Lock icon is available in the lower right corner of the
File Security Setup view.
Lock icon
If the Unlock icon appears, click the Unlock icon to activate the
Lock icon.
11-55
11-56 Case Security
8. Click the Close and Exit icon to save the case security setting.
11.15.2 Loading a Locked UniSim

Close and Exit icon
Design Case
When loading a case that is locked to a password, the following view
appears.
Figure 11.58
Passwords are case sensitive and must be at least six characters in

length. You are allowed only three attempts to enter the correct
password. If the incorrect password is entered or the correct password
is entered but a locking device is not found, the following message
appears and the case does not open.
Figure 11.59
See Setting a Time If the correct user password was entered, but the time restriction date
Restriction section in the
has expired, then the following message appears:
following section for more
time restriction date. Figure 11.60
This message appears only once and uses one attempt of the log on
procedure.
11.15.3 File Security Setup

To access the File Security Setup view, select the Case Security
command from the Tools menu. One of the following will occur:
11-56
• If the case was never locked, the Enter Master Password view
appears.
Figure 11.61
The password is case Specify a new password, confirm the password, and click the
sensitive and must be at
least six characters in Accept Password icon.
length. • If the case is locked, the Enter Master Password view appears.
Figure 11.62
Accept Password icon
Type the correct password and press ENTER.
You are allowed only three attempts to enter the correct

password. If you exceed the attempt limit, the File Security
Setup view does not open and you cannot attempt the access
again until the case is reloaded.
11-57
11-58 Case Security
The File Security Setup view appears in the figure below.
Figure 11.63
Object Icon Description

Contact Name Enables you to specify the name of the person
field who implemented the password.
Company Name Enables you to specify the company name.
field
Change Enables you to change the master password.
Password button
Clear Password Enables you to remove the master password.
button
Password field Enables you to specify the user password.
The password is case sensitive and must be at
least six characters in length.
Confirm field Enables you to re-enter and confirm the user
password.
Good Until field Displays the expiry date of the user password.
View User Enables you to see the user password.
Password icon
Clear User Enables you to remove the user password.

Password icon
Open Calendar Enables you to access the Calendar view and
View icon select the expiry date for the user password.
Accept User Enables you to save/accept the user password

Password icon entered in the User Password group.
Hardware Locks Displays the status of the selected Hardware
table locks.
Hardware Locks Enables you to access the Scan All Locking
button Codes view and modify the hardware lock
selection.
Advanced button Enables you to access the Advanced Lock
Selection view, and select different hardware
lock type.
11-58
Object Icon Description

Remove button Enables you to remove the selected hardware
lock from the table.
Remove All Enables you to remove all the hardware lock
button in the table.
Case Security is Displays the case security status and enables
Currently Active you to change from locked to unlocked case.
icon
Case Security is Displays the case security status and enables
Currently Disable you to change from unlocked to locked case.
icon
Close and Exit Enables you to close and save the changes
icon made in the File Security Setup view.
Master Password
The master password is case sensitive, cannot be less than 6
characters, and cannot be more than 24 characters.
Changing the Master Password

1. Open the File Security Setup view.
Press the ESC key at any 2. Click the Change Password button. The Enter Master Password
time to cancel changing view appears.
the password.
Figure 11.64
3. Enter the password, then press ENTER. The New Password view
appears.
Figure 11.65
Accept Password icon 4. Enter a new password in both the Password and Confirm fields.
5. Click the Accept Password icon.
6. Click the Cancel icon to exit the function.
Cancel icon
11-59
11-60 Case Security
Clearing the Master Password

1. Click the Clear Password button. The Enter Master Password view
appears.
Figure 11.66
Press the ESC key at any 2. Enter the password, then press ENTER.
time to cancel deleting
the password.
User Password
After a master password is entered, a user password can also be
entered. This is optional, but useful when more than one user is
working with the case and you do not want to give access to the
security setup.
The following restrictions are applied to the user password:

• Cannot be the same as the master password.
• Cannot be less than six characters or more than 24 characters.
If a case is opened with a user password, then the File Security Setup
view is not available.
Adding a User Password

1. Enter the password in the Password field.
2. Retype the password in the Confirm field to confirm the password.
3. Click the Accept user password icon.
Accept user password After accepting the user password, the Accept user password
icon icon is greyed out and the two icons to the left of it become active.
Viewing the User Password

1. Click the View user password icon. The Enter Master Password
View user password
icon
11-60
view appears.
Figure 11.67
2. Type the correct password.

3. Press ENTER and the user password can be viewed.
4. Click the View User Password icon again to hide the user
password.
Clearing the User Password

1. Click the Clear user password icon. The Enter Master
Password view appears.
Clear user password
icon
Figure 11.68
Press the ESC key at 2. Type the correct password.

any time to cancel this
operation. 3. Press ENTER.
Setting a Time Restriction

To place a time restriction on a user password:
1. Click the Open Calendar View icon. The Calendar view
Open Calendar View icon
11-61
11-62 Case Security
appears.
Figure 11.69
2. From the month drop-down list, select the month that the password
expires.
3. From the year drop-down list, select the year that the password
expires.
4. From the calendar, select the day that the password expires. This
date is the time restriction date.
Accept and close icon 5. Click the Accept and close icon.
Refer to the table for the functionality of the remaining icons.
Name Icon Description

Clear good until date Clears the selected time restriction date.
Cancel Cancels the action.
Hardware Locks
Cases can also be locked to hardware devices on your machine or a
client machine for additional security. The Hardware Locks button
scans the current machine for a possible lock, while the Advanced
button lets you enter information that is found on a client’s machine.
Scanning for Lock Codes

1. Click the Hardware Locks button. The Scan All Locking Codes view
11-62
appears.
Figure 11.70
2. Click the Scan button to scan your system for all the locks listed.
The Lock code column either displays the lock code for the
associated hardware device or “Not Found” if no lock code is
available.
3. Check the Accept checkbox for each of the lock codes you want to
lock the case to.
4. Click the Exit View icon to accept the changes. The selected lock
Exit View icon codes appear in the Hardware Locks table.
You can click the Cancel icon to close the Scan All Locking Codes
view without accepting any changes.
Cancel icon
Specifying Lock Codes

To enter a specific lock code.
1. Click the Advance button. The Advanced Lock Selection view
appears.
Figure 11.71
2. From the Lock Type drop-down list, select the hardware device
being locked to the case.
3. In the Lock Code field, specify the lock code that corresponds to
the selected lock type.
Accept icon 4. Click the Accept icon and the lock code displays in the Hardware
Locks table.
You can click the Cancel icon to close the view without accepting
Cancel icon
any changes.
11-63
11-64 Case Security
You can use the Echo ID tool to help you determine the lock codes for
your computer. Refer to Section 11.16 - Echo ID for more
information.
Removing Hardware Locks

To remove a single hardware lock:
1. Select the hardware lock you want to remove from the Hardware
Locks table.
2. Click the Remove button. The Enter Master Password view appears.
Figure 11.72
Press the ESC key at any 3. Type the correct password and press ENTER.
time to cancel this
operation.
To remove all hardware locks:
1. Click the Remove All button. The Enter Master Password view
appears.
Figure 11.73
Press the ESC key at any 2. Type the correct password.

time to cancel this
operation. 3. Press ENTER.
11.15.4 Unlocking a Case

Although a case is locked and all passwords are entered, the case can
still be unlocked without clearing all the passwords and locks.
1. Click the Case Security is Currently Active icon. The Enter
Case Security is
Currently Active icon
11-64
Master Password view appears.
Figure 11.74
2. Type the correct password.

Press the ESC key at any time to cancel this operation.
3. Press ENTER. The Case Security is Currently Active icon
changes to Case Security is Currently Disable icon which
Case Security is indicates that the case is unlocked.
Currently Disable icon
To lock the case again, click the Case Security is Currently Disable
icon and the file security is automatically activated.
11.15.5 Runtime Mode

A Runtime case is a The Runtime tab allows you to set the restrictions for a runtime case.
version of an application
that has a limited set of
capabilities compared to Runtime licensing is a special and restricted type of license that
the standard version of Honeywell grants users. A user that has a runtime license is permitted
that application. to load any UniSim Design runtime case or may be restricted to only
load runtime cases with a certain Runtime ID or from a certain author
(see below). In all situations a user with a runtime license can not add
or delete unit operations and hence can not build new cases or modify
the flowsheet topology of existing cases. A runtime license user can
not load non-runtime cases. The runtime license is authenticated by
the UniSim Design security system and the license file that is provided
by Honeywell.
In the use of runtime licensing, there is a runtime case originator or

author and there is a runtime case user. This capability is very useful
for process licensors, engineering firms or other solution providers. In
fact, one company or department can use a network license file with
the same RunTime-Author entry. This way when they publish runtime
cases, they all are bound against the same author and the users of
these cases only need a runtime license permitting use of this author or
supplier's cases.
A UniSim Design runtime case is typically created by the original

developer of the model. As the creator of the runtime case, you can
create it in one of two ways:
1. If you have RunTime-Author capability in your license file, you
would also have present in this license file a certain author id. In
11-65
11-66 Case Security
this situation you can create any number of different runtime cases,
all marked with the same author (or runtime id). Then any of your
clients or affiliates which have a runtime license authorizing the
running of your authored cases can utilize these cases. Contact
Honeywell if you would like to author runtime cases in this manner.
Honeywell will supply you with a RunTime-Author license.
2. If your license file does not have RunTime-Author capability, or if
you do not wish to convert a case to runtime as this author, you can
also use a unique RunTime ID (RTID). This RTID is automatically
generated for each case each time you convert the case to runtime.
In this situation, you will need to contact your client or affiliate and
inform them that they need to request a runtime license file from
Honeywell which permits the use of runtime cases with this RTID.
Depending on the original contract terms with Honeywell, a runtime

licensed user may also obtain an open runtime license which means
that they can open and use any runtime cases with any RTID but not if
that RTID is the same as the author (bound to author).
There is also some capability for the creator of the runtime case to
permit or restrict what unit operations or specifications may by
changed. See below for more details on this.
Activate Runtime Mode

Use this procedure to activate the runtime mode in UniSim Design:
1. In the menu bar, select Tools | Case Security command.
The Enter Master Password view appears.
2. Click on the Runtime tab.
Figure 11.75
3. Select the Enable Support for Runtime Mode checkbox.

4. Click the Configure button. The Runtime Mode Configuration view
appears.
5. In the General tab, select the appropriate checkbox to activate the
options you want.
11-66
6. In the Specifications tab, select the specifications you want to

enable for other people to modify.
7. In the Access tab, select which objects are accessible by other
people.
Runtime Mode Configuration View

The Runtime Mode Configuration view allows you to create a runtime
case with a custom set of restrictions. The following tabs are available
in the Runtime Mode Configuration view:
• General
• Specifications
• Access
General Tab
The General tab allows you to set general restrictions in a runtime case.
Figure 11.76
The General tab contains the following groups:

• Runtime Model Control
• Runtime Case Options
• Runtime Case Information
11-67
11-68 Case Security
Runtime Mode Control Group

The Runtime Mode Control group contains the following checkboxes:
Checkbox Descriptions
Test Runtime You can check this checkbox to test the current case in
Mode runtime mode under the settings specified in the
Runtime Case Options and Specifications tab.
Once the case is Convert to You can check this checkbox to convert the current case
converted into runtime Runtime Mode to a runtime case under the settings specified in the
mode, you have to exit Runtime Case Options group and Specifications tab.
UniSim Design to restore
the standard operation
mode.
Runtime Case Options Group
The Runtime Case Options group contains the following checkboxes:
Checkbox Descriptions
Can Change All Allows you to change all the specified properties (blue
Specifications values) of the unit operations in the runtime case.
Enable OLE Enables you to apply the OLE password protection
password feature.
protection When this protection feature is activated, only OLE
access to the case is allowed if the runtime password is
supplied. The OLE methods available are:
• OpenLockedOLEWithPassword
• put_VisibleWithPassword
• PlayScriptWithPassword
• PlayScriptRelativeToWithPassword
So, if a case is OLE locked then,
• OpenWithPassword is replaced by
OpenLockedOLEWithPassword
• PlayScript is replaced by PlayScriptWithPassword
• PlayScriptRelativeToWithPassword
• put_Visible is replaced by
put_VisibleWithPassword
Can Open All Enables you to toggle between access to or restriction
Flowsheet from all flowsheet objects when in runtime mode.
Objects This feature overrides any protections specified on the
Access tab.
Bind Case Enables conversion to runtime case with the Runtime
Against Author ID being set equal to the author. This allows the user
ID of the runtime case to use an existing license file which
permits the loading of this author’s cases. the user can
use multiple cases from this author or publishing
company.
Runtime Case Information Group

The Runtime Case Information displays the Runtime ID, Author, and the
number of edit changes in a runtime case. The Runtime Case
Information table appears only when the case is confirmed to run in
runtime mode. The Author entry may be blank if their license file does
11-68
not have a runtime Authoring entry. One can still convert a case to
runtime but a unique RTID will be generated.
Figure 11.77
Each time a runtime case is created, a unique Runtime ID (RTID) is

assigned to the case as long as the Bind case against Author ID option
is not selected. The Author of the runtime case has to advise Honeywell
of the RTID so that a license can be issued to the users to run the case.
A runtime case can only be opened in standard mode by the original

Author. When a runtime case is saved, it will store the name of the
Author in the case. If the name of the user does not match the runtime
author license, then the case opens in runtime mode and the user can
only use the runtime case under the restrictions pre-set by the original
Specifications Tab
The Specifications tab will The Specifications tab allows the original Author of the runtime case to
appear blank if the Can
Change All select the parameters that can be modified in runtime mode.
Specifications checkbox
is selected. Figure 11.78
Select the method for importing the changeable parameters by

selecting one of the four radio buttons available in the Add Specification
From group.
11-69
11-70 Echo ID
The parameters you select appear in the table on the Specifications tab,
and you can view the Object Name, Description, Object Type, and
Variable Owner for each parameter. The parameters you can modify
appear in blue text when you run the runtime case.
You can modify only the parameters selected on the Specifications tab
when the case is in runtime mode. All other parameters are view-only
(black text) for the runtime case.
Access Tab
The Access tab will The Access tab enables you to select which objects in the simulation
appear blank if the Can
Open All Flowsheet case can be viewed by other people.
Objects checkbox is
selected. Figure 11.79
To make an object available for modification to other users:

1. In the object tree, click the + icon to expand the branches and
select the object you want to add.
To remove an object:
1. In the Object Name list, select the object you want to remove.
2. Click the Remove button.
11.16 Echo ID
The Echo ID tool allows you to scan your computer and display all of the
11-70
available locking codes. To open the Scan All Locking Codes view, click
the Echo ID command in the Tools menu.
Figure 11.80
11.17 Correlation Manager

Refer to Chapter 3 - The Correlation Manager allows you to manage individual property
Streams in the UniSim correlations or property correlation sets that can be applied to all
Design Operations
Guide for more streams in your case.
information about
managing property
correlations in individual UniSim Design has two kinds of settings for property
streams. correlations. A property correlation or correlation set that is
added to a stream from the stream property view has a local
setting. A property correlation or correlation set that is
added to a stream from the Correlation Manager view has a
global setting.
The property correlation sets can be defined and saved
external to the case and can be read into any other
simulation case.
To access the Correlation Manager, select the Correlation Manager
11-71
11-72 Correlation Manager
command from the Tools menu.
Figure 11.81
Select different The Display Name Refer to Section 3.1.1 -

The UniSim Design
property correlations have methods of can be modified Worksheet Tab in the
configuration for when the property UniSim Design Operations
been grouped into
categories that target the certain correlation is a Guide for more information
properties. clone. about the Status group.
specific reporting needs of
the various process
industries.
Filter the list of available

properties by using the
Filter by drop-down list.
Three filter options are
available:
• All. Displays all
available properties.
• Point Properties.
Displays only point
properties.
• Plottable
Properties. Displays
only plottable
properties.
The Correlation Manager view contains three groups and a Preference

Option status bar. The Configuration group contains a list of property
correlation types. The Stream Correlation Controls (Global) group
contains the following icons:

Scan System Scan all system correlation files. Click this icon to
Correlations manually scan the system registry and build a list
of available property correlations.
Clone Click to clone a selected property correlation. You
Selected can only clone property correlations with variable
Correlation parameters.
Delete Click to delete the selected property correlation
Cloned clone. You can only delete property correlation
Correlation clones.
From List
Activate Click to add the selected global property
Selected correlation to all the streams.
Global
Correlation
Remove Click to remove the selected global property
Selected correlation from all the streams.
Global
Correlation
Remove All Click to remove all the global property correlation
Global from all the streams.
Correlation
The Preference Option status bar indicates whether the Activate
11-72
Property Correlations checkbox on the Options page, Simulation tab of

the Session Preferences view is checked or not.
The stream property view lets you create your own group of property
correlations called a correlation set. The Stream Correlation Set
Controls (Global) group lets you to select a correlation set and globally
apply it to all streams in the case.

You can only create a View Global Opens the Correlation Set Picker. From this view,
correlation set in the Correlation select the correlation set you want to apply to all
stream property view. Set List case streams. The Correlation Set Picker will
display “File has not been created” until you have
saved your first set.
Remove Click to remove the global correlation set
Global displayed in the status bar from all the streams.
Correlation The Correlation Manager will only remove the
Set correlation properties that are part of the selected
global set. Any other correlation properties that
have been globally (or locally) added to the
streams are not removed.
Active Set Provides description on the status of the active
status bar selected global correlation set.
• Red status bar. Indicates that no global
correlation set is selected for the streams.
• Green status bar. Indicates that a global
correlation set is selected for the streams.
• Yellow status bar. Indicates that the global
correlation set has been modified. This is
when correlation properties that are not part
of the set have been globally added to all
streams (activated), or when properties of
this set have been globally removed from all
streams (deactivated).
11.17.1 Adding Property

Correlations to Streams
Use this procedure to add a global property correlation to the streams.
1. From the list of Available Correlations, click the + icon to expand
the tree, displaying the available property correlations for each
type. All property information for the selected property correlation
appears on the table to the right.
2. Certain properties require qualifiers before they are fully configured.
Click the appropriate field and specify any values that are required.
3. Click the Activate Selected Global Correlation icon in the
Stream Correlations Controls (Global) group. The Global Active
status bar changes from red to green.
Activate Selected Global
Correlation icon
11-73
11.17.2 Removing Property

Correlations from Streams
Use this procedure to remove global property correlations from the
streams.
1. From the Available Correlations list, select the property correlation
you want to remove from each stream in your case. Click the + icon
to expand the tree, displaying the available property correlations for
each type. The property information for the selected property
correlation appears on the table to the right.
2. Click the Remove Selected Global Correlation icon in the Stream
Correlations Controls (Global) group. The Global Active status bar
Remove Selected Global
Correlation icon
changes from green to red.
3. To remove ALL global property correlations and active global
correlation sets from the streams, click the Remove All Global
Correlations icon in the Stream Correlations Controls (Global)
group.
Remove All Global
Correlations icon
11.17.3 Cloning Property

Correlations
Any property correlation that contains changeable parameters can be
cloned. When a correlation is globally activated, all streams in the case
use the same calculation specified by that correlation. When you
change a correlation’s parameter, all the streams in the case use the
new parameter to calculate that correlation’s value.
If you require a correlation to have different parameter values for

different streams, you need to create a clone for that correlation. When
you create a clone, you can specify a unique parameter value for that
correlation and then add the clone to the appropriate streams.
Do the following to create a clone of a property correlation:

1. From the Available Correlations list, select the property correlation
you want to clone. Click the + icon to expand the tree, displaying
the available property correlations for each type.
2. Click the Clone Selected Correlation icon in the Stream
Correlations Controls (Global) group. The new property correlation
Clone Selected is added to the Available Correlations tree under the Clone branch.
Correlation icon UniSim Design automatically names each cloned property
correlation using the original property correlation name and
“_Clone-1”. The number at the end increases with each clone of the
same property correlation.
11-74
3. Rename the clone property correlation in the Display Name field if

required. You can only rename cloned property correlations and
each clone name must be unique.
11.17.4 Deleting Cloned Property

Correlations
1. From the Available Correlations list under the Clone branch, select
the clone property correlation you want to delete. Click the + icon
to expand the Clone branch displaying the available clone property
correlations.
You can only delete clone property correlations that are not used by
any streams.
2. Click the Delete Cloned Correlation From List icon in the Stream
Correlations Controls (Global) group. The selected clone property
Delete Cloned Correlation correlation is removed from the Available Correlations tree under
From List icon the Clone branch. If the selected clone is being used by any stream
within the case, it cannot be deleted.
11.17.5 Adding Correlation Sets

to Streams
Use this procedure to add a global correlation set to all the streams in
the case.
1. Before selecting a correlation set, there must be no active global
correlation set.
Figure 11.82
The status bar is red,

indicating that there is
no active global
correlation set.
Remove Global Correlation Set icon
View Global Correlation Set List icon
11-75
2. Click the View Global Correlation Set List icon. The Correlation
Set Picker view appears.
View Global Correlation Figure 11.83

Set List icon
The location and name of the file that
contains the correlation set is shown in
The Correlation Manager
the File Path field.
will not display the
Correlation Set Picker If an error is encountered in the file path
view if a set is already or file name when UniSim Design looks for
globally active. Only one the available correlation sets, you are
correlation set can be asked to let UniSim Design rebuild the file
globally active at a time. path and file, or you can change the file
path and file name in the Session
Preferences view. (You can only change
the file path and name in the Session
Preferences view.)
Refer to Section 12.5.2 - Locations
Page for more information.
If you have a new product installed the

Support\StreamCorrSets.xml file will not exist until you
actually save a set.
UniSim Design creates the file the first time you want to save
a set. The program manages the file after this, but should
only have to create the file once. If you are looking in the
Support directory the file will not exist there until the user
has saved a correlation set using one of the stream
properties views (Refer to Section 3.1.1 - Worksheet Tab in
the UniSim Design Operations Guide).
3. Select the correlation set you want from the view. You can click the
+ icon to see what property correlations the correlation set
contains.
4. Click the Apply button. The selected correlation set is now the
active global correlation set. All the streams in the case contain the
selected correlation set and any new stream added to the case will
automatically contain the selected correlation set.
Whenever a correlation/correlation set is applied to the streams, a

check is made of the correlation type against the fluid type of each
stream. If the Correlation Manager encounters a problem, it will send a
warning to the trace window.
The Active Set status bar turns green and displays the selected global
11-76
correlation set.
Figure 11.84
11.17.6 Deleting a Correlation Set

Refer to Deleting a Correlation Set in Section 3.1.1 - Worksheet
Tab from the UniSim Design Operations Guide for more
information.
11.17.7 Gas Properties

Correlation
The Gas Properties in the Correlation Manager consists of the following
seven correlations:
• HC Dew Point
• Higher Heating Value
• Lower Heating Value
• Mass Density (Std. Cond)
• Water Content In Mg/m3
• Water Dew Point
• Wobbe Index
Refer to Adding a These correlations are grouped within the Gas correlation type. The Gas
Property Correlation in type is shown on the Available Correlations window of the Correlation
Section 3.1.1 -
Worksheet Tab from the Picker and Correlation Manager views. You can access the seven Gas
UniSim Design correlations by double-clicking on the Gas correlation type to expand
more information on the
Correlation Picker.
11-77
the list.
Figure 11.85
The following four Gas correlation types allow you to specify the
calculation’s reference temperature:
• Higher Heating Value
• Lower Heating Value
• Mass Density (Std. Cond)
• Wobbe Index
For more information on the Correlation Manager, refer to Section

11.17 - Correlation Manager.
Properties
The Gas correlation uses the methods and data from ISO
6976:1995(E). If the stream contains components that are not
supported by this data, then the data for the hydrocarbon with the
nearest molecular weight Alkane is used. If the molecular weight is
greater than decane (C10), then the data for decane is assumed. ISO
data has been provided to support the following components:
Components
Methane n-Decane n-C21 Propene M-Cyclohexane
Ethane n-C11 n-C22 Methanol CO
Propane n-C12 n-C23 EGlycol CO2
i-Butane n-C13 n-C24 TEGlycol H2S
n-Butane n-C14 n-C25 Benzene Ammonia
i-Pentane n-C15 n-C26 Toluene H2O
n-Pentane n-C16 n-C27 E-Benzene Hydrogen
11-78
Components
n-Hexane n-C17 n-C28 124-M-Benzene Nitrogen
n-Heptane n-C18 n-C29 Cyclopentane Argon
n-Octane n-C19 n-C30 Cyclohexane Oxygen
n-Nonane n-C20 Ethylene M-Cyclopentane
Higher Heating Value

The higher heating value is the amount of heat obtained during
combustion when the water produced in the combustion is condensed
(when the water is in liquid form).
∑ xi × HHVi (11.1)
HHV = ----i----------------------
Z
where:
HHV = Overall higher heating value
HHVi = Higher heating value of component i
Lower Heating Value

The lower heating value is the amount of heat obtained when this water
is not condensed (when the water is in vapour form).
∑ xi × LHVi (11.2)
LHV = ----i---------------------
Z
where:
LHV = Overall lower heating value
LHVi = Lower heating value of component i
Hydrocarbon & Water Dew Point

The dew point is the temperature at a given pressure at which the first
drop of liquid starts to form. Hydrocarbon and water dew points
11-79
indicate the type of liquid formed.
In UniSim Design, the dew point is calculated by using a flash to

calculate the temperature at which the vapour fraction is equal to one.
When the vapour fraction is equal to one, the vapour is said to be
saturated or at steam pressure. If the case does not contain water, the
temperature at which the vapour fraction equal to one is reported as
the hydrocarbon dew point. If the case has water as one of the
components, the type of liquid phase formed is reported with its
corresponding dew point temperature. Then the temperature is
decreased until a second liquid phase forms, the temperature at which
this occurs is reported as the other dew point.
Mass Density at Standard Conditions

The mass density is reported at 1 atm and 15°C (288.15K). From the
Ideal Gas law:
PV = nZRT (11.3)
where:
P = Pressure (kPa)
V = Volume
n = Number of moles
Z = Compressibility factor
R = Gas constant (8.3145 J/mol K)
T = Temperature (K)
The molar density can be expressed as:
1 P
-- = ------- (11.4)
V ZRT
The mass density is therefore:
⎛ ⎞
⎜
⎜
⎝
∑ x × MW ⎟ × P
i i⎟
⎠
(11.5)
ρ = ------i------------------------------
Z×R×T
11-80
where:
ρ = Mass density (kg/m3)

xi = Mole fraction of component i
MWi = Molecular weight of component i
Water Content
The water content is the mass of water per unit volume of each phase.
It is expressed as mg/m3.
Wobbe Index
The Wobbe Index (or Wobbe Number) is a measure of how much heat
is released when gas is burnt.
The Wobbe Index is calculated by dividing the HHV (higher heating

value) by the square root of the density relative to air.
Wobbe = ------HHV
-------------- (11.6)
ρ
relative
The higher heating value is the amount of heat obtained during

combustion when the water produced in the combustion is condensed.
Density Relative to Air

The density relative to air is calculated by dividing the equation for the
density of the stream by the equivalent one for the density of air at 1
atm and 15°C.
∑ xi × MWi Z
∑ x × MW
i i
(11.7)
air 0.99958
ρ = ----i-------------------- × ------------- = ----i-------------------- × -------------
relative Z MW Z 28.962
air
where:
ρ = Density relative to air
11-81
MWair = Molecular weight of air
11.17.8 RVP Properties

Refer to The RVP properties uses the methods and data constructed by the
http://www.api.org/ company API. The RVP properties consist of the following eight
http://www.astm.org/
correlations:
• Reid VP at 37.8 C
• True VP at 37.8 C
• API 5B1.1
• API 5B1.2
• ASTM D323-73/79
• ASTM D323-82
• ASTM D4953-91
• ASTM D5191-91
The Reid VP at 37.8 C and True VP at 37.8 C correlations are grouped

within the Standard correlation type, and the other six correlations are
grouped under the RVP correlation type.
The RVP and Standard types are shown on the Available Correlations
Refer to the section on window of the Correlation Picker and the Correlation Manager views.
Adding a Property
Correlation in Section (For more information on using the Correlation Manager, refer to
3.1.1 - Worksheet Tab Section 11.17 - Correlation Manager.)
from the UniSim Design
more information. You can access the eight correlations by double-clicking their
corresponding correlation type to expand the list.
Figure 11.86
11-82
Properties
The following is a brief description of each of the correlations listed
under the RVP type.
API 5B1.1 (Naphtha)

This property correlation is useful for gasoline and finished petroleum
products, but not crude or oxygenated blends. The TVP is correlated
against the RVP, temperature, and slope of the ASTM D86 distillation
curve at the 10% point. This property solves the corrected version of
the API databook equation of the correlation for the RVP. A recognized
limitation of the API Naphtha correlation is that the D86 10% point can
have a similar gradient for vastly different streams.
API 5B1.2 (Crude)

This property correlation is generally used for condensate and crude oil
systems (typically wide boiling preprocessed hydrocarbons). TVP is
correlated against RVP and the temperature. This property solves the
API databook equation of the correlation for RVP.
The correlation is based on data from 1959, but it is popular with

engineers for its quick and dirty calculations.
ASTM D323-73/79
This correlation is also known as P323. The pressure is adjusted at the
RVP reference temperature until the vapour to liquid ratio is 4:1 by
volume. This correlation is essentially the same as the Reid VP at 37.8
C correlation, except it is not on a dry basis and the flash method used
is the same for the rest of the flowsheet.
ASTM D323-82
This is the standard and accepted procedure for RVP lab measurement.
Liquid hydrocarbon is saturated with air at 33°F and 1 atm pressure.
Since the lab procedure does not specify that the test chamber is dry,
the air used to saturate the hydrocarbon is assumed to be saturated
with water.
This air-saturated hydrocarbon is then mixed with dry air in a 4:1
11-83
volume ratio and flashed at the RVP reference temperature, such that
the total volume is constant (since the experimental procedure uses a
sealed bomb). The gauge pressure of the resulting mixture is then
reported as the RVP.
ASTM D4953-91
This correlation is for oxygenated gasoline. It is the same as the D323-
82 test method, except everything is on a completely dry basis (i.e., the
air is not saturated with water).
ASTM D5191-91
This was developed for gasoline and gasoline-oxygenate blends as an
alternative to the D4953-91 test method. In the experimental
procedure, the hydrocarbon is saturated with dry air and then placed in
an evacuated bomb with five times its volume. The total pressure is
then converted to a dry vapour pressure equivalent (DVPE) and
reported as the RVP.
The method used is to mix near vacuum air at 0.01 psia and 100°F with
hydrocarbon at 1 atm and 33°F in the ratio 4:1. This is then flashed at
constant volume at the RVP reference temperature. The pressure is
then converted to a DVPE and reported as the RVP.
Conditions for Using RVP

In order to apply some of the RVP correlations to your stream, the
components in the stream need to comply with the correlation.
Nitrogen, oxygen, and water need to be present in the stream if you are
using the following RVPs:
• ASTM D323-82
• ASTM D4953-91
• ASTM D5191-91
If all three components are not present within your stream and you
want to use any of the above three RVPs, UniSim Design will administer
a warning in the trace window.
Electrolyte Components
Electrolytes are the only type of components which cannot be used with
11-84
any of the RVP correlations. If an Electrolyte component is present in

the stream and you try to add a RVP correlation, UniSim Design will not
allow you to use it. If the RVP correlation is already applied to a stream
and you add the Electrolyte component afterwards, UniSim Design will
automatically remove the electrolyte component from that given
stream.
11.18 Alarm Manager

The Alarm Manager is used to view and acknowledge the current status
of raised alarm events by suitably-configured equipment items.
Currently Controller P V alarms are supported. The Alarm Manager is
available only in dynamic mode and can be quickly accessed in the
main and column environments via the Dynamics toolbar icon .
Figure 11.87
11.18.1 Opening the Alarm

Manager
There are a number of ways to open the Alarm Manager when running
11-85
11-86 Alarm Manager
a dynamic case:
• Click the Alarm Manager icon in the toolbar (A yellow warning
symbol)
• Click the Alarm Manager menu entry in the Tools menu
• Double-click on an Alarm Manager message in the status
information area when the Alarm Manager status appears as a
result of an alarm event.
11.18.2 Understanding the Alarm

Manager
The Alarm Manager displays current alarm events in a strict
chronological (simulation time) order, with the most recently occurring
alarm appearing at the top of the list.
A vertical scrollbar automatically appears to accommodate large lists of

alarms greater than the default window size.
For each alarm event an entry is created in the alarm display manager
displaying the following information:
Event Description
State Whether the object is actually in alarm or not. An asterisk in
this column indicates that this item is still in alarm. (This allows
the view to differentiate between items in alarm and items
which have moved from an in-alarm state to a no-alarm state
without the user having acknowledged the occurrence of the
alarm).
Ack The checkbox indicates whether the alarm has been
acknowledged y the user. Clicking on the checkbox when it is
an unchecked state acknowledges the alarm. Clicking on an
already-checked field has no effect.
Tag Name The name of the equipment item. Depending on context, the
displayed name will be the plain equipment name - or if the
equipment item is present in a sub-flow sheet - the fully
qualified equipment name. Clicking on this display pops-up the
view of the equipment item in question.
Type Describes the Alarm type - may be one of HighHigh, High, Low
or LowLow.
Trip Displays the trip point of the breached alarm threshold.
Value Displays the current value of the displayed variable.
Alarm events from suitably configured equipment objects (i.e.

Alarming is currently appropriate alarm limits have been set) appear on the alarm display of
supported for the PV of
controller. Refer to Alarms an executing dynamic case under the following circumstances:
Page from the UniSim • The PV of a monitored equipment object breaches an alarm
Design Operations limit.
Guide for more
information. • An alarm limit is changed so that the current value of the item
now breaches the modified limit.
11-86
Alarm events are automatically removed from the alarm display of an

executing dynamic case under the following circumstances:
• The PV of an acknowledged alarm event leaves an alarm limit.
• An alarm limit is changes so that the PV of an acknowledged
event no longer breaches that limit.
An unacknowledged alarm is not automatically removed from the

display under the above two conditions. Instead, only the asterisk
declaring that it is in alarm (in the State column of the display) is
removed. The alarm remains until the user explicitly acknowledges
that alarm (or clears it as part of a Clear All operation via the
Acknowledge pushbutton in the display). Once acknowledged the alarm
event is immediately removed from the display.
Multiple Alarm Events for the Same Point

A single point may appear in the alarm list more than once if multiple
alarm limits have been breached. For example an uncorrected Low
alarm may transition to a LowLow - in this case separate entries for
both the Low and LowLow conditions are created. As described
above, neither of these entries would be removed from the alarm list if
the point returns to a healthy condition unless the alarm has been
explicitly acknowledged.
In the above example, a point value returning from a level triggering a

LowLow alarm condition to a healthy value would pass through a
number of states - depending on whether both, one or neither of the
alarm conditions had been acknowledged:
LowLow and Low unacknowledged: Both remain in the alarm manager as

unacknowledged entries.
LowLow acknowledged: LowLow removed from list once LowLow
limit (plus tolerance) surpassed. Low entry
remains.
Low and LowLow acknowledged Each removed in turn as respective limits
(plus tolerance) surpassed.
Similar rules apply to alarms breaching High and HighHigh limits - or

in the case of a wildly transitioning point - between the Low and High
limit sets.
As described in the section above, acknowledging an alarm condition

when that condition is no longer active results in its immediate removal
from the list.
11-87
11-88 Variable Navigator
Acknowledging an Alarm
To acknowledge an individual alarm:
• Click the checkbox in the Ack column
To acknowledge all alarms on the display:

• Click the Acknowledge All pushbutton located at the bottom
right of the Alarm Manager Display
Status Reports
The user is alerted to alarm-related activity by entries in the Status
Window.
Messages vary according to the severity of the current alarm manager

contents in the following order of precedence:
1. If an unacknowledged high-importance alarm is present (e.g.
HighHigh or LowLow) this information is presented as a high-
priority (red) message.
2. If an unacknowledged medium importance (e.g. High or Low)
this information is presented as a high-priority (red) message.
3. If an acknowledged high importance event is present this is
reported as a warning (blue) message.
4. If an acknowledged medium-importance event is present this is
reported as a warning (blue) message.
The Alarm Manager can be displayed by double-clicking on any of those

alarms.
11.19 Variable Navigator

The Variable Navigator is one of the two navigational aids that can be
used to bring the multi-flowsheet architecture into a flat space. It is
also used when browsing for variables, such as selecting a process
11-88
variable for a controller or a strip chart.
Figure 11.88
The Variable Navigator uses a similar structure to the Object Navigator,

but allows for a more detailed search.
11.19.1 Using the Variable

Navigator
Refer to Section 7.17 - When selecting a variable, work through the groups from left to right.
The Object Filter eliminates selections from the Object group.
details on list filtering.
You can click the Cancel button at any time to close the Variable
Navigator without accepting any changes.
Selecting a Process Variable

1. Select one of the radio buttons in the Navigator Scope group. The
list located above this group changes depending on the radio button
selected.
2. From the list, select either the flowsheet, case, basis, or utility in
which the process variable is located.
3. From the list of available objects, select the object with the variable
you want to use.
use.
5. Certain variables (such as component specific variables), require
further specification. From the list of variable specifics, select the
qualifier for the variable.
6. Enter a more detailed description of the variable in the Variable
Description field or leave the default description.
11-89
7. Click OK to accept the variable.

8. To disconnect a variable from an object, click the Disconnect
button. The Variable Navigator remains open, allowing you to make
a new variable selection.
Navigator Scope
The following table provides information on the different navigator
scopes you can use.
Object Definition
Flowsheet Provides a list of all available flowsheets in the simulation,
so you can select an object from any flowsheet.
Case Access general case information (for example, about the
Main Solver or Optimizer). You can also use this option
when a column is the main flowsheet (for example, if you
are in a column template, then there are a bunch of
variables that have to be accessed through the Case filter.
This is because the column template file doesn't have the
upper environment, so those variables become available
through the case filter).
Basis Provides a list of property packages or components being
used in the case.
Utilities Provides a list of all available utilities in the simulation. A
special utility Object Filter replaces the default filter.
11.20 Simulation Balance

Tool
The Simulation Balance Tool command opens the Simulation Balance
Tool view. Refer to Section 7.27 - Simulation Balance Tool for more
information.
11.21 RTO Manager

The RTO Manager is used for external access to variables of
optimization objects for data reconciliation and derivative utilities.
To access the RTO Manager, use the following method:
11-90
• Select the RTO Manager command from the Tools menu.
Figure 11.89
All variables used by the RTO Manager are managed through the
Transfer Tables. Each transfer table is created for each derivative or
data recon utility. Multiple transfer tables can be created for the same
utility.
11.21.1 Adding a Transfer Table

Use this procedure to add a transfer table to the RTO Manager.
1. Click the Add Table button to display the Select Utility view.
Figure 11.90
2. From the list of available utilities, select the utility which uses the
optimization objects whose variables need external access.
11-91
11-92 RTO Manager
Click the Cancel button at any time to close the Select Utility view
without accepting any changes.
3. Click OK. A transfer table which is attached to the selected utility
appears in the list of Transfer Tables. If required, type a new name
in the Name field.
Figure 11.91
11.21.2 Viewing a Transfer Table

1. From the list of Transfer Tables, click the transfer table you want to
view.
2. Click the View Table button. The Transfer Table view appears.
The Transfer Table shows the following for each variable:
• Object that the variable is attached to.
• Variable description.
• Current value.
• Units of the value.
• Tag for the variable.
11-92
• Access mode of the variable.
Figure 11.92
11.21.3 Deleting a Transfer Table

1. From the list of Transfer Tables, click the transfer table you want to
delete.
11.21.4 Adding Object

1. Click the Add Object button to display Select Opt Object view.
Optimization objects which are used by the selected utility will
appear in the list of available objects. Type filters can be used to
only display objects of a specific type.
1. Click the Add Object button to display Select Opt Object view.
Optimization objects which are used by the selected utility will
appear in the list of available objects. Type filters can be used to
only display objects of a specific type.
Figure 11.93
2. From the list of available objects, select the object whose variables
are needed for external access.
11-93
11-94 RTO Manager
3. Click OK. The selected optimization object will be added to the list
of Objects and all variables of the object will also be displayed in the
matrix of Variables which includes columns Variables, Show and
Access Mode.
Figure 11.94
4. Check the Show checkbox for each variable you want displayed in
the transfer table.
5. Click the Enable All button to add all of the variables to the transfer
table.
6. Click the Invert All button to check all unchecked checkboxes and
uncheck all checked checkboxes.
7. Click the Disable All button to remove all of the variables from the
transfer table.
8. If checkbox Apply changes to objects of the same type is checked,
any changes in Show and Access Mode will be applied to all other
objects of the same type.
11.21.5 Removing Object

1. From the list of Objects, select the object to be removed.
2. Click the Remove Object button. The selected object will be
removed from the list of Objects and from the transfer table.
11-94
Session Preferences 12-1
12 Session Preferences
12.1 Introduction ................................................................................ 3

12.1.1 Save Preferences ................................................................... 3
12.1.2 Save Preferences As... ............................................................ 3
12.1.3 Load Preferences.................................................................... 4
12.1.4 Save Preferences File by Default............................................... 4
12.2 Simulation Tab............................................................................. 5

12.2.1 Options Page ......................................................................... 5
12.2.2 Errors Page ........................................................................... 8
12.2.3 Desktop Page .......................................................................10
12.2.4 Naming Page ........................................................................11
12.2.5 Tool Tips Page.......................................................................12
12.2.6 Flash Control Page.................................................................14
12.2.7 Dynamics Page .....................................................................14
12.2.8 Steady State ........................................................................16
12.2.9 Performance Page .................................................................16
12.2.10 Licensing Page ....................................................................17
12.2.11 Column Page ......................................................................18
12.2.12 Status Window Page ............................................................18
12.2.13 Trace Window Page ..............................................................19
12.2.14 Cut/Copy/Paste Page ...........................................................19
12.3 Variables Tab..............................................................................20

12.3.1 Units Page............................................................................20
12.3.2 Formats Page........................................................................24
12.4 Reports Tab ................................................................................26

12.4.1 Format/Layout Page ..............................................................26
12.4.2 Text Format Page ..................................................................27
12.4.3 Datasheets Page ...................................................................28
12.4.4 Company Info Page ...............................................................29
12.5 Files Tab .....................................................................................30

12.5.1 Options Page ........................................................................30
12.5.2 Locations Page......................................................................31
12.5.3 Revision Control....................................................................32
12.5.4 Databases ............................................................................34
12.6 Resources Tab ............................................................................36

12.6.1 Colours Page ........................................................................36
12-1
12-2 Session Preferences
12.6.2 Fonts Page ...........................................................................37

12.6.3 Icons Page ...........................................................................38
12.6.4 Cursors Page ........................................................................40
12.6.5 Sounds Page.........................................................................41
12.7 Extensions Tab ...........................................................................42
12.8 Oil Input Tab ..............................................................................43

12.8.1 Assay Definition Page .........................................................43
12.8.2 Assay Options Page ............................................................44
12.9 Tray Sizing Tab ...........................................................................44

12.9.1 Parameters Page ................................................................45
12.9.2 Packed Page ......................................................................46
12.9.3 Trayed Page.......................................................................46
12.10 Case Tools Tab..........................................................................48

12.10.1 Scenario Manager................................................................48
12.10.2 Simulation Balance Tool........................................................49
12-2
12.1 Introduction
The Session Preferences view is used to specify default information for
the simulation case. This information includes Automatic Naming
Formats, Units, Colours, Fonts, Icons, etc. Multiple Session Preferences
can be saved for use in other simulations.
Access the Session Preferences view by selecting the Preferences

command from the Tools menu in any UniSim Design environment.
Figure 12.1
There are a number of tabs associated with the view. Common to all
tabs are the three buttons along the bottom of the view:
• Save Preferences
• Save Preferences As...
• Save Preferences file by default
• Load Preferences...
12.1.1 Save Preferences

1. Click the Save Preferences button. The current preferences are
saved.
12.1.2 Save Preferences As...

1. Click the Save Preferences As... button. The Save Preference File
view appears.
2. Specify the name and location for your preference file.
12-3
12-4 Introduction
3. Click Save. You will be prompted with the following message:
Figure 12.2
Click Yes, No or Cancel to continue.
12.1.3 Load Preferences...

1. Click the Load Preferences... button. The Open Preferences File
view appears.
2. Browse to the location of your preference file (*.prf).
3. Select the file you want to load and click Open.
12.1.4 Save Preferences File by

Default
1. Check on the Save Preferences file by default check box. The
preference file will be automatically saved onto user's machine
when exiting the UniSim Design application.
2. Check off the Save Preferences file by default check box. The
preference file will not be saved automatically unless user has
changed some setting in the preference file. A message box as
follow will appear when exiting the UniSim Design Application.
Figure 12.3
The user can decide if there is a need to save the preference file on to
their maching by clicking Yes or No.
12-4
12.2 Simulation Tab

The Simulation tab contains the following pages:
• Options
• Errors
• Desktop
• Naming
• Tool Tips
• Flash Control
• Dynamics
• Steady State
• Performance
• Licensing
• Column
• Status Window
• Trace Window
• Cut/Copy/Paste
12.2.1 Options Page

The Options page contains five groups: General Options, Basis
Environment Warnings, Stream Property Correlations, Hypothetical
components options and Transfer Basis.
Figure 12.4
The following table lists and describes the checkboxes in the General
12-5
12-6 Simulation Tab
Options group.
Option Description
Allow Multiple Controls whether lists of streams are filtered only to
Stream those that are not currently connected. If this
Connections checkbox is unchecked, when you use the drop-down
list of streams to select a feed to an operation, only
streams that are not already connected as a feed to an
operation appear in the list. If the checkbox is checked,
all the streams in the flowsheet appear, including the
ones that you cannot connect as feed streams.
View New If checked, the property view for the stream
Streams Upon automatically appears when you add a new stream.
Creation
Use Modal When checked, all property views appear as modal
Property Views (with a Pin). When views are modal, you can
individually make each property view non-modal by
clicking the Pin in the upper corner of the view.
Record Time When checked, all notes are time stamped when they
When Notes are are modified.
Modified
Enable Cross When checked, any time the cursor is positioned over
Hairs on PFD the PFD view, a set of vertical and horizontal lines
appear and intersect where the cursor point is in the
view.
When unchecked, the set of lines do not appear.
Save XML Fluid When this checkbox is checked, you can save and
Package to User export an XML file that contains a fluid package to the
Defined File user-defined file so that HYPROPIII can manually read
the file.
Use Input Column operations have an optional installation expert
Experts built in to assist you in the installation. When this
checkbox is checked, the Input Expert guides you
through the Column installation.
Confirm Deletes When checked, you are prompted for confirmation
before deleting an object. If the checkbox is
unchecked, the object is deleted when the instruction
is given. It is recommended that you keep this option
checked.
Confirm Mode When this checkbox is checked, you are prompted for
Switches confirmation when changing to or from Dynamics
mode.
Enable Single When checked, all objects that require a double-click
Click Actions only require a single-click.
Enable Cell Edit When checked, a cell that is ‘editable’ has a button
Button appearing on the left side when the cell has focus.
Clicking this button, accesses the cell’s edit functions
(similar to pressing F2).
The Basis Environment Warnings group consists of two checkboxes:

• Show Property Package Warning checkbox. When checked
the warning message related to the property package will be
displayed.
• Show Warning Message on Edit of Interaction Parameters
checkbox to show the related warning.
The Stream Property Correlations group has two checkboxes:

• Activate Property Correlations checkbox
12-6
When checked, UniSim Design will activate all available Black

Oil, Electrolyte, and Standard Property Correlations. The
activation process does not guarantee that each stream in the
case will contain all active correlations.
Before the UniSim Design Correlation Manager appends any
stream correlations it first checks each streams Fluid Package to
confirm that the required information will be available to that
correlations calculation. If that stream fluid does not supply the
required information the correlation cannot be appended. If the
checkbox is not selected the UniSim Design Correlation Manager
will not activate any new property correlations and will not
remove any correlations previously added. If this checkbox is
unselected and then reselected, the Correlation Manager will
repeat the process of activating and appending all available
Black Oil, Electrolyte, and Standard Property Correlations.
• Confirm Before Adding if Active Correlations are Present
checkbox
When checked, a warning message will appear when UniSim
Design activates a correlation in a case which already contains
some active correlations. This warning message asks you if you
want to add a full list of correlations in addition to the existing
correlations.
The Hypothetical components options group checkbox:

• Confirm before replacing duplicate hypos from all hypo
groups
Select Confirm before replacing all duplicate hypos from all hypo
groups checkbox to have some options on replacing duplicate
hypos. If this checkbox is not checked, all duplicate hypos will
be replaced without warning by their existing counterparts when
the Translocate button is activated in the Hypotheticals tab of
the Simulation Basis Manager view.
The Transfer Basis group has six checkboxes. Use the checkboxes to
select the default transfer basis to be used in stream cutters,
subflowsheet templates, column internal/external stream connections,
etc.
Modal vs. Non-Modal Property Views

When a view is modal, you cannot access any other element in the
simulation (i.e., you cannot select a menu item or view that is not
directly part of that modal view). This functionality is convenient if you
12-7
12-8 Simulation Tab
do not want to clutter the Desktop with unnecessary views.
Figure 12.5
Modal View Non-Modal View
A modal view with a Pin The modal view is indicated by the substitution of the Minimize/
can be converted to a
non-modal view by Maximize icons with a Pin icon. Some modal views, such as the Input
clicking the Pin icon. Composition view, do not have Pins. Click the Pin icon to switch to a
non-modal view.
Non-modal views are not restrictive because you can leave a non-modal
view open and interact with any other view or menu item. The non-
modal view has the Minimize/Maximize icons in the upper right corner
of the view.
12.2.2 Errors Page

Refer to Section 1.3 - The Errors page contains three groups: Errors, Case Checking Tool and
Objects Associated with Pumparounds.
Trace Window for more
information on the Trace
Window. Figure 12.6
12-8
The Errors group has five checkboxes which, when checked, send the
specified errors to the Trace Window. When these checkboxes are
unchecked, you are not prompted to acknowledge errors.
The following is a brief description of each error type.
Error Type Description

Display Errors in The basic error message is displayed within the
Trace Window trace window rather than via a pop-up window.
Display Numerical This option sends numerical errors to the trace
Errors in Trace window rather than via a pop-up error message
Window window. In dynamics mode, checking this option
ignores numerical errors so the integrator will
continue to run even if the numerical errors occur.
Prefix Date and TIme The date and time (according to the clock and
to Error calendar of your CPU) is placed before the error
message.
Prefix Integrator The integrator time is placed before the error
Time to Error message (this only applies when the integrator is
running in a dynamics case).
Identify Source of This option will try to identify the source of a
Numerical Errors numerical error and display it within the trace
window. This can slow UniSim Design down so it
should only be used when you are trying to track
down errors to clean them up. Once you have
finished tracking errors, turn this option off.
This option may not be able to identify the source
if it does not occur within a unit operation (i.e., If
the error was caused by a strip chart).
The Case Checking Tool group has three checkboxes.

• Check case for corrupt variable associations in unit
operations on load (warning: this may increase the load
time). When this box is checked USD will do a search for all the
variables associated with the unit ops during case loading. If a
variable is found to be corrupted, USD will do a correction
automatically. This may prevent some cases from crashing in
loading.
• Reset all variables associations. When this is checked, USD
will reset all variables association with unit op unconditionally
during case loading. The benefit is that it may resolve some
mysterious crash of an old case. The penalty is that all the
variables “Calculated By” information will be lost. It will be
reestablished in the next Flowsheet solution.
• Component List Synchronization. When this box is checked
on, USD will do a check and synchronize all the Fluid Packages
associated Component Lists with the Master Component List
during case loading. Some old cases may have this issue.
The Objects Associated With Pumparounds group as one checkbox

Ask to Delete All Objects Associated With Pumparounds. When
user deletes/removes a column Pumparound object, a message will pop
up to confirm with user if he/she wants to keep or delete all the objects
associated with the Pumparound object if this check box is checked on.
Otherwise, the objects associated with the Pumparound object will be
12-9
12-10 Simulation Tab
kept in the flowsheet.
12.2.3 Desktop Page

The Desktop page contains two groups: Initial Build Home View and
Face Plates.
Figure 12.7
The Initial Build Home View group contains radio buttons that let you
specify which of the three main views (Workbook, PFD, or Summary)
automatically appears when you first enter the Simulation environment.
This does not restrict your access within that environment, as the
Workbook, PFD, and Summary views can all be open at the same time.
This setting only establishes the view that appears by default.
The Face Plates group involves the placement of face plates on the
Desktop. When you have a large number of face plates open in a case
and you click the Arrange Desktop command in the Window menu, the
12-10
face plates are organized according to your specifications in this group.
Figure 12.8
When the Tile Face Plates Along Side radio button is selected, the
views are tiled as shown.
A value of 2 was specified as the maximum Extra views, including

number of columns for tiling; this is why there are face plates, are
only two columns visible here. cascaded.
The face plates are either placed along the left side of the Desktop in a
column format or along the top in a row format. You can limit the
number of columns or rows (depending on the selected radio button) in
the Maximum Number of Columns/Rows field. Any excess face plates
that cannot be placed on the Desktop due to the columns/rows limit are
cascaded with other open views.
There are no restrictions

12.2.4 Naming Page
in naming streams and
operations. You can use The Naming page dictates how streams and operations are named
more than one word, and
spaces are allowed. when they are installed. You can specify the naming convention for
each type of operation. For each flowsheet object, specify a naming
convention and a starting number.
12-11
For example, in the figure below, Energy Streams are indicated as Q-

%d, with a starting number of 100. The first energy stream installed in
the simulation is named Q-100, the second Q-101, and so on. The
automatic naming function is provided for convenience. You can change
any default name at any time within the flowsheet.
Figure 12.9
12.2.5 Tool Tips Page

Figure 12.10
The following table lists and describes the objects in the Show Tool
12-12
Tips group.
Object Description
Show ToolTips Activates the available tool tips. When this checkbox is
checkbox checked you can use the checkboxes in the ToolTips
group.
Default Unit Set Select this radio button to use the default unit set.
radio button
User Defined Select this radio button to define a custom unit set.
Unit Set radio The User Defined Unit Set table becomes active, and
button you can define the unit set.
Value Calculated Displays what operation calculated the value in the tool
By checkbox tip. Uncheck the checkbox if you do not want to see
this value.
Value in EuroSI Displays the value in European SI units in the tool tip.
Units checkbox Uncheck the checkbox if you do not want to see this
value.
Value in Field Displays the value in Field units in the tool tip. Uncheck
Units checkbox the checkbox if you do not want to see this value.
Value in SI Units Displays the value in SI units in the tool tip. Uncheck
checkbox the checkbox if you do not want to see this value.
User Define User Available only when the User Defined Unit Set radio
Set table button is selected. Allows you to define the unit set.
The following table lists and describes the objects in the Show PFD Fly
By group.
Object Description
Show PFD Fly By Click this checkbox to see the Fly by text in the PFD.
checkbox The Fly by displays information about an object when
you move the cursor over it in the PFD.
Steady State Select this radio button to view the Fly by text in
radio button Steady State mode.
Dynamic State Select this radio button to view the Fly by text in
radio button Dynamic Mode.
PFD object tree Select a PFD object type from the tree browser. A list of
browser Fly by options appears in the table to the right of the
tree browser.
Show PFD Fly By Select the checkboxes in the table to select the
Table parameters you want to view in the Fly by text. By
default, Temperature, Pressure, and Molar Flow are
already selected. Some options are available only in
Dynamic mode.
Reset to default Click this button to reset the Show PFD Fly By options
selections button back to the default setting.
12-13
12.2.6 Flash Control Page

Figure 12.11
Trace Phase Tolerance is the threshold value for phase fraction; it is

used in the flash calculations. If phase fraction value of a phase drops
below the Trace Phase Tolerance value during flash calculation, then
that phase is deleted.
The Default Trace Phase Tolerance value is 1E-6. This value can be
changed by the user. Any user entered Trace Phase Tolerance value
should be between 1E-6 and 1E-12.
12.2.7 Dynamics Page

There are five groups in the Dynamics page: Assistant, Controller
12-14
Options, Pressure Flow Solver, DataLogger Options and Other.
Figure 12.12
The following table lists and describes the objects on the Dynamics
page.
Object Description
Set dynamic stream Check the checkbox to automatically set all of
specifications in the the dynamic stream specifications.
background checkbox
Perform checks when Check the checkbox if you want to use the
switching to dynamics or Dynamics Assistant every time you switch
starting the integrator from steady state to dynamics, or when
checkbox starting the Integrator.
Save steady state case Check the checkbox if you want to save the
on switch to Dynamics steady state case before changing to dynamic
state.
Trace controller alarm Check the checkbox if you want to see
messages checkbox controller alarm messages in the Trace
Window.
Ignore convergence When checked, convergence failures for up to
failures checkbox five pressure flow steps are ignored. Checking
this option is not recommended, but it can be
useful when you know a converging case
converges while having problems during one
of the calculation steps.
Logger Size field Specify the amount of data (steps) you want
stripcharts to keep.
Sample Interval field Specify how frequent UniSim Design records
the data for the stripcharts. The shorter the
amount of time, the more frequent UniSim
Design records the data.
Delete Internal sub- When checked, all internal sub-flowsheet
flowsheet streams when streams are deleted when the corresponding
external streams are external stream is deleted.
deleted checkbox
12-15
12.2.8 Steady State

Figure 12.13
There are three checkboxes in the Steady State Unit Op Options

group:
• Show Warning Status on Unit Ops with Negative Flows.
• Show Warnings in the Trace Window for Unit Ops with
Negative Flows.
• Enforce Pressure Back Propagation and Equalize all
Pressure Rule. When this is checked, unit op such as 3 Phase
Separator, Separator, Tank, Single Outlet Vessel, CSTR, Gibbs
Reactor, Equilibrium Reactor and Conversion Reactor will
conduct back pressure calculation and equalize all pressure for
multiple feed streams when pressure value is not provided by
user.
12.2.9 Performance Page

The Performance page allows you to manipulate the UniSim Design
computation time and calculation process.
Figure 12.14
Macro Performance Group

The Macro Performance group contains the Macro Performance slider.
Move the slider to your required setting to balance the Macro speed
with your memory requirements. The faster the setting, the more
memory your computer requires to run the macros.
The default setting for the

Update Object Status
Update Object Status when Solving Checkbox
when Solving checkbox
is selected. When the Update Object Status when Solving checkbox is selected, the
object status services updates each time an object is solved. For
12-16
example, as UniSim Design solves the entire flowsheet, the object

status goes between “not solved” and “solved” as UniSim Design
encounters not solved objects and solved objects in the flowsheet.
When the checkbox is clear, UniSim Design only updates the object
status of all the objects in the flowsheet at the end of the solve pass, in
other words, when UniSim Design has finished solving the entire
flowsheet. The calculation time decreases and performance improves
when you clear the checkbox.
12.2.10 Licensing Page

To purchase additional The Licensing page contains the following groups: Licensing Options,
licenses or products, Job Tracking Options and Startup Options.
contact Honeywell, or e-
mail us at
unisim.support@honeyw Figure 12.15
ell.com.
The default licensing behaviour of the UniSim Design Dynamics license

can be changed in the Licensing Options group.
The options in the Job Tracking Options group are Use Job tracking for
all checked out licenses and Use Defaults.
• If you check the Use Job tracking for all checked out
licenses checkbox, job numbers will be requested when either
a new or old case is opened. This option does not support
multiple jobs within a single UniSim Design session.
• If you check the Use Defaults checkbox, you can enter defaults
values in the adjacent table. If these defaults are set, UniSim
Design will not ask for any job information.
The options in the Startup Options group.

• You have the option to change the warning about when your
license will expire. The default is 30 days.
12-17
• You have the option to changing the warning for the number of
days that a commuted license will expire.
• You have the option to check for available license servers to
return commuted licenses
• You will have the ability to choose to auto-commute a network
license.
12.2.11 Column Page

The Column page consists of one group: Column Options.
Figure 12.16
The Column Options group contains the following checkboxes:

• Use Input Experts. Column operations have an optional input
expert built in to assist you in the installation. When this
checkbox is checked, you are guided through the Column
installation.
• Expand Tray Sections. When checked, it shows a fully
expanded column in the Column environment PFD. When the
checkbox is unchecked, the column appears with the minimum
required number of trays (those trays which have streams [inlet
or outlet] attached to them).
• Default New Columns to Split All Feed Streams. When
checked, all feed streams in any newly created column are
automatically split. (The option does not affect existing columns
and any feed splitting options already selected.)
• Default Absorber Bottom Stage Downward Feed Split.
When checked, the liquid phase of any feed stream with "Split"
checked to the bottom stage of any newly created absorber will
flow to the sump separator below the bottom tray of the
absorber, while the split vapour phase in the stream will flow to
the specified tray, bottom tray. (The option does not affect
existing columns and any feed splitting options already
selected.)
• Enforce propagating column stage pressure to feed
stream. When checked, column stage pressure will be
propagated to the feed stream which is connected to the stage.
The options in the Status
Window page are exactly
the same as the options
offered in the Status List
Properties view. See the
12.2.12 Status Window Page
Object Status Window
sub-section from Section The Status Window page allows you to manipulate the file that saves
1.3.3 - Object Inspect
Menu for more information.
12-18
the status message that appears in the Status Window.
Figure 12.17
12.2.13 Trace Window Page

The options in the Trace The Trace Window page allows you to manipulate the Trace Window
Window page is exactly the
same as the options offered options.
in the Trace Properties view.
See Trace Window sub- Figure 12.18
section from the Section
1.3.3 - Object Inspect
Menu for more information.
12.2.14 Cut/Copy/Paste Page

The Cut/Copy/Paste page allows you to add specific extension name to
a copied unit operation after you have paste the operation.
Figure 12.19
For example, if you specified -optim as the extension to the copied
12-19
12-20 Variables Tab
name, as shown in the figure below:
Figure 12.20
The copied and paste object will have -optim added to the back of its
name, as shown in the figure below of a copied separator:
Figure 12.21
12.3 Variables Tab

The Variables tab has two pages: Units and Formats.
12.3.1 Units Page

The Units page allows you to select and manipulate the unit set used in
12-20
the simulation case.
Figure 12.22
Displays all available unit sets. The default Adds a new

unit sets cannot be changed or deleted. custom unit set.
Used to delete
a custom unit
set from the
preferences.
Lets you change the

Displays the name of a custom unit
variable and the set.
unit according to
the selected unit
set. Sorts the list of variables
in ascending alphabetical
order.
UniSim Design contains the following default unit sets:

• Field
• SI
• EuroSI
These three sets cannot be modified in any way or deleted. If you want
UniSim Design to display information in units other than the default,
you can create your own custom unit sets.
Adding a Unit Set

A custom unit set lets you 1. Select the unit set you want to clone from the list of available unit
mix SI and Field units sets.
within the same unit set.
2. Click the Clone button. A new unit set appears with the name
NewUser.
3. Change the default name in the Unit Set Name field, if required.
The units used in the new unit set are the same as the unit set you
cloned.
Deleting a Unit Set

You can not delete the
three default unit sets: SI, 1. Select the unit set you want to delete from the list of available unit
Field, and Euro SI.
12-21
12-22 Variables Tab
sets.
You are not prompted to confirm the deletion of a unit set, so

ensure that you have selected the correct unit set to delete.
Changing the Units in a Unit Set

You can not modify the 1. From the list of available unit sets, select the user-defined unit set
units in any of the three you want to use for your simulation.
default unit sets: SI, Field,
and Euro SI. 2. In the Displayed Units group, click the unit you want to change
(e.g., Temperature).
3. In the selected unit cell, press the space bar to open a drop-down
list. The drop-down list shows all available convertible units for that
unit type. For Temperature, you see C, K, F, and R and any user
conversions that were created.
This selection does not 4. From the list, select the unit you want use.
change the UniSim Design
internal unit set.
Adding a Unit Conversion

If you require a unit that is not available in the UniSim Design
database, you can create your own unit and supply a conversion factor.
You can only add a unit to a user defined unit set.
1. From the list of available unit sets, select the customized unit set
you want to use for your simulation.
2. In the Displayed Units group, select the unit for which you want to
add a conversion.
The UniSim Design 3. Click the Add button to display the User Conversion view.
internal unit is always
displayed on the User
Conversion view. Figure 12.23
4. In the Name field, type the name of your new unit.

5. In the second field (the multiply/divide field), type the conversion
factor between your unit and the UniSim Design internal unit.
6. From the drop-down list, specify whether you want to multiply or
divide by the conversion factor.
7. In the final field (the add/subtract field), type the conversion factor
between your unit and the UniSim Design internal unit.
To add a factor, specify a value in this field. To subtract, place a
12-22
negative sign in front of the number (for example, enter -2.0).

8. Click OK. The User Conversion view closes with this unit as the
active unit for that unit type.
Viewing a Unit Conversion

The View button lets you view the conversion factor used to convert a
unit from its internal unit (SI) to the selected user defined unit in the
unit set.
1. From the list of available unit sets, select the unit set you want to
use for your simulation.
2. In the Displayed Units group, select the unit for which you want to
view the conversion.
3. Click the View button. The Conversion view appears.
Figure 12.24
4. Do one of the following:

• Click the OK button to accept any changes made to a user unit
conversion and close the view.
• Click the Cancel button to close the view without accepting any
changes.
Deleting a Unit Conversion

You can only delete user defined unit conversions.
1. From the list of available unit sets, select the required unit set.
2. In the Displayed Units group, select the user-created unit you want
to delete.
deletion of the unit. The unit returns to the UniSim Design default
unit.
Viewing Users of a Unit Set

Units sets can be attached to spreadsheets and reports, so
spreadsheets can have different unit sets than your simulation.
1. From the list of available unit sets, select the unit set you want to
use for your simulation.
12-23
12-24 Variables Tab
2. Click the View Users button. The Unit Set view appears. This
Clicking the OK button button is available only if the unit set is attached to an object.
closes the view and
returns you to the
Session Preferences view. Figure 12.25
3. From the list of available users, select the user you want to view.
4. Click the View selected object button. The property view of the
selected user appears and the Unit Set view closes.
12.3.2 Formats Page

This page lets you specify how variables appear.
Figure 12.26
Resets the format of the active variable

back to the UniSim Design default setting.
Sorts the list of Resets all the

variables in variable formats
ascending back to the
alphabetical UniSim Design
order. default setting.
12-24
Modifying Variable Formats

To select more than one 1. From the list of variable formats, click the format cell of the variable
format at a time, hold you want to modify.
down the CTRL key, and
click each variable you 2. Click the Format button. The Real Format Editor view appears.
want to select.
Figure 12.27
Assigns the
UniSim Design
default format to
the associated
values.
3. Select the format you want to use for your variable.

4. Click OK to accept the changes and close the view.
Real Format Editor

The Real Format Editor lets you set the format for displaying values in
UniSim Design.
The following table lists and describes the available formats:
Radio Button Description

Exponential Displays the values in scientific notation. The number of
significant digits after the decimal point is set in the
Significant Figure field. For example:
• Entered or calculated value: 10000.5
• Significant Figure: 5 (includes the first whole digit)
• Final display: 1.0001e+04
12-25
12-26 Reports Tab
Radio Button Description

Fixed Displays the values in decimal notation. The number of
Decimal whole digits and significant digits after the decimal point
Point are set in the Whole Digits and Decimal Digits fields. For
example:
• Entered value: 100.5
• Whole digits: 3
• Decimal digits: 2
• Final display: 100.50
If the entered or calculated value exceed the specified
whole digits, UniSim Design displays the value as
Exponential, with the sum of the specified whole and
decimal digits being the number of significant figures.
If the Display sign if zero checkbox is checked, UniSim
Design displays the sign of the number entered or
calculated that is rounded to zero.
Significant The number of significant digits after the decimal point is
Figure set in the Significant Figure field. Displays the values in
either decimal notation or scientific notation.
Example one:
• Significant Figure: 5
• Final display: 100.50
Example two:
• Significant Figure: 5
• Final display: 1.0001e+04
12.4 Reports Tab

The Reports tab is divided into four pages: Format/Layout, Text Format,
Datasheets, and Company Info.
12.4.1 Format/Layout Page

The Format/Layout page provides options for formatting and specifying
12-26
the appearance of your printed reports.
Figure 12.28
Object Description
Shading When checked, headers, footers, and titles are shaded.
Line Number When checked, line numbers appear on the left side of
the report.
Thick Borders When checked, report border lines are thicker than the
other lines in the report.
Indicate User When checked, any user specified values in the
Specified Datasheet are indicated with an asterisk (*).
Start Datasheet When checked, each Datasheet starts on a new page.
on New Page
Empty Text Specify what you want to display in the Datasheet
when there is no value available. The UniSim Design
default is “---”.
Unit Set Select the unit set you want your Datasheet to use.
This gives you the option of printing Datasheets with
different unit sets than your case. For example, your
case may be in SI, but you can set the report to appear
in Field units.
Page Margins Set the margins of your page. The values are the
distance in inches from the edge of the page.
Paper Options Select the size of paper on which you want to print.
The list contains all the Microsoft defaults.
Orientation Select the orientation of the data on the paper. You
have two options: Portrait or Landscape.
12.4.2 Text Format Page

Use the Text Format page to define the appearance of text in the
12-27
12-28 Reports Tab
report.
Figure 12.29
Object Description
Use Delimiting Check this checkbox if you want the text file to always
By Default be delimited.
Title Description When checked, a title is added to the text file. The title
Visible includes the name of the object and the tabs that are
included in the report.
Header Field When checked, a header is added to the text file. The
Visible header includes the company information and the date
the report was created.
Footer Field When checked, a footer is added to the text file. The
Visible footer includes the UniSim Design version and build
number.
Fields Padded for When checked, spaces are added between each field to
Alignment align the fields.
Disable Column When checked, column wrapping is disabled. This
Wrapping means that text that goes past the edge of the page
does not wrap onto the next line.
Empty Text Specify what you want to display in the Datasheet
when there is no value available. The UniSim Design
default is “---”.
Delimiter Specify what you want to use as the delimiter in your
text file. The UniSim Design default is comma
delimited (,).
12.4.3 Datasheets Page

The Datasheets page lets you control which information will appear in
12-28
the report for selected streams and operations.
Figure 12.30
Checks all the Checks all unchecked datablocks

datablocks checkboxes checkboxes and unchecks all checked
for the selected datablocks checkboxes for the selected
Datasheet type. Datasheet type.
12.4.4 Company Info Page

UniSim Design does not The Company Info page lets you customize the company information
automatically resize a that appears on the report.
bitmap file to fit the logo
box on this page.
The size of the sample Figure 12.31
logo is 4.42 cm wide by
1.88 cm high.
The maximum logo size
that can be
accommodated by the
logo box is 6.55 cm wide
by 2.38 cm high.
To modify the company information, do the following:
12-29
12-30 Files Tab
1. In the Company Name field, type the company name that will
appear in the report header.
2. In the Company Location field, type the company location that will
appear in the report header.
The logo picture must be 3. To add a company logo, click the Select button. The Open File view
in bitmap format. appears. Browse to the location of your bitmap file (*.bmp).
4. Select the file you want to import and click the Open button.
12.5 Files Tab

The Files tab has the following pages:
• Options
• Locations
• Revision Control
• Databases
12.5.1 Options Page

The Options page lets you modify the preferences used when saving a
case.
Figure 12.32
From the Select style for ‘File Open’ and ‘Save As’ group, select either
the Standard Windows file picker or the custom file picker radio button.
The custom file picker displays custom UniSim Design open and save
views that show the build in which the case was saved, and the case
description (if one was added).
In the AutoRecovery Settings and Backups group, use the checkboxes
12-30
to select the options you want to use. The following table lists and
describes the checkboxes.
Object Description
Save When checked, UniSim Design saves an auto recovery
AutoRecovery case in the time interval specified in the minutes field.
Cases Every You can use the up and down arrows to increase and
decrease the value of the field by one with each click,
or you can enter a value directly in the field.
Save When checked, UniSim Design saves an auto recovery
AutoRecovery case every time the integrator is run. This checkbox is
Case While only available when the Save AutoRecovery Cases
Integrating Every checkbox is checked.
Cascade Backups This checkbox is used in conjunction with the Number
on Every Save of Case Backups Automatically Maintained. When
checked, UniSim Design maintains the specified
number of backups of each simulation, using the
extension bk*. The newest backup is bk0, the next
newest bk1, etc.
Backup old cases Check this box if you want the Backup cases to include
with build the build number.
number in file
name
12.5.2 Locations Page

UniSim Design is set to On the Locations page, select and specify the default path for various
look in the Cases folder UniSim Design resource files.
for any case files
because the Cases field
contains the path Figure 12.33
“Cases”. Leave the field
blank if you do not want
to use a default location
for that option.
In the Default Files and Paths table, specify the file or path in which you
want the selected option to reside.
You can scroll down to the Stream Correlation Sets File field and change
the default name and path. UniSim Design has access to any custom
12-31
12-32 Files Tab
correlation set files (xml) which you also have access too.
12.5.3 Revision Control

The Revision Control page lets you set up the preferences for revision
control for simulation cases or other types of files. The revision control
information can be used to generate appropriate file names and
populate optional information related to the file.
Figure 12.34
The name creation attributes are used to automatically create file

names for a simulation case or other file type.
The following table describes the items in Default file name creation
attributes for Save As groupbox.
Object Description
Show a pop-up view on Save As Decide if a pop-up window is to be
checkbox shown when Save As is invoked.
This window allows more options for
Save As.
Resolve inconsistency between Decides if the inconsistency between
file name and revision control the file name and the revision control
attributes on loading checkbox attributes will be addressed or not
after a file is loaded.
Append Name Creation Attribute Append a name creation attribute to
button the attribute list displayed in the
matrix below.
Delete Selected Name Creation Delete the selected name creation
Attributes button attributes in the matrix below.
Reorder Name Creation Sort the name creation attributes
Attributes button manually.
Name field The name of the attribute.
12-32
Object Description
Type Field The data type of the attribute. The
choices are: Text, Number, Date,
Time and Yes/No.
Use Prefix Field Decide if a prefix character is to be
used before this field.
Prefix Field The character used immediately
before the content of the attribute.
Format Field The format for number and date
types. The number format is used for
generating file name only, but the
number itself should not exceed the
specified number of digits. In
generating the file name, smaller
numbers will use leading zeros to
make up the number of digits
specified.
Init Value Field The initial or reset value for a
number attribute.
Auto Inc Field Decide if a number is automatically
increased by 1 before saving the file.
However, if the next default file name
will conflict with an existing file in the
same directory, the number will keep
increasing until a non-conflicting
value is found.
Auto Reset Field Automatically reset to initial value
when any attribute above this one
changes.
Use Suffix Field Decide if suffix should be used with
the content of this attribute when
creating the default file name.
Suffix Field The character used immediately after
the contents of the attribute.
CSM Use Field Decide if this attribute should be
shown in case scenario manager
project setup view.
The optional attributes do not form part of a file name, but are saved
along with the file to provide additional information on the file.
The following table describes the items in Optional attributes

groupbox.
Object Description
Append Optional Attribute button Append an optional attribute to the
attribute list displayed in the matrix
on the left.
Delete Selected Optional Delete the selected optional
Attributes button attributes in the matrix on the left.
Reorder Optional Attributes Manually resort the optional
button attributes in the matrix on the left.
Name field The name of the attribute.
Type field The data type of the attribute. The
choices are: Text, Number, Date,
Time, Yes/No.
12-33
12-34 Files Tab
Object Description
Format field The format for date.
CSM Use field Decide if this attribute should be
shown in case scenario manager
project setup view.
Automatically update all the date and time attributes before

saving the file checkbox: Check this box if you want UniSim Design to
automatically update the date and time attributes in both name
creation attributes matrix and optional attributes matrix before saving
the file. The corresponding fields will not be manually changeable any
more.
Reset to Default button: Clicking this button will reset all the
attributes to the system default.
12.5.4 Databases
The Databases page lets you manage component property databases
by adding, removing, resetting or ordering Component Property
Databases. The component property database order will decide the set
of available components in the component list.
Figure 12.35
To Add a Component Property Database:

1. Click the Add button in the Component Property Databases group.
12-34
The custom component property database type picker appears.
Figure 12.36
2. Choose the intended component property database type and Click

Next to browse for Component Property Database file. The
operation could be cancelled by clicking Cancel.
3. In the open file dialog, browse to the location of component
property database file. From the list of available database files,
select the file you want to use. Click Open. The selected component
property database appears in the list of available component
property database. You can also verify the database configuration
string and database status of the added Component Property
Database in Component Property Databases group.
To Remove a Component Property Database:

1. Select Component Property database to be removed from the
available database list.
2. Click the Remove button in the Component Property Databases
group.
3. UniSim Design prompt will appear to confirm the removal of the
selected Component Property Database. Click Yes to confirm or No
to cancel the operation.
To Edit a Component Property Database:

1. Select Component Property database from the available Component
Property database list to edit the properties.
2. Click the Edit button in the Component Property Databases group.
3. A File Open dialog box will appear to browse and select the edited or
updated component property database file.
To Change the order of Component Property Database:

1. Select Component Property Database in Component Property
Changing the order of Databases group for which sequence needs to be changed.
database loader is 2. Click the Up Arrow button to move the selected Component
possible only when more
than one Component
Property database higher in the order of the list.
Property Database is 3. Click the Down Arrow button to move the selected Component
configured.
Property database lower in the order of the list.
12-35
12-36 Resources Tab
To Reset Component Property Databases:

1. Click the Reset button in the Component Property Databases group.
2. A dialog box will prompt you to confirm reset for the list of
Component property
Component Property Databases. Click Yes to confirm or No to cancel
databases will be reset as the operation.
per the last saved UniSim
12.6 Resources Tab

Session preferences
The Resources tab is divided into five pages: Colours, Fonts, Icons,
Cursors, and Sounds.
12.6.1 Colours Page

UniSim Design default All the functions and views in UniSim Design are set with a predefined
colour settings for text in
cells/fields are as follows:
colour scheme. The Colours page lets you customize this colour scheme
• Black text indicates to meet the specific needs of your organization or simulation.
the value is calculated
by UniSim Design and
cannot be changed. Figure 12.37
• Blue text indicates Contains all the screen Double-clicking this Displays the current colour
the value is entered elements in UniSim Design
by the user and is area opens the for the selected object in
for which you can change Colour Palette. the Colour Name list.
editable.
the colour.
• Red text indicates the
value is calculated by
UniSim Design and is
editable.
Opens the Colour system applied to the Resets all colours to

Colour Palette. selected object in the Colour the default colour
Name list. scheme.
To change the colour of an element, do the following:

1. In the Colour Name list, select the item you want to modify.
2. From the Select System Colour drop-down list, select one of the
system colours that are available, or select <Custom>.
12-36
3. If you selected <Custom>, click the Select Custom Colour button.

The colour palette appears. Select the required colour and click OK.
12.6.2 Fonts Page

All the text displayed in UniSim Design has a predefined font scheme,
however, like the colour scheme, you can change the font scheme.
Figure 12.38
Contains all the Displays the current Double-clicking

text items in font for the selected this area opens
UniSim Design. font element. the Font view.
The system font Present scaling

currently applied to factor of the font.
the selected font.
You can select
another font in the Opens the Resets all fonts to
drop-down list. Font view. the default font
scheme.
To change the font of a text element, do the following:

1. In the Font Name list, select the item you want to modify.
2. From the Select System Font drop-down list, select one of the
system fonts that are available, or select <Custom>.
12-37
12-38 Resources Tab
3. If you selected <Custom>, click the Select Custom Font button.

The Font view appears.
Figure 12.39
4. In the Font list, select the font type for the text element.
5. In the Font Style list, select the style for the text element.
6. In the Size list, select or type in the size for the text element.
7. Click OK.
12.6.3 Icons Page

UniSim Design has a default icon scheme. Any icons that can be
12-38
changed appear on this page.
Figure 12.40
Lists all the Double-click in

Displays the
icons that can be this area to open
selected icon.
changed in the Internal
UniSim Design. Icons view.
Opens the Icon system

Internal Icons applied to the Resets all icons
view. selected icon. to the UniSim Used for aligning
Design default the icon.
icon scheme.
To change an icon, do the following:

1. In the Icon Name list, select the icon you want to modify.
2. From the Select System Icon drop-down list select one of the
system icons that are available, or select <Custom>.
12-39
12-40 Resources Tab
3. If you selected <Custom>, click the Select Custom Icon button.

The Internal Icons view The Internal Icons view appears. Select the required icon and click
displays all the icons
available in UniSim OK.
Design. You can select
any of these icons as the Figure 12.41
icon for an item.
Lets you browse to

other directories
(besides UniSim
Design) and select
icons.
Scroll Bar indicates

that there are more
icons in this view.
12.6.4 Cursors Page

As with the Colours, Fonts, and Icons pages, you can customize the
cursors in UniSim Design.
Figure 12.42
Displays all the cursors

available in UniSim Design. Displays the selected cursor.
Double-
clicking this
area opens
the Internal
Cursors view.
Cursor system
presently
applied to the
selected cursor.
Opens the Internal Cursors Resets all cursors to the UniSim

view. Design default cursor scheme.
To change a cursor, do the following:
12-40
1. In the Cursor Name list, select the cursor you want to modify.
2. From the Select System Cursor drop-down list, select one of the
system cursors that are available, or select <Custom>.
Figure 12.43
3. If you selected <Custom>, click the Select Custom Cursor button.

The Internal Cursors view appears. Select the required cursor and
click OK.
12.6.5 Sounds Page

Click the Test Sound The Sounds page lets you set up UniSim Design to play a sound if the
button to play the steady state solution takes longer than a defined period of time.
selected sound file.
Figure 12.44
To play a sound, do the following:

1. Check the Enable Solver Done Sound checkbox.
2. Click the Select Audio File button. The Open File view appears.
3. Browse to the location of your sound file (*.wav). Select the file you
want to use, then click Open.
12-41
12-42 Extensions Tab
4. In the Play Sound if Steady State Solve Takes Longer Than

Use the up and down field, enter the amount of time you want to the let the steady state
arrows to increase or
decrease the value in the solver take before a sound is played.
field by one each click or
12.7 Extensions Tab

you can enter a value
directly in the field.
The Extensions tab is used to register external extension in UniSim

Design.
Figure 12.45
The Registered Extensions group displays the

extension type, CLSID, ProgID, location of the
*.dll and extension status.
To register an extension, do the following:

1. Click the Register an Extension button. The custom file picker
appears.
2. In the File Path group, browse to the location of the extension DLL.
3. From the list of available extension *.dlls, select the extension you
want to register with UniSim Design.
4. Click Ok. The Custom file picker closes and the extension appears in
the Registered Extensions group.
To unregister an extension, do the following:

1. Select the extension you want to unregister from the list of
registered extensions.
2. Click the Unregister Extension button.
12-42
12.8 Oil Input Tab

For more details about The pages on the Oil Input tab lets you set default settings for
these options, see
characterizing oils in your simulation case.
Chapter 3 - UniSim
Design Oil Manager in
12.8.1 Assay Definition Page

the UniSim Design
Simulation Basis Guide.
Figure 12.46
Use the following procedure to set your default assay definition.

1. From the Bulk Properties drop-down list, select Used if you are
supplying bulk properties data by selection, or Not Used if you are
not supplying this information.
2. From the Assay Data Type drop-down list, select one of the
following data types: TBP, ASTM D86, ASTM D1160, ASTM D86-
D1160, ASTM D2887, Chromatograph, EFV or None.
3. From the Light Ends drop-down list select one of the following
options: Ignore, Input Composition, Or Auto Calculate.
4. From the Molecular Wt. Curve drop-down list, select one of the
following options: Not Used, Dependent, or Independent.
5. From the Density Curve drop-down list, select one of the following
options: Not Used, Dependent, or Independent.
6. From the Viscosity Curves drop-down list, select one of the
following options: Not Used, Dependent, or Independent.
12-43
12-44 Tray Sizing Tab
12.8.2 Assay Options Page

Figure 12.47
To set your default assay options, do the following:

1. From the Assay Basis drop-down list, select one of the following
options: Liquid Volume%, Mass%, or Mole%.
2. Use the drop-down lists in the Conversion Methods group to select
the methods UniSim Design will use for D86-TBP Interconversion
and D2887-TBP Conversion.
3. Use the drop-down lists in the Curve Fitting Methods group to select
the extrapolation method to be used by each curve type. There are
three extrapolation methods to select from: Lagrange, Least
Squares, and Probability.
12.9 Tray Sizing Tab

The Tray Sizing tab lets you set the UniSim Design defaults for the Tray
Sizing utility. Any parameters set here are automatically used when you
attach a Tray Sizing utility to your case. For more information about this
utility, see Section 14.18 - Tray Sizing in the UniSim Design
Operations Guide.
12-44
12.9.1 Parameters Page

Figure 12.48
To set your default tray sizing parameters, do the following:

1. In the Area Tolerance field, enter a value for your area tolerance.
2. In the NFP Diam Factor field, enter a value for your NFP diameter
factor.
3. From the Tray Internal Type drop-down list, select one of the
following tray types: Valve, Sieve, Bubble Cap, or Packed.
12-45
12-46 Tray Sizing Tab
12.9.2 Packed Page

Figure 12.49
For information about the To set your default packed parameters, do the following:
packing types available in
UniSim Design, refer to 1. From the Correlation Type drop-down list, select one of the following
the packinfo.db file design correlations for predicting pressure drop and liquid hold-up:
located in the Support Robbins or Sherwood-Leva-Eckert. The default is Robbins.
folder.
2. In the Packing Flooding Factor field, specify the packing flood
You can open the file
using any text editor factor of your packed tray. The default is 1.000.
program. 3. In the Maximum Flooding field, specify the maximum percentage
of flooding you can have on your tray. The default is 70.00%.
4. In the Maximum dP per length field, specify the maximum
pressure difference you can tolerate per measured length. The
default is 0.4086 kPa/m.
12.9.3 Trayed Page

The selections made on the Trayed page are used as the default
settings for every new tray section that you add to your tray sizing
utility. The tray parameters group changes depending on which radio
12-46
button you select.
Figure 12.50
To set your default trayed parameters, do the following:

1. Select the General radio button.
2. In the General Tray group, enter values for the following tray
specifications: Tray Spacing, Tray Thickness, Tray Foaming Factor,
Max Tray Flooding, Weir Height, Max Weir Loading, D/C Type, D/C
Clearance and Max DC Backup.
Sieve tray calculations are 3. Select the Sieve radio button.
based on the valve tray
manuals for tray layout, 4. In the Sieve Tray group, enter values for the following sieve tray
and Mass-Transfer specifications: Hole Diameter, Hole Pitch, Flooding Method and Max
Operations for pressure Tray DP (height of liquid).
drop, weeping and
entrainment calculations 5. Select the Valve radio button.
by Treybal, (McGraw-Hill).
6. In the Valve Tray group, enter values for the following valve tray
specifications: Orifice Type, Design Manual, Valve Material Density,
Valve tray calculations are
based on the Glitsch, Valve Material Thickness, Hole Area (% of actual area) and Max Tray
Koch, and Nutter valve DP (height of liquid).
tray design manuals.
7. Click the Bubble Cap radio button.
Bubble tray calculations 8. In the Bubble Cap Tray group, enter values for the following bubble
are based on the method cap tray specifications: Hole Area (% of actual area), Cap Slot
described in Design of Height and Max Tray DP (height of liquid).
Equilibrium Stage
Processes by Bufford D. 9. Click on the Chimney radio button.
Smith, (Wiley & Sons).
10. In the Chimney Tray group, enter values for Riser Area (% of AA),
Riser Height, Chimney Tray Spacing, Max Tray DP (height of liquid),
Chimney Weir Height, and Residence Time.
11. Click on the Sump Tray radio button.
12. In the Sump Tray, enter values for Sump Tray Spacing, Liquid
Height, Residence Time, and Max Tray DP (height of liquid).
12-47
12-48 Case Tools Tab
12.10 Case Tools Tab

The Case Tools tab has the following pages:
• Scenario Manager
• Simulation Balance Tool
12.10.1 Scenario Manager

The Scenario Manager page lets you set the UniSim Design defaults for
Case Scenario Manager's input and output variables. When a case
scenario project is created, it will inherit the input and output variable
settings from the preferences default. The selected input or output
variables will be used to compare for differences between the master
simulation case and the other cases in a case scenario project.
Figure 12.51
The following table describes the items in Case Scenario Manager

Input/Output Variables Selection groupbox.
Object Description
Input Variables radio button Select the input variables to be used by the case
scenario manager for case comparison. Input
variables are the variables which can be modified
by the user.
Output Variables radio button Select the output variables to be used by the case
scenario manager for case comparison. Output
variables are the calculated variables in a
simulation case.
Select Object Type object tree Select an object type from the currently supported
types of objects.
12-48
Object Description
Variable list Show the list of input or output variables for the
selected object type.
Use checkbox Select the input or output variables to be used in
case comparison.
Select All button Select all the displayed variables for the selected
object type.
Clear All button Unselect all the displayed variables for the
selected object type.
Reset to Default button Reset all the displayed variables to their system
default selection.
The following table describes the items in Apply to All Object Types
groupbox.
Object Description
Reset to Default button Reset all input and output variables to the
system default variable selections for all
object types.
Export Variable Selections button Export the variable selections to a file in XML
format. This file can then be imported back to
the preferences or any case scenario project.
Import Variable Selections button Import variable selections from a file in XML
format. The file must be in the same format
as that exported by the above export
operation.
Select All Input Variables button Select all input variables for all object types.
Select All Output Variables button Select all output variables for all object types.
Clear All Input Variables button Unselect all input variables for all object
types.
Clear All Output Variables button Unselect all output variables for all object
types.
Variable Selection State text box Show the current variable selection state.
There are three states:
• System Default: UniSim Design's
internal setting. This state is shown
when user input has never been done, or
when the Reset to Default button in
this group has been activated.
• File [filename].ucsv: This state
indicates that the current variable
selections are imported from file
[filename].ucsv, where [filename] is the
name of the file without extension.
• Custom: This state shows that there
have been some changes from above
two states.
12.10.2 Simulation Balance Tool

The Simulation Balance Tool lets you set the UniSim Design defaults for
the Simulation Balance Tool. Any parameters set here are automatically
used when the Simulation Balance Tool is created. For more information
12-49
on the Tool itself, see Simulation Balance Tool.
Figure 12.52
To set your default Tool parameters, do the following:

1. In the Mass Balance row, enter a value for your absolute tolerance,
specify whether to perform the absolute mass balance check, enter
a value for your relative tolerance, and specify whether to perform
the relative mass balance check. The default values are 9.0 kg/h,
checked, 0.25%, and checked, respectively.
2. In the Mole Balance row, enter a value for your absolute tolerance,
specify whether to perform the absolute molar balance check, enter
a value for your relative tolerance, and specify whether to perform
the relative molar balance check. The default values are 0.09 kg-
mole/h, not checked, 0.0025%, and not checked, respectively.
3. In the Energy Balance row, enter a value for your absolute
tolerance, specify whether to perform the absolute heat balance
check, enter a value for your relative tolerance, and specify whether
to perform the relative heat balance check. The default values are
9.0 kJ/h, not checked, 0.25%, and not checked, respectively.
4. In the Component Balance row, enter a value for your absolute
tolerance, specify whether to perform the absolute component
molar balance check, enter a value for your relative tolerance, and
specify whether to perform the relative component molar balance
check. The default values are 0.09 kg-mole/h, not checked,
0.0025%, and not checked, respectively.
5. In the Transitions Temp Balance row, enter a value for your absolute
tolerance and enter a value for your relative tolerance. The default
values are 0.01C and 0.10%, respectively.
6. In the Transitions VFrac Balance row, enter a value for your absolute
tolerance and enter a value for your relative tolerance. The default
values are 0.01 and 0.10%, respectively.
12-50
7. Select to Include "Feed" and "Product" streams within Sub-

Flowsheets in balancing of Sub-Flowsheets. The default is not
checked.
8. Select to Run the Simulation Balance Tool Always. The default is not
checked. When this option is enabled, loading an older case without
a Simulation Balance Tool will automatically create a Simulation
Balance Tool.
9. Select to Include Non-physical Feed Streams (Multiple
Stream Connections or Exported Column Streams). The
default is not checked.
10. Select to Remove Flowsheet Analyzer on recall. Selecting "Yes" will
remove the feature (if exist) from the case on recall. The default is
Ask.
11. Select to Remove Flowsheet Analyzer on Simulation Balance
creation. Selecting "Yes" will remove the feature (if exist) from the
case when the Simulation Balance Tool is created. The default is
Ask.
12-51
12-52
Window & Help Options 13-1
13 Window & Help Options
13.1 Introduction ................................................................................ 2
13.2 Window Menu .............................................................................. 2

13.2.1 Save Workspace..................................................................... 2
13.2.2 Load Workspace..................................................................... 3
13.3 Help Menu.................................................................................... 4

13.3.1 Adding a Bug Report............................................................... 4
13.3.2 Editing a Bug Report............................................................... 5
13.3.3 Deleting a Bug Report............................................................. 5
13-1
13-2 Introduction
13.1 Introduction
This chapter provides descriptions for the options available in the
Window and Help menus.
If you want to switch To access the Window or Help menu options, do one of the following:
focus from the menu bar
without making a • Click the required menu bar item to open the associated menu.
selection, press the ESC • Use the ALT key in combination with the underlined letter in the
key or the ALT key. menu title. For example, ALT W opens the Window menu.
• Use the ALT key by itself to move the active location to the File
menu in the menu bar. When the menu bar is active, navigate
across it using the keyboard. The up and down arrows move
through the menu associated with a specific item, while the left
and right arrows move to the next menu bar item, opening the
associated menu.
13.2 Window Menu

This menu contains general Windows application functions. The
commands are as follows:
Command Description
Arrange Desktop Cascades all views that are currently open and not
iconized. Face plates are placed in rows or column
according to the specifications on the Desktop page of
the Session Preferences view. Refer to Section 12.2.3
- Desktop Page, for more information.
Arrange Icons Arranges icons horizontally at the bottom of the
Desktop.
Close Closes the active view.
Close All Closes all views.
Save Workspace Saves the current view layout for future use.
Load Workspace Loads another UniSim Design case which is currently
open. This function lets you toggle between cases.
The last section in this menu lists all open views on the Desktop. The
active view is indicated by a checkmark.
13.2.1 Save Workspace

You can save different Workspace arrangements within a UniSim Design
case. The Workspace is a specific organization of views for the current
case. For example, create an arrangement of views that has the PFD,
Workbook, Controllers, Strip Charts, etc. You can name each
13-2
arrangement individually, then access the arrangement at any time.
Figure 13.1
This has no effect on the calculation status. It is simply the way the
various views are arranged. After changes are made to the Desktop
arrangement, reload a saved arrangement to access the view layout.
1. From the Window menu, select Save Workspace. The Save
Workspace view appears.
2. In the Save Workspace As field, enter the name of the workspace.
3. Click Save.
13.2.2 Load Workspace

The Load Workspace view displays all cases that are currently open and
the workspaces available for the loaded case.
Loading a Workspace
Check the Save when 1. From the Window menu, select Load Workspace. The Load
Switching checkbox to Workspace view appears.
save the case when
switching between
workspaces. Figure 13.2
2. In the list of available cases, select the case in which you are
currently working.
13-3
13-4 Help Menu
3. From the list of available workspaces, select the workspace you

want to use.
4. Click Load.
Switching to Another Open Case

1. From the Window menu, select Load Workspace. The Load
Workspace view appears.
2. From the list of available cases, select the case in which you want to
switch.
3. From the list of available workspaces, select the workspace you
want to load in the new case.
4. Click Load.
Check the Save when Switching checkbox to save the case when
switching between cases.
13.3 Help Menu

The following table lists and describes the commands in the Help menu:
Command Description
UniSim Design Opens the UniSim Design Online Help to the Welcome
Help Topics page.
Help on Opens the UniSim Design Extensibility Online Help.
Extending
UniSim Design
Help on the Opens the UniSim Design Online Help to the topic that
Current Form relates to the active view. If no topic is found for that
view, the Welcome page appears.
Bug Reports Accesses UniSim Design’ unique bug reporting option.
About UniSim Provides information about UniSim Design (version,
Design etc.).
Honeywell on the Clicking the Honeywell on the Web command opens a
Web sub-menu with a link to the Honeywell Web site.
13.3.1 Adding a Bug Report

1. From the Help menu, select Bug Reports. The Bug Reports view
appears.
2. Click the New button to display the Bug Report view.
3. In the Bug Title field, type the name of the bug report.
4. The current date and time appear in the Date field, but you can
change it if necessary.
13-4
5. In the Reported by field, type a contact name so Honeywell

Technical Support can ask further questions or provide answers to
the problem.
6. In the Class group, click either the Bug or Enhancement radio
button.
7. In the Priority group, click either the High, Medium or Low radio
button.
8. In the Program Area field, enter the area of the program in which
the bug is found.
For example, if a bug is found on the Assay tab of the Oil
Characterization environment, specify Assay tab - Oil
Characterization environment. Be as specific as possible so the
problem can be located.
9. In the Step-by-Step Description field, enter the steps used to
produce the bug. Be as specific as possible so the problem can be
located and fixed.
10. In the Reproducibility group, click either the Always, Sometimes,
or Never radio button.
11. Click the Write button to display the Save File view.
12. Specify a name and location for your bug report file.
13. Click Save.
14. E-mail the bug report file to the Support Center at
[email protected].
13.3.2 Editing a Bug Report

appears.
2. From the list of available bug reports, select the bug report you
want edit.
3. Click the Edit button to display the Bug Report view.
4. Modify any of the parameters making up the bug report.
13.3.3 Deleting a Bug Report

appears.
2. From the list of available bug reports, select the bug report you
want delete.
You are not prompted to confirm the deletion of a bug report,

so ensure the correct report is selected before deleting.
13-5
13-6 Help Menu
13-6
Index
A deleting 13-5
editing 13-5
Absorber Column 8-27
Adding C
annotations in PFD 10-34
Calculation/Responsiveness Button 1-8
assay 6-5
Case 1-7
blend 6-7
snap shot 11-27
bug report 13-4
states 11-27
component list 5-4
Case Security 11-54
component map 5-22
adding user password 11-60
correlation set 6-11
changing master password 11-59
fluid package 5-11
clearing master password 11-60
global correlation set 11-75
clearing user password 11-61
global property correlation 11-73
file security setup 11-56
hypotheticals 5-15
hardware locks 11-62
operation 8-5
loading a lock case 11-56
optimization object 7-62
locking a case 11-54
reaction 5-18
master password 11-59
reaction set 5-19
removing hardware locks 11-64
report 9-8
scanning lock codes 11-62
schedule⁄sequence⁄event 7-14
specifying lock codes 11-63
stream 8-5
time restriction 11-61
sub-flowsheets 10-30
unlocking a case 11-64
unit set 12-21
user password 11-60
user password 11-60
viewing user password 11-60
user property 5-24, 6-9
Case Studies 11-30
user variables 7-54
3-dimensional graph control 11-36
utilities 7-95
adding 11-31
Adjust 8-32
multi-dimensional graphing 11-35
Adjust-Recycle Manager 7-28
removing 11-31
Air Cooler 8-10
setup 11-32
Alarm Manager 11-85
viewing results 11-34
Annotations 10-34
Case Summary 11-3
adding in PFD 10-34
Cloning
editing in PFD 10-34
assay 6-6
moving and sizing labels 10-35
blend 6-8
Assay 6-4
correlation set 6-13
adding 6-5
property correlation 11-74
cloning 6-6
user property 6-10
deleting 6-6
Closing Commands 4-10
editing 6-6
Colour Schemes 7-84
exporting 6-6
setting preferences 12-36
importing 6-6
Column
Axes 10-38
disabling input experts 12-6
Azimuth 11-36
menu 7-94
B sub-flowsheet environment 3-6
tray section display in PFD 7-87
Baghouse Filter 8-17
Column Page 12-18
Balance 8-34
Component Map 5-21
adding 5-22
entering 7-52
basis environment 5-21
Basis Menu 5-2
deleting 5-22
Boiling Ranges 6-3
editing 5-22
Boundary Label 3-17
Component Splitter 8-31
Bug Report 13-4
Components 5-3
adding 13-4
I-1
I-2 Index
adding 5-4 editing variables 11-6

copying list 5-10 process data tables 11-7
deleting list 5-9 strip charts See also Strip Charts 11-13
editing list 5-4 variables 11-5
exporting list 5-10 viewing process data table 11-7
importing list 5-10 viewing scenario 11-28
Compressible Gas Pipe 8-12 Datasheets 12-28
Compressor 8-11 printing 9-3
Confirm Mode Switches 12-6 Defining
Control Manager 11-41 3 phase distillation column 8-30
Conversion Reactor 8-22 3 phase separator 8-7
Converting Case to Template 7-9 absorber column 8-27
Cooler 8-8 adjust 8-32
Copy Command 10-3 air cooler 8-10
Copy Special Command 10-3 baghouse filter 8-17
Copy With Labels Command 10-3 balance 8-34
Copying component splitter 8-31
component list 5-10 compressible gas pipe 8-12
fluild package 5-13 compressor⁄expander 8-11
reaction 5-19 conversion reactor 8-22
reaction set 5-20 cooler⁄heater 8-8
schedule⁄sequence⁄event 7-20 crystallizer 8-24
Correlation Manager 11-71 CSTR 8-19
adding global correlation set 11-75 cyclone 8-16
adding global property 11-73 digital point 8-34
cloning property 11-74 distillation column 8-25
deleting clone property 11-75 energy stream 8-6
removing global property 11-74 equilibrium reactor 8-22
Correlation Oil Environment 6-10 gibbs reactor 8-21
Crystallizer 8-24 heat exchanger 8-10
CSTR 8-19 hydrocyclone 8-16
Cursors 12-40 liquid-liquid extractor 8-29
Cut Command 10-3 LNG exchanger 8-9
Cut⁄Blend 6-6 material stream 8-5
Cyclone 8-16 mixer 8-14
MPC controller 8-35
D
neutralizer 8-23
Data Historian 11-25 PFR 8-20
exporting 11-26 PID controller 8-33
See also Strip Charts pipe segment 8-13
viewing current data 11-26 precipitator 8-24
Data Recorder 11-27 pump 8-11
deleting states 11-29 reboiled absorber column 8-28
recording states 11-27 recycle 8-33
setup 11-30 refluxed absorber column 8-26
Databook 11-4 relief valve 8-14
adding process data table 11-7 rotary vacuum filter 8-17
adding scenario 11-27 selector block 8-34
adding scenarios 11-27 separator 8-6
adding variables 11-5 set 8-33
case studies See Case Studies short cut distillation column 8-31
data recorder See Data Recorder simple solid separator 8-15
deleting process data table 11-13 tank 8-7
deleting scenario 11-29 tee 8-15
deleting variables 11-6 transfer function block 8-35
I-2
Index I-3
valve 8-13 user variables 7-54

Deleting Energy Stream 8-6
assay 6-6 Enter Basis Environment 7-52
blend 6-8 Environments 3-4
bug report 13-5 advantages 3-8
clone property correlation 11-75 column sub-flowsheet 3-6
component list 5-9 entering build 7-57
component map 5-22 main flowsheet 3-5
confirm mode 12-6 oil characterization 3-5
correlation set 6-12 relations 3-7
event 7-20 simulation 3-5, 7-5
fluid package 5-12 simulation basis 3-4, 5-2
hypothetical group 5-16 sub-flowsheet 3-5, 3-10
optimization object 7-63 Equation Summary 7-52
PFDs 7-79 Equilibrium Reactor 8-22
reaction 5-19 Event Scheduler 7-13
reaction set 5-20 adding schedule⁄sequence⁄event 7-14
report 9-11 copying schedule⁄sequence⁄event 7-20
schedule 7-19 deleting event 7-20
sequence 7-19 deleting schedule 7-19
unit set 12-21 deleting sequence 7-19
user property 5-25, 6-10 exporting schedule⁄sequence⁄event 7-23
user variables 7-54 importing schedule⁄sequence⁄event 7-21
utilities 7-97 sorting schedule⁄sequence⁄event 7-24
Desktop 1-7 Exit UniSim Design 4-11
main features 1-8 Expander 8-11
preferences 12-10 Exporting
toolbar 1-14 assay 6-6
Digital Point 8-34 component list 5-10
Distillation Column 8-25 fluild package 5-13
DXF Files 9-14 historical data 11-26
Dynamic 7-50 hypothetical group 5-16
Dynamic Assistant 12-14 reaction set 5-20
Dynamics Assistant 7-50, 11-40 schedule⁄sequence⁄event 7-23
hot keys 1-17 user variables 7-55
icon 1-15 xml 7-12
Extensions 12-42
E
F
Echo ID 11-70
Edit Menu 10-3 Face Plates 11-39
Editing opening 7-83, 11-39
assay 6-6 preferences 12-10
blend 6-8 types 11-40
bug report 13-5 File Menu 4-2
component list 5-4 closing commands 4-10
component map 5-22 exit 4-11
correlation set 6-12 new and open commands 4-3
fluid package 5-12 printing 4-11
hypothetical group 5-16 saving commands 4-6
optimization object 7-62 Files
PFD 10-4 case 1-7
reaction 5-19 Custom file picker 12-30
reaction set 5-20 hysim case 4-4
report 9-11 saving locations 12-31
user property 5-25, 6-10 templates 3-14, 7-9
I-3
I-4 Index
ufl 4-11 Heater 8-8

xml 7-10 Help Menu 13-4
Files Preferences 12-30 Help Options 13-4
Flowsheet 3-2 Home View Preferences 12-10
adding utilities 7-95 Hot Keys 1-16
boundary label 3-17 Hydrocyclone 8-16
column 3-3 Hypotheticals 5-14
deleting utilities 7-97 adding 5-15
information transfer 3-13 deleting group 5-16
multi-level architecture 3-11 editing group 5-16
object browser 7-58 exporting group 5-16
special elements 1-7 importing group 5-16
transfer basis 3-17 HYSIM Case
viewing utilities 7-97 opening in UniSim Design 4-5
Flowsheet Analysis 7-80 reading 4-4
Flowsheet Menu
I
adding operation 8-5
adding streams 8-5 Icons
boiling ranges property view 6-3 changing default preferences 12-38
fluid package⁄dynamic model 7-63 changing icons on PFD 10-18
notes manager 7-60 toolbar 1-14
object navigator 7-56 wire frame/3D 10-19
object palette 8-3 Importing
optimization objects 7-61 assay 6-6
reaction package 5-25, 7-63 component list 5-10
simulation navigator 7-58 fluild package 5-13
user variables See also User Variables 7-52 hypothetical group 5-16
Fluid Package 5-10 reaction set 5-20
adding 5-11 schedule⁄sequence⁄event 7-21
associating to flowsheet 5-13 user variables 7-55
copying 5-13 Information Transfer 3-13
deleting 5-12 Input Experts Option 12-6
editing 5-12 Installing
exporting 5-13 objects from object palette 8-3
importing 5-13 oil into flowsheet 6-13
in sub-flowsheets 3-10 operation from flowsheet menu 8-5
Fluid Package⁄Dynamic Model 7-63 operation from workbook 7-67
Fly-by Information Boxes 7-82 stream from flowsheet menu 8-5
Fonts 12-37 stream from workbook 7-67
Forget Pass 1-5 templates 3-20
Format Editor 10-41 Integrator 7-26
active 7-51
G
holding 7-51
Gibbs Reactor 8-21 Interface
Graph Control 10-36 basics 1-3
3-dimensional 11-36 elements 1-3
manipulating axes 10-38 flowsheet elements 1-7
manipulating graph title 10-39 terminology 1-9
manipulating legend 10-40
L
manipulating plot area 10-40
modifying data display lines 10-37 Legacy HYSIM Case
strip charts 11-20 limitations 4-6
Legend 10-40
H
License 12-17
Heat Exchanger 8-10 Line Segments
I-4
Index I-5
adding bend points 10-22 locating 7-57

alignment 10-24 multi-flowsheet navigation 3-13
line straightening 10-23 object filter 7-57
moving 10-21 Object Palette 8-3
removng bend points 10-23 Object Status Window 1-11
Liquid-Liquid Extractor 8-29 object inspect menu 1-12
LNG Exchanger 8-9 Oil Characterization Environment
Logger Set-Up 11-14 See Environments
Logger Set-Up-All 11-14 Oil Manager
Logger Size 11-14 adding blend 6-7
adding correlation set 6-11
M
adding user property 6-9
Macro Language Editor 11-52 assay 6-4
Material Stream 8-5 basis environment 5-16
Menu Bar cloning blend 6-8
access 4-2, 10-3, 11-3, 13-2 cloning correlation set 6-13
basis 5-2 cloning user property 6-10
closing commands 4-10 correlation 6-10
column 7-94 cut⁄blend 6-6
edit 10-3 deleting blend 6-8
file 4-2 deleting correlation set 6-12
help 13-4 deleting user property 6-10
new and open commands 4-3 editing blend 6-8
PFD 10-4 editing correlation set 6-12
printing 9-3 editing user property 6-10
saving commands 4-6 install oil into flowsheet 6-13
utilities 7-94 oil characterization environment 6-2
window 13-2 oil output settings 6-3
workbook See also Workbook 7-64 user property 6-9
Mixer 8-14 Oil Output Settings 6-3, 7-55
Modal Views 12-7 Oils Preferences 12-43
Mouse Wheel Scrolling 10-20 Operations
MPC Controller 8-35 analysis 3-24
Multi-flowsheet Architecture 1-4 connecting in PFD 10-27
deleting from workbook 7-68
N installing from flowsheet menu 8-5
Naming Preferences 12-11 installing from workbook 7-67
Navigation Between Flowsheets 3-13 performance 3-24
Neutralizer 8-23 sub-flowsheet 3-10
New and Open Commands 4-3 Optimization Objects 7-61
Non-Modal Views 12-7 adding 7-62
Notes 11-25 deleting 7-63
Notes Manager 7-60 editing 7-62
Optimizer 7-12
O
P
Object
browser 7-58 Pan/Zoom Functions 10-6
deselection 10-13 See also PFD
moving 10-14 Paste Command 10-3
multiple selection in PFD 10-12 Performance Page 12-16
single selection in PFD 10-12 Performance Speed 12-16
transformation 10-17 PFD 7-77
variable table 7-89 accessing objects property views 7-80
Object Navigator 7-56 adding annotations 10-34
entering build 7-57 additional functions 10-11
I-5
I-6 Index
aligning objects 10-15 tools 10-6

auto positioning 10-14 wire frame/3D icon 10-19
auto snap align 10-15 working across panes 7-93
auto-scrolling 10-19 PFD Colour Schemes 7-84
break connection button 10-11 adding query colour scheme 7-86
break connection icon 10-30 changing 7-85
changing icons 10-18 deleting query colour scheme 7-86
cloning objects 10-32 editing query colour scheme 7-87
closing panes 7-93 selecting 7-85
colour schemes 12-36 PFD Menu 10-4
column sub-flowsheet 7-83 PFD Modes
column tables 7-92 attach 10-8
connecting logical operations 10-28 auto attach 10-8
connecting operations to streams 10-26 move 10-8
connecting streams and operations 10-25 size 10-8
connecting two operations 10-27 PFD Notebook 7-78
creating streams from operation 10-26 deleting a PFD 7-79
Cut/Copy/Paste 10-32 installing a new PFD 7-78
Cut/Paste Functions 10-30 renaming a PFD 7-79
deleting streams and operations 7-81 PFR 8-20
deselecting objects 10-13 PID Controller 8-33
disconnecting streams and operations 10-29 Pipe Segment 8-13
editing 10-4 Playback
exchanging XML files 7-94 See Script Manager
exporting objects 10-31 Plots
flowsheet analysis 7-80 control 10-36
hiding objects 10-35 printing 9-5
importing objects 10-32 Precipitator 8-24
label variables 10-32 Preference
line segments See also Line Segments 10-21 See Session Preferences
modes See also PFD Modes 10-7 Printer Setup 9-6
moving objects 10-14 Printing
multi-pane 7-92 datasheets 9-3
notebook 7-78 menu bar 9-3
object inspect menu 10-5 menu bar command 4-11
object transformation 10-17 options 9-2
object variable table 7-89 PFD 9-5, 10-36
open PFD option 7-82 PFD as DFX file 9-14
pan and zoom 10-6 plots 9-5
printing 9-5 printer setup 9-6
printing as a DFX file 9-14 reports 9-14
quick route 10-11 snap shots 9-6
rebuilding 10-25 Property View
resizing panes 7-93 flowsheet analysis 3-22
reveal hidden objects 10-36 locating 7-57
selecting objects 10-12 Pump 8-11
show/hide sub-flowsheet objects 7-82
Q
sizing objects 10-15
stream label options 10-32 Quick Route 10-11
sub-flowsheets 10-30
swap connections 10-17 R
swap connections button 10-11 Reaction Package 5-25, 7-63
table properties 7-90 Reactions
tables 7-88 adding 5-18
thick stream line 10-19 adding set 5-19
I-6
Index I-7
adding set to fluid package 5-21 Selector Block 8-34

basis environment 5-17 Separator 8-6
copying 5-19 Session Preferences 12-3
copying set 5-20 basis environment warnings 12-5
deleting 5-19 colour options 12-36
deleting set 5-20 column options 12-18
editing 5-19 cursor options 12-40
editing set 5-20 databases 12-34
exporting set 5-20 desktop options 12-10
importing set 5-20 dynamics options 12-14
Real Format Editor 10-41, 12-25 file location options 12-31
Reboiled Absorber Column 8-28 file saving options 12-30
Recording fonts options 12-37
See Script Manager format options 12-24
Recycle 8-33 general options 12-5
Recycle-Adjust Manager hypothetical components options 12-5
Simultaneous Adjust Recycle Group 7-30 icon options 12-38
Reflux Absorber Column 8-26 license options 12-17
Relief Valve 8-14 load 12-4
Report Builder 9-11 modifying formats 12-25
Report Manager 9-7 naming options 12-11
Report Preferences 12-26 oil assay default definition 12-43
Reports 9-7 oil characterizing options 12-43
creating 9-8 performance setting 12-16
deleting 9-11 register external extension options 12-42
editing 9-11 report company information options 12-29
editing datasheet 9-10 report format⁄layout options 12-26
format and layout 9-11 report information options 12-28
inserting datasheet 9-8 report text format options 12-27
printing and previewing 9-14 revision control 12-32
removing datasheet 9-10 save 12-3
text format 9-12 saving 12-3
Reports, printing specs only 9-13 Scenario Manager 12-48
Resource Preferences 12-36 Simulation Balance Tool 12-49
Rotary Vacuum Filter 8-17 sound options 12-41
RTO Manager 11-90 status window options 12-18
Runtime Mode 11-65 steady state 12-16
stream property correlations 12-5
S
tool tips options 12-12
Sample Interval 11-14 trace window options 12-19
Saving transfer basis 12-5
file locations 12-31 tray sizing options 12-44
save all cases 4-7–4-8 units options 12-20
save as 4-7–4-8 Set 8-33
saving commands 4-6 Short Cut Distillation Column 8-31
workspace 13-2 Simple Solid Separator 8-15
Scenario Manager 12-48 Simulation Balance Tool 7-98, 11-90, 12-49
Scenarios Simulation Basis Environment
adding to databook 11-27 See Environments
deleting 11-29 Simulation Basis Manager 5-2
recording states 11-27 Simulation Case 1-7
viewing in data recorder 11-28 calculation levels 7-6
Script Manager 11-50 converting case to template 7-9
playback 11-52 manipulation 7-5
recording 11-51 status 7-6
I-7
I-8 Index
Simulation Environment PFD label options 10-32

See Environments quick route mode 10-20
Simulation Menu view new upon creation 12-6
adjust-recycle manager 7-28 viewing utilities 7-97
dynamic⁄steady state 7-50 Strip Charts 11-13
enter basis environment 7-52 adding 11-15
event scheduler See also Event Scheduler 7- curves 11-16
13 deleting 11-15
importing & exporting user variables 7-54 graph control 11-20
integratorSee also Integrator 7-26 graphical line appearance 11-21
main properties See also Simulation Case 7-5 graphical line properties 11-22–11-23
oil output settings 7-55 historical data 11-25
optimizer See also Optimizer 7-12 interval markers 11-18
solver active⁄holding 7-51 Logger Set-Up 11-14
user variables See also User Variables 7-52 Logger Set-Up-All 11-14
view equations 7-52 manipulating x-axis 11-18
xml See also XML 7-10 manipulating y-axis 11-17
Simulation Navigator 7-58 object inspect menu 11-20
viewing an object 7-59 print control 11-25
Simultaneous Adjust Recycle Group 7-30 viewing 11-15
Snap Shot 11-27 zooming 11-19
Snapshot Manager 11-44 Sub-flowsheets 3-10
Solver Active 7-51 advantages 3-11
Solver Holding 7-51 capabilities 3-11
Sorting components 3-10
schedule⁄sequence⁄event 7-24 creating 10-30
Sounds 12-41 viewing from workbook 7-70
Spec Scenarios 11-37 Swapping Connections in the PFD 10-11
Adding 11-38
T
removing 11-38
viewing results 11-38 Tank 8-7
specs only 9-13 Tee 8-15
States Templates 3-14
See Snap Shot creating 3-19
Steady State 7-50, 12-16 exported connections 3-15
Step Size 7-28 exported variables 3-18
Streams feed and product streams 3-17
adding utilities 7-95 information 3-15
allowing multiple connections 12-6 installed simulation basis 3-16
analysis 3-22 installing 3-20
bend points 10-22 reading 3-21
defining energy stream 8-6 tag 3-16
defining material stream 8-5 Terminology Structure 1-6
deleting from workbook 7-67 Three Phase Distillation Column 8-30
deleting utilities 7-97 Three Phase Separator 8-7
installing 8-5 Tool Tips 12-12
installing from object palette 8-3 PFD 7-82
installing from workbook 7-67 Toolbar 1-14
manual route mode 10-21 Tools Menu
I-8
Index I-9
case security 11-54 Variable Navigator 11-88

case summaries 11-3 navigator scope 11-90
control manager 11-41 using 11-89
correlation manager 11-71 Viewing
databook See also Databook 11-4 user password 11-60
dynamics assistant 11-40 utilities 7-97
echo id 11-70 Virtual Stream 8-36
face plates See also Face Plates 11-39
W
macro language editor 11-52
pfd 11-3 Window Menu 13-2
reports 11-4 load workspace 13-3
script manager See also Script Manager 11-50 save workspace 13-2
session preferences 12-3 switch workspace 13-4
utilities 11-4 Windows Functionality 1-3
workbook 11-3 Workbook 7-64
Trace Window 1-11 accessing objects 7-68
object inspect menu 1-13 adding new tabs 7-72
Transfer Basis deleting operations 7-68
flash types 3-17 deleting streams 7-67
See Flowsheet deleting tabs 7-74
Transfer Function Block 8-35 editing tabs 7-72
Tray Sizing Preferences 12-44 exporting 7-76
packing options 12-46 exporting tabs 7-76
parameters options 12-45 importing 7-77
tray setting options 12-46 importing tabs 7-77
installing operations 7-67
U
installing streams 7-67
UFL Files 4-11 object hide 7-75
Unit Set 12-20 object reveal 7-75
adding 12-21 object sort 7-74
adding conversions 12-22 opening 7-65
changing 12-22 show name only 7-71
deleting 12-21 sorting information 7-74
deleting conversions 12-23 tab setup 7-71
viewing conversions 12-23 tables on PFD 7-88
viewing users 12-23 variable sort 7-76
Units Preferences 12-20 viewing sub-flowsheets 7-70
User Property Workbook Menu 7-66
adding 5-24 export 7-76
basis environment 5-22 import 7-77
deleting 5-25 order hide reveal objects 7-74
editing 5-25 page scope 7-70
oil environment 6-9 setup 7-71
User Variables 7-52 Workspace
adding 7-54 loading 13-3
deleting 7-54 saving 13-2
editing 7-54 switching 13-4
exporting and importing 7-54
X
Utilities 7-94
adding 7-95 XML 7-10
deleting 7-97 exporting 7-12
viewing 7-97 importing 7-12
printing 7-12
V
Valve 8-13
I-9
I-10 Index
Z
Zoom Icons 10-6
I-10

UniSim User Guide PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

UniSim User Guide PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

UniSim User Guide PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What are the main components of the UniSim Design interface?

What are the main components of the UniSim Design interface?

What are the main environments in UniSim Design?

What are the main environments in UniSim Design?

UniSim® Design

For further information please contact

Copyright Honeywell 2009. All rights reserved.

2 Program Philosophy ............................................. 2-1

3 Flowsheet ............................................................. 3-1

4 File Management .................................................. 4-1

5 Basis Environment................................................ 5-1

6 Oil Characterization Environment ......................... 6-1

7 Simulation Environment ....................................... 7-1

8 UniSim Design Objects ......................................... 8-1

9 Print Options ........................................................ 9-1

10 Edit Options........................................................ 10-1

11 Simulation Tools................................................. 11-1

12 Session Preferences ........................................... 12-1

13 Window & Help Options ...................................... 13-1

1.1 Introduction .................................................................................. 2

1.2 Interface Basics............................................................................. 3

1.3 Object Status Window/Trace Window ..........................................11

1.4 Toolbar .........................................................................................14

1.5 Hot Keys .......................................................................................16

The usability of UniSim Design is attributed to the following four key

1.1.1 Event Driven

1.1.2 Modular Operations

1.1.3 Multi-flowsheet Architecture

1.1.4 Object Oriented Design

Also, if a variable is specified, then it is shown as a specification in

1.2 Interface Basics

1.2.1 Views Functionality

Most of the different views found in UniSim Design are resizable to

The following list provides a brief description on resizable views:

1.2.2 Primary Interface Elements

Interface Element Description

Each of these interface elements, plus the complimentary tools such as

In addition, there are no restrictions as to what can be displayed at any

Sub-flowsheets can also be created at any time within the main

The nature of the sub-flowsheet gives rise to the concept of

When you enter the sub-flowsheet’s Build environment, the following

This definition may seem to contradict previous statements regarding

Since the sub-flowsheets are, in essence, single operations within the

Through the object oriented design of UniSim Design, the information

Objects, such as an icon in a PFD, are tied to appropriate commands for

1.2.6 Structure Terminology

Special Flowsheet Elements

The special capabilities of the column and flowsheet template are as

Menu Bar Title Bar Environment/Mode Label

Object Status Window Trace Window Scroll Bar

Some additional information about the UniSim Design Desktop:

1.2.8 Interface Terminology

Active View/Active Location

1.3 Object Status Window/

The Object Status Window and Trace Window cannot be

1.3.1 Opening & Sizing the

1.3.2 Message Windows

An example of the contents shown in the Object Status and Trace

1.3.3 Object Inspect Menu